POLICE ORGANIZATION AND 1.

GENERAL MANAGEMENT THEORY – and organizational structure is

ADMINISTRATION by Henri Fayol-Give emphasis on the designed.
elements of planning, organizing, e. COORDINATION – is the
ORGANIZATION- is an association or group of command, coordination and control. integration of all details
individuals with a common goal. It is the structuring 2. BUREAUCRATIC MODEL OF necessary for accomplishment of
of individuals and functions into productive ORGANIZATION – by Max Weber-Give the organization.
relationships. It is either formal or informal emphasis on the elements characteristics f. CONTROLLING- the action
organizations. of bureaucracy taken by the commander to
a. Division of labor ensure that directives, orders,
1.FORMAL ORGANIZATION – are those with a b. Centralization of authority plans, and policies are complied
system of coordinated activities, a group of people, c. Rational program of personnel with in such a manner that the
authority and leadership and cooperation towards a administration objectives will be attained.
goal. d. Rules and regulation g. REPORTING – it is an
2. INFORMAL ORGANIZATION – an indefinite and e. Written records administrative function which
structureless organization that has no definite 3. THE SCIENCE OF ADMINISTRATION – visualized the agency’s
subdivisions comprises by unconscious groups of by Luther Gulick and Lyndal Urwick accomplishment and other vital
feelings, passion and activities of individuals. - Give emphasis on the principles matters. It is commonly called the
Unplanned system of the activities and interactions of of: (POSDCORB) mirror of accomplishment.
participants. a. PLANNING- it is the process of h. BUDGETING- it is a vital
reasoning and thinking which administrative function because
POLICE ORGANIZATION- is a structured group of occur before action is taken. It without allocated funds, the
trained personnel dealt with achieving the following involves in determining what is to organization cannot function well.
goals and objectives; be done, where it should be 4. PRINCIPLES OF ORGANIZATION – by
GOALS: done, when will be done, who will Mooney and Reiley
a.to ensure public safety do it, why there is need to do it, - it identified coordination as the
b.to protect lives and property and how will it be done. preeminent element of
c.to maintain peace and order. b. ORGANIZING – it is the process organizational designs. Thus,
OBJECTIVES: of identifying and grouping the coordination is the mother of
1.to attain an acceptable degree of peace and order. work to be performed, defining principles.
2.to attain effectiveness in the enforcement of laws and delegating responsibility and
and efficiency of law enforcers authority as well as establishing POLICE ADMINITRATION – the study of the
3.to attain a low crime volume or crime rate good relationship for the common processes and condition of Law Enforcement as a
4.to attain a maximum degree of solution and criminal purpose of enabling people work pillar of Justice.
conviction of law violators together most effectively,
5.to attain a maximum degree in the protection of efficiency and economically. EVOLUTION OF POLICING
lives and property. c. STAFFING-choosing the men of
TRADITIONAL ORGANIZATION THEORY the agency who will assist the A. ANGLO-SAXON (ANCIENT ENGLAND)
1.SCIENTIFIC MANAGEMENT IN commander in the exercise of the PERIOD OF POLICING SYSTEM
ORGANIZATION- By Frederick Taylor command. Policing was carried but under a system
-Give emphasis on planning, standardizing, and d. DIRECTING-I is to activate the called FRANK PLEDGE or MUTUAL PLEDEGE in
improving human effort in the operational level of the organization and start the action which every male over 12 years of age join 9 of his
organization. when the plans are already drawn neighbors to or a TYTHINGMEN as they were
1
called. Their duty is to approachend any individual
who violated a particular prohibited act and to
deliver them for trial. Anyone who failed in his
obligatory duty was subject himself to a very severe
fine. Thus, the responsibility for upholding laws and
appreachending law breakers rested with the
individual citizen.
ANGLO-SAXON (600-1066 AD):
The following are the features of this period of
policing:
TUN POLICING SYSTEM – TUN is the
forerunner of the word TOWN. Under this system, all
male residents are required to guard the town to
preserve peace and order, protect life and
properties of the people.
HUE AND CRY – a system of apprehending a
criminal whereby a complainant goes in the middle
of the street and shout at the top of his voice calling
all males to assemble. Victims report his complaint to
the assembly and indicate the whereabouts of the
culprits. All the male residents would proceed to the
place and apprehend the offered. When
apprehended trial is conducted to give chance the
culprit to defend himself
ROYAL JUDGE – Conducted criminal
investigation and gave punishment. Punishment
fitted the crime. This features started the
identification of criminals.
TRIAL BY ORDEAL – an ordeal whereby the
suspect will put into a physical challenge when not
hurt he will be acquitted but if hurt he will be
adjudged guilty in a certain crime.
FEATURES OF THIS PERIOD:
1. SHIRE-REEVE – England at the time of William
Norman divided England into 55 military districts
known as Shire-Reeve. SHIRE is the DISTRICT while
REEVE was the RULER who made laws, pass
judgment and impose punishment. He was assisted
by CONSTABLES- the forerunner of
CONSTABULARY.
- the ruler of the district
2. TRAVELLING JUDGE – held responsible in
passing judgment which was taken from shire-reeve
in view of some abuses.
3. LEGES HENRIE – This law was enacted during this
period with the following features:
a.Offenses were classified as against the king and
individual.
b.Policeman became public officials.
c. The police and citizen have the broad power to
arrest.
d.Grand jury was crated to inquire on the facts of the
law.
e.Magna Carta – another law enacted upon demand
of the Knights of the Round Table forcing the king to
sign the same.
The feature of this law are:
No freeman shall be taken or imprisoned or outlawed
except by legal judgment of this peers; No person
should be tried for murder unless there is proof of the
body of the victim.
C. WESTMINSTER PERIOD OF POLICING (1285-
1500)
This period has the following features:
1. Statute of 1295 – closing of the gates of London at
sundown. This is the beginning of the curfew hours.
2. Justice of the peace – a position having the power
to arrest, pursue, and impose imprisonment
3. Star chamber court – a special court which tried
offender against the state
Merchant, Parochial, Military Police, and Street
Police as expanded by Oliver Cromwell in sequence.
2
D. MODERN PERIOD OF POLICING
In 1829, Sir Robert Peel introduced the
Metropolitan Police Act passed by the parliament in
England – the milestone of England’s police force. Sir
Robert Peel became famous and was considered as
the FATHER OF MODERN POLICING SYSTEM
Peel’s concept of policing are:
a.The police should be organized along military
lines.
b.The police should be placed under screening and
training
c.The police should be hired on a probationary basis
d.The police should be deployed by time and by
area
e.Police headquarters should be made accessible to
the people.
AMERICAN DEVELOPMENTS ON POLICING
Policing in America followed the model
developed in England, New York, Boston, and
Philadelphia developed a similar night watch known
as RATTLEWATCH, because they carried rattles
while on duty to inform the public of their watchful
presence.
A . Municipal Police Force
1638 – night watch formed in Boston
1658 – rattle watch formed in New York
1700 – night watch in Philadelphia
1722 – New Haven had a regulation that no
watchman will have the liberty to sleep
1800 – all able-bodied males over 16 were required
to serve without pay
1833 – the advent of daytime police adopted a full
police uniform
B. State Police Force
1835 – Texas Rangers were organized (forerunner of
Federal Bureau of Investigation)
1865 – Massachusetts organized a force of state
constables
1905 – Pennsylvania state police came into being
C. Federal Police Force
1829 – Post Office Inspection system begun
1861 – Investigation on crimes against government
started
1868 – Detective forces were formed to investigate
problems on revenue services, immigration and
smuggling
1895 – Federal attention focused on lotteries, drug
regulations and transportation regulations.
1910 – White slave act and motor vehicle act were
adopted
1934 – National Kidnapping Act, Banking Act,
Racketeering Act were passed by congress
PHILIPPINE POLICE: EARLY DEVELOPMENT
A. PRE-SPANISH REGIME
The police under Philippine setting, evolved
from the practice of different tribes to select able-
bodied young men to protect their villages, not from
the assault of criminals, but from the deprivation of
wild animals, which prey on their crops and
livestock’s during the night.
These young men, who walk around to
protect their village during the night, need not work
in the field during the day. The village council has
agreed that they were given an equal share of the
harvest for their family.
Historically, this is the forerunner of the
contemporary patrol function of the police crime
prevention.
BARANGANIC SOCIETY
Village Chief – administrative leader of the
community.
1. The scope of his authority was limited by a
traditional body of customs and traditions.
2. Although his position has become
hereditary, it was originally intended by an
exhibition of a greater prowess and valor. Since the
original basis for leadership was his superior
personal attributes, he could be replaced if for some
reason his position weakened.
3. Administered the land in the name of the GUARDIA CIVIL – created by Royal Decree issued
barangay. by the Crown of February 12, 1852 to partially relieve
FREEMEN – assisted the Chief with work involving the Spanish peninsular troops of their work in
the welfare of the community. policing towns.
LAWS: -Consisted of Filipino policemen organized originally
1. Unwritten in each of the provincial capitals of the Alcaide
2. Written (Governor)
a.Code of Kalantiao (1433) – a law that gives harsh -
and savage punishment. LOCAL GOVERNMENT UNIT DURING THE
b.Maragtas Code (1257) – considered as the oldest SPANISH ERA
written law a. The barangay were consolidated into towns
c. Luwaran – Muslims (Pueblos), each headed by a gobernadorcillo
d. Principal Code of Sulu (Little Governor) popularly called Capitan.
b. Towns into provinces, each headed by a
B. SPANISH REGIME governor who represented the Governor
Police service during the Spanish regime to General in the province
the 19th century was looked upon by the Spanish c. Cities were governed by special charters.
government as a part of the military system of the Each of these cities had an Ayuntamento or
defense colony. So the locally organized police Cabildo (Special Council)
forces, although performing civil duties and
seemingly created for the sole purpose of GOVERNOR GENERAL
maintaining peace, were in fact direct adjusts of the 1. He exercised executive, administrative and judicial
military establishment. powers
2. AS Captain-General, he was the commander-in-
POLICE FUNCTIONS: chief of all the armed forces of the Philippines
1. The suppression of brigandage by 3. As Vice Royal patron, he exercised certain
patrolling unsettled areas religious powers.
2. Detection of local or petty uprising
3. The enforcement of the collection, JAPANESE OCCUPATION
including church revenues. The Japanese military police known as
KEMPETAI were held responsible in maintaining
CARABINEROS DE SEGURIDAD PUBLICO peace and order in Manila. The Manila police was
(MOUNTED POLICE) – organized in 1712 to carry renamed Metropolitan Constabulary under the
out the regulations of the Department State. Bureau of Constabulary.
Discharge the duties of he port, harbor, and river
police. PHILIPPINE EXECUTIVE COMMISSION (THE
PUPPET GOVERNMENT)
GUARDRILLEROS – a body of rural police A civil government composed of Filipinos
organized in each town with Jose B. Vargas as Chairman. It exercised both
- Established by the Royal Decree of January the executive and legislative powers. The laws
8, 1836 enacted were subject to the approval of the
commander-in-chief of the Japanese forces.
3

PHILIPPINE INDEPENDENCE
February 7, 1945, Gen. McArthur returned to the
Philippines. The Manila Police was again placed
under the American control.
July 4, 1946 – when Philippine Independence was
established, President Manuel Roxas became the first
President and appointed Colonel Lamberto T.
Javalera as Chief of Police of Manila.
D. AMERICAN OCCUPATION
The American occupation in the Philippines,
which came after the Filipino-American War from
1898 to 1901, was followed by a period of Political
ferment and social equilibrium. Soon after the
established of civil government in 1901, General
Howard Taft became the first civil Governor of the
Philippines.
SALIENT FEATURES:
1. Manila Police Department – organized by virtue
of Act No. 183 of the Philippine Commission on July
31, 1901.
- Capt GEORGE CURRY became the first Chief of
Police
2. Philippine Constabulary – organized by virtue of
Act No. 175 of the Philippine Commission on August,
1901, “An act providing for the organization and
government of an Insular Police better known as the
Philippine Constabulary – the First Insular Police of
the Philippines
- Capt. HENRY T. ALLEN became the first Chief of
PC.
NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION
Republic Act No. 4864 – An act creating the
National Police Commission under the office of the
President in September 8, 1966.
PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 765
An act creating the Police
Constabulary/Integrated National Police (PC/INP) in
August 8, 1975. This law put the NAPOLCOM under
the Ministry of National Defense. During this time
pursuant of E.O 389, PC became one of the four major
services of the AFP
Salient Features of PD 765
1.The INP was established and constituted, composed
of the PC as the nucleus and the INP as component
under the DND.
2.The head of the PNP was Chief of the PC
3.The PC remained as the major service of the AFP
4.The remaining power of the NAPOLCOM was
extended to the police, fire and jail components of
the INP.
PNP LAW OF 1991
Republic Act No. 6975 – an act establishing
the PNP under a Reorganized Department of the
Interior and Local Government in December 13,
1990.
REPUBLIC ACT NO. 8551 – PNP Reform and
Reorganized Act of 1998 under the National Police
Commission.
. on foot or motorize
THE CONCEPTS, THEORIES AND PHILOSOPHY
OF POLICE SERVICE
A. THEORY OF POLICE SERVICE
1.Continental Theory – policemen are considered
servants of higher authorities and people have little
or no share of all their duties, nor any direct
connection with them.
2.Home Rule Theory – policemen are considered
servant of the community who depends for the
4
effectiveness of their functions upon the express
wishes of the people.
B. CONCEPT OF POLICE SERVICE
1. Old Concept – punishment is the role
instrument of crime control throwing
more people to jail than keeping
them out of jail.
2. Modern Concept – the yardstick of
efficiency of the police is the absence
of crime. Its objective is the welfare of
the people and the society.
TITLES OF ORGANIZATIONAL UNITS
A. FUNCTIONAL UNITS
1. Bureau – largest organic unit within a large
department
2. Division – a primary sub-division of a bureau.
3. Section – functional unit within a division – this is
necessary for specialization
4. Units – functional groups within a section.
B. TERRITORIAL UNITS
1. Posts – a fixed point or location to which an officer
is assigned for duty such as designated desk or
office.
- An intersection or cross work form of traffic duty
- A spot or location for general guard duty
2. Route – a length of street/s designated for patrol
purposes
- Is a also called Line Beat
3. Beat – An area assigned for patrol purposes either
4. Sector – An area containing two or more beats,
routes or post
5. District – geographical subdivision of a city for
patrol purposes, usually with its own station
6. Area – a section or territorial division of a large
city, each comprised of designated districts
C. TIME UNITS
1. Watch /shift – a time division of the day
purposes of assignment
 2. Platoon – composed of several squads
usually commanded by a Lieutenant, may
serve the entire city or district. Divisions
that have personnel on duty for more than
shift divide them into platoons on the
basis of hours of the day they are on duty.
CLASSIFICATION OF POLICE OFFICERS AND
IMPORTANT TERMS
1. SWORN OFFICER – all personnel of the
police department who have taken an
oath of office and who posses power of
arrest
2. SUPERIOR OFFICER - one having
supervisory responsibilities over officers
of lower ranks. It is either temporary or
permanent.
3. COMMANDING OFFICER – an officer
who is I command of the department, a
bureau, a division, an area, or a district
4. RANKING OFFICER – officer having the
highest grade or rank.
5. LENGTH OF SERVICE – the period of
time that elapsed since the oath of office
was administered
6. ON DUTY - the period when the officer is
active in the daily performance of his
duty
7. SPECIAL DUTY – the nature which
requires that the officer be excused from
the performance of the active regular
duty
8. OFF DUTY – the nature, which the police
officer is free from specific routine duty
9. LEAVE OF ABSENCE – an extended
period during which an officer is excused
from active duty participation
10. SICK LEAVE – period which an officer is
excused from active duty by reason of
illness or injury
11. SUSPENSION – a consequence of an act
which temporarily deprives the officer
from the privilege of performing his
duties as result of violating a directive or
other department resolution
12. DEPARTMENT RULES – rules
established by the department
directors/supervisors to control the
conduct of the members of the police
force
13. DUTY MANUAL – describes the
procedures and defines the duties of
officers assigned to specified post or
position
14. ORDER – an instruction given by a
ranking officer to a subordinate; either
general, special, or personal
15. REPORT – usually a written
communication unless otherwise
specified to verbal report
ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
It is a mechanical means of depicting by an
arrangement of symbols, the relationship that exist
between individuals, groups, and functional
relationships between groups and individuals are
clearly defined to ensure accountability and
compliance.
TYPES OF ORGANIZATION STRUCTURES
A. LINE ORGANIZATION – often called the
individual, military or department type of
organization
-it is the simplest and oldest type of organizational
structure
-channels of authority and responsibility extend in a
direct line from top to bottom within the structure
ADVANTAGES:
1. Simple
2. Division of work
3. Each unit completely controlled
4. direct responsibility and accountability
5
5. Quick decisions because of direct lines of
authority
DISADVANTAGE:
1. Impractical
B. FUNCTIONAL ORGANIZATION
Functional organization divides responsibility
and authority between several specialists, such as a
person responsible for all training, an employee
directing the community relations activities of all
units, or a person handling cases involving all
juvenile activities. The functional responsibility of a
commander is limited to the particular activity over
which he has control.
C. LINE AND STAFF ORGANIZATION
The line and staff organization is the
combination of line and functional types and is found
in almost all police agencies today. It combines staff
specialist with line organization so that service of
knowledge can be provided line personnel by
specialists such as criminalist, training officers and
intelligence specialist.
COMMANDER AND STAFF PRINCIPLES
COMMANDER – he exercise command authority
and responsibility over subordinated by virtue of his
rank and assignment, he discharge his
responsibilities through a chain of command
COMMAND AUTHORITY – this provides the
commander with the right to plan, organize, direct,
coordinate, and control PNP forces or units in order
to accomplish an assigned mission or task
COMMAND RESPONSIBILITY – commander is
responsible for all that his unit does or fails to do. He
alone answers for the success or failure of his
command
STAFF – issue orders in the name of commander
provides information to commander, offices, other
agencies and units. Make estimates of the situation,
recommendation, preparing plans and orders as well
as supervision.
PRINCIPLES OF ORGANIZATION
1. GROUPING OF SIMILAR TASK
-task, similar or related in purpose, process, method,
or clientele should be grouped together in one or
more units under the control of one person. Grouping
can be done in the following:
a. ACCORDING TO FUNCTION – grouping
according to the nature of task to be performed. It
should be dived into groups so that similar and
related duties may be assigned to each.
b. ACCORDING TO TIME FRAME – the units are
dived into shifts according to time of the day.
c. ACCORDING TO PLACE OF WORK – a
territorial distribution of a platoon accomplished by
assigning patrolman on beats is necessary to
facilitate the direction and control of officers and to
ensure suitable patrol service at every point within
the jurisdiction.
d. ACCORDING TO LEVEL OF AUTHORITY – a
police department is always divided according to
level of authority; that is, there will be some
patrolmen, some sergeants, some lieutenants, and so
on. Vertical combinations of superior officers with
each rank at a different level of authority from any
other, from channels through which operations may
be directed and controlled. Those chains of
command, or lines of direct control, facilitate the
delegation of authority and the placing of authority
and responsibility, supervision is thus ensured.
2. SPECIALIZATION BASED ON NEEDS
Specialization is a principle of
organization that results from the division of the force
into separate units to perform police tasks. The
degree of specialization is determined by the size of
the department, by the number of units created and
extent of responsibility for the performance of task
within the special field.
For example: in spite of the creation of a
traffic division, most street- traffic duties should be
performed by motorized boat patrolmen. Similarly,
while a detective division may be established, much
of the work of investigating crimes may be beat
patrolmen.
3. LINE OF AUTHORITY AND CHAIN OF
COMMAND
Communications should be ordinarily goes
upward and downward through established channels
in the hierarchy. Diverting orders, directives, or
reports around a level of command usually has
disastrous effects on efficiency of the organization, if
the level which is bypassed is ordinarily capable and
responsible. The bypassed superior has no official
knowledge of the nature of a directive going
downward. Since he is unaware of the directive, he
can be hardly be held responsible for enforcing it.
In emergency situations, those that requires
an immediate action, giving of orders by an officer in
a staff capacity in the name of someone high in the
hierarchy is acceptable, thus the duty of a
subordinate to obey. He has no alternative under
those special situations. This is also known as
SCALAR OF COMMAND.
4. UNITY OF COMMAND
Only one man is in complete command of
each situation, only one man must be in direct
command or supervision of each officer. Confusion is
created when more than one superior undertakes
independent command of an operation performed by
several subordinates or when a subordinate receives
orders from more than one superior.
5. SPAN OF CONTROL
The ability of one man to direct, coordinate,
and control immediate subordinates. The broad span
of control may be reduced by the use of additional
supervisory level of officials, thus lengthening the
chain of command.
6
6. DELEGATION OF AUTHORITY
The principle of delegation of work is related
to the process of committing an activity to another’s
care. It is closely related to the principle of span of
control in that even though the span of attention is
excessive, the harm from it can be reduced by the
delegation of much detail to subordination.
The transfer of authority be a higher officer to
another subordinate such as a unit head or who is a
superior of another unit or division. This process is
continued to the lowest level of execution.
THE DELEGATION OF AUTHORITY ARE
DIVIDED INTO:
A.POLICE FORMULATION – involves what are to
be done in the form of orders or broad statement of
action.
B.DIRECTION – deals with procedures, what is to
be done who will is to be done, who will do it, when,
where and how it is be done.
C.SUPERVISION – deals with the assistance and
guidance given to subordinates to ensure successful
performance.
D.EXECUTION – deals with the performance of tasks
in consonance with authority to fulfill responsibility.
THE ORGANIC UNITS IN THE POLICE
ORGANIZATION
The effective, efficient and economical
operation of a police department is always the wish of
police administrative and planners. The nature of the
operation can be realized if the department is
properly organized.
The following are the composed parts on how
a police organization can be structured to attain
effective police service.
1. Three Police functions in organization;
a. Primary functions
b. Auxiliary or secondary functions
c. Administrative functions
2. Three organic units that may be assigned
the foregoing functions:
a.Operational units:
Patrol – prevention of crimes through police visibility
Investigation – crime investigation/detection
Traffic – enforcement of traffic laws and ordinances
Vice Control – victimless crimes
Juvenile Delinquency – control of youthful offenders
b.Service units:
Records – indexing and statistics
Communication
Jail – custody of prisoners and rehabilitation
Crime laboratory – examinations of evidence
Maintenance – property maintenance
c.Administrative units:
Personnel – personnel/human resource management
Budget – budget and finances
Plans and Training – plans for training programs and
policies
Public Information – police community relations
Police intelligence – gathering of facts involving
criminal activities as well as conduct of behavior of
the members of the force
POLICE ROLES AND LEADERSHIP IN THE
COMMUNITY
Police leadership - is the ability of police
administration in winning support for developmental
programs from people within the department a well
as the citizen. Leadership is probably the most
important characteristics of an effective superior. It is
through personal example, demeanor, and self
discipline, the means of controlling and directing the
work of subordinates and instilling a sense of
purpose in organizational goals.
A superior does not automatically become a
leader, nor do those with leadership skills always
become superiors. Leadership qualities do not go
with the position, but rather develop in the
individual. Thus, when selecting individuals for
supervisory assignments, it is important to identify
those who either have a basic leadership capabilities guidance or direction. Free rein leaders are
or capable of acquiring them. really effective in the organizational setting
The essence of real leadership is the ability to and often fail to retain control under crisis
obtain from each subordinate the highest quality situations.
service that he or she has render. Leadership comes
from a strong motivation of subordinates, dedication To give police leader control, controls must
and skill in accomplishing organizational goals specify the following specifications:
through persuasion rather than through force or 1. They must be specific and economical.
command, it does not involve the exercise of 2. They must be meaningful, relating to
authority through commands coupled with threats of significant events.
punishment for noncompliance but from proper 3. They must be using the appropriate
motivation of individuals. indicators.
4. They must be timely.
TYPES OF LEADERSHIP 5. Their limitations must be understood.
6. They must be as simple as possible.
1. AUTOCRATIC LEADER - the autocratic 7. They must be directed to those who can take
leader is one that almost totally on formal the necessary action.
organization power and authority. Autocratic
leaders usually proceed best in pressure
type or emergency situations but not as well
under more leisurely conditions. LEADERSHIP AND PERFORMANCE
2. DEMOCRATIC LEADER – the democratic The police leader is responsible for three
leader normally employs a more equally important essentially different broad
participative style of management in which responsibilities.
subordinates are allowed to offer suggestions 1. Fulfilling the mission of the police
and become involved in the making of department.
decisions that affect them. While democratic 2. Making work productive and
leaders do not relinquish their authority, they subordinates achieving.
tend to share it with their follower, thereby, 3. Producing impacts.
creating a more open and democratic sense
of organizational commitment. Democratic Section 6. Article 16 (Philippine Constitution)
leaders are usually more successful in Establishment of national police force that is
developing skills and capabilities in their national in scope and civilian in character.
subordinates, and promoting a greater
degree of personal commitment in the goals A. RANK CLASSIFICATION
and activities of the organization.
3. FREE REIN – the free rein or laissez faire Police Ranks and Equivalent Military
leader normally exercise a minimum of Abbreviations Ranks
control over subordinates and in many cases A. COMMISSIONED OFFICERS
will abdicate supervisory authority and Director General General
responsibility be allowing subordinates to Deputy Director General Lieutenant General
make decisions by themselves with very little Director Major General
7
Chief Superintendent Brigadier General Police Officer II Police Staff Sergeant CITY CLASS A – cities with 100,000 populations
Senior Superintendent Colonel Police Officer I Police Corporal and above
Superintendent Lieutenant Colonel Patrolman/Patrolwoman CLASS B – cities 75,000 up to less than 100,000
Chief Inspector Major CLASS C – cities with less than 75,000 populations
Senior Inspector Captain How many stars in the PNP ?
Inspector Lieutenant 63 stars TOWN CLASS A – town with 75,000 population and
B. NON-COMMISSION OFFICERS above
Senior Police Officer IV Master Sergeant Breakdown: CLASS B – town with 30,000 to less than 75,000
Senior Police Officer III Technical Sergeant 1 PNP chief CLASS C – town with less than 30,000 populations
Senior Police Officer II Staff Sergeant 3 Deputy Director General (1 for administration, I
Senior Police Officer I Sergeant operation, I chief of the Directorial Staff) GENERAL QUALIFICATIONS FOR
Police Officer III Corporal 11 Police director APPOINTMENT
Police Officer II Private First Class 48 Police Chief Superintendent 1. A citizen of the Philippines.
Police Officer I Private 2. A person of good moral character.
Ranks of cadets of the PNP – Above SPOIV but below ORGANIZATION AND KEY POSITION 3. Must pass the psychiatric or psychological,
Inspector The PNP shall be headed by a Chief with rank drug, and physical tests to be administered
of a Director General (1st in command), assisted by by the PNP or any accredited government
Rank of cadets of the PNPA – above SPOIV but two (2) Deputy Chiefs with ranks of Deputy Director hospitals.
below Inspector General, 1 for administrations (2nd in command); and 4. Must possess a formal baccalaureate degree
1 for operation (3rd in command) appointed by the from a recognized institution of learning.
president. 5. Must be eligible in accordance with the
The PNP shall be composed of a national standards set by the commission
office where it shall house the directorial staff, 6. Must not have been dishonorably discharged
Police Ranks and New PNP Rank RA 11200 service staff and special support units, regional from military employment or dismissed from
Abbreviations offices, provincial offices, district offices and city and civilian position in the government.
A. COMMISSIONED OFFICERS municipal stations. 7. Must have been convicted by final judgment
Director General Police General of crime involving moral turpitude.
Deputy Director Police Lieutenant General MANNING LEVEL MORAL TURPITUDE – An act baseness, vileness or
General Police Major General -the approximate police to population ratio morally evil oftentimes offensive to senses or
Police Director Police Brigadier General sensibilities or highly disagreeable sins where one if
Chief Superintendent Police Colonel THINGS TO CONSIDER IN MANNING LEVEL convicted by final judgment of the crime committed
Senior Superintendent Police Lieutenant Colonel 1. state of peace and order of his parental authority, guardianship over the ward,
Superintendent Police Major 2. population density marital authority, and right to manage his property.
Chief Inspector Police Captain 3. actual demands on service in area 8. Must have height of at least 1.62 m for male
Senior Inspector Police Lieutenant and 1.57 m for female.
Inspector 1:500 Average nationwide manning level 9. Must weight nor more or less than 5 kgs.
B. NON-COMMISSION OFFICERS 1:1000 minimum police to population ratio From the standards corresponds to his age,
Senior Police Officer IV Police Executive Master Sergeant sex and height.
THREE CLASSIFICATIONS OF CITY AND 10. Must not be less than 21 nor more than 30
Senior Police Officer III Police Chief Master Sergeant
Police Senior Master Sergeant MUNICIPALITY ACCORDING TO POPULATION years old.
Senior Police Officer II
Police Master Sergeant
Senior Police Officer I
Police Officer III
8
Character and Background Investigation – the
screening Committee shall cause a confidential
investigation of the character and from among
various sources.
Psychological and/or Neuro-Psychiatric Test – in
order to exclude applicants who are emotionally or
temperamentally unstable, psychotic or suffering
from any mental disorder, the applicant shall take a
psychological and/or neuro-psychiatric test to be
administered by the NBI, the PNP, or other duty
recognized institution offering such test after he has
qualified and met all the requirements above.
Oral Interview – the Screening Committee shall
interview the qualified applicants for suitability for
police work. The interview shall aid in determining
appearance, likeableness, and affability, attitude
toward work, outside interest, forcefulness,
conversational ability and disagreeable mannerism.
Police Appointment – Any applicant who meets the
general qualifications for appointment to police
service and who passes the test required in the
screening procedures.
The following are recommended for initial
appointment:
1. Temporary – If the applicant passes through the
waiver program as provided in under RA 8551.
2. Probationary – If the applicant passes through
the regular screening procedures.
3. Permanent – If the applicant able to finish the
required field training program for permanency.
APPOINTMENT OF PNP OFFICERS AND
MEMBERS
1. POI-SPOIV – PNP Regional Director for Regional
personnel
- PNP Chief National Personnel
2. Inspector- Superintendent – Chief PNP as 1. Those possess disqualifications shall take
recommended by their immediate superior precedence over the others.
3. Senior Superintendent to Deputy Dir. Gen. – 2. Order of waived disqualifications; Age,
President upon recommendation of the chief PNP Height, Weight and Education.
4. Director General – President from among the
most senior officers down to the rank or position. Examination of policemen
NAPOLCOM shall administer the entrance
and promotional examinations for policemen.
WAIVER SYSTEM
ATTRITION SYSTEM
WAIVER – is program given to an applicant having The loss in the personnel of its organization in
disqualification set by the law but still want to join the the normal course of events due to attainment of
PNP service. maximum tenure in position, relief for just cause,
demotion in position or rank, non-promotion and
QUALIFICATIONS THAT CAN BE WAIVED: retirement.
Age – not below 20 nor more than 35 years old TYPES OF ATTRITION
Height – granted to applicants belonging to cultural 1. Attrition by attainment of Maximum Tenure
minorities. Officer will be attrited if he attained the
Weight – more or less than 5 kgs. from the standards following tenure:
set by law. (Applicant will be given not exceeding 6
months to comply with this standard) POSITION
Education – without baccalaureate degree; at least MAXIMUM TENURE
72 units leading to a bachelor degree. 1. Chief PNP 4 years
* Applicant with no baccalaureate degree 2. Deputy Chief PNP 4 years
will be given a maximum of 4 years to comply and 3. Director of Staff Services 4 years
applicant with at least 72 units will be given two years 4. Regional Director 6 years
to comply 5. Provincial/ City Director 9 years
* Such disqualifications may be waived only
when the numbers of qualified applicants fall below 2. Attrition by relief
the minimum quota. - PNP personnel who have been relieved foe just
* The nature of appointment under waiver cause and not given assignment within 2 years
program under education and weight is temporary.
Failure to comply with the standards within the 3. Attrition by demotion in rank or position
specified time shall be dismiss from service. - Personnel assigned in a position lower than his
* Any PNP personnel who is disqualified from grade despite the existence of vacancy within 18
service by reason of failure to meet the waiver of months after the demotion.
education and weight can eligible to re-apply for PNP
if already possess the minimum qualifications. 4. Attrition by non-promotion
- Personnel who has not promoted despite there is
CRITERIA IN SELECTING APPLICANTS FOR vacancy for a period of 10 years.
WAIVER PROGARM
9
5. Attrition by retirement 3 yrs. – Insp. – Sr.Insp. such as dentists, optometrists, nurses, engineers,
- Personnel who rendered at least 20 years of service 3 yrs. – SPO IV – Insp. criminologists and graduates of forensic science.
2 yrs. – SPOIII – SPO IV Doctors of medicine, members of the Bar and
6. Attrition by other means 2 yrs. – SPOII – SPOIII Chaplains shall be appointed to the rank of senior
a. inefficiency based on poor performance during the 2 yrs. – SPOI – SPOII inspector in their particular technical service.
last 2 successive annual rating periods. 2 yrs. – POIII – SPOI
b. Inefficiency based on poor performance fro 3 1 yr. – POII – POIII SUPPORT UNITS
cumulative annual rating periods 1 yr. – POI – POII
c. Physical and mental incapacity A. ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT UNITS
d. failure to pass entrance examinations twice Satisfactorily passed the psychiatric, 1. Crime Laboratory - it provides scientific and
or finish required career course. psychological and drug tests technical investigative aids and support to the PNP
a. No pending administrative and and other government investigative agencies.
KINDS OF PROMOTION criminal case 2. Logistic Unit – shall responsible for the
1. Regular promotion b. Cleared by the People’s Law procurement, distribution and management of all
Requirements Enforcement Board logistic requirements in the PNP including firearms
a.Successfully passed the promotional examination and ammunitions.
given by the NAPOLCOM PLEB – the central receiving entity for any citizen’s 3. Communications Unit – shall responsible for
b.Satisfactorily completed the appropriate and complaint against the officers and members of the establishing an effective police communications
accredited course in the PNPA and training PNP. network.
institutions -it should take cognizance or refer the complaint to 4. Computer Center – shall responsible for the
Officers Senior Executive Course (OSEC) the proper authority within 3 days upon the filing of design, implementation and maintenance of a data
MNSA or allied related master’s degree the complaint. base system for the PNP.
General Staff Course (GSC) -At least 1 PLEB for every 500 city/municipality police 5. Finance Center – shall responsible for providing
Supt. – Sr. Supt. personnel. finance and budget services for the PNP.
Officer Advance Course (OAC) 6. Civil Security Unit – it provides administrative
Chief Inspector 2.SPECIAL PROMOTION - given to PNP personnel services and general supervision over the
Officer Basic Course (OBC) who have exhibited acts of conspicuous courage and organization, business operation and activities of all
Senior Inspector gallantry at the risk of his life above and beyond the organized private detectives, watchmen, security
Officer Candidate Course (OCC) call of duty shall be promoted to the next higher guard agencies and company guard forces.
Inspector rank.
Senior Leadership Course (SLC) 3. Promotion by Virtue of Position B. OPERATIONAL SUPPORT UNITS
SPOIII-SPOIV -Any member of the PNP designated to any key 1. Maritime Police Unit – perform all police
Junior Leadership Course (JLC) position whose rank is lower than that which is functions over Philippine territorial waters and rivers.
SPOI-SPOII required for such position shall, after 6 months of 2. Police Intelligence Unit – it serves as the
Police Basic Course (PBC) occupying the same, be entitled to a promotion, intelligence and counter-intelligence operation unit
POI-POIII subject to the availability of vacant positions. of the PNP
3. Police Security Unit – provides security for the
TIME IN GRADE IN A PERMANENT RANK LATERAL ENTRY IN THE PNP government, VIP’s visiting dignitaries and private
1 yr. – Sr. Supt, Dir., Deputy Director General All original appointments of commissioned individuals authorized to be given protection
3 yrs – Sr. Supt. – C/Supt. officers in the PNP shall commence with the rank of 4. Criminal Investigation unit – it undertakes the
5 yrs. – C/Insp. – Sr. Supt. Inspector to include all those with highly technical monitoring, investigation and prosecution of all
5 yrs. – Sr. Insp. – C/Insp qualifications applying for the PNP technical services,
10
crimes involving economic sabotages and other
crimes.
5. Special Action Forces – the mobile strike force or
reaction unit to augment regional provincial,
municipal and city police forces for civil disturbance
control, counter insurgency, hostage-taking rescue
operations, and other special operations.
6. Narcotics Unit – Philippine Drug Law Enforcement
Agency
7. Aviation Security Unit – it secures all the
country’s airport against offensive and terroristic acts
that threaten civil aviation, exercise operational
control and supervision.
8. Traffic Management Unit – enforce traffic laws
and regulations.
9. Medical and Dental Centers – responsible for
providing medical and dental services for the PNP.
10. Civil Relations Unit - implement plans and
programs that will promote community and citizen’s
participation in the maintenance of peace and order.
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SYSTEM – regular member of their respective commands, the
administered to foster the improvement of individual
efficiency and behavioral discipline as well as the
promotions of organizational effectiveness and
respect for the constitutional and human rights of
citizens, democratic principles and ideals and the
supremacy of civilian authority over military.
RETIREMENT BENEFITS
COMPULSARY RETIREMENT – retirement for
officer and non-officer of the PNP upon the attainment
of 56 years old, even without reaching 20 years in the
service.
OPTIONAL RETIREMENT – accumulation of at least
20 years of satisfactory active service even without
reaching 56 years old.
DISCIPLINARY MECHANISMS
CITIZEN’S COMPLAINT – any complaint by a
natural or juridical person against any member of the
PNP.
PROPER AUTHORITIES WHERE COMPLAINT
WILL BE BROUGHT
1. Chief of Police – offense is punishable by
withholding of privileges, restriction to
specified limits, suspension of forfeiture of
salary, or any combination thereof, for a
period of not exceeding 15 days.
2. Mayors – offense punishable of not less than
16 days but not more than 30 days or
dismissal.
3. People’s Law Enforcement Board – offense
is punishable for a period of exceeding 30
days.
INTERNAL DISCIPLINE
Dealing with minor offense involving internal
discipline found to have been committed by any
duty designated supervisors and equivalent officers
of the PNP.
AUTHORITIES WHO CAN EXERCISE
DISCIPLINARY POWER IN ANY DISCIPLINE
1. Chiefs of Police – summarily impose the
administrative punishment of admonition or
reprimand, restriction to specified limits, withholding
of privilege, forfeiture of salary or suspension and the
total period shall not exceed 15 days.
2. Provincial Directors – the total period shall not
exceed 30 days
3. Police Regional Directors the total period shall not
exceed 60 days
4. Chief of PNP- the total period shall not exceed 180
days
FORUM SHOPPING – multiple filing of complaints
11
When an administrative complaint is filed
with a police disciplinary authority, no other case
involving the same cause of action shall be filed with
any other disciplinary authority.
AWOL – Absence Without Official Leave
Any member of the PNP who shall go on
AWOL for continuous period of 30 days or more shall
be dismissed immediately from the service.
DISCIPLINARY APPELLATE BOARD
NATIONAL APPELLATE BOARD - consider appeals
from decisions of the Chief of the PNP.
REGIONAL APPELLATE BOARD – consider
appeals from decisions of the Regional directors,
other officials, mayors, and the PLEB.
WOMEN’S DESK – administer cases involving
crimes against chastity, sexual harassment, abuses
committed against women and children and other
similar offenses.
PARTICIPATION OF LOCAL EXECUTIVES IN
THE ADMINISTRATIN OF THE PNP
a. PROVINCIAL GOVERNOR
1. Shall choose the PNP Provincial Director
from a list recommended by the PNP Regional
Director.
2. Serve as a chairman of the Provincial Peace
and Order Council and oversee the implementation
of the Provincial Public Safety Plan.
b. CITY AND MUNICIPAL MAYORS
1. Shall serve the operational supervision and
control over the PNP in their respective jurisdiction.
2. Shall develop and establish an integrated
area public safety plans
3. Shall have the power to impose notice and
summary hearing for minor offenses committed by
the PNP in their respective jurisdiction
 4. Authorize to choose the chief of Police from Completion and Certification of Training – after 1. Attendance
a list recommended by the provincial director. the basic recruit training, the Regional Director shall 2. Appearance
5. Authorize to recommend the transfer, certify that the police recruits have completed the 3. Compliance with rules
reassignment or details of PNP members outside of training and has satisfied all the requirements for 4. Safety practices
their area police service. 5. Public contracts and relations
6. Authorize to recommend the appointment 6. Knowledge of work
of new member of the PNP to be assigned in their The PNP Field Training – is the process by which an 7. Work judgment
area. individual police officer who is recruited into the 8. Planning and organizing
service receives formal instruction on the job for 9. Leadership
POLICE TRAINING special and defined purposes and performs actual 10. Quality of work
job functions with periodic appraisal on his 11. Acceptance and directions of responsibility
Organized training – is the means by which officers performance and progress. 12. Effectiveness under stress
are provided with the knowledge and the skills 13. Care and operation of equipment
required in the performance of their multiple POLICE APPRAISAL 14. Work coordination
complex duties. Appraisal – refers to the process of measuring 15. Initiative
the performance of people in achieving goals and 16. Supervisory skills
PPSC – Philippine Public Safety Colleges objectives. 17. Others
• The premier educational institution for - It is also known as “performance evaluation system”
the training of human resources in the POLICE ASSIGNMENT
field of law enforcement (PNP, BFP, BJMP) Purpose of Police Appraisal
subject to the supervision of the 1. It serves as guide for promotion, salary increase, Police Assignment – is the process of designating a
NAPOLCOM. retirement and disciplinary actions. police officer at a particular function, duty or
2. It increases productivity and efficiency of police responsibility.
TYPES OF POLICE TRAINING PROGRAM works.
3. It assimilate supervision. Purpose of Police Assignment
The following are the training programs in the police 4. It informs the officer of the quality of his work for -To ensure systematic and effective utilization of al
service: improvements. the members of the force.
1. Basic Recruit Training
2. Field Training Uses of Police Appraisal Power to make designation or assignment
3. In Service Training Program 1. Eligibility to be hired -The chief of PNP (CPNP), Regional Director (RD),
4. Department In-Service Training Program 2. Salary adjustments Provincial Director (PD), and the City or Municipal
5. National and International Conventions on 3. Determining potential for promotion Chief of Police (COP) can make designation or
Policing. 4. Evaluation of probationary officers assignment of the police with in their respective
5. Identification of training needs levels.
The Basic Recruit Training 6. Isolating supervisory weaknesses
• The most basic of all police training 7. Validating selection techniques POLICE SALARIES, BENEFITS, AND PRIVILIGES
• It is a pre-requisite for permanency of 8. Reduction in ranks (demotion)
appointment. 9. Dismissal from service and other disciplinary
• This course is conducted within not less actions. On Salary
than six (6) months. • The uniformed members of the PNP are
Factors used in Police Appraisal considered employees of the national
1. Observation of work hours
12
 Government and draw their salary there
from.
On Benefits and Privileges
1. Incentives and Awards – The NAPOLCOM shall
promulgate standards on incentives and award
system in the PNP administered by the Board of
Incentives and Awards. The following are
examples of authorized Decorations / medals /
citation:
a. Police Medal of Valor
b. Police Medal of Merit
c. Wounded Police Medal
d. Police Efficiency Medal
e. Police Service Medal
f. Police Unit Citation Badge
Posthumous Award – in case a police officer dies.
2. Health and Welfare – the NAPOLCOM is
mandated to provide assistance in developing
health and welfare programs for police
personnel.
3. Longevity Pay and Allowances – under Republic
Act 6975, PNP personnel are entitled to a
longevity pay of 10% of their basic monthly
salaries for every five years of service. They shall
also enjoy the following allowances:
a. Subsistence allowance
b. Quarter’s allowance
c. Clothing allowance
d. Cost of living allowance
e. Hazard pay
f. Others
4. Retirement Benefit – monthly retirement pay shall
be fifty percent (50%) of the base pay and
longevity pay of the retired grade in case of
twenty (20) years of active service, increasing by
two and one half percent (2.5%) for every active
service rendered beyond twenty (20) years to a
maximum of ninety percent (90%) for thirty six
(36) years of service and over.
5. Permanent Physical Disability Pay – a PNP
member who is permanently and totally disabled
as a result of injuries suffered or sickness
contracted in the performance of duty as certified
by the NAPOLCOM, upon finding and
certification by the appropriate medical officer,
that the extent of the disability or sickness
renders such member unfit or unable to further
perform the duties of his or her position.
6. Early Retirement Benefit – a PNP member of his
or her own request and with the approval of the
NAPOLCOM, retire from the service shall be paid
separation benefits corresponding to a position
two ranks higher than his present rank provided
that the officer or non-officer has accumulated at
least 20 years of service.
POLICE INSPECTION
The purpose of police inspection is to ascertain the
standard policies and procedures, review and
analyze the performance, activities and facilities
affecting operations and to look into the morale,
needs and general efficiency of the police
organization in maintaining law and order.
Types of Police Inspection
1. Authoritative Inspection – those concluded by the
head of subordinate units in a regular basis.
2. Staff Inspection – those conducted by the staff for
and in behalf of the Chief PNP or superior officers
in command of various units or departments.
Nature of Police Inspection
1. Internal Affairs – inspection on internal affairs
embraces administration, training, operation,
intelligence, investigation, morale and discipline
as well as the financial condition of the police
organization.
2. External Affairs – it embraces the community
relationship of the organization, the crime and
vice situation of the locality and the prevailing
13
public opinion concerning the integrity and
reputation of the personnel.
Authority to Inspect
The following are the authority to conduct inspection
for the PNP:
1. NAPOLCOM or its representative
2. PNP Chief or his designated representative
3. PNP Director for Personnel or his representative
4. PNP Regional Director or his representative
5. City / Municipal Chief of Police or his
representative
6. Internal Affairs Service (IAS under RA 8551)
POLICE DISCIPLINARY MECHANISM
The following also serves as disciplinary mechanisms
in the police service:
Administrative Disciplinary Powers of the Local Chief
Executive (LCE) – the City and Municipal Mayors
shall have the power to impose, after due notice and
summary hearings, disciplinary penalties for minor
offenses committed by members of the PNP assigned
to their respective jurisdiction as provided in Section
41 of Republic Act No. 8551.
Administrative offenses that may be imposed
against a PNP member. The following are the
offenses for which a member of the PNP may be
charged administratively:
1. Neglect of duty or nonfeasance – it is the omission
or refusal, with sufficient excuse to perform an act
or duty, which it was the peace officers legal
obligation to perform; it implies a duty as well as
its breach and the fast can never be found in the
absence of a duty.
2. Irregularities in the performance of duty – it is the
improper performance of some act which might
lawfully be done.
3. Misconduct or malfeasance – it is the doing,
either through ignorance, inattention or malice,
 of that which the officer had no legal right to do at
all, as where he acts without any authority
whatsoever or exceeds, ignores or abuses his
powers.
4. Incompetency – it is the manifest lack of adequate
ability and fitness for the satisfactory
performance of police duties.
5. Oppression – it imports an act of cruelty, severity,
unlawful exaction, domination or excessive use of
authority.
6. Dishonesty – it is the concealment or distortion of
truth in a matter of fact relevant to one’s office or
connected with the performance of his duties.
7. Disloyalty to the Government – it consist of
abandonment or renunciation of one’s loyalty to
the government of the Philippines or advocating
the overthrow of the government.
8. Violation of Law – this presupposes conviction in
court of any crime or offense penalized under the
Revised Penal Code or any special law or
ordinance.
POLICE PLANNING
PLAN – an organize schedule or sequence by
methodical activities intended to attain a goal and
objectives for the accomplishments of mission or
objectives.
PLANNING – the process of determining the
problem of the organization and coming up with the
proposed resolutions and finding the best solution.
- the process of combining all aspects of the
department for the realistic anticipation of future
problem and the analysis of the strategy and its
details.
POLICE PLANNING – an attempt by the
administration to allocate anticipated resources to
meet anticipated service demands.
- the systematic and orderly determination of
facts and events as basic for policy formulation and
decision affecting law enforcement management.
POLICE OPERATIONAL PLANNING – the process
of formulating coordinated sequence of methodical
activities and the allocation of resources to line units
in order that it can attain its mandated objectives of
mission.
GOAL – a general statement of intention aNd
typically with the time horizon
OBJECTIVES – a specific commitment to achieve a
measurable results with in a specific period of time.
STRATEGY – I broad design, method, plan to attain a
stated goal or objectives.
TACTICS – It is a specific design, method or course
of action to attain a particular objective in
consonance with strategy.
PROCEDURE – a sequence of activities to reach a
point or to attain that which is desired.
POLICY – a product of prudence or wisdom in the
management of human affairs.
GUIDELINES – a rule of action for the rank and file to
show them how they are expected to obtain the
desired effect.
POLICE VISION – a statement on how the
organization will look in the future. It is the picture of
what an organization wants to be.
POLICE MISSION – a statement, which clearly
specifies what business, the organization is in.
PUBLIC SAFETY – a generic term, which covers the
end result of law enforcement, crime prevention and
control, maintenance of peace and order, fire safety
protection and jail management and penology.
STRATEGIC PLANNING – a series of preliminary
decisions on a framework, which in turn guides
subsequent decisions that generate the nature and
direction of an organization. This is usually long
ranged in nature
Objectives of Police Planning
1. Increases the chances of success by focusing on
results.
2. Force analytical thinking and evaluation of
alternatives for better decisions
3. Establish a framework for decision making
consistent with the goal
4. Orient people to action instead of reaction
14
5. Modify the day-to-day style of operation to future
management
6. Provide basis for measuring original
accomplishments
7. Provide decision making flexibility
8. Increase employee and personnel involvement
and improve communication.
CHARACTERISTICS OF A GOOD PLAN
1. Clearly defined objectives or goals
2. Simplicity, directness and clarity
3. Flexibility
4. Possibility of attainment
5. Provide standards of operation
6. Economy in terms of resources needed foe
implementation
RESPONSIBILITIES IN PLANNING
Broad External responsibilities – the
responsibilities of the legislative branch of the
government. The main concern of the police in this
external policy planning is assisting the legislature in
their determining of police guideline through the
passage of appropriate laws.
Internal Policy Planning – the responsibility of the
C/PNP and other chiefs of the different units or
headquarters within their area of jurisdiction to
achieve the objectives or mission of the organization.
APPROACHES IN POLICE PLANNING
a. Synoptic Planning – the rational comprehensive
approach is the dominant in the planning. This model
is based on the problem-oriented approach to
planning especially appropriate for police agencies.
b. Incremental Planning – It concludes that long
range and comprehensive planning are not only
difficult, but inherently bad. The problems are seen
as too difficult when they are grouped together and
easier to solve when they are taken one at a time and
broken down into gradual adjustment over time.
c. Transactive Planning – is carried out in face-to-
face interaction with the people who are to be
affected by the plan and not to an anonymous target
community of beneficiaries.
d. Advocacy Planning – include a greater sensitivity
to the unintended and negative side effects of plans.
e. Radical Planning – It involves collective actions
to achieve concrete results in the immediate future.
CONSIDERATIONS IN POLICE PLANNING
1. Primary Doctrines
a. Fundamental doctrines – these are the basic
principles in planning, organization and management
of the PNP in support of the overall pursuits of the
PNP vision.
b. Operational Doctrines – these are the principles
and rules governing the planning, organization and
direction and employment of the PNP forces in the
accomplishment of basic security operational mission
in the maintenance of peace and order.
2. Secondary doctrines
a. Complimentary Doctrines – formulated jointly by
two or more bureaus in order to effect a certain
operation with regard to public safety and peace and
order.
b. Ethical Doctrines – these define the fundamental
principles governing the rules of conduct, attitude,
behavior and ethical norm of the PNP.
FOUR PRIMAL CONDITIONS OF THE POLICE
ORGANIZATIN
Authority – the right to exercise, to decide, and to
command by virtue of rank and position.
Doctrine – it provides for the organization’s
objectives. It provides the various actions. Hence,
policies, procedures, rules and regulations of the
organization are based on the statement of doctrines.
Cooperation or coordination
Discipline – It is imposed by command or self-
restraint to insure supportive behavior.
TYPES OF PLAN
1. Policy or Procedural Plans – intended to guide
members of the PNP in routine and field operation
and in some special operations. These activities can
be carried out in accordance with the following
procedures:
a. Field Procedure – procedure intended to be used
in all situation of all kinds shall be outlined as a guide
to officers and man in the field. Procedure that relate
to reporting, to dispatching, to raids, arrest, stopping
suspicious persons, receiving complaints touring
beat, and the investigation of crime.
b. Headquarter Procedures – to be included in
these procedure of the dispatcher, jailer, matron and
other personnel concerned which maybe reflected in
the duty manual, procedure that involved
coordinated action on activity of several offices,
however, shall be established separately as in the
case using telephone for local/long distance calls and
other similar device.
2. Tactical Plans – procedures for coping with
specific situation at known location. Includes in this
are plans for dealing with an attack against building
with alarm systems and an attack against PNP
headquarters by lawless elements.
3. Operational Plans – Plans for operation of special
division like patrol, detective, traffic, vice and
juvenile control divisions. Operation plans shall be
prepared to accomplish each of the primary police
task. For examples, patrol activities must be planned;
the forced must be distributed among the shifts and
territorially among beats, in proportion to the needs.
4. Extra Office Plans – the active interest and
participation of individual citizen is so vital to the
success of the PNP program that the police shall
continuously seek motivate, promote, and maintain
an active public concern in its affairs.
5. Management Plans – it shall map out in advance
all operation involved in organization, management
of personnel and material and in the procurement
and disbursement of money, such as;
a. Budget Planning – present and future money
needs personnel, equipment and capital investment
must be estimated, and plans for supporting budget
15
request must be made if needed appropriations are
to be obtained.
b. Accounting Procedure – Accounting procedure
shall be established and expenditure reports shall
also be provided to assist in making administration
decision and in holding expenditures within
appropriations.
c. Specifications and purchasing procedures –
specification shall be drawn for equipment and
supplies and purchasing procedures shall likewise
be established to insure checking of deliveries
against specification of order.
d. Personnel – procedure shall be established to
insure the carrying out of personnel and component
organizational units in proportion to need.
e. Organization – a basic organization plan of the
command/unit shall be made and posted for the
guidance of the force. For the organization to be
meaningful, it shall be accompanied by duty manuals
which define relationships between the component
units in terms of specific responsibilities.
STEPS IN PLANNING
1. Frame of references – this shall be based on a
careful view of the matters relating to the situation to
which plans are being developed. Opinion or ideas
of person who may speak with authority on the
subject and view of the police commander, other
government officials, and other professional shall be
considered.
2. Clarifying the problem- this calls for the
identification of the problem understanding both,
each record and its possible solution.
3. Collecting all pertinent facts – no attempt be
made to develop a plan until all facts relating to it
have been gathered.
4. Analyzing the facts – after all the data have been
gathered, a careful analysis and evaluation shall be
made. This provides the basis from which a plan is
evolved. Only such facts as may have relevance shall
be considered.
5. Developing Alternative Plans – in the initial
process of plan development, several alternatives
measures shall appear to be logically comparable to
the needs of the situation. As the alternative solutions
are evaluated, one of the purposes of plan shall
usually prove more logical than others.
6. Selecting the most appropriate alternative – a
careful consideration of all facts usually leads to the
selection of the best of alternative proposals.
7. Selling the Plan - a plan to be effectively carried
out must be accepted by person concerned at the
appropriate level of the plan development.
8. Arranging for execution of the plan – the
execution of a plan requires the issuance of order and
directiveness to units and personnel concerned the
establishment of schedules, and the provision of
manpower and equipment for carrying out plan.
9. Evaluating the effectiveness of the plan – the
result o the plan shall be determined. This is
necessary in order to know whether a correct
alternative was chosen. Whether the plan was
correct, which phase was poorly implement, and
whether additional planning may be necessary.
CHARACTERISTICS OF A PLAN
a. There must be clearly defined, objective
or goals
b. Plan must be simple, direct, and clear
c. Plan must be flexible
d. There must be possibility of attainment
e. There must be provision of standard of
operation
f. It must be economical in term of resource
needed for implementation
g. Must contain anticipated effect on future
operation
h.
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANNING AND LEVEL OF
HIERARCHY OF PLANNING:
1. Strategic or Long range planning – it relates to
plans which long term in application; it determines
original goals and strategy.
- It refers to the process of determining how to pursue
the organization long term goal with the resources
expected to be available.
2. Intermediate or medium range planning –
refers to plan which determine quantity and quality of
effort accomplishment. Its application is medium
range duration.
- it refers to the process of determining the
contribution on efforts that submits, can make or
provide with allocated resources.
3. Operational or short range planning – refers to
the production of plan which determines the
schedule of special activity and are applicable from
one week to less than a year duration .
- the process of determining how specific task can
best is accomplished on time with available allocated
resources.
Republic Act No. 9708 August 12, 2009
AN ACT EXTENDING FOR FIVE (5) YEARS THE
REGLEMENTARY PERIOD FOR COMPLYING WITH
THE MINIMUM EDUCATIONAL QUALIFICATION FOR
APPOINTMENT TO THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL
POLICE (PNP) AND ADJUSTING THE PROMOTION
SYSTEM THEREOF, AMENDING FOR THE PURPOSE
PERTINENT PROVISIONS OF REPUBLIC ACT NO.
6975 AND REPUBLIC ACT NO. 8551 AND FOR OTHER
PURPOSES
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of
Representatives of the Philippines in Congress
assembled::
Section 1. Section 30(j) of Republic Act No. 6975, as
amended by Section 14 of Republic Act No. 8551, is
hereby further amended to read as follows:
"SEC. 30. General Qualifications for Appointment. - No
person shall be appointed as officer or member of
16
the PNP unless he or she possesses the following
minimum qualifications:
"(j) For a new applicant, must not be less than twenty-
one (21) nor more than thirty (30) years of age:
Provided, That except for the last qualification, the
above-enumerated qualifications shall be continuing
in character and an absence of any one of them at any
given time shall be a ground for separation or
retirement from the service: Provided, further, That
PNP members who are already in the service upon
the effectivity of Republic Act No. 8551 shall be given
five (5) years to obtain the minimum educational
qualification preferably in law enforcement related
courses, to be reckoned from the date of the
effectivity of this amendatory Act: Provided,
furthermore, That for concerned PNP members
rendering more than fifteen (15) years of service and
who have exhibited exemplary performance as
determined by the Commission, shall no longer be
required to comply with the aforementioned
minimum educational requirement.
Section 2. Section 38(a) of Republic Act No. 6975, as
amended by Section 33 of Republic Act No. 8551, is
hereby further amended to read as follows:
"SEC. 38. Promotions. - (a) A uniformed member of
the PNP shall not be eligible for promotion to a
higher position or rank unless he or she has
successfully passed the corresponding promotional
examination given by the Commission, or the Bar, or
the corresponding board examinations for technical
services and other professions, has satisfactorily
completed the appropriate and accredited course in
the PNPA or equivalent training institutions, and has
satisfactorily passed the required
psychiatric/psychological and drug tests. In addition,
the institution of a criminal action or complaint
against a police officer shall not be a bar to
promotion: Provided, however, That upon finding of
probable cause, notwithstanding any challenge that
may be raised against that finding thereafter, the
concerned police officer shall be ineligible for
promotion: Provided, further, That if the case remains
unresolved after two (2) years from the
aforementioned determination of probable cause, he
or she shall be considered for promotion. In the event
he or she is held guilty of the crime by final
judgment, said promotion shall be recalled without
prejudice to the imposition of the appropriate
penalties under applicable laws, rules and
regulations: Provided, furthermore, That if the
complaint filed against the police officer is for a
crime including, but not limited to, a violation of
human rights, punishable by reclusion perpetua or
life imprisonment, and the court has determined that
the evidence of guilt is strong, said police officer
shall be completely ineligible for promotion during
the pendency of the said criminal case.
Section 3. Section 23 of Republic Act No. 8551 is
hereby further amended to read as follows:
"SEC. 23. Continuing Education Program. - The
Commission shall design, establish and implement a
continuing education program for the Philippine
National Police officers and members in coordination
with the Civil Service Commission, the Commission
on Human Rights and the Commission on Higher
Education through a distance education program
and/or an in-service education program focusing on
law enforcement, criminal investigation, human
rights or other similar programs.
Section 4. Implementing Rules and Regulations. -
The National Police Commission and the Philippine
National Police shall promulgate the necessary rules
and regulations for the effective implementation of
this Act. Such rules and regulations shall take effect
upon its publication in two (2) newspapers of general
circulation.
Section 5. Separability Clause. - If, for any reason,
any provision of this Act is declared to be
unconstitutional or invalid, the other sections or
provisions hereof which are not affected thereby
shall continue to be in full force and effect.
Section 6. Repealing Clause. - All laws, decrees,
executive orders, rules and regulations, and other
issuances or parts thereof which are inconsistent with
this Act are hereby repealed, amended or modified
accordingly.
Section 7. Effectivity Clause. -This Act shall take
effect fifteen (15) days after its complete publication
in at least two (2) newspapers of general circulation.
REPUBLIC ACT NO. 8551
-The PNP Reform and Reorganization Act of 1998
1.) WHAT IS REPUBLIC ACT NO. 8551?
R.A. 8551 is an act providing for the reform and
reorganization of The Philippine National Police.
It amends certain provisions o Republic act No. 6975
which established the Philippine National Police
under a reorganized Department of the Interior and
Local Government.
2.) HOW IS R.A. KNOWN?
R.A. 8551 is known as the “Philippine National Police
Reform and Reorganization Act of 1998”
3.) WHAT IS THE DECLARED POLICY OF THE
STATE WITH REGARDS TO THE POLICE?
It is the policies of the state of establish a highly
efficient and competent police force which is national
in scope and civilian in character administered and
controlled by a national police commission.
As such the Philippine national police (PNP) shall be
a community and service oriented agency
responsible for the maintenance of peace and order
and public safety. It shall be so organized to ensure
accountability and uprightness in police exercise of
17
the discretion as well as to achieve efficiency and
effectiveness of its members and units in the
performance of their functions. (Section 2)
4.) WHAT IS THE ROLE OF THE DILG AND THE
PNP IN COUNTER INSURGENCY FUNCTIONS
AND IN TIMES OF NATIONAL EMERGENCY?
 Section 12 of Republic Act No. 6975 has been
amended such that the Department of the
Interior and Local Governments now relieved
of the primary responsibility on matters
involving the suppression of insurgency and
other serious threats to national security.
 The Philippine National Police shall, through
information gathering and performance of its
ordinary police function support in the Armed
Forces of the Philippines on matters involving
suppression of insurgency, except in the
cases where the president shall call on the
PNP to support the AFP in combat operations.
However, times of national emergency, the
PNP, the Bureau of Fire Protection, the Bureau
of Jail Management and Penology shall, upon
the direction of the President assist the
Armed Forces in meeting the national
emergency (Section 3)
5.) WHAT IS THE COMPOSITION OF THE
NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION UNDER R.A.
8551?
 The Commission shall be an agency attached
to the DILG for policy and program
coordination. It shall be composed of a
chairperson, four (4) regular Commissioners,
and the Chief of PNP as ex-officio member.
Three (3) of the regular commissioners shall
come from the civilian sector who are neither
active nor former members of the of the
police or military one.
6.) WHAT ARE THE POWERS AND FUNCTIONS
OF THE COMMISSION?
  The commission shall exercise the following
powers and functions (section 5): a. Exercise
administrative control and operational
supervision over the Philippine National
Police which shall mean the power to:
7.) WHAT QUALIFICATION MUST ONE POSSESS
TO BE A MEMBER OF THE COMMISSION?
 No person shall be appointed regular
member of the Commission unless (section 6)
: set by the Commissions
a. He or she is a citizen of the Philippines;
b. A member of the Philippine Bar with at least five
(5) years experience in handling criminal or human
rights cases of a holder of a master’s degree but
preferably a doctorate degree in public
administration, sociology, criminology, criminal
justice, law enforcement and other related
disciplines; and,
c. The regular member coming from the law
enforcement sector should have practical experience
in law enforcement work for at least (5) years while
the three (3) other regular commissioners must have
done extensive research work or projects on law
enforcement, criminology or criminal justice or
members of duly registered non-government
organization involved in the promotion of peace and
order.
8.) WHAT IS THE TERM OF OFFICE OF A
COMMISSIONER?
 The tour (4) regular and full-time
Commissioner shall be appointed by the
President for a term of six (6) years without
re-appointment or extension (section 7)
9.) WHAT ARE THE GENERAL QUALIFICATION
FOR APPOINTMENT IN THE PNP?
 No person shall be appointed as officer or
member of the PNP unless he or she
possesses the following minimum
qualification (Sec 14)
a. a citizen of the Philippines
b. a person of good moral conduct
c. must have passed the psychiatric/psychological
drug and physical test to be administered by the PNP
or by any NAPOLCOM accredited government
hospital for the purpose of determining physical and
mental health
d. must possess a formal baccalaureate degree from
a recognized institution of learning
e. must be eligible in accordance with the standards
f. Must not have been dishonorable discharged from
military employment or dismissed for cause from any
civilian position in the government
g. must not have been convicted by final judgment of
an offense or crime involving moral turpitude
h. must be at least one meter and sixty-two
centimeter (1.62) in height for male and one meter
and fifty-seven (1.57) for females
i. Must weight not more or less than five kilograms (5
kgs) from the standard weight corresponding to his
or her height, age and sex
j. for a new applicant must not less than twenty-one
(21) nor more than thirty (30) years of age, except for
the qualification the above enumerated qualifications
shall continuing in character and in and an absence of
any one of them at any given time shall be ground for
separation or retirement from the service. Provided,
that PNP members who are already the service upon
the effectivity of this Act shall be given at least two (2)
more years to obtain the minimum educational
qualification and one (1) year to satisfy the weight
requirement.
10.) WHAT ARE THE REQUIREMENTS FOR
INITIAL APPOINTMENTS TO THE PNP THAT
CAM BE WAIVED?
The following can be waived (a) age (b) height (c)
weight (d) education
11.) WHEN CAN THESE REQUIREMENTS BE
WAIVED?
18
Only when the number of qualified applicants fall
below the annual quota
12.) WHO MAY AVAIL OF THESE WAIVERS?
 The waivers may be available of any an
applicant who is below 20 nor 35 years of age
provided further that any applicant not
meeting the weight requirement shall be
given reasonable time but not exceeding six
(6) months within which to comply with the
said requirement provided further more that
only applicant who have finished second year
college or have earned at least seventy-two
(72) collegiate units leading to a bachelor
degree shall be eligible for appointments;
 provided furthermore, that anybody who will
enter the service without a baccalaureate
degree shall be given a maximum of four (4)
years to obtain the required educational
qualification. Provided finally that a waiver
for height requirements shall have be
automatically granted to applicants
belonging to the cultural communities.
13.) WHAT ARE THE SELECTION CRITERIA
UNDER THE WAIVER PROGRAM?
The selection of applicants under the waiver program
shall be subject to the following minimum criteria
(Section 16)
a.) applicant who possess the least disqualification
shall take procedure over those who possess more
disqualification shall take precedence over those
who possess more disqualification
b.) the requirements shall be waived in the following
order :
1.) age
2.) height
3.) weight
4.) education
14.) ARE THERE OTHER SITUATIONS ARISING
FROM THE WIAVERS OF THE ENTRY
REQUIREMENTS?
 The Commission is mandated by the law to
promulgate rule and regulations to address
other situations arising from the waiver of the
entry requirements
15.) WHAT IS THE NATURE OF APPOINTMENT
UNDER A WAIVER PROGRAM?
Any PNP uniformed personnel who is admitted due to
the waiver of the education or weight requirements
shall be temporary appointment pending the
satisfaction of the requirement waived. Any number
who will fail to satisfy any of the waived requirements
within the specified time period under section 15 of
this Act shall be dismissed from service (section 17).
16.) CAN DISMISSED PNP MEMBERS UNDER A
WAIVER PROGRAM REAPPLY?
Any PNP members shall be dismissed under a waiver
program shall be eligible to re-apply for
appointment to the PNP provided, that he or she
possesses the minimum qualifications under section
14 of this Act and his or her re-appointment is not by
virtue of another waiver of another waiver program
(section 18)
17.) WHAT IS THE CALLED FIELD TRAINING
PROGRAM?
 The field training program involving actual
experience and assignment in patrol, traffic
and investigation as a requirement for
permanency of appointment (Section 19)
18.) WHO ARE REQUIRED TO UNDERGO THE
FIELD TRAINING PROGRAM?
 All uniformed members of the PNP
19.) WHO SHALL ADMINISTER THE ENTRANCE
AND PROMOTIONAL EXAMINATION FOR
POLICEMAN?
The National Police Commission shall administer the
entrance and promotional examinations for
policemen on the basis of the standards set by the
Commission (Section 21).
20.) WHAT ARE THE INCREASED
QUALIFICATION FOR PROVINCIAL DIRECTOR?
No person may be appointed Director of a Provincial
Police office unless (Section 20)
a.) he or she holds a master’s degree in public
administration, sociology, criminology, criminal
justice, law enforcement, national security
administration, defense studies or other related
discipline from a recognized institution of learning
b.) has satisfactory passed the required training and
career course necessary for the position as may be
established by the Commission.
21.) WHAT ARE THE QUALIFICATIONS OF CHIEF
OF CITY POLICE STATIONS?
 No person shall be appointed chief of city of a
police station unless he or she is a graduate
of Bachelor of a mater’s degree program in
public administration, criminology, criminal
justice, law enforcement, national security,
defense studies and other related discipline
from a recognized institution of learning.
 No person shall be appointed chief of a
municipal police station unless he or she
finished at least second year Bachelor of Laws
or has earned at least twelve (12) units in a
master’s degree program in Public
administration and other related discipline
from a recognized institution of learning
provided that members of the Bar with at
least five (5) years of law practice,
licensed criminologist or graduates of the Philippines
National Police Academy and who possess the
general qualifications for initial appointment to the
PNP shall be qualified for appointment as chief of a
city or municipal police station provided, further that
the appointee has successfully passed the required
19
field training program and has complied with other
requirements as may be established by the
Commission Provided furthermore that the chief of
Police shall be appointed in accordance with the
provisions of section 51 paragraph (b) subparagraph
4 (1) of this Act (section 22).
22.) WHAT SYSTEM OF ATTRITION MUST BE
ESTABLISHED FOR THE UNIFORMED MEMBERS
OF THE PNP?
The system of attrition that must be established shall
included the following (Section 25, 26, 27, 28 and 29):
a.) attrition by attainment of maximum tenure in
position
b.) attrition by relief
c.) attrition by demotion in position or rank
d.) attrition by non-promotion
e.) attrition by other means
23.) WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM TENURE OF PNP
MEMBERS HOLDING KEY POSITION?
The following key PNP members will have maximum
tenure as indicate (Section 25)
 POSITION MAXIMUM TENURE
 Chief (4) years
 Deputy Chief (4) years
 Director of the Staff Service (4) years
 Regional Directors (6) years
 Provincial/City Directors (9) years
 Other position bigger than provincial
director shall have the maximum tenure of six
(6) years( star ranks)
 Maximum tenure defined:
A maximum cumulative period for a PNP member to
hold a particular position
 One year before retirement a PNP personnel
is not allowed to be promoted
24.) WHAT ARE THE EXPECTATIONS TO THE
PROVISION ON MAXIMUM TENURE OF PNP
MEMBERS HOLDING KEY POSITION?
Police officers holding the above mentioned positions
shall be compulsorily retired at the maximum tenure
in position prescribe, or at age fifty-six (56) which is
earlier
25) CAN THE TENURE OF THE PNP CHIEF BE
EXTENDED?
Yes, in times of war of other national emergency
declared by congress, the President extends the PNP
Chief’s tour of duty.
26.)WHAT HAPPENS TO PNP MEMBERS WHO
HAVE REACHED THEIR MAXIMUM TENURE
UPON THE EFFECTIVITY OF THIS ACT?
They may be allowed one (1) year more of tenure in
their positions before the maximum tenure provided
in Section 25 shall be applied to them unless they
shall have already reached the compulsory
retirement age shall prevail.
27.) CAN A PNP MEMBER WHO HAS LESS THAN
ONE (1) YEAR OF SERVICE BEFORE REACHING
THE COMPULSORY RETIREMENT AGE BE
PROMOTED TO A HIGHER RANK OR
APPOINTED TO ANY OTHER POSITION?
 No except for the Chief, PNP
28.) WHEN IS THERE ATTRITION BY RELIEF?
 When a PNP uniformed personnel who has
been relieved for just cause and has been
given an assignment within two (2) years after
such relief shall be retired or separated
(section 26).
29.) WHEN IS THERE DEMOTION IN POSITION
OR RANK?
When any PNP personnel, civilian or uniformed who
is relieved and assigned to a position lower than what
is established for his or her grade in the PNP staffing
pattern and who shall not be assigned to a position
commensurate to his or her grade within eighteen
(18) months after such demotion in position shall be
retired or separated (Section 27).
30.) WHEN IS THERE NON-PROMOTION?
When any PNP personnel who was not been
promoted for a continuous period often (10) years
shall be retired or separated (section 28).
31) WHAT ARE THE OTHER MEANS OF
ATTRITION?
A PNP member or officer with at least five (5) years of
accumulated active service shall be separated based
on any of the following factors (section 29)
a.) inefficiency based on poor performance during
the last two (2) successive annual rating periods
b.) inefficiency based on poor performance for three
(3) cumulative annual rating periods
c.)physical and or mental incapacity to perform
police function and duties or failure to pass the
required entrance examinations twice and or finish
the required career course except for justifiable
reason
32.) WHAT IS THE EFFECT OF BEING DISMISSED
FROM THE PNP PURSUANT TO ANY OF THE
ESTABLISHED SYSTEM OF ATTRITION?For a PNP
personnel who has rendered at least twenty (20)
years of service he or she shall be separated from the
service. For a PNP personnel who has rendered less
than twenty (20) years of service he or she shall be
separated from the service (Section 30).
33.) CAN PNP PERSONNEL WHO ARE RETIRED
OR SEPARATED UNDER ANY OF THE ATTRITION
SYSTEM RECEIVE BENEFITS?
Yes, unless the personnel is disqualified by law
receive such benefits.
34) WHICH MAY A PNP PERSONNEL BE
PROMOTED VIRTUE OF HIS POSITION?
Any personnel designated to any key position whose
rank is lower than that which is required for such
20
position shall after (6) months of occupying the same
shall be entitled to a rank adjustment corresponding
to the position provided that the personnel shall be
not resigned to a position calling for a higher rank
until two (2) years from the date of such rank
adjustment minimum qualifications therefore shall
copy the same temporarily for non than six (6)
months without reappointment or extension (Sec 32).
35.) HOW WILL THE RETIREMENT BENEFITS OF
PNP PERSONNEL BE COMPUTED?
Monthly retirement pay and longevity pay for the
retired grade in case of twenty (20) years of active
service increasingly by two and one-half percent
(2.5%) for every of active service rendered beyond
twenty (20) years to a minimum of ninety (90%) for
thirty-six (36) years of active service and over
provided that the uniformed personnel have the
option to receive in advance and in lump sum of his
retirement pay for the first five (5) years provided
further that payment of the retirement benefits in
lump sum shall be within six (6) months from
effectivity date of retirement and or completion
provided finally that retirement pay of the
officers/non-officers of the PNP shall be subject to
adjustments based on the prevailing scale of base
pay police personnel in the active service (Section
34).
36.) WHAT WILL AN OFFICER OR NON-OFFICER
HAVING PERMANENT PHYSICAL DISABILITY BE
ENTITLED TO?
An officer or non-officer is permanently and totally
disable as a result of injuries suffered or sickness
contracted in the performance of his duty as duly
certified by the National Police Commission upon
finding and certification by the appropriate medical
officer that the extent of the disability or sickness
renders such members unit or unable to further
perform the duties of his position shall be entitled the
one year salary and to a lifetime pension equivalent
eighty (80%) of his last salary in addition to other
benefits as provided under existing laws (Section 35).
37.) CAN A LEGAL HEIRS OF A PNP MEMBER
WHO RETIRED UNDER THE PERMANENTLY
DIED WITHIN FIVE (5) YEARS FROM HIS
REQUIREMENTS RECEIVE ANYTHING?
Should such member who has been retired under
permanent total disability under the section die
within five (5) years from his retirement, his surviving
legal spouse or if there be none the surviving
dependent legitimate children shall be entitled to the
pension for the member of the five (5) years
guaranteed period.
38.) WHAT IS THE EARLY RETIREMENT
PROGRAM UNDER RA 8551?
Within three (3) years after the effectivity of this Act
any PNP officer or non-commissioned officer may
retire and be paid separation benefits corresponding
to a position two (2) rank higher than his or her
present rank subject to the following conditions
(Section 37)
a.) that at the time he or she applies for retirement he
or she already rendered at least ten (10) years of
continuous satisfactory service
b.) the applicant has scheduled for separation of
retirement from the service due to the attrition
system or separation for cause
c.) he or she has no pending administrative or
criminal case
d.) he or she has at least three (3) more years in the
service before reaching the compulsory retirement
age and at least a year before he or she maximum
tenure in the position(Section 37) government service
39.) WHO IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE
FORMULATION OF A NATIONALIZED
RETIREMENT AND SEPARATION BENEFIT
SCHEDULE AND PROGRAM?
The Commission shall formulate a rationalized
retirement and separation benefit schedule and
program within one (1) year from the effectivity of
this Act for approval by Congress provided that the
approval schedule program shall have retroactive
effect in favor of PNP members and officers retired or
separated from the time specified in the law, unless
the retirement or separation is for cause and the
decision denies the grant of benefits (Section 38).
40.) WHAT ARE THE POWERS AND FUNCTIONS
OF THE INTERNAL AFFAIRS SERVICE (IAS)?
The Internal Affair Service of the PNP shall (Section
39)
a.) proactively conduct inspections and audits on PNP
personnel and units
b.) investigate complaints and gather evidence in
support of an open investigation
c.) conduct summary hearings on PNP members
facing administrative charge
d.) submits a periodic report on the assessment,
analysis and evaluation of the character and behavior
of PNP personnel ad units to the Chief PNP and the
Commission
e.) file appropriate criminal cases against PNP
members before the courts as evidence warnings
and assist in the prosecution of the case
f.) provide assistance to the Office of the Ombudsman
in cases involving the personnel of the PNP.
41.) CAN THE IAS ON ITS OWN INITIATIVE
CONDUCT INVESTIGATION OF PNP MEMBER?
Yes, IAS can conduct motu propio, automatic
investigation of the following cases:
 REPUBLIC ACT NO. 8551
a.) incidents where a police personnel discharges a
firearm
b.) incident where death, serious physical injury or
any violation of human rights occurred in the conduct
of a police operation
c.) incidents where evidence was compromised,
tampered with obliterated or lost while in the custody
of police personnel
21
d.) incident where a suspect in the custody of the
police was seriously injured
e.) incidents where the established rules of
engagement have been violated.
42.) HOW DOES THE IAS AFFECT THE CAREER
OF POLICE OFFICERS?
 The IAS shall prove document s
recommendations regards to the promotion
of the members of the PNP or the assignment
of PNP personnel to any key position (Section
39).
43.) WHAT ARE THE OFFICES OF THE IAS?
 National, regional and provincial offices of
the internal Affairs Service shall be
established (Section 40).
44.) HOW HEADS THE OFFICES OF THE IAS?
 The Internal Affairs Service shall be headed
by an inspector General how shall be
assisted by a Deputy Inspector General. The
regional offices shall be headed by a director
while the provincial offices shall be headed
by a Superintendent.
45.) WHAT IS THE QUALIFICATION
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE HEAD OF THE IAS?
 The head of the Internal Affairs Service shall
be a civilian who shall meet the qualification
requirements provided in R.A. 8551.
46.) WHAT IS THE STAFFING PATTERN IN THE
IAS?
 The commission shall establish a rationalized
staffing pattern for IAS in the Reorganization
Plans as provided for in Section 13 R.A. 8551.
47.) WHO SHALL APPOINT THE INSPECTOR
GENERAL?
Inspector General shall be appointed by the
President upon recommendation of the Director
General of the PNP and duly endorsed by the
commission.
48.) WHO SHALL APPOINT THE PERSONNEL OF
THE IAS?
Appointment of personnel who shall occupy various
positions shall be made by the Inspector General
and shall be based on an established career pattern
and criteria to be promulgated by the commission.
49.) WHAT ARE THE QUALIFICATION FOR
ENTRY TO THE IAS?
 Entry to the Internal Affairs Service shall be
voluntary and subjects to rigid screening
where only PNP personnel who have at least
five (5) years experience in Law Enforcement
and who have no derogatory serviced
records shall be considered for appointment
(Section 42).
50.) ARE THERE EXEMPTION TO THE
AFOREMENTIONED QUALIFICATION?
 Yes, members of the Bar may enter the
service laterally
51.) INITIALLY, WHO SHALL MAKE THE
APPOINMENT OF THE HEADS OF OFFICES IN
THE IAS?
 Initial appointment of the head of the National
Area and Provincial Offices of the
International Affairs Service shall be made by
the President upon recommendation by the
commission. Thereafter, appointments and
promotions to the Service shall follow the
established requirement and procedures.
(sec. 4)
52.) WHAT A IS THE PROMOTION SYSTEM
WITHIN THE IAS?
 The commission shall establish a promotion
system with the IAS which shall follow the
general principles of the promotion system in
the PNP (Sec. 45).
53.) WHAT ARE THE PROHIBITIONS ON PNP
MEMBERS HOW JOIN THE IAS?
 Any personnel who joins the IAS,, may not
thereafter join any other unit of the PNP.
Neither shall any personnel of the IAS be
allowed to sit in a committee deliberating on
the appointment, promotions, and assignment
of any PNP personnel (Sec. 45).
54.) IS THERE AN INCENTIVE FOR A PNP
MEMBER JOINING THE IAS?
 Yes, and these are the following (Sec. 46);
a.) personnel of the International Affairs Service shall
in addition to other allowances authorized under
existing laws, be granted occupational specially pay
which shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of their
basic pay. This pay shall not be considered a
forfeiture of other remuneration and allowances
which are allowed under existing laws.
b.) IAS members shall also have priorities in all quota
allocation for training and education.
55.) WHO KEEPS THE RECORDS OF PNP
MEMBERS SUBJECT OF IAS INVESTIGATION?
 Local Internal Affairs offices shall be
responsible for the maintenance and update
of the records of the members of the PNP
within their jurisdiction. When a PNP
personnel is reassigned or transferred to
another location or unit outside the
jurisdiction of the current Internal Affairs
office, the original records of such personnel
shall be transferred over the Internal Affairs
office that will acquired jurisdiction over the
transferred personnel while copied will be
retained by the former Internal Affairs Office.
22
 In cases where a PNP personnel has been
relived of his or her position and has not been
given an assignment the Internal Affairs
Office where the person has been given an
assigned last shall continue to have
jurisdiction over his or her records will be
forwarded to the Internal Affairs Office
acquiring jurisdiction over the PNP
personnel.
56.) ARE THE IMMEDIATE SUPERIORS OF PNP
MEMBERS INVESTIGATED RELIEVED OF THE
RESPONSIBILITIES FOR THE OFFENSES OF
THEIR SUBORDINATE ONCE THE IAS
INVESTIGATES THE LATTER?
The immediate superior of supervisor of the
personnel or units being investigated under the
preceding section shall be automatically included in
the investigation of the IAS.
57.) WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THE
INVESTIGATION OF THE IMMEDIATE
SUPERIOR OR SUPERVISORS?
To exclusively determine lapses in administration or
supervision.
58.) WHAT IS THE EFFECT OF ANY UNIFORMED
PNP PERSONNEL FOUND GUILTY BY LAS UNDER
THE PROVISION OF SECTION 39?
 Any uniformed PNP personnel found guilty of
any of the cases mentioned in Section 39 (3rd
paragraph) of RA 8551 shall be
recommended automatically for dismissed
59.) WHAT IS THE EFFECT OF BEING FOUND BY
THE IAS AS NEGLIGENT UNDER SECTION 48?
 Any immediate superior or supervisor found
negligent under Section 48 of RA 8551 shall
be recommended automatically demotion.
60.) CAN THE DISCIPLINARY AUTHORITY IN
THE PNP REVISE THE RECOMMENDATION OF
LAS?
 Recommendations by the IAS for the
impositions of disciplinary measures against
an earring PNP personnel, once final cannot
be revised set-aside or unduly delayed by
any disciplining authority without just cause.
61.) ON WHAT BASIS CAN A DISCIPLINARY
AUTHORITY REVISE OR SET-ASIDE A
RECOMMENDATION OF THE LAW?
 Only for just cause
62.) WHAT IS THE LIABILITY OF A IAS PERSONNEL BE BROUGHT?
DISCIPLINARY AUTHORITY WHO FAILS TO ACT
OR WHO ACTS WITH ABUSE OF DISCRETION ON
THE RECOMMENDATION ON THE IAS?
 The disciplinary authority who fails to act or
who acts with abuse of discretion on the
recommendation of the IAS shall be made
liable for gross neglect of duty.
63.) WHERE SHALL THE CASE OF THE
AFORMENTIONED ERRING DISCIPLINARY
AUTHORITY BE BROUGHT?
 The case of erring disciplinary authority shall
be submitted to the Director General for
proper disposition
64.) WHERE CAN AN AGGRIEVED PARTY
APPEAL THE FINDINGS OF AN IAS OFFICE?
 Decisions rendered by the provincial
inspectors shall be forwarded to the area
Internal Affairs office for review within ten
(10) working days upon the receipts thereof.
Decisions of the area office may be corrected
to the National Office through the Office of
Inspector General. Decisions rendered by
the National IAS shall be appealed to the
National Appellate Board or to the court as
may be appropriate (Section 50)
65.) WHAT IS THE EFFECT OF THE CREATION
OF IAS TO THE SUMMARY DISMISSAL POWERS
OF THE PNP DIRECTOR GENERAL AND
REGIONAL DIRECTORS?
 The summary dismissal powers of the
Director General and Regional directors as
provided in Section 42 of Republic Act no
6975 shall remain valid provided that the
existing jurisdiction over offenses as
provided under Republic Act no 6975 shall
not be affected
66.) WHERE CAN A COMPLAINT AGAINST AN
 A complaint against any personnel or office of
IAS shall be brought to the Inspector
General’s Office or to the Commission as may
be appropriate (sec 51)
67.) WHAT IS A CITIZENS COMPLAINT?
 Any complaint by a natural or juridical
person against any member of the PNP (sec
52).
68.) WHERE IS A CITIZENS COMPLAINT BE
FILED?
 Any complaint by a natural or juridical
person against any member of the PNP shall
be brought before the following:
a.) Chiefs of Police, where the offense is punishable
by withholding of privileges, restriction to specified
limits suspension or forfeiture of salary or any
combination thereof for a period not exceeding
fifteen (15) days
b.) mayors of cities and municipalities where the
offense is punishable by withholding of privileges,
restriction to specified limits, suspensions or
forfeiture of salary or any combination thereof for a
period of no less than sixteen (16) days but not
exceeding thirty (30) days
23
c.) people’s law enforcement board, as created
under section 43 of RA 8551 where the offense is
punishable by withholding of privilege, restriction to
specified limits suspension or forfeiture of salary or
any combination thereof for a period exceeding
thirty (30) days or by dismissal “the commission shall
provide in its implementing rules and regulations a
scale of penalties to be imposed upon any member of
the PNP under this section.
69.) WHAT IS A “MINOR OFFENSE”?
 For purposes of RA 6975, a Minor Offense
shall refer to any act or Mission not involving
moral turpitude but affecting the internal
discipline of the PNP and include but not
limited to;
a.) Simple misconduct or negligence
b.) Insubordination
c.) Frequent absence and tardiness
d.) habitual drunkenness
e.) Gambling prohibited by law
70.) WHO EXERCISE DISCIPLINARY POWERS
OVER “MINOR OFFENSE” INVOLVING
INTERNAL DISCIPLINE?
 On dealing with minor offenses involving
internal discipline found to have been
committed by any regular member of their
respective commands, the duly designed
supervisors and equivalent officers of the PNP
shall after due notice and summary hearing,
exercise disciplinary powers as follows;
a.) provincial directors or equivalent supervisors may
summarily impose administrative punishment of
admonition or reprimand restrictive custody
withholding of privileges forfeiture of salary or
suspension for any combination of the foregoing
provided that in all cases the total period shall not be
exceed thirty (30) days
b.) Police Regional Directors or equivalent
supervisors shall have the power to impose upon any
member the disciplinary punishment of dismissal
from the service. He may also impose the
administrative punishment of admonition or
reprimand restrictive custody withholding to
privileges suspension of forfeiture of salary demotion
or any combination of the foregoing provided that in
all cases the total period shall not exceed sixty (60)
days
c.) The Chief of the PNP shall have the Power to
impose the disciplinary punishment of dismissal from
the service suspension or forfeiture of salary or any
combination there for a period not exceeding one
hundred eighty (180) days provided further that the
chief of the PNP shall have the authority of place
police personnel under restrictive custody during the
tendency of a grave administrative case filed against
him or even after the filing of a criminal complaint
grave in nature against such police personnel.
71.) CAN TWO OR MORE DISCIPLINARY
AUTHORITIES ENTERTAIN ONE AND THE SAME
COMPLAINT?
 A complaint or a charge filed against a PNP
member shall be heard and decided
exclusively by the disciplining authority that
has acquired original jurisdiction over the
case. And not withstanding the existence of
concurrent jurisdiction as regards the offense
(ibid).
INDUSTRIAL SECURITY MANAGEMENT
A- HISTORY OF SECURITY
a. Early Civilizations
➢ Security has a long history dating back to
the origin of human being. Cave dwellers
devised various forms of security to
protect themselves and their property
from other tribe and wild animals.
➢ The LAW OF HAMMURABI (King of
Babylon 1900 B.C.). The Law of
Hammurabi is the earliest record of laws
to protect people and property.
➢ The ancient GREEK CITY STATES
(about 600 B.C). This was consisted of
the municipality and the surrounding
territory with a centrally located fortress
built on a hill. These city states created
what is considered the FIRST POLICE
FORCE.
b. Middle Ages
➢ 1066 England, King William-assumed
ownership of the land when he
conquered England.
➢ France, King William (Duke of
Normandy) - he divided England into
fifty-five military district and given the
title REEVES.
REEVE- during this time, another position created to
assist the reeves, which were CONSTABULI.
CONSTABULI- keeper of the stable
Constable- denotes someone with special police
power.
➢ King John- was forced to sign the
MAGNA CHARTA (1215) this document
guaranteed basic civil and Political
liberties to both people and nobles.
➢ King Edward I- issued the statute of
WESTMINSTER in 1285- established a
systematic Police and Justice System
➢ The Watch and Ward- organized town
watchmen to patrol at night and to assist
the constable who worked during the
day.
➢ Curfew- this act also established the
position of bailiff. Who was required to
check on all strangers every fifteen days.
Today bailiffs are Officers of the court.
24
➢ The Hue and Cry- was an integral part of
the watch and ward.
➢ Assize of Arms- is requiring on males
between fifteen and sixty years to
maintain a weapon in their home. The
Statue of Westminster established this.
The statute of Westminster played a
significant role in promoting law and
order.
c. The Eighteenth Century
➢ In 1749, Henry Fielding-published the
first great social novel entitled TOM
JONES.
➢ The Bow Street Runners- referred to as
the first detective unit, since they quickly
moved to the scene of crimes for
immediate investigation.
d. The Nineteenth Century
➢ Sir Robert Peel- was introduced into
Parliament the Metropolitan Police Act
in 1829. He argued for a single police
system in London composed of
professionals that would be carefully
selected and thoroughly trained. At the
same time, he realized the police could
never be effective if the law were wide in
scope and harsh in penalty. Today Police
officers in England are called BOBBIES
and named after Sir Robert Peel.
e. Evolution Of Security In America
➢ 1600’s- several cities established a
“watch”.
➢ 1800’s- several cities, Detroit, Chicago,
Philadelphia, San Francisco and Los
Angeles established “paid police
force”.
 ➢ New York City- adopted the Peelian
principles. Federal Law Enforcement
agencies were also organized.
➢ The US Post office established an
investigative arm in 1828. The US treasury
Development did the same in 1864.
➢ In 1908- the Department of Justice formed
the Bureau of investigation that became
the FBI in 1924 headed by J. Edgar
Hoover.
f. Private Security Grows In America
➢ Allan Pinkerton- who was cooper
(maker of barrels) by trade, settled in
Chicago from Scotland. He became
interested in law enforcement and made
a career change by becoming a deputy
sheriff.
In 1984- he was appointed Chicago’s first detective.
After seven years, he formed his own private security
company, Pinkerton National Detective Agency
that provides security to various business clients.
Today Pinkerton Service Corporation is a subsidiary
of security based in Stockholm Sweden.
➢ President Lincoln- during Civil War he
summoned Pinkerton to Washington to
establish an intelligence network for
Union forces.
➢ United States of America, William J.
Burns- he was a former Secret Service
Investigator who headed the Bureau of
Investigation. He formed William J. Burns
Banker Association.
• Today, Burns International
Services Corporation is the
Subsidiary of SECURITAS.
➢ 1850’s- Henry Wells joined William Fargo
and established American Express, which
operates east of the MISSOURI RIVER.
Today, Wells Fargo is a division of Burns
International Services Corporation.
➢ In 1859, Washington Perry Brink-
established a freight and package
delivery Service in Chicago. He also
concentrated on the protection of
valuable in transit.
➢ In 1910, William J. Burns- the pore most
American Investigator of his day and the
first director of the government agency
that became the FBI, formed the William J.
Burns Detective Agency.
➢ In 1917- the armored truck was born.
Today, this company is the largest
armored truck service in the world and
subsidiary of the Pittston Company.
g. Other National Contributed to the
Development Of Security
➢ Greek and Roman civilizations devised
various forms of protection.
➢ The French, under King Louise XIV,
during the 1600’s promoted crime
prevention through preventive patrol and
street lighting.
➢ Asian investigative methods used
psychology to elicit confession.
h. Railroad Police
➢ This was the era of the ROBBER
BARONS when massive corporate
organizations formed secret agreements
to eliminate competition. Although
Congress passed the Sherman Anti-trust
Act in 1890 to curb monopolies, railroads,
(monopolies charged) became one of the
most hated industries, thus were subject
to violence.
25
➢ Jessie James- devised the idea of using
dynamite to wreck a train before robbing
it.
➢ July 21, 1873- first gang used this
dangerous technique headed by Jessie
James.
➢ Several states enacted legislation
permitting rail roads to organize security
force with full police power.
➢ By 1914- there were about 14 thousand
railroad police in America. They were
been deputized by the federal
government to help prevent sabotage.
i. The Growth Of Security After World War II
➢ In 1950 Korea- the department of
defense formulized security requirement
for defense contractors to protect
classified information and materials and
to prevent espionage.
j. A New Century with Challenges
➢ September 11, 2001
Terrorist attacked with hijacked airline killed about
5,000 people by leveling the World Trade Center
and destroying part of the Pentagon these bolt
surprise attracts, subsequent bio- terrorism, and the
war in Afghanistan show the difficult and guard are
yielding to professional security officer who is more
educated, better trained, knowledgeable of
humorous security and loss prevention strategies.
k. Development of Security Device
➢ Personnel- are the backbone of
protection efforts, various security
devices and stems provided additional
safe guard like:
a. Dogs- with their keen sense and
smell they are a very old form of
alarm notification.
b. The ancient civilizations of China and
Egypt doors with primitive keyed
locks.
c. Pegs- used to slide down into a door
to secure it. A special notched board
was required to raise the pegs high
enough to clean the door.
d. Early Egyptians constructed locked
vaults deep inside huge pyramids
that illustrated the concept of
“protection-in-depth” a modern
strategy used at banks.
e. The ancient of Israel used bright light
and loud noise to scare intruders.
f. Gideon- a Jewish warrior king
instilled fear in a large invading force
by blowing three hundred trumpets
and waving three hundred torches.
g. The Romans used the sensitive
hearing and squawking of geese to
warn of an approaching army.
h. During 1700’s, British inventors
assembled the first mechanical
burglar alarm system to protect
doors. It was set of chimes linked to a
door lock. Therefore burglars
defeated the system by cutting the
cord between the lack and the
chimes.
i. In 1852, Augustus R. Pope- filed a
patent for an electromagnetic alarm
consisting of an electric bell activated
by a falling weight or uncoiling of a
spring when a door or window
opened.
j. Edwin Holmes- after six years he
bought Pope patent and formed the
first private company that provides
alarm protection. Holmes protection
Group INC was acquired by ADT
Security century service Inc. at the
end of twentieth.
B-BASIC CONCEPTS OF INDUSTRIAL SECURITY
MANAGEMENT
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Security
➢ It is the state or condition of being safe or
free from fear, harm, danger, loss,
destruction or damages.
➢ There is a need for adequate protection
because of the prevailing action of man
against man that leads to unsecured
and/or unsafe conditions due to economic
reasons, revenger, or just plain greed
and avarice.
Industry
➢ The term denotes “earnest or constant
application to work or business”, or “a
special branch of productive work, or the
capital or workers employed in it”.
(Webster, 1993)
➢ It is likewise defined as large-scale
production or organized economic
activity connected with the production,
manufacture, or construction of a
particular product or range of product or
range of products. (Microsoft Encarta,
2001-2006)
Industrial
➢ This is defined as “pertaining to or
engaged in industry”. (Webster,1993)
Management
26
➢ This term means the “skillful use of means
to accomplish a purpose”. (Webster,
1993)
➢ This term is the process of properly
utilizing available resources to achieve
organizational goals and objectives.
Industrial Security
➢ This term may mean: (a) security
measures applied to business industries.
(Manwong and Delizo, 2006); or (b) the
business of providing security and
protection to private individuals, business
and enterprises, or government and non-
government industries.
Industrial Security Management
➢ It is the skillful handling of the security
and safety measures of business
enterprises and industrial establishments.
C- LEGAL BASES OF INDUSTRIAL SECURITY
MANAGEMENT IN THE PHILIPPINES
A. Natural Authority
1. The highest law is the law of self-
preservation.
➢ Man naturally reacts to protect himself,
his family, his honor, freedom, liberty and
property from danger, threat or hazard.
➢ It became an unwritten law of the early
Filipinos to protect themselves and their
property against the natural and man-
made hazards.
B. Constitutional Authority
1. The prime duty of the Government is to
serve and protect the people. (Art. II, Sec.
4)
 ➢ The government may call upon the
people to defend the State and, in the
fulfilment thereof, all citizens may be
required, under conditions provided by
law, or to render personal military
service.
➢ Although the defense of the States is the
one contemplated here, people being
one of the elements of the State is directly
affected in whatever protection the state
will receive from the government and the
people. Take not also that all citizens who
are qualified, including the security
guards, may be required by law to
render personal military or civil services.
The service required of the citizens is
personal.
2. No person shall be deprived of life,
liberty or property without due process of
law, nor shall any person be denied the
equal protection of the laws. (Art. III, Sec.
1)
➢ This means the life, liberty, freedom and
property can only be taken from a person
after the observance of due process of
law. Due process of law is of two aspects:
substantive and procedural. Daniel
Webster, in brief, defines procedural due
process as “one which hears before it
condemns, which proceed upon inquiry,
and render judgment only after trial”. But
if the taking of life, liberty, freedom or
property does not fall within the
framework of due process of law,
available remedies under the law should
be resorted to.
3. Private property shall not be taken for
public use without just compensation.
(Art III, Sec.9)
➢ The Constitution protects not only
ownership but also possession,
enjoyment, use and disposition of private
property by their rightful owners subject
to such limitations imposed by law. In this
regards, private property to be taken by
the government in its exercise of the
power of the eminent domain must satisfy
two important conditions, namely: public
use and just compensation.
4. The right of the people to be secure in
their persons, houses, papers, and effects
against unreasonable searches and
seizures of whatever nature and for any
purpose shall be inviolable, and no search
warrant or warrant of arrest shall be issued
except upon examination under oath or
affirmation of the complainant and the
witnesses he may produce, and particularly
describing the place to be searched and the
persons or things to be seized. (Art. III, Sec.
2)
C. Statutory Authority
1. Revised Penal Code (Act 3815, as
amended)
➢ The applicable provisions for the Code on Crime
Against Persons, Personal Liberty and Security
and Property have bearing on the security and
protection of one’s life, liberty and property.
2. Private Security Agency Law (RA 5487, as
amended)
➢ This law governs the operation, administration of
security agency and activities, qualification,
duties and licensing of security guards,
27
watchmen and private detectives. In short, it is
the intention of this law to professionalize the
security services in order to upgrade the level of
security protection.
D-TYPES OF SECURITY
1. Industrial Security- a type of security applied to
business groups engaged in industries like
manufacturing, assembling, research and
development, processing, warehousing and even
agriculture.
2. Hotel Security- a type of security applied to
hotels where its properties are protected from
pilferage, loss, damage, and the function in the
hotel restaurants are not disturbed and troubled
by outsiders or the guest themselves. This type of
security employs house detectives, uniform
guards and supervisor and insures that hotel
guests and their personal effects are
safeguarded.
3. Bank security- this type of security is concerned
with bank operations. Its main objective is the
protection of the bank cash and assets, and
personnel and clientele. Security personnel are
trained to safeguard bank and assets while in
storage, in transit and during transactions.
4. VIP Security – a type of security applied for the
protection of top- ranking officials of the
government or private entity, visiting persons of
illustrious standing and foreign dignitaries.
5. School Security- a type of security that is
concern with the protection of students, faculty
members, and school properties. Security
personnel are tined to protect the school
property from theft, vandals, handling campus
riots and detecting the use of intoxicated drugs
and alcohol by the students.
6. Supermarket or Mall Security- a type of
security which is concerned with the protection of
the stores, warehouses, storage, its immediate
premises and properties as well as the
supermarket personnel and customers. Security
personnel are trained to detect “shoplifter”,
robbery and bomb detection and customer
relation.
7. Physical security- part of security concerned
with the physical measures designed to
safeguard personnel and to prevent unauthorized
access to equipment ,facilities, materials and the
documents and to protects them from espionage
sabotage, damages or theft. This if the broadest
type of security.
8. Document security- protection of documents,
classified papers and vital record from loss,
access to unauthorized persons, damages, theft,
and compromise through proper storage and
procedures.
9. Operational Security- this involves the
protection of process, formula and patents,
industrial and manufacturing activities from
espionage, infiltration, loss compromise or
photocopying.
10. Communication Security –the protection
resulting from the application of various
measures which prevents or delay the enemy or
unauthorized person in gaining information
through communication. This includes
transmission, cryptographic and physical
security.
THREE MAJOR DIVISIONS OF SECURITY
A. Physical Security- this concern with the physical
measures adopted to prevent unauthorized
access to equipment, facilities, material and
document and to safeguard them against
espionage, sabotage, damage, loss and theft.
B. Personnel Security- this is as important as
physical security. Personnel security starts even
before the hiring of an employee and remains to
be maintained for as long as the person is
employed. Its purpose is to ensure that a firm
hires those best suited to assist the firm in
achieving its goal and objectives and once hired
assist in providing necessary security to the work
force while carrying out their functions.
C. Document band Information security- this
involves the protection of documents and
classified papers for loss, access by unauthorized
persons, damage, theft and compromise through
disclosure. Classified documents need special
handling. Lack of indoctrination and orientation
among the personal handling them can result in
the leakage, loss, theft, and unauthorized
disclosure of the documents.
A- PHYSICAL SECURITY
➢ Physical measures are used to define, protect and
monitor property rights and object; they consist
of barriers and devices that are able to detect,
impede, and deter potential security threats.
➢ Physical security measures help to combat the
crime –related threats that both employees and
outsiders pose to the organization (for example:
robbery, burglary, arson, assault, rape, theft and
vandalism). If measures are properly planned,
most potential intruders, whether employees or
outsiders, should see that the risk of detection
and punishment for attempting to penetrate a
protected area are significantly greater that
whatever they may gain.
28
I-Protective Barriers
Barrier– Any structure or physical device capable of
restricting, deterring and delaying illegal access to
any installation.
Purpose of Barriers
1. Define the physical limits of an area
2. Create a physical and psychological deterrent to
unauthorized entry
3. Prevent penetration there in or delay intrusion,
thus, facilitating apprehension of intruders
4. Assist in more efficient and economical
employment of guards
5. Facilitate and improve the control of vehicular
topic.
Types of Physical Barriers
1. Natural Barrier – ex. Geographical features like
rivers, cliffs, canyons, or any other terrain that is
difficult to traverse.
2. Structural Barrier- these are features
constructed by man regardless of their original
intent that tends to delay the intruder.
Examples: Fence, walls, grills, doors, roadblocks,
screens or any other construction that will serve as a
deterrent to unauthorized entry.
3. Human Barrier- persons being used in
providing a guarding system or by the nature of
their employment and locations, fulfil security
functions.
Examples: Security guards and employees of the
establishments.
4. Animal Barrier – animals are used in partially
providing a guarding system.
Examples: dogs, geese, turkey
5. Energy –it is the employment of mechanical,
electrical, electronic energy imposes a deterrent
 to entry by the potential intruder or to provide
warning to guard personnel.
Examples: protective lightning, alarm system and
any electronic devices used as barriers.
Three Lines of Physical Defense
1. First line of defense- perimeter fences or
barriers
2. Second line of defense- doors, floors, windows,
walls, roofs, grills and other entries to the
building
3. Third line of defense – storage system like steel
cabinets, safes, vaults, and inferior files.
Principles of Physical Security
1. The type of access necessary will depend upon a
number of variable factors and therefore may be
achieved in a number of ways.
2. There is no impenetrable barrier.
3. Defense- in depth is barrier after barriers.
4. Delay is provided against surreptitious entry.
5. Each installation is different.
A-Perimeter Barrier
➢ A medium or structure, which defines the
physical limits of an installation or area to
restrict or impede access thereto.
➢ It refers to any physical barrier used to
supplement the protection of an inside
perimeter.
a. Inside Perimeter- a line protection
adjacent to protected area and passing
through points of possible entry into the
area such as doors, windows, skylights or
other points of access.
b. Outside Perimeter- a line of protection
surrounding but somewhat removed from a
protected area, such as fence.
Types of Perimeter Barrier
1. Fences
➢ Wire fencing can be barbed wire, chain link
or concertina. Chain link are for permanent
structure, barbed wire is for semi-permanent
structure, and concertina for the least
permanent and can also be used as temporary
roadblock for impediment during strikes and
crowd control. Wire fences are attractive and
low in maintenance cost; they offer fewer
hazards to people because of the absence of
barbs, and the openings are small to prevent
passage of pilfered article.
2. Building Walls
➢ Walls floors, roofs or their combination serve
also as barriers and they should be of such
construction to provide uniform protection just
like the wire fencing.
3. Bodies of Water
➢ The river, lakes, marsh cataract, sea pond or
any other bodies of water forming a part of the
wall, building or fencing should never be
considered adequate natural perimeter
barrier. Additional security measures like wire
fence, concrete walling, security patrolling
and floodlighting at night may be necessary
for the portions of the perimeter.
Types of Fences
1. Solid Fences
a. Visual access to the fencing is denied.
b. It denies the opportunity for the intruder to
become familiar with the personnel, activities
and the time scheduled of the movements of
the guards in the installation.
c. It prevents the guards from observing the
area around the installation and it creates
29
shadow that may be used by the intruder for
cover and concealment.
2. Full-view Fence
a. Visual access is permitted through the fence.
b. It denies the roving patrols and stationary
guard to keep the surrounding area of the
installation under observation.
c. It allows intruder to become familiar with the
movements and time schedule of the guard
patrols thereby allowing him to pick the time
that is advantageous on his part.
Types of Full-View Fence
1. Chain link Fence
a. It must be constructed or 7 feet material
excluding the top guard.
b. It must be of 9 gauges or heavier.
c. The mesh openings are not to be larger than
2 inches per side.
d. It should be twisted and barbed selvage at
the top and bottom.
e. It must be securely fastened to rigid metal or
reinforced concrete.
f. It must reach within 2 inches of hard group or
paving.
g. On soft ground, it must reach below surface
deep enough to compensate for shifting soil
or sand.
2. Barbed wire fence
a. Standard barbed wire is twisted, double-
strand, 12 gauges wire with 4 point barbs
spaces in an equal distance apart.
b. It should not be less than 7 feet high
excluding the top guard.
c. It must be firmly affixed to posts not more
than 6 feet apart.
d. The distance between strands must not
exceed 6 inches at least one wire will be
 interlaced vertically and midway between
posts.
3. Concertina wire fence
a. Standard concertina barbed wire is
commercially manufactured wire coil of high
strength steel barbed wire clipped together
at intervals to from a cylinder.
b. Opened concertina wire is 50 feet long and 3
feet in diameter.
Types of Perimeter Barrier Openings
1. Gate and Doors- when not in active use and
controlled by guard, gates and doors in the
perimeter should be locked and frequently
inspected by guards. Locks should be changed
from time to time.
2. Sidewalk Elevator- these provide access to
areas within the perimeter barrier and should be
locked or guarded.
3. Utilities Openings- like sewers, air tanks and
exhaust channels.
4. Clear Zone- unobstructed area should or a “clear
zone” should be maintained on both side of the
perimeter barrier
a. A “clear zone” of 20 feet or more
should exist between the perimeter
barrier and exterior structure parking
areas and natural or man-made
features.
b. A “clear zone” of 50 feet or more
should exist between the perimeter
barrier and structure within the
protected area except when building
wall constitute part of the perimeter
barrier.
B. Additional Protective Barrier
1. Top Guard- a top guard is an additional
overhand or barbed-wire place on vertical
perimeter fences facing upward and outward
with a 45-degree with three to four strands of
barbed wires, 6 inches apart and must be stalled
on the supporting arms.
2. Guard Control Stations- this is formally
provided at main perimeter entrance to secure
areas located outdoors, and manned by a guard
on a fulltime basis.
3. Tower- “Guard Tower” is house-like structure
above the perimeter barriers.
4. Signs and Notice- “Control Signs” should be
erected where necessary in the management of
unauthorized ingress and preclude accidental
entry. Signs should plainly be visible and legible
from approach and in under standard language.
Signs on entry should also be posted at all
principal entrance.
II-Protective Lighting
➢ Protective Lighting provides a means of
continuing, during hours of darkness, a degree of
protection approaching that maintained during
daylight hours. This safeguard also has
considerable values as a deterrent to thieves and
vandals and may make the job of the saboteur
more difficult. It is an essential element if an
integrated physical security program.
➢ Depending on the nature of the facility, protective
lighting is designed to emphasize the illumination
of the perimeter. In the case, it produces
sufficient light to create a psychological deterrent
to intrusion as well as to make detection virtually
certain in the event an entry is made. It must
avoid glared that would reduce the visibility of
security personnel, while creating glared to
detect intruder. This is particularly important
30
where the facility is within streets, highways or
navigable waterways.
➢ The system must be reliable and designed with
overlapping illumination to avoid creating
unprotected area in the event of individual light
failure. It must be easy to maintain and it must
secure itself against attack. Poles should be
within the barrier power lines and the switch box
must be protected.
Requirements
a. Protective or security lighting needs at
installation and facilities depend upon each
situation and the areas to be protected. Each
situation requires careful study to provide the
best visibility practicable for such security
duties as identification of badges and people
at gate inspection of vehicles, prevention of
illegal entry, detection of intruders outside
and inside buildings and other structures,
and inspection of unusual or suspicious
circumstances.
b. When such lightning provisions are
impractical, additional security posts, patrols,
entry dog patrols, or other security means
will be necessary.
c. Protective lighting should not be used as
psychological deterrent only.It should be
used on a perimeter fence line only where
the fence is under continuous or periodic
observation. Protective lighting may be
unnecessary where the perimeter fence is
protected by a central alarm system.
d. Protective lighting maybe desirable for those
sensitive areas or structures within the
perimeter, which are under specific
observation. Such areas or structures include
pier and dock areas, vital buildings, storage
 areas, and vulnerable control points in
communications, power, and water
distribution systems. In interior areas where
night operations are conducted, adequate
lighting of the area facilitates detection of
unauthorized persons approaching or
attempting malicious acts within the area
Characteristics
a. Lighting is expensive to maintain and, when
properly employed, may reduce the need for
security forces.
b. It may also provide personal protection for
forces by reducing the advantages for
concealment and surprise for a determined
intruder. Security forces thus relieved maybe
used to better advantages elsewhere.
c. Protective lighting usually requires less
intensity than working light, except for
identification and inspection at authorized
portals and in emergencies.
d. Each area of an installation or facility presents
its particular problems based in physical
layout, terrain, atmospheric and climactic
conditions, and the protective requirements.
➢ Data are available from the
manufactures of lighting equipment
and from the Army Corps of
Engineers, which will assist in
designing a lighting system.
➢ Included in these data are:
Descriptions, characteristics, and
specification of various incandescent,
arc, and gaseous discharge lamps.
Lighting patterns of the various
luminaries. Typical layouts showing
the most efficient height and spacing
of equipment.
➢ Minimum protective lighting
intensities required for various
applications.
Principles of Protective Lighting
➢ Protective lighting should enable guard force
personnel to observe activities around or inside
an installation without disclosing their presence.
➢ Adequate lighting for all approaches to an
installation not only discourages attempted
unauthorized entry, but also reveals persons
within the area. However, lighting should not be
used alone.
➢ It should be used with other measures such as
fixed security posts or patrols, fences, and
alarms.
➢ Other principles of protective lighting are listed
next:
a. Good protective lighting as achieved by
adequate, even light upon bordering
areas, glaring lights in the eyes of the
intruder, and relatively little light on
security patrol routes. In addition to
seeing long distances, security forces
must be able to see low contrasts, such as
indistinct outlines of silhouettes, and must
be able to spot an intruder who may be
exposed to view for only a few seconds.
Higher levels of brightness improve all of
these abilities.
b. In planning protective lighting, high
brightness contrast between intruder and
background should be the first
consideration. With predominantly dark
dirty surfaces or camouflage types
painted surfaces, more light is needed to
produce the same brightness around
31
installations and buildings than when
clean concrete, light brick, and grass
predominate. When the same amount of
light falls on an object and its
background, the observer must depend
on contrasts in the amount of light
reflected. The ability of the observer to
distinguish poor contrasts is significantly
improved by increasing the level of
illumination.
c. When the intruder is darker than his
background, the observer sees primarily
the outline or silhouette. Intruders who
depend on dark clothing and even
darkened face and hands may be foiled
by using light finishes on the lower parts
of buildings and structures. Stripes on
walls have also been used effectively, as
they provide recognizable breaks in
outlines or silhouettes. Providing broad
lighted areas around and within the
installation, against which intruders can
be seen, can also create good
observation conditions.
d. Two basic systems or a combination of
both may be used to provide practical
and effective protective lighting. The first
method is to light the boundaries and
approaches. The second is to light the
area and structures within the general
boundaries of the property.
e. To be effective, protective lighting
should:
i. Discourage or deter attempts at
entry by intruders. Proper
illumination may lead a potential
 intruder to believe detection is
inevitable
ii. Make detection likely if entry is
attempted.
Types of Protective Lighting
A. Stationary Luminary- this is a common type
consisting of a series of fixed luminaries to
continuously flood a given area.
Types of Stationary Lighting
1. Glare Projection Type
➢ the intensity is focused to the intruder
while the observer or guard
remained in the comparative
darkness. The lighting is toward the
entrance to an installation.
➢ The glare projection lighting method
is useful where the glare of lights
directed across surrounding territory
will not be annoying nor interfere
with adjacent operations. It is a strong
deterrent to a potential intruder
because it makes it difficult for him to
see the inside of the area. It also
protects the guard by keeping him in
comparative darkness and enabling
him to observe intruders at
considerable distance beyond the
perimeter.
a. Glare projection or other
protective perimeter lighting may
not be appropriate in some
instances. In combat tactical
perimeter security considerations
are given first priority over
security against pilferage.
Generally, the tightening of
tactical perimeter security
strengthens other physical
security efforts. A blending of
tactical and physical security
principles is required especially
true with regards to perimeter
lighting.
b. Glare projection is not
appropriate where security troop
emplacements may be
silhouetted or illuminated for the
enemy to see from the enemy’s
approach to the secured site.
Where glare projection is
desired, security troops placed in
front of the perimeter fence
should be moved, but still be able
to take up effective fields of fire
for defense of the perimeter. If
such blending of protective
lighting and tactical security
cannot be accomplished,
perimeter lighting should not be
used. Floodlights that provide a
band of light with great horizontal
angular dispersal and which
directs the glare at a possible
intruder while restricting the
downward beam, is preferred in
this application.
2. Controlled Lighting
➢ the lighting is focused on the pile of
items rather than the background.
The width of the lighted strip can be
controlled and adjusted to suit the
security needs.
➢ Controlled lighting is best when it’s
necessary to limit the width of the
32
lighted strip outside the perimeter
because of adjoining property or
nearby highways, railroads,
navigable waters, or airports. In
controlled lighting, the width of the
lighted strip can be controlled and
adjusted to fit the particular need,
such as illumination of a wide strip
inside a fence and a narrow strip
outside; or floodlighting a wall or
roof. This method of lighting often
illuminates or silhouettes security
personnel as they patrol their routes.
B. STANDBY LIGHTING- this system is similar to
continuously lighting but it is turned on manually or
by a special device or other automatic means.
C. MOVABLE LIGHTING- this consists of stationary
or portable, manually operated searchlights. The
searchlights may be lighted continuously during the
hours of darkness or only as needed, and are usually
supplementary to other types of secure lighting.
D. EMERGENCY LIGHTING- this may be
duplicative of existing systems. This is at standby,
which can be utilized in the event of electronic
failure, either due to local equipment or commercial
power failure.
Types of Light Lamps
a. Incandescent Lamp- these are common
light bulbs of the type found in the home.
They have the advantages of providing
illumination when in the home. They have the
advantages of providing illumination when
the switch is thrown and are thus most
commonly used protective lighting system.
 b. Gaseous discharge lamp- the use of
gaseous discharge lamps in protective
lighting is somewhat limited since they
require a period from two to five minutes to
light when they are cold and even longer to
relight when hot or after a power
interruption. This is very economical to use
but for industrial security, it is not acceptable
due to long time in the lighting in case it is
turned off by accident or by low voltage or
brown-out.
Types of Gaseous Discharge Lamps
a. Mercury Vapor Lamps- these lamps
give a blue-green color light due to
the presence of mercury vapor. Its
initial cost is higher than the
incandescent lamps of the same
voltage but is more efficient and
gives more light. This is widely used
for interior and exterior lighting.
b. Quartz Lamps- these lamps emit a
very bright white light and snap on
almost as rapidly as the incandescent
lamp. They are frequently used at
very high voltage, and they are
excellent for use along the perimeter
barrier and in troublesome areas.
General Types of Lighting Sources
1. Incandescent Lamp- it is the least expensive in
terms of energy consumed and has the advantage
of providing instant illumination when the switch
is on.
2. Mercury Vapor Lamp- it is considered more
efficient than the incandescent and used
widespread in exterior lighting. This emits a
purplish-white color, caused by an electronic
current passing through a tube of conducting and
luminous gas.
3. Metal Halide- it has similar physical appearance
to mercury vapor but provides a light source of
higher luminous efficiency and better color
rendition.
4. Fluorescent- this provides good color rendition,
high lamp efficiency as well as long life. However
it cannot project light over long distance and
thus, are not desirable as flood type lights.
5. High Pressure Sodium Vapor- this has gained
acceptance for exterior lighting of parking areas,
roadways, buildings and commercial interior
installations. Constructed on the same principles
as mercury vapor lamps, they emit a golden
white to light pink color and this provide high
lumen efficiency and relatively good color
rendition.
Types of Lighting Equipment
1. Floodlights- these can be used to accommodate
most outdoor security lighting needs, including
the illumination of boundaries, fences and
buildings and for the emphasis of vital areas or
particular buildings.These are wide beam units,
primarily used to extend the illumination in long,
horizontal strips to protect the approaches to the
perimeter barrier.
2. Street lights- this lighting equipment received
the most widespread notoriety for its value in
reducing crime.These produce diffused rather
than directional beam. They are directly used in
parking areas.
3. Search lights- these are highly focused
incandescent lamp and are designed to pinpoint
potential trouble spots.
4. Fresnel lights- these are wide beam units,
primarily used to extend the illumination in long,
33
horizontal strips to protect the approaches to the
perimeter barrier. Fresnel projects a narrow,
horizontal beam that is approximately 180
degrees in the horizontal and from 15 to 30
degrees in the vertical plane.
General Considerations in Protective Lighting
1. The determination of lighting needs must be
depending upon the threat, perimeter
extremities, surveillance capabilities, and
available guard forces
2. Protective lighting must be designed to
discourage unauthorized entry and to facilitate
detection of intruders approaching or
attempting to gain entry into protected areas.
3. The protective lighting must be continuously
operates during periods of reduced visibility,
and that standby lighting is maintained and
periodically tested for used during times of
emergency and mobilization alerts.
4. Cleaning and replacement of lamps and
luminaries, particularly with respect to costs and
means required and available
5. The effects of local weather conditions may be a
problem in cases where fluorescent units are
used.
6. Fluctuating or erratic voltages in the primary
power sources.
7. Requirements for grounding fixtures and the use
of common ground on an entire line to provide a
stable ground potential.
III- Protective Alarms
➢ Another safeguard used to assist security to
complement if not to supplement physical
security is an array of alarms. These alarms of
various types and cost can be installed indoors or
outdoors.
➢ Basically, alarms systems are designed to alert
security personnel to consummated or attempted
intrusion into an area, building or compound.
➢ Each type of alarm is activated in the event that
an intruder tampers the circuitry, ab beam or
radiated waves. In short, intrusion alarms can be
electrical, mechanical or electronic.
Types of Alarm System
1. Metallic foil or wire- in building or compound,
all point of entry can be wired by using
electrically charge strips of tinfoil wire. Any
actions that will move the foil or wire break the
circuit and activate an alarm. Metallic foil or wire
is used in window or glass surfaces. Doors and
windows can be equipped with magnetic or
spring activated contacts, which will sound and
alarm when the door or window is opened.
2. Photoelectric or electric eye- a light beam is
transmitted at a frequency of several thousand
per second. It is connected by a wire to a control
station and when an intruder crosses the beam he
makes contact with the photo electronic coil
which thus activates the alarm.
3. Audio detective device- supersensitive
microphone speaker sensor is installed in walls,
ceiling and floors of the protected area of any
sound caused by attempted forced entry
inspected by the sensor.
4. Vibration detection device- the vibration
sensitive sensor is attached to walls, ceiling or
floors of the protected areas. The sensor detects
any vibration caused by attempted forced entry.
5. Foot Rail Authority- placing the front of their
foot to engage the activation bar places foot rail
activator on the floor in such a position that tellers
may activate the alarm. Foot rails do not acquire
any obvious use of the teller’s hand and their
hands may be kept in full view of the robbers for
reason of safety. Because of foot rail can be
activated very obtrusively and safety, it is
frequently found in the banks where tellers
normally operate while standing up.
6. Bill Traps- bill traps or currency activation
devices are usually placed in the teller’s cash
drawer and connected to the alarm system using
a wire connector. When currency is removed
from the devices, the alarm is activated. The
advantage of these devices is that the robbers
frequently remove the currency and activate the
alarm. This is particularly helpful when the
employees are immediately forced to leave their
station without having an opportunity to activate
the alarm safely.
7. Knee or Thigh Button- these are installed inside
the desk or teller station so they can be activated
by knee or thigh pressure. They are commonly
found in location where personnel usually
perform their duties from a seated position.
8. Foot button- like the foot rail permit alarm
activation safety while both hands remain clear in
view of the robber.
9. Double squeeze buttons- pressure is required
on both side of the device and therefore the
probability of accidental alarm is reduced.
Types of Alarm Detection System
1. Central Station System- a type of protective
alarm system where the central station is located
outside the installation. It can be located in an
agency and the installation is one of the
subscribers. When alarm is sounded, central
station notifies police and other agency. A system
in which the alarm signal is relayed to remote
panel located at the facilities of private owned
34
protection. Service Company manned by its
personnel.
2. Proprietary System- this function in the same
way as central system except that is owned by,
operated and located in the facility. Response to
all alarms is by facility’s own security or fire
personnel. Since this system is monitored locally,
the response time to an alarm is considerably
reduced.
3. Local Alarm System- in this case, the sensor
activates the circuit, which in turn activities a
horn or siren or even flashing light located in the
immediate vicinity of the alarmed area. Only
guard within sound or hearing can respond to
such alarms, so their use is restricted where
guards are so located that their response is
assured.
4. Auxiliary System – in this system installation
circuits are led into local police or fire
department by lease telephone lines. The dual
responsibility for circuits and the high incidence
of false alarms have made this system unpopular
with public fire and police personnel.
5. Local Alarm-By-Chance System- this is a local
alarm system in which a bell or siren is sounded
with no predictable response. These systems are
used in residence or small retail establishments,
which cannot afford a respond system. The hope
is that a neighbor or passing will reach to the
alarm and call for police assistance, but such a
call is purely a matter of chance.
6. Dial Alarm System- this system is set to dial a
predestined number when the alarm is activated.
The number selected might be the police or the
subscriber’s home number, or both. When the
phone is answered, a recording states that an
intrusion is in progress at the location so alarmed.
 This system is relatively inexpensive to install
and operate, but since it is dependent on general
phone circuit, it could fail if line were busy or if
the phone connection were cut.
Three Parts of an Alarm System
1. Sensor or Trigger Device
2. Circuit which carries messages to the signaling
apparatus
3. Signaling system, sometimes called the
enunciator
IV-Protective Locks and Keys
➢ The best defense against lock picking and
making of key by impression is the installation of
special pick-resistant, impression-resistant lock
cylinders.
➢ Generally speaking, locks are the cheapest
security investment that can be made.
➢ Locking device is simply a mechanism that
extends the door or window into a wall that hold
them. If, thereof, the wall or the door itself is
weak or easily destructible, the lock cannot be
effective.
➢ It must be recognized that any lock will
eventually yield to attack.
➢ They must be thought of only as delaying. But this
delay is of primary importance. The longer the
intruder is stalled in an exposed position while he
works to gain entry, the greater the chances of
discovery. E
➢ ven the highest locking devices are only one part
of door and entrance security locks, cylinders,
door and frame construction, and key control are
inseparable element; all must equally be
effective. If one element is weak, the system will
breakdown.
Lock- a mechanical, electrical, hydraulic or
electronic device to prevent entry into a building,
room, container or hiding place and to prevent the
removal of items without the consent of the owner.
Padlock- a portable and detachable lock having a
sliding hasp which passes through a staple ring or the
like and is them made fast of secured.
Peterman – An English term used to describe a lock
picker.
Types of Locks
1. Warded Locks – Offer very little security. This
type of lock must therefore be used only to have
privacy but not to provide a high degree of
security.
2. Disc Tumbler Locks – designed for the use of
automobile industry and are in general used in
car doors today. Because this lock is easy and
cheap to be manufactured, its use has expanded
to others areas such as desks, files and padlocks.
The delay afforded is approximately ten minutes.
3. Lever Locks – are difficult to define in terms of
security since they vary greatly in their
effectiveness. They are used in safe deposit
boxes and are for all practical purposes, pick-
proof. The least of these locks are used in desks,
lockers and cabinets and generally less secure
than pin tumbler lock.
4. Combination Locks – are difficult to defeat,
since they cannot be picked because few can
manipulate the device to discover the
combination. Most of these locks have three dials,
which must be aligned in the proper order before
the lock will open. Some locks may have four
dials for greater security.
5. Code Operated Locks – these are combination-
type locks and that no key is used. Pressing the
35
series of numbered button in the proper
sequence opens them. Some of them are
equipped to alarm if wrong sequence is pressed.
These are high security locking device.
6. Electromagnetic Locks –these are devices
holding a door by magnetism. These are
electrical units consisting of the electromagnetic
on metal holding sequence. When three power is
secured on the door, they will resist pressure of
up to 1000 pounds.
7. Card Operated Locks – are electronically or
more usually magnetic. Coded card notched,
embossed or containing an embedded patter of
copper locks are used to operate suck locks.
These are frequently fitted with recording device,
which registers time of use and the identity of the
user.
Types of Keys
1. Change Key – a specific key, which operates the
lock and has a particular combination of cuts, or
bittings, which match the tumblers of the
tumblers in the lock.
2. Sub-Master Key – a key that will open all the
lock within a particular area or grouping in a
particular facility.
3. Master Key – A special key that will capable of
opening a series of locks.
4. Grand Master Key – a type of key that will open
everything in a system involving two or more
master key groups.
Key Control
➢ Once an effective control has been installed,
positive control of all keys must be gained and
maintained. This can be accomplished only if it is
in conjunction with the new locking devices.
➢ The following can be utilized to maintain
effectively key control:
1. Key Cabinet – a well-constructed cabinet will
have to be produced. The cabinet will have to be
of sufficient size to hold the original key to every
lock in the system. It should be locked at all
times.
2. Key Records – some administrative means must
be set up to record code number of the locks and
to whom the keys of a specific locks was issued.
3. Inventories – periodic account must be made of
all duplicates and original keys in the hands of
the employees whom they have been issued.
4. Audits – in addition to periodic inventories, an
unannounced audit should be made of all the key
control records and procedures by a member of
the management.
5. Daily Report – a regular report must be made to
the person responsible for the key control from
the personnel department indicating all persons
who have left or will be leaving the department
or the company. In the event that a key was
issued, steps should be made to recover the key.
V-Protective Cabinet
➢ The final line of defense at any facility is in the
high security storage area where records,
papers, plans or cashable instruments, previous
metals or other especially valuable assets are
protected, these security cabinets will be of a
sized and quantity which the nature of the
business dictates.
Safe
➢ A metallic container used for the safekeeping
of documents or small items in an office or
installation. Safe can be classified as either
robbery or burglary resistance depending
upon the use and need.
Vault
➢ Heavily constructed fire and burglar
resistance container usually a part of the
building structure used to keep and protect
cash, documents and negotiable instruments.
Vaults are bigger than safe but smaller than a
security file room.
File Room
➢ A cubicle in a building constructed a little
lighter than a vault but bigger size to
accommodate limited people to work on the
records inside.
B-PERSONNEL SECURITY
➢ Personnel security is considered as the most
important aspect of security. This is for the simple
reason that security involves people, both as
asset to be protected and as source of security
threats.
➢ It is an acknowledge fact that losses are
attributed mainly to negligence or active
participation of employees, either theft or
sabotage. This emphasizes the need to set up a
system of hiring the people for the company.
Purpose of Personnel Security
1. To insure that a firm hires those employees best
suited for the firm; and
2. Once hired, to assist in providing the necessary
security to these employees while they are carrying
out their functions.
Scope of Personnel Security
1. Personnel Security Investigation (PSI)
2. Security Education
36
Key Functions of Personnel Security
1. It serves as a screening device in hiring suitable
employees.
2. It provides background investigation services of
both potential and present employees, for possible
assignment to sensitive position.
3. It handles investigation of employees suspected of
wrongdoing.
4. It develops security awareness among employees.
5. It attempts to ensure the protection of employees
from discriminatory hiring or terminating procedures
as well as unfounded allegations of illegal or
unethical activities and conduct.
Personnel Security Investigation
Personnel Security Investigation is a process of
inquiry into the character, reputation, discretion,
integrity, morals and loyalty of an individual to
determine the suitability for appointment or access to
classified matter.
General Techniques of Personnel Security
Investigation
1. Background Investigation (BI)
➢ This technique is very expensive but
necessary in personnel security. It serves to
verify information on the application form and
to obtain other information pertinent to
decision to employ.
Components of Complete BI
a. Applicants Name
b. Date Of Birth Investigation
c. Present Residence Address
d. Personal History
e. Marital History
 f. Residence History ➢ It is the process whereby a subject’s reaction C-DOCUMENT AND INFORMATION
g. Citizenship in a future critical situation is predicted by SECURITY
h. Physical Data observing his behavior, or by interviewing Basic Definition of Terms
i. Education History him, or analyzing his responses to a 1. Document Security
j. Organization Membership questionnaire, such as honesty test. The Reid It involves the protection of documents and
k. Neighborhood Report is an example of honesty test. classified papers from loss, access by unauthorized
l. Character Reference 4. Deception Detection Techniques persons, damage, theft and compromise through
m. Employment History ➢ This is a process of using devices in detecting disclosure.
n. Military History deception during the interview stage. This 2. Classified Information
o. Foreign Travel History includes the use of a Polygraph, It includes all information concerning
p. Criminal Record Psychological Stress Evaluator and Voice document, cryptographic devices developed
q. Credit Records Analyzer. projects and materials following on the categories of
r. Applicant's Signature 5. Financial and Lifestyle Inquiry Top Secret, Confidential, Restricted, Secret,
s. Date Of Application This type of investigation seeks to gather Unclassified.
information on income and mode of living, sometimes 3. Classified Matter
Types of Local Agency Check (LAC) referred to as earning-to-debt ratio. It refers to any information or material in any
a. Barangay Clearance form or of any nature, the safeguarding of which is
b. City or Municipal Clearance 6. Undercover Intelligence necessary in the interest of security and which is
c. Local Police Clearance ➢ This is the placement of an agent in a role in classified for such purpose by the responsible
d. Court Clearance which the agent’s true identity and role classifying authority.
remains unknown, in order to obtain
Types of National Agency Check (NAC) information for criminal prosecution or for 4. Classify
a. National Bureau of Investigation (NBI) Clearance recovery or limitation of asset losses. This refers to the assigning of information or
b. PNP Directorate of Intelligence (DI) Clearance 7. Exit Interview material, one of the four security categories after
c. Intelligence Service, AFP (ISAFP) Clearance ➢ This is a valuable tool because it gives determination has been made that the information
2. Positive Vetting departing employees an opportunity to list requires the security protection as provided.
➢ It is the process of inspecting or examining grievances. It offers security managers an 5. Declassify
with careful thoroughness. The essence of opportunity to learn of problems not The act of removing the security classification
vetting that it is a personal interview previously known. Incorporating a checklist from classified information or matter.
conducted under stress. It is based on of company-issued property and confronting 6. Reclassifying or Regarding
information previously given by the a departing employee of this has resulted in It refers to the act of changing the assigned
applicant. Other information is used during reducing losses of company property. classification from classified information or matter.
the interview, such as those discovered in the ➢ Debriefing an employee is also incorporated 7. Upgrading
BI which confirms or denies this given by the into the exit interview to remind employees It refers to the act of assigning the information
applicant. of their continuing legal obligation to or matter to the higher classification that that
3. Profiling safeguard confidential company information. previously assigned to it.
8. Compartmentation
37
 It refers to the grant of access to the classified
matter only to properly cleared person when such
classified information is required in the performance
of their official duties.
9. Need to Know
It is the dissemination of classified
information or matter to be limited strictly to those
person whose duties requires knowledge or
possession thereof.
10. Unauthorized
It refers to any person not authorized to have access
on classified matters.
11. Compromise
This takes place through the loss of security which
results from unauthorized persons obtaining
knowledge of classified matters.
12. Damage
It refers to the prejudice, embarrassment or injury to
the country resulting from act or omission.
Purpose of Protecting Classified Materials
1. Deter and impede potential spy.
2. Assist in security investigation by keeping
accurate records of the moments of classified
materials.
3. Enforce the use of “Need to Know” principle.
Two Kinds of Documents
1. Personal – letters, diary and notebooks. These
should be treated usually the same with official
document.
2. Official – orders, manuals, letters, overlays,
maps and magazines. You may be careful and
follow the chain of command.
Document and Information Cycle
1. Creation
2. Classification
3. Storage Three Security Concepts
4. Retrieval 1. Personnel are the weakest link in the security
5. Retention/Purging chain.
6. Transfer 2. Training is important to make security personnel
7. Disposition conscious and realize the value of document.
3. Training is necessary for the practice of the
Categories of Document “Need to Know” principle.
1. Category A
➢ Information which contains reportable time Four Types of Classified Matters
sensitive, order of battle and significant 1. TOP SECRET (green color code)
information. It is any information and materials, the
➢ It should be given priority because it is critical unauthorized disclosure of it would cause
information. exceptionally grave damage to the nation, politically,
➢ It must be forwarded without delay. economically and military operation.
➢ It is critical to friendly operations. 2. SECRET (red color code)
➢ It requires immediate action. It is any information and material, the
2. Category B unauthorized disclosure of it would endanger
➢ Anything that contains communication, national security, causes serious injury to the interest
cryptographic documents, or system that and prestige of the nation of any government activity,
should be classified as secret and requires or of great advantage to a foreign country.
special handling. 3. CONFIDENTIAL (blue color code)
➢ Higher authorities should declassify it. It is any information or material, the
unauthorized disclosure of it would be prejudicial to
3. Category C the interest and prestige of the national or
➢ Other information which contains something governmental activity or would cause administrative
that could be an intelligence value. embarrassment or unwanted injury to and be
➢ Contains exploitable information regardless of advantage to a foreign country.
its contents. 4. RESTRICTED (white or no color)
➢ Unscreened materials or documents should be It is any information and material which
categorized as Category C. requires special protection other than those
4. Category D determines confidential, secret and top secret.
➢ No value, yet level will never classify
documents as category D. Rules for Classification of Documents
➢ No decision must be made at the lower 1. Documents shall be classified according to their
echelon that document has no value. It is the content.
responsibility of the higher headquarters.
38
2. The overall classification of a file or of a group of
physically connected therein. Pages, paragraphs,
sections or components thereof may bear
different classification. Documents separated
from file or group shall be handled in accordance
with their individual classification.
3. Transmittal of documents or endorsements which
do not contain classified information or which
contain information classified lower than that of
the preceding element or enclosure shall include
a notation for automatic downgrading.
5. Correspondence, indexes, receipts, reports of
possession transfer or destruction, catalogs, or
accession list shall not be classified if any
reference to classified matter does not disclosed
classified information.
6. Classified matter obtained from other department
shall retain the same original classification.
Protection of Sensitive Information
➢ Proprietary information is information that in
some special way relates to the status or activities
of the possessor and over which the possessor
asserts ownership. In the business community,
proprietary information relates to the structure,
products or business methods of the organization.
➢ It is usually protected in some way against casual
or general disclosure.
➢ All proprietary information is confidential, but
not all confidential information is proprietary.
For example, confidential personnel data in
employee files is not considered as proprietary
although the company treats it as confidential.
Types of Proprietary Information
1. Trade Secrets – this consist of any formula,
pattern, device or compilation of information which is
used in one’s business and which gives him an 2. Pre and post-employment screening and
opportunity to gain an advantage versus competitors review.
who do not know or use it. It may be a formula for a 3. Non-disclosure agreements from
compound, a process of manufacturing, treating or employees, vendors, contractors and
preserving materials, a pattern for machine or visitors.
device, or a list of customers. A trade secret is a 4. Non-competitive agreements with
process or device for continuous use in the protection selected employees.
of the business. 5. Awareness programs.
2. Patterns – this is a grant made by the government 6. Physical security measures.
to an inventor, conveying or securing to him the 7. Informed monitoring of routine
exclusive right to make, use, or sell his invention for activities.
term of years.
PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION AND
Primary Distinctions between Patents and Trade MOVEMENT CONTROL
Secrets
1. Requirements for obtaining a patent are specific. In every installation, the use of protective
To qualify for a patent the invention must be more barriers, security lighting, communication and
than novel and useful. It must represent a positive electronic hardware provides physical safeguards
contribution beyond the skill of the average but these are insufficient to maximize the effort of the
person. guard force. A control point must be establishment
2. A much lower of novelty is required of a trade for positive personnel identification and check
secret. system. This is to ensure that only those people who
3. A trade secret remains secret as long as it have the right and authority will be given the
continues to meet trade secret tests while the necessary access to the area.
exclusive right to patent protection expires after The most practical and generally accepted
17 years. system of personnel identification is the use of
identification cards, badges or passes. Generally
Proprietary Information Protection Program speaking, this system designates and where and how
➢ Realizing that the most serious threat to trade identification cards should be displayed and to
secrets is the employee, a measure of protection whom. This helps security personnel eliminate the
if often realized through the use of employee risk of allowing the access of unauthorized personnel
agreements which restricts the employee’s within the establishments.
ability to disclose information without specific
authorization to the company. Types of Personnel Identification
➢ The following countermeasures may be adopted. 1. Personal recognition
1. Policy and procedures statements 2. Artificial recognition
regarding all sensitive information.
39
Use of Pass System
1. Single pass system- the badge or pass coded for
authorization to enter specific areas is issued to
an employee who keeps it in his possession until
his authorization is terminated.
2. Pass exchange system – an exchange takes
place at the entrance of each controlled area.
Upon leaving the personnel surrender his badge
or pass and retrieve back his basic identification.
3. Multiple pass system – this provides an extra
measure of security by requiring that an
exchange take place at the entrance of each
restricted area.
Badge and Pass Control
1. The system should have a complete record of all
badges and identification cards issued, returned,
mutilated or lost by serial number and cross-
indexed alphabetically.
2. The supervisor from time to time for its accuracy
and authenticity should check the lists.
3. Passes and badges reported lost should be
validated and security at entrance be informed
through conspicuous posting.
Visitor’s Movement Control
1. Visitor’s logbook – all visitors to any facility
should be required to identify them and should
be given a visitor’s ID by the security. Visitor’s
logbook should be filled up with the name of
visitors, nature and duration of visit.
2. Photograph – taking of photographs should also
be considered. Extreme caution must be
exercised in areas where classified information is
displayed to preclude unauthorized taking of
pictures of the installation. If a visitor has camera
and it is prohibited to take picture, said camera
should be left in the care of security with
corresponding receipt.
3. Escort – if possible visitors should be escorted
by the security to monitor their activity within the
establishment and guide them where to go.
4. Visitor’s entrance – separate access for visitors
and employees of the establishment should be
provided.
5. Time-traveled – if there is a long delay or time
lapse between the departure and arrival, the
visitors may be required to show cause for the
delay.
Package Management Control
1. No packages shall be authorized to be brought
inside and outside the industrial installation,
offices and work area without proper authority.
This basic precept help reduce if not eliminate
pilferage, industrial espionage or sabotage.
2. Outgoing packages carried by personnel should
be closely inspected and those in vehicles should
also be checked as many pilfered items are
hidden in the surface of the vehicles leaving the
compound.
3. Any personnel or visitor entering the installation
with a package should deposit the same to the
security and in return receives a numbered tag,
which he or she will use in claiming his or her
package upon departing.
Vehicular Movement Control and Identification
1. Privately owned vehicle of personnel or visitor
should be registered and are subjected to the
identification and admittance procedure.
2. Vehicles should be subjected for search at the
entrance and exit of the installation.
3. All visitors with vehicle should provide the
security as to the complete details of their
40
duration of stay, person to be visited, and other
information.
4. All vehicles of visitors should be given a sign or
sticker to be placed on the windshield.
5. Traffic warning signs should be installed in all
entrance in order to guide the visitors in their
destination as well as to provide them with the
necessary safety precautions while they are
inside the installation.
2. Security personnel must constantly supervise
parking areas and make frequent spots of
vehicles found there.
Building Access Control
At any physical barrier, a security system
must possess the ability to distinguish among
authorized persons, unauthorized visitors, and other
unauthorized persons. This is to assist the security
personnel protects sensitive are and information
within the installation.
Appropriate warning signs should be posted
at the building perimeter. Special restricted entry
facilities to public access be provided. This will be
dependent on the degree of security needed for the
protection of property, activity and other processes
within the building.
The access to the restricted area shall be
limited to authorized personnel who have the direct
involvement with the installation, construction and
operation and maintenance of the equipment and
systems and/or use of the materials contained within
the restricted area. A clear-cut policy on the access
control should be disseminated to all personnel of the
installation.
IMPLEMENTING RULES AND
REGULATIONS OF THE PRIVATE SECURITY
AGENCY LAW OF THE PHILIPPINES

DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
Security Guard – sometimes called private security
guard or watchman shall include any person who
offers or renders personal services to watch or
secure either a residence or business establishment
or both for hire or compensation, and with a license
to exercise profession.
Security Guard Force – is a group of force selected
men, trained or grouped into functional unit for the
purpose of protecting operational processes from
those disruption which would impede efficiency or
halt operation at a particular plant, facility,
installation or special activity.
Private Security Agency – any person, association,
partnership, firm or private corporation, who
contracts, recruits, trains, furnishes or post any
security guard to do its function or solicit individuals
business firms, or private, public or government-
owned or controlled corporations to engage his or its
services or those of his or its security guards, or hire,
commission or compensation.
Company Security Force – a security unit
maintained and operated by any private company or
corporation for its own security requirements only.
Government Security Unit – a security unit
maintained and operated by any government entity
than military and/or a police which is established and
maintained for the purpose of securing the office or
compound and/or extension such government entity.
License to Exercise Profession – shall mean any
document issued by the Chief, Philippine National
Police or his duly authorized representative
recognizing a person to be qualified to perform his
duties as private security or training personnel.
License to Operate(LTO) – is a license certificate
document, issued by the Chief, Philippine National
Police or his duly authorized representative,
authorizing a person to engage in employing security
guard or detective, or a juridical person to establish,
engage, direct, manage or operate an individual or a
private detective agency or private security agency
company security
SAGSD – otherwise refer to the current PNP Civil
Security Group Security Agency and Guard
Supervision Division or any other PNP Office that may
be designated later as the primary office for
supervision of the implementation of RA 5487.
PADPAO – refers to Philippine Association of
Detective and Protective Agency Operators, Inc.
which is an association of all licensed security
agencies and company security forces.
Duty Detail Order – a written order or schedule
issued by a superior officer usually the private
security agency or branch manager or operations
officer assigning the performance of private security;
detective services duties.
Republic Act Nr. 5487- it is the law that governs the
organization and operation of private security agency
throughout the Philippines. It is otherwise known as
the “Private Security Agency Law of the Philippines”.
This act was approved on October 3, 1972 and it was
amended on October 8, 1994.
General Prohibitions
No license certificate shall be granted to any
applicant for license to operate or license to exercise
security profession with the following
disqualification:
1. Having previous record of any conviction of
any crime.
41
2. Having previous record of any conviction of
any offense involving moral turpitude.
3. Having been dishonorably discharged or
separated from employment or service.
4. being a mental incompetent.
5. Being a user or addicted to the use of
prohibited drugs or narcotics.
6. Being a habitual drunkard
7. Dummy of a foreigner.
License to Operate
Any Filipino citizen or corporation,
association, partnership, one hundred percent
(100%) of which is owned and controlled by Filipino
citizens, may organize and maintain a Private Security
Agency or Private Detective Agency. He must meet
the following basic requirements:
1. Filipino Citizen;
2. should not less than twenty five (25) years of
age;
3. college graduate and/or commissioned
officer in the inactive service or retired from
the Armed Forces of the Philippines or the
Philippine National Police;
4. has taken a course or seminar on Industrial
Security Management and/or must have
adequate training or experience in security
business, and
5. good moral character
New applicants for license to operate shall be
required to obtain a minimum capitalization of one
million pesos (Php 1,000,000.00) with a minimum
bank deposit of five hundred thousand (Php
500,000.00) in order to start its business operation.
Limitation, Disqualification and Prohibitions
 1. No person shall or organize or even have an
interest in more than one agency
2. Elective or appointive government employees
who may be called upon on account of the
functions of their respective offices in the
implementation and enforcement of the
provisions of RA 5487, and any person related to
such government employee by affinity or
consanguinity in the third civil degree, shall not
hold an interest directly or indirectly, in any
security or watchman agency.
3. No agency shall offer, render or accept services
in gambling dens or other illegal business
establishments or enterprises.
4. The extent of the security guard services being
furnished by the security agency shall not go
beyond the compound and/or property of the
person or establishment contracting the security
service except when the security guards is
escorting big amount of money or valuables.
5. All agencies shall maintain a main office in their
registered addresses. Branch offices may be
established and maintained in other provinces or
cities where the security agency has deployed
guard.
6. All applicants for license to operate shall be
required to attend a private security agency or
company guard force operators and management
seminar or workshop.
Prohibition on “Kabit System” Operators
a. No licensed security agency shall operate,
promote and enter into an agreement of merger
or “kabit system” with any person or group of
persons for the purpose of organizing a branch
unit or subsidiary under separate control and
ownership. Merger of security and detective
agencies shall not be recognized without prior
approval from the Securities and Exchange
Commission with respect to their Articles of
Incorporation and the Department of Trade and
Industry, with regards their business name.
b. Any of the following circumstances or a
combination thereof shall be considered prima-
facie evidence of the existence of “Kabit System”.
1. Maintaining a separate branch, unit or
subsidiary office aside from the main office
of the agency situated within the same
locality.
2. Receiving direct payments from the
agency’s clientele and issuing official
receipt of their own distinct from that issued
by the agency concerned.
3. Remitting directly Social Security System
premiums, Medicare contributions and other
premium for other policy insurance benefits
by the aforementioned branch, unit or
subsidiary office.
4. Keeping or maintaining separate payrolls for
the branch employees signed and/approved
by the branch manager only.
5. Absence of record of monthly income
remittance to the main office when said
branch is authorized to make collections
from the clients of the licensee.
6. All other similar acts tending to show
separate and distinct relationship or
personality or ownership or management.
On Membership
1. No regular license shall be granted to any private
security agency unless it has a minimum of two
hundred (200) licensed private security
personnel under its employ.
42
2. No regular license shall be granted to any
company guard force or private detective agency
unless it has minimum of thirty (30) licensed
private security personnel under its employ.
3. The maximum number of private security
personnel that a PSA/CGF/PDA may employ shall
be on thousand (1000) including the branch and
the subsidiary.
Status and Validity of License to Operate
1. Regular LTO – issued, after complying with
licensing requirements.
2. Temporary LTO – initial and conditional
issuance to new private security agencies and to
PSAs holding regular LTO not able to maintain the
minimum number of security, personnel or
conform to standards, for them to be able to attain
the 200 minimum number of security personnel
or comply with license standards, prior to
issuance or re-issuance of regular LTO. Such
issuance shall not be renewable nor be
extendible.
3. Unless sooner cancelled or revoked and
provisions hereof modified, all license to operate
shall have a validity of two (2) years. Temporary
LTOs upon expiration are automatically
cancelled.
Renewal of License to Operate
1. Application for renewal of License to Operate
shall be field at least sixty (60) days before
expiry date of LTO.
2. Renewal applications of holders of regular
license not able to maintain the 200 minimum
number of security personnel under its employ or
license renewal requirements at the time of filing
 of application shall be reverted to temporary
status and issued temporary LTO.
3. The Licenses to Operate of applications for
renewal of regular License to Operate who fail to
file application 60 days after the expiry date of
LTO subject of the renewal application, SHALL
AUTOMATICALLY BE CANCELLED.
4. No application shall be approved unless a
certification is issued by FED-CSG to the effect
that all licenses of firearms of the agency
concerned are updated or renewed for at least
one (1) year forthcoming during validity of the
renewed LTO.
License to Exercise Private Security Profession
Basic Requirements of private security personnel
1. Filipino Citizen
2. not be less than eighteen (18) years of age
3. Must have taken a private security course or
seminar and/or must have adequate training or
experience in security business or rendering
security/detective services.
4. Of good moral character and must not have been
convicted of any crime or violation of these rules
and regulations carrying a penalty of prohibition
to be licensed.
5. Must be physically and mentally fit.
Qualification of a Private Security Guard
1. Filipino Citizen
2. high school graduate
3. physically and mentally fit
4. not less than eighteen years of age nor more than
fifty years of age (for new applicants and SGs in
non-supervisory position)
5. Has undergone a pre-licensing training course or
its equivalent.
Qualification of Security Officer
1. Filipino citizen
2. holder of Baccalaureate Degree
3. physically and mentally fit
4. Has graduate from a Security Officer Training
Course or its equivalent.
Qualification of Consultant
1. Filipino citizen
2. physically and mentally fit
3. holder of a master’s degree in either
Criminology, Public Administration, MNSA,
Industrial Security Administration, or Law
4. Must have at least ten years’ experience in the
operation and management of security business.
Qualification of a Private Detective
1. Filipino citizen
2. physically and mentally fit
3. holder of Baccalaureate Degree preferably
Bachelor of Laws or Bachelor of Science in
Criminology
4. Graduate of Criminal Investigation Course
offered by the PPNP or the NBI or any police
training school, or a detective training in any
authorized or recognized training center.
5. advance ROTC or CMT graduate or its
equivalent.
CONCEPTS OF SECURITY SURVEY
Security Education
➢ Security Education is conducted to develop
security awareness among employees of the
company. It should cover all employees,
regardless of rank or position.
43
Objectives of Security Education
1. Guidance for all supervisory and execution levels
of the organization.
2. A mandatory indoctrination on security for all
new personnel before their assignment to their
respective jobs.
3. Development of a high degree of security
consciousness among the selected supervisors
and other key personnel in a program that should
be continuing and supported by top
management.
4. A down-the-line security program aimed at
instilling consciousness and dedication through
demonstration, lectures, motivations and
suggestions.
5. To let all employee force be informed that they
all belong to the organization and that non-
awareness to the security program is tantamount
to disloyalty.
6. That the program is also to develop discipline,
loyalty and belongingness.
Phases of Security Education Program
1. Initial Interview – it is the first contact of the
prospective employee wherein the interviewer
determine the suitability of the applicant for
employment through his given answers on the
different type of questions being conducted. It is
in this stage where the interviewer may start
providing the necessary information as to the
overview of company security and at the same
time on the employee accountability and
corresponding penalties that could result from
violation there from.
2. Orientation and Training – it is in this stage
where new employees receive detailed
presentation of personnel security policy. Usually
 handouts or employees manual is being
distributed for reference. New employees also
requested to sign acknowledgement that they
have been aware of the existing company
policies and will abide the same.
3. Refresher conference – it is design to remind
employees of the company about their
responsibilities, review the guidelines and
policies, introduction of new policies and
regulation and a moment of getting employees
feedback about the company policies that is
being implemented.
4. Security reminders – a phase which employs an
indirect approach of educating the employees
such as posting security posters and distributing
fliers.
5. Security Promotion – it is the act of emphasizing
the importance and role of security achieving the
company goals and objectives. It involves
securing employee cooperation and support.
Security Survey and Inspection
➢ The basic instrument for determining security
vulnerability is the security survey. Most
description of security surveys refers
principally to checklists, audits or inventories
of security conditions.
Security System
➢ This is the set of policies, procedures and
rules and regulations designed to reduce to
an absolute minimum the possibility of
espionage, sabotage and compromise of
classified information of an office or a whole
establishment.
Survey
➢ The term applied to the first detailed “look
see” conducted by a team.
Security Survey
➢ A critical on-site examination and analysis of
an industrial plant, business, a home or
public or private institution done to ascertain
the facility’s current security status, to
identify deficiencies or excess in current
practices, to determine what protection is
needed and to make recommendations for
improving the overall level of security at that
installation.
➢ A general term that often encompasses other
procedures.
Two Kinds of Security Survey
1. Entrance Conference
➢ A conference or dialogue between the survey
team and management officials of a plan
before security is conducted.
2. Exit Conference
➢ A conference similar to entrance conference
done after the completion of the security
survey.
Objectives of Security Survey
1. To determine existing vulnerabilities to injury,
death, damage or destruction by natural causes.
2. To determine existing vulnerabilities of corporate
assets due to outside criminal activity.
3. To determine existing vulnerabilities of corporate
assets due to criminal activity within the
organization.
4. To determine existing conditions of physical
security of corporate property.
5. To measure compliance of employees to security.
Planning a Security Survey
44
1. Verify the need.
2. Obtain organizational support.
3. State the survey’s executive.
4. Determine how data will be gathered.
5. Develop alternatives.
6. Prepare a schedule of activities.
7. Implement the plan.
The Security Survey Report
➢ A good security survey report must
encompass all aspects of security risks and its
accompanying security plan shall conform
with existing security policies of the
management if nay, in order to come up with
adequate security system. The use of maps,
sketches of the area and even floor plans of
the building should be availed of to indicate
sensitive areas that would necessitate the
provision of adequate security.
Security Inspection
➢ An important activity to ensure the integrity
of the overall security programs.
➢ It complements security survey in its attempt
to prevent losses of company properties.
➢ It is conducted for two reasons: to check on
the degree of compliance with the
recommended countermeasures and to
determine the effectiveness and adequacy of
the countermeasures which are in effect.
Types of Security Inspection
1. Continuous Inspection
➢ It is an on-going and never ending activity.
2. Formal Inspection
➢ It is usually preceded by an announcement,
and the unit under inspection “prepares” for
 events, including some housekeeping
activities that would not otherwise happen at
that point in time.
3. Informal Inspection
➢ It is usually the result of a long and firmly
entrenched inspection program.
➢ It is seriously and quietly executed in a spirit
of understanding and cooperation.
4. Structured Inspection
➢ It is one that moves systematically from one
area to the next and so on.
➢ There is a format or a logical sequence to the
process.
5. Unstructured Inspection
➢ It is conducted in a random manner.
➢ There is no formal or logical sequencing.
Security Investigation
➢ It is a planned and organized determination
of facts concerning specific loss or damage of
assets due to threats, hazards or unsecured or
unsecured conditions.
Tools of Investigation
1. Information-Knowledge which the investigation
gathers from other persons
2. Interview- The simplest questioning of a witness
who has no personal reason to withhold
information.
3. Interrogation- The skillful questioning of a
person who is reluctant to divulge information
concerning the offense under investigation.
4. Instrumentation-The application of instruments
and methods of physical sciences to the detection
of crimes. In other words, the sum total of the
application of all sciences in crime detection
otherwise known as Criminalistics.
RISK ANALYSIS AND SECURITY HAZARD
Risk – it is the potential damage or loss of an asset.
➢ The level of risk is a combination two factors:
the value placed on that asset by its owner
and the consequence, impact adverse effect
of the loss or damage to that asset and the
likelihood that a specific vulnerability will be
exploited by a particular threat.
Risk Management – is a process of selecting and
implementing security countermeasures to achieve
an acceptable of risk at an acceptable cost.
Risk Analysis – the analysis of risk include
examinations of the vulnerability, probability and
critical of potential threats and include natural and
manmade risk.
Adversary – it refers to any individual, group, or
government that conducts activities or has the
intention and capability to conduct activities
detrimental to the individual, private or government
entity.
Asset – any information, facility, material information,
or activity which has a positive value to its owner
whether it is an individual, private or government
entity.
Vulnerability – any weakness that can be exploited
by an adversary to gain access to an asset.
Countermeasures – an action taken or a physical
entity used to reduce or eliminate one or more
vulnerabilities. The cost of possible countermeasures
may be monetary, but may also include non-
monetary cost such as reduced operational
efficiency, adverse publicity un favorable working
conditions, and political consequences.
Probability – it is the chance or likelihood that a loss
will take place.
45
Criticality – the impact of a loss as measured in
functional terms.
Risk Management Alternatives and Strategies
Risk Avoidance – eliminating or removing the risk
totally from the business, government, or industrial
environment for which the risk manager has
responsibility.
Risk Reduction – decreasing the risk by minimizing
the probability of the potential loss. The reduction or
criminal opportunity is often accomplished by
situational crime (prevention strategies to
discourage, deter, or deny criminal incidents.
Risk Spreading – spreading the risk through
compartmentation or decentralization to limit the
impact (critically) of the potential loss.
Risk Transfer – moving the financial impact of the
potential loss-over to an insurance company.
Risk Self-assumption – planned assumption and
acceptance of the potential risk by making a
deliberate managerial decision of doing nothing
about the threat, or setting aside resources for use in
case of a specific loss incident.
Security Hazards
➢ Any act or condition which may result in the
compromise of information, loss of life, loss or
destruction of property or disruption of the
objective of the installation.
Types of Hazards
1. Natural hazards – these are hazards which arise
from natural phenomena. The following are types
of natural hazards or disasters:
a. Floods caused by typhoons
b. Earthquakes
c. Fire (not caused by human action)
 d. Storms typhoons, cyclones, tornado
and hurricane)
e. Lightning storms
f. Extreme temperature and humanity
2. Human-Man made Hazards – these are hazards
which are the result of a state of mind, attitude,
weaknesses or character traits of one or more
persons. They can be acts of commission or
omission, both overt and covert, which can
disrupt operation of a plant or installation. The
following are the types of human or man-made
hazards:
a. Carelessness- accidents and
dissatisfaction
b. Disloyalty- subversion and sabotage
c. Espionage- pilferage and theft
d. Vandalism, etc.
Sabotage as a Security Hazard
Description of a Saboteur
1. He is the most dangerous foe that security will
have to deal with while planning and
implementing security measures and techniques.
2. He is an ordinary looking as the next guy but in
his mind, he has the training in deception,
knowledge in incendiaries, explosives,
chemistry, bacteriology, mechanics and
psychology.
3. He can work alone, in-groups, or simultaneously
in several places.
Espionage as a Security Hazard
Description of an Espionage Agent
1. He is very dangerous adversary and his skills in
deception and his cunning should never be under
estimated.
2. He is usually a person of extensive training and
will be highly effective in gaining the confidence
of people and of extracting information of value
to be relayed to his employer or handler.
3. Even how well-trained an espionage agent he
might be, he is human like the saboteur and he
can be defeated in his own game if proper
methods and techniques are undertaken.
Some Methods Employed by Espionage Agent
1. Stealing of information from employees.
2. Stealing information from records or other
sources.
3. Using various methods of reproducing
documents, products, equipment or working
models.
4. Using “front” as commercial concepts, travel
agencies, associations, business groups and
other organizations to obtain confidential
information or data.
5. Using various form or threats to obtain
information.
6. Using blackmail techniques by exposing intimate
and personal details concerning an individual or
organization.
7. Picking or securing information in social and
other gatherings.
8. Penetration and operational tactics.
Subversive Activity as a Security Hazard
Threats of subversive Activity
1. It can be local or national in nature and their
mission is to undermine the authority, weaken the
organization, and eventually take over. This can
be in business or any activity.
2. This can be in the form of rumor mongering,
propaganda, undermining morale, and injecting
46
defeatist attitudes, and other emotional
approaches.
3. It is an activity not easy to detect.
Pilferage as a Business Hazard
1. Pilferage in one of the most annoying and
common human hazards which security has to
deal with. This activity if uncontrolled can
become financial drain if not a menace to smooth
and orderly operation.
2. Failure to detect shortage and inaccurate
inventories will cause inventory losses, which
may be labeled as pilferage.
Types of Pilferer
1. Casual Pilferer – one who steals due to his
inability to resist the unexpected opportunity and
has little fear of detection has no plan or
premeditation and he is usually a “loner” on the
job. The temptation pick up the article is basically
due to poor security measure. The implication of
casual pilferage is the big cumulative cost if it
remains unchecked.
2. Systematic Pilferer – one who steals with
preconceived plans and takes away any or all
types of items or supplies for economic gain.
Pilferers of this kind can be employees or
outsiders of the establishment.
Anatomy of Pilferage
1. When need or desire exists and opportunity is
present, theft is almost sure to result.
2. Pilferage occurs everywhere. Opportunities for
pilferage increase when supplies or goods are
transported from one place to another.
Factors considered by a Pilferer to be Successful
on his Act
1. Location of items to be pilfered
2. Access to the items
3. Removal of item
4. Disposal of items
POLICE PATROL WITH POLICE
COMMUNICATION AND POLICE PLANNING
Police Patrol
Patrol is considered the skeletal foundation or
it is the backbone or department. The discussed
earlier, the term police originated from the Greek
word politeia, which means civil organizational and
the state: the Romans slightly changed the word to
politia from the French changed the word to police to
call those people authorized to implement the law
and the English and the Americans barrowed the
word from the French and used in to describe a law
enforcer cop is a European term meaning to catch or
seize.
Augustos Ceasar , just before time of Christ ,
formed the “vigiles” of Rome a group of over two
thousand men, armed with stoves and short sword,
those duty was to keep the peace and fight fires.
“Evolution of Police Patrol”
The origin of patrolling goes in the history of
police organized the development of patrol as a vital
police function is closely associated with the
evolution of police forces. The development of police
patrol is associated with the increase of human
population and the need for protection and security.
Police
-is the agency of a community or government that is
responsible for maintaining public order and
preventing and detecting crime.
Praetorian Guard
-is composed of Roman soldiers or centurions
carefully selected by the commander of the city
under the authority of Emperor Caesar, he achieved
the high level of law enforcement in effect until the
decline to the empire of Middle Ages beginning in
the 15th century policing became a task of the heads
of fiefdom and principalities
“Police in the Ancient Time”
In recorded history, they are many
documents and archeological finds that insinuate
from of originated police for example, a clay tablet
used by the ancient Babylonian dated, around 2000
BC contains a report from a Babylonian officer, he
was arrested and take a fingerprints and then taken a
control properties.
The Old Testament (song of Solomon, Isaiah
and Jeremiah) and the new testament (Matthew and
John), we find references to watchmen whose duty it
was to protect the city and arrest offenders.
Hieroglyphics of the ancient Egyptians
indicates that they had police officers; they tied
special flag with its distinctive emblem, a gazelle with
a large ostrich feather attached to its neck. There
some type of protective police patrol because of the
great treasures hidden in the many tombs. It was
regard that the Egyptians became the 1st people to
“we police dogs on patrol”
47
Police in the Middle Ages
A system of mutual protection was developed called
the “Frankpledge’. Under this system, a community
was divided into tithings or groups of 10 men, each
member of which was responsible for the conduct of
the other members of his group and for the assurance
that a member charged with a breach of the law
would be produced at court.
England
Shire Reeve - each shire was the responsibility of a
“Reeve” later called the Sheriff, who in turn was
responsible to their King for law and orders in his
respective district. Each Shire was broken down into
Hundreds (100 households) headed by a
Hundredman, later known as a High Constable. Each
hundred was further broken down into Tythings (10
families) headed by a Tythingman or Chief
Tythingman who was elected by the group, later on
replaced by the Constable in the 12th century. He
served as constable and judge.
“Watchman - each able bodied man to serve so
much time patrolling the town at night”. Later, it was
required that they call out the time and weather on
the hour.
Hue and Cry- The horn, the oldest known warning
device in history, was sounded when a person
committed a crime, or a felon escaped, and it was
detected. When they hear this, they raised a cry,
sounded their horns and by law had to lay aside their
work and join their pursuit. If they failed to join, they
were considered to have taken the part of the
escaping person and would be arrested. The law
stated that pursuit of the fugitive must continue until
he was caught or reached the sea.
Keepers of the Peace- At the end of 12th century
(1195), King Richard issued a proclamation entitled
“Keepers of the Peace”, requiring the appointment of
knights to keep the King’s Peace. Some believe that
the present “shield” type badge used by some police
departments had its origin with the shield the knights
used. They keep guard at bridges and gates and
checking on people leaving and entering the town.
Statue of Winchester (Watch and Ward Act)- Near
the end of 13th Century (1285), the Statue of
Winchester enacted the system of Watch and Ward
Act. A watch was stationed between sunset and
sunrise at each gate of a walled town. It revived the
Hue and Cry. Some watchers are grouped together
for protection and patrolled the town in “Marching
Watches”.
The Charlies- King Charles passed an act which
provided in London one thousand Night Watchmen or
Bellmen to be on duty from sunset to sunrise and they
were called the Charlies. Also referred to by the local
citizens as “Shiver and Shake” watch because they
were often old and frail and would run off if they saw
any trouble, or heard a cry for help. They carried
long staves and dimly lit lanterns, and they called out
the hour and weather conditions. Some were not
honest and sometimes work for criminals as lookouts.
Because of this ineffectiveness, merchants hired their
own watchman who was known as the “Merchant
Police”.
Bow Street Runners- In 1748, Henry Fielding
became the Chief Magistrate at Bow Street in
Middlesex, London . He organized a group of men
known as Bow Street Runners whose task was to run
errands for the Bow Street Court. He later formed the
Bow Street Horse Patrol whose duty was to patrol the
main roads thus secure the travelers from highway
bandits. According to some books, Bow Street
Runners was the first organized foot patrol and Bow
Street Horse patrol was the first mounted police on
patrol.
The Metropolitan Police- In 1829, Sir Robert Peel
introduced the Metropolitan Police Act and was
passed by the English parliament of England in the
same year. This law led to the creation of the
Metropolitan Police Force of London, which was
viewed by some historians as the first organized
uniformed police form. This Police force was later
called Scotland Yard. Being the sponsor of the law,
Peel became the first head of the police organization
thus earning the title of “The Father of Modern
Policing System”.
France
The Citizen Night Guard - (similar to English
Watchman) and the Royal Guard which was
probably for the king’s protection. At this time, Saint-
Louis gave the Guard a motto that is even today on
the French police emblem, “Vigilat ut Quiescant” (he
watches that they may sleep).
End of the 18th Century (1791)-
The position of “Officers de Paix” was formed
(origin of Peace Officer”).
First Police Organization (headed by Louis-Marie
Debelleme)- In truth, the French were the first to
48
establish a group of uniformed police officers tasked
to patrol the city of Paris. This police force was called
“Sergent de Ville” (servant of the city) which was
organized six months earlier before the creation of
Metropolitan Police Force of London.
HISTORICAL SETTING OF THE PHILIPPINES
POLICE SERVICE
A. PRE-SPANISH REGIME
The police under the Philippine setting evolved
from the practice of different tribes to select able
bodied young men to protect their villages, not from
the assault of criminals, but from the depredation of
wild animals which prey on their crops and livestock
during the night.
These young men, who walk around to protect
their village during the night, need not work in the
field during the day. The village council has agreed
that they given an equal share of the harvest for their
family.
Historically this is the forerunner of the
contemporary patrol function of the police crime
prevention.
THE BARANGANIC SOCIETY
Village chief- administrative leader of the
community
1. A traditional body of customs and traditions
limited the scope of his authority.
2. Although his position has become hereditary,
it was originally intended by an exhibition of
a greater power and valor. Since the original
basis for leadership was his superior
 personal attributes; he could replace it for
some reasons his position weakened.
3. Administered the land in the name of the
barangay.
Freemen-Assisted the chief with work involving
the welfare of the community.
Laws;
1. Unwritten
2. Written
a) Code of Kalantiaw (1433)
b) Maragtas Code (1257) The first written law in
the Philippines
c) Luwaran- written law of the muslims
d) Principal code of Sulu
B. SPANISH REGIME
Police services during over the Spanish regime to
the 19th century was looked upon by the Spanish
government as part of the military system of the
defense colony. So the locally organized police
forces, although performing civil duties and
seemingly created for the sole purpose of
maintaining peace, were in fact direct adjust of the
colonial military establishment.
Police functions:
1. The suppression of brigandage be patrolling
unsettled areas.
2. Detection of local petty uprising
3. The enforcement of the collection, including
church revenues
Carabineros be seguridad publico (Mounted
Police)
Organized in 1712 to carry out the regulations of the
Department State. Discharge the duties of a port,
harbor and river police.
Guardrilleros
- A body of rural police organized in each town
- Establish by the Royal Decree of January 8,
1836
The Guardia Civil
- Created of royal decree issued by the crown
of February 12, 1852 to partially relieved the
Spanish peninsular troops of their wink in
policing town.
- Consisted of Filipino policemen organized
originally in each of the provincial capital of
the alcalde.
THE LOCAL GOVERNMENT UNIT DURING
SPANISH ERA
A. The barangay were consolidated into town (
pueblos each headed by a gobernadorcillo
(little governor) popular called Capitan.
B. Towns into provinces each headed by a
governor who represented the governor
general in province.
C. Citiess were governed by special charters.
Each of these cities had an Ayuntamiento of
cabildo (special council).
Governor General
1. He exercise executive, administrative and
judicial powers
2. As Captain General he was the commander in
chief of all the armed forces of the
Philippines.
3. As Vice- royal patron, He exercised certain
religious power.
D. THE JAPANESE OCCUPATION
The Japanese military police known as
“Kempetai” were help responsible in maintaining
49
peace and order in Manila. The Manila police was re-
named Metropolitan Constabulary under the Bureau
of Manila.
The Philippine Executive Commission
A civil government composed of Filipinos with Jose
B. Vargas as a Chairman. It exercises both the
executive and legislative power. The laws enacted
were subject to the approval on the commander-in-
chief of the Japanese forces.
The Philippine Independence
On February 7, 1945 Gen. Mac Arthur returned to
the Philippines. The Manila Police placed was placed
under America control.
On July 4, 1945 Philippine Independence was
establish Pres. Manuel A. Roxas become the
Philippine chief in Manila.
E. THE AMERICAN OCCUPATION
The American occupation of the
Philippines which came after the Filipino
Americanwar from 1898 to 1901 was followed
by a period of political ferment and
equilibrium.
On November 30, 1901 the Philippine
Commission recommended to the secretary
the organization of an insular police.
Soon after they establish of civil
government in 1901, Gen. Howard Taft
became the first civil Governor of the
Philippines.
Salient Features:
Manila Police Department- organized by virtue of
act No. 183 of the Philippine Commission July 31,
1901 Capt. George Curry- first chief of police.
Philippine Constabulary- Act No. 175 of the
Philippine Commission, August 1, 1901
“Constabulary” also known as Philippine
Constabulary-first Insular police of the Philippines.
a) Capt. Henry T. Allen- First chief of P.C.
b) Manned mostly by Filipinos but officer were
mostly Americans
The Nature of Police Patrol
Patrol - is the backbone of the police department.
The proof is that patrol force is the only
division in the police organization that cannot be
eliminated. This is usually true in small police
organization since it cannot afford to create divisions
such as Traffic, Investigation, Juvenile and other
specialized areas.
While small police departments grow to keep
up with the increasing population, expanding
geographical boundaries, and growing diversity of
police jurisdiction, there is a need to hire uniformed
and non-uniformed police personnel to take over the
clerical and record keeping functions in order to
provide policeman more time for their field
responsibilities. Specialized units such as vice squad,
homicide section, child and women’s desk, and
others have to be created. But all the while, the patrol
unit continues to exist as the principal functional unit
or “backbone” of the police department.
Importance of Police Patrol
1. Patrol is the essence of police operations.
2. The patrol group is the single largest unit in
the police organization.
3. Actions taken by the patrol officer have the
most direct impact on the citizen’s satisfaction
and on the accomplishment of police goals
and objectives.
4. Patrol operation is the most visible form of
activity that enhances the welfare and
security of the community.
5. Individual patrol officers represent the police
department in its contact with the community.
6. Individual patrol officers play a major role in
determining the quality of justice in a given
community. Errors made by patrolmen have
significant negative effect in the public’s
officer is the most important human element
of the police organization since all police
field operations are supported by the patrol
activity.
The Role of Police Patrol
Police, the first component of the Criminal
Justice System in the Philippine setting is responsible
in performing these fundamental functions.
1. Prevention of crime and repression of
criminal activities
2. Prevention of peace and order
3. Protection of life and property
4. Enforcement of laws and ordinances and
regulation of non-criminal conduct
5. Investigation of crimes
6. Apprehension of criminals
7. Safeguarding of citizens rights and public
morals
Citizens usually call first the police when a social
problem occurs
Traditionally, because the police are
constantly available when needed; dependable when
called upon; and capable of providing advice to
decide or settle interpersonal conflicts. Thus, there
are two broad duties of police officers while on
patrol.
1. Provide public protection through
a. Preventive Enforcement –
progressive and continuous
patrolling
50
b. Selective Enforcement – research
and investigation
2. Render social services
a. Information services
b. Police escort
c. Assisting other agencies
d. Serving court notices (warrants)
Patrol and Police Discretion
Discretion - refers to the wise use of one’s judgment
based on personal experience and common sense to
decide a particular situation.
- also mean the freedom to decide: the
freedom or authority to judge something or make a
decision about it.
Concept of Crime Prevention and Crime
Suppression
Crime prevention - involves the suppression of the
desire of potential criminals to commit crimes.
Crime suppression - involves the elimination of the
opportunity of criminals to perform acts against the
law.
In reality, crime prevention and crime
suppression are activities that patrol officers do not
bother to distinguish. When they are deployed at the
streets, patrol officers have no time to ponder if what
they do is under crime prevention or crime
suppression.
DUTIES OF ORGANIZATIONAL UNITS
A. FUNCTIONAL UNITS- Functional division of
the department are describe in the following
terms;
BUREAU- largest organic unit within a large
department. Each bureau is composed of the
number of divisions.
DIVISION- A primary subdivision of a bureau
SECTION- Functional unit within the division.
This is necessary for specialization.
UNITS- Functional group within a section where
further specialization is needed.
B. TERRITORIAL UNITS
POST- A fixed point or location to which an
officer is assigned for duty. Such as designated
desk or officer an intersection or cross works
from traffic, duty or location for general guard
duty.
ROUTE- A length streets designated for patrol
purposes, also known line beat.
SECTOR- an area containing two or more beat,
routes or post.
DISTRICT- a geographical subdivision of a city
for patrol purposes, usually with its own station.
AREA- a section or territorial division of a large
city, each compromised of designated districts.
THE REACTIVE AND PRO-ACTIVE PATROL
RE-ACTIVE PATROL- this is a patrol which
consists of driving around the districts waiting for
something to happen. It’s not very different from
stereotyped old-time policeman who just set
around in the precinct playing cards while
waiting for calls. The sensibility and affordability
of this scheme is non-being questioned because
of budgetary constraints and skyrocketing prices.
PRO-ACTIVE PATROL- An alternative patrol
system which means the fielding of the field units
in their respective area of responsibility with
prescribe objectives and verifiable tasks
scheduled for the day to augment the calls and
other on sight activities that makes up the officer
day.
During those times when the reactive patrol
officer could be on his routine patrol, the pro-
active officer on the other hands will be making
burglar prevention inspection of business and
residential areas, zeroing in known drug dealer
or burglar and showing them for a while to see if
they are playing their illegal trade and OF
currently under investigation.
OBJECTIVES OF POLICE FIELD
OPERATIONS
SERVE AND PROTECT- Includes the objectives
of protecting lives and properties and providing
ill the other service which are required or
expected from police officers. This objective may
be effectively established by maintaining open
line of communication between the people and
officers who serve them include in this category
are the functions of “community relation”.
PARTICIPATIVE LAW ENFORCEMENT-
Includes or locally referred to as the community
oriented policing system COPS, it is now has a
wide application by the PNP particularly in Metro
51
Manila area. Actually the teamwork concept
between the police and citizenry is not something
new although it seems to be something new to
those who are not aware of on have forgotten the
“basic teamwork” between the police and citizen
will always be necessary in order that law
enforcement function may be performed
effectively.
PREVENTION OF CRIMINAL AND
DELINQUENCY BEHAVIOR- this field objective
is partially aimed or ways and means of reducing
the desire to commit crime. It is a police
responsibility top to be able to identify the
offender, delinquents and near-delinquents
before an arrest become necessary. This is more
regularly carried out the field officer in contacts
with juveniles whose behavior patterns are not so
indelibly impressed and who might be amenable
to change.
REPRESSION OF CRIMINAL AND
DELINQUENT BEHAVIOR- repression of crime
is generally accomplished whether by having
police officer present at specific locations
maintaining a highly active undercover
operation. In both cases, fear of being caught in
the act the theory is bases upon the area. We
actually refer to this phenomenon as police
“OMNI PRESENCE”
IDENTIFICATION, APPREHENSION AND
CONVICTION OF OFFENDERS- Patrol officer
are usually in a position of readily identify
obvious or suspected violators of law and to take
enforcement action immediately when possible.
When a policeman is assigned to investigate a
complaint of a crime, it is their first responsibility
 to know what is crime and what is not. They must
initiate the investigation immediately locate and
questions victims and witnesses, protect the
crime scene and make every effort to locate and
apprehend suspects.
TRAFFIC FLOW AND COLLISION
REDUCTION- Pedestrians and vehicle traffic
must be free flowing and collision free so that
people may move safely from one place to
another. The police objective is to determine the
causes of congestion and to relieve it, which
involves investigation and the Three E’s
(education, engineering and enforcement).
Patrol functions
Based on Section 1 of Rule II of the original
Police Manual, the patrol force has the primary
responsibility of safeguarding the community.
1. Protection of persons and property
2. Preservation of peace and order
3. Prevention of crime
4. Suppression of criminal activities
5. Apprehension of criminals
6. Enforcement of laws and ordinances
7. Regulation of criminal conduct
8. Performing necessary services and
inspection
In order to realize the above-enumerated
functions, the patrol unit has to perform the following
activities:
ACTIVITIES FOR THE PATROL DIVISION
1. Routine patrol and observation- the routine
patrol is basic patrolling activities, but it
should be one of the routine avoidance. 1. Perimeter control
When do not have fixed pattern to patrolling 2. Asset prosecution and inventory shrinkage
your districts, the criminals must take greater 3. Personal, executives/ celebrity protection
risk when attempting to commit crimes while 4. Location and recovery of stolen properties
you are in duty. 5. Disturbance prevention and crowd control
2. Preventive attendance at public gathering- 6. Special purpose police
the purpose of this is to prevent any unlawful
activity by individuals or by crowds as a FACTORS THAT DETERMINE PATROL
whole. DEPLOYMENT
3. Benevolent and community services- The
performance of many services by the police 1. Resident and transients population,
officer which does not appear in any list of particularly in the business sector,
their job specification. universities and tourist belt areas. Some
4. Business and property security- patrol areas may double is population in the
officers should take out thoroughly the daytime because of the transients while some
security of residential areas/commercial may be virtually empty during working hours
buildings and properties as best they can on week.
without the constraint of time and their other 2. Numbers and types of crimes arrest
responsibility. Frequent and unscheduled 3. Location of crime and arrest
visit to property for security checks will 4. Traffic location statistics and patterns
further reduce the likelihood of criminal 5. Location of frequent incidents of hazard
activity at those locations. requiring concentrated police coverage such
5. Inspection service- Since patrol officer were as sports areas, stadiums, theaters,
already on the streets it is most sufficient to transportation terminals, or other place
extend the inspection responsibilities of the where people usually gathers.
police and then require the officers to report 6. Disproportionate concentration on
the law violation or unsafe conditions to the population, such as widely separated single
appropriate agency. family residence versus the heavily
6. Responding to call of service concentrated dwelling in the depresses
7. Animal control areas.
8. Traffic direction and control- assuring safely 7. Socio- economic factors- people from the
and efficient movement of vehicular and high income groups tends to stay from home
pedestrians traffic in your district more often than the low income groups which
9. Information services- serving as a best source has preference or without any choices but to
of information. stay at home.
10. Developing contacts 8. Zoning plan of the city (relative location of
11. Preliminary investigation business, industrial, residential and other
12. Collection and prevention of evidences type of zoning).
13. Arrest of offenders
14. Preparation of reports DESIGNATIONS OF DISTRICTS
15. Testifying in court
PRIVATE POLICE ACTIVITIES
52
 Aside from considering all the preceding all the
preceding factors, the apportionment of the police
jurisdiction maybe in the following manner.
1. Divide into patrol district that can suitably
handled by assigned officer
2. Separate the jurisdiction into very small
segment known as “reporting districts” to
maintain complete record on each districts
3. Assign the officer proportionate to the
indicated proportionate needs of the districts
4. Group the reporting districts into contiguous
“patrol districts”
DISTICTION OF POLICE SERVICE FROM
MILITARY SERVICES
1. The police are service oriented while military
is mission oriented.
-A soldier carried out the orders of his superiors
and think of accomplishing the mission, while the
policeman considers the community and the
populace.
2. Military transcend external boundary to
protect the national security and territorial
security of the state while the police evolve within
internal limit.
3. Military are combatant and pursue the doctrine
of attack, search and destroys using the principle
of “find, fix and finish” While the police follows
the doctrine of law enforcement such as; public
safety, crime prevention, preservation of peace
and orders using the principle of life and
property preservation.
4. Military deals with the use of firearms and
armaments as the principal weapon, while the
police deal with the knowledge of the law as the
principal weapon where the use of firearm is
possible only as a last resort.
5. Military treats on the national power of the
state while the police deal with the police power
of the state.
6. The military deals on rigid reaction while the
police deal on protection
CATEGORIES OF POLICE ACTIVITIES
1. Law enforcement- customary police function
2. Order maintenance- serve role/social service
Three major police functions
1. crime prevention
2. crime investigation
3. traffic supervision
PATROL FORCE ORGANIZATION
Patrol force organization – is defined as the
hierarchy of police officers working together towards
a common goal. The general goal of the patrol force
is to safeguard the community.
To achieve this goal , patrol officers must coordinated
activities whether these are in the form of:
1. protection of life property
2. preservation of peace and order
3. prevention of crime
4. suppression of criminal activities
5. apprehension of criminals
6. enforcement of laws and ordinances
7. regulation of criminal conduct
8. performing necessary services and
inspections
Thus, patrol force organization requires
proper management. Note that a poorly organized
patrol force cannot function effectively even with the
53
best management. On the other hand, a properly
organized patrol force will not operate maximum
efficiency if it is not well managed.
Without the application of sound principles of
organization, the effects are as follows.
1. duties and responsibility may not be clearly
defined;
2. duplication of effort may occur;
3. vital resources may not be utilized in the most
efficient manner; and
4. essential tasks may not be properly
coordinated;
PRINCIPLES OF PATROL ORGANIZATION
Most police organizations today are
organized along semi-military lines because of these
three basic reasons:
1. The nature of the work they perform;
2. The conditions under which they operate; and
3. The manner in which they are expected to
perform duties;
Organizing - is the process of grouping of people,
things, functions, activities, processes according to
some logical ore systematic plan or procedure so that
work is carried out in the most effective and efficient
manner. In other words, the process of organizing
helps to ensure that police work is carried out in the
most effective manner by achieving maximum benefit
of available resources.
Principles that enable goals of organizing the
patrol affairs are achieved.
1. Simplicity
In organizing the patrol force and its
functions, a plan is needed. The organizational
plan should be simple enough to be clearly
 understood by all concerned, yet detailed
enough to provide clear lines of authority and
responsibility.
According to Hale (1994), overly complex
structures may;
a.Thwart (delay or stop) the free flow of
communication;
b.Confuse organizational relationships; or
c.Hamper unity of operations, and impede the proper
coordination of operations.
Organization chart - is a diagram of system. It
facilities understanding since it shows at a glance
how information, instructions, or orders are formally
communicated within an organization and who
reports to whom within an organization. It prescribes
relationships and thereby facilities communications.
2. Organizing by Function
This basic principle of organization
emphasizes the grouping of similar tasks, job
assignments, and functions together and placing
then under a single supervisor or command
officer.
Organizing by function promotes:
a.Efficiency and eliminate duplication of effort; and
b.Logic and clarity in the organizational structure;
Basically, police tasks are normally grouped
according to:
a. Function
b. Process
c. Method
d. Clientele
e. Geographic area (police districts or
precincts
f. Time of day (patrol shifts)
3. Chain of Command
Information must be transmitted through the
organizational structure in a systematic manner in
order to ensure that all concerned personnel will be
properly informed. Moreover, the chain of command
permits each person in the hierarchy of authority to
take appropriate action at the proper level before
passing the matter upward or downward in the line
command.
Violations of chain of command results to any or
all of the following:
a. Internal disharmony
b. Confusion in the minds of subordinates as
to whom they are responsible
c. Undermined or weakened authority of
responsible supervisors
Chain of command is especially important in
a police organization because accountability is
critical. The principle of chain of command holds that
each successive person in the chain of command,
from the first level supervisor to the chief of police,
must be allowed to opportunity to deal with those
incidents for which he or she is responsible. A person
cannot be held accountable if the chain of command
is violated by allowing persons either below or
above that person to handle the situation.
4. Span of Control
The ability of one person to supervise the
affairs of subordinates is limited by such factors as
the level of the work being performed, whether
supervision is direct and continual or irregular and
indirect, and the degree of judgment and initiative
exercised by the supervisor.
54
The principle of span of control is based on
the assumption that there is limit to the number of
individuals that one person can effectively supervise.
The optimum span of control in any organization
depends upon a number of things, including:
a. The type and complexity of work being
performed;
b. The job skills, training, and experience of
those performing the work;
c. The degree of specialization involved in
the work being performed; and
d. The knowledge, skill and experience of
the supervisor
5. Unity of Command
The principle of the unity of command is
based on the belief that an individual; should be
responsible to one and only one person at any given
time and in any given situation.
The principle of unity of command states that
a person cannot function effectively if he or she is
expected to receive and follow orders form more
than one person at a time. To do otherwise opens the
opportunity for internal conflict, confusion, and lack
of cohesion and coordination effort.
Functional supervision - is exercised by the person
who is formally assigned to supervise or command a
unit or person to the organization chart or established
directive.
Administrative supervision - however, may be
exercised by the person who is in charge of a
particular function at a particular time and place.
Police Personnel Distribution
 The patrol force is an organization within an
organization. The patrol force is the nucleus (focal
unit) of the department about which the special
services are grouped, and therefore, it shall not be
subordinated to any other police unit in the police
department. The operational heart of a police
organization is the patrol force to which other
department divisions relate in a supportive role.
In ordinary police stations, the suggested
distribution of police function is as follows.
Police Activity Percentage
1. Patrol Functions 50%
2. Criminal Investigation 15%
3. Traffic Functions 10%
4. Vice & Juvenile 10%
Related Function
5. Administrative 10%
Functions
6. Auxiliary Functions 5%
The proportional strength of the patrol force
and the special units like investigation, traffic, vice
and juvenile units depend on the services performed
by each. The patrol force, being backbone of the
police service, is responsible for the accomplishment
of most police objectives. In small police
departments having no specialization, the patrol
force performs all the primary, secondary, and
administrative police tasks. If a special unit is
created, it must decide which tasks:
1. will be taken from the patrol unit, to be
made as the exclusive responsibility of the
special unit;
2. will remain as exclusive responsibility of the
patrol unit; and
3. will be assigned as joint responsibility
Manning Level of Patrol Force
The patrol unit must get the most number of
uniformed personnel. The “rule of thumb” regarding
the manning level of any police department must be
observed.
‘‘Rule of Thumb” as: common practice – a way of
proceeding based on experience or sound judgment;
or generally reliable method any practical, through
not entirely accurate, method that can be relied on
for an acceptable result.
In the Philippine setting, the rule regarding
the manning level of the police is provided under
section 27 of Republic Act # 6975. The standard
manning level is 1:500 (1 police officer for every 500
residents). However, in extreme conditions, this
manning level maybe stretched to maximum, which
is 1:1000 (1 police officer for every 1,000 resident).
Deployment of Patrol Force
Responsibility for the performance of certain
police tasks within a certain area is placed on the
individual policeman, and the accomplishment of this
duty requires his movement from one place to
another. A choice of patrol method whether foot or
mobile must be made and it must be based on:
1. the purpose of the patrol; and
2. the conditions under which it is to be
provided
Factors that determine Patrol Deployment
1. Resident and transient populations in the
business tourist districts, and the university
belt. Some areas may double its population in
55
daytime because of the transients while some
may be virtually empty during working hours
on weekdays.
2. Numbers and types of crimes and arrests
3. Locations of crimes and arrests
4. Traffic accident statistics and patterns.
Location of accident prone areas and
“frequent incidents” or hazards requiring
concentrated police coverage such as sport
arenas, stadiums, popular night spots, bars,
theater, transportation terminals or other
places where people usually gather.
5. Disproportionate concentrations of
population, such as widely separated single
family residence versus the heavily
concentrated dwellings in the depressed
areas.
6. Socio-economic factors. People from the
higher-income groups tend to stay away from
home more often than the low-income groups
who have no choice but to stay at home.
7. Zoning plan of the city (relative locations of
business, industrial, residential, and other
types of zoning). By their nature, certain
types of places call for higher volumes of
police service.
8. Size of Jurisdiction and shape.
9. Geography and Topography.
10. Location, sizes, and access to parks and
recreational facilities.
11. Age, male-female, and married-unmarried
ratios of the population.
12. Homogeneity and/or mixture of various
ethnic-cultural populations.
13. Modes of transportation and location of
transportation terminals.
14. Number and qualification of officers available
for field duties.
15. Amount of trust and confidence of the people
to the police, which may influence the
frequency and types of calls police service.
PATROL THEORIES AND PATROL METHODS
A. Fundamental Theories of Patrol
1. Theory of Police Omnipresence – High
police visibility discourage criminals.
Normally, criminals think twice before
executing their plans if there is obvious
presence of police officers. Thus, patrol
activity should be carried in a manner that
attracts maximum attention to the police
officer or police vehicles. This theory applies
the principle of overt operation or high police
visibility.
2. Low Profile Theory – Low police visibility
increases the opportunity to apprehend
criminals. Deceptive absence of the police
officers will let criminals believe that they will
not be detected or caught if they execute
crimes that they planned. In this theory, the
objective is to attract as little attention as
possible while on the process of patrolling.
The officers should operate in manner that it
would be difficult for either criminals or the
public to determine that police are around.
The principle of covert operation is
integrated in this theory.
TYPES OF PATROL
1. FOOT PATROL
-The most expensive type of patrol
- Restricted to small areas with dense population and
it is used to deal with special problem of prevention
and repression that cannot be adequately handled by
the officers in radio cars.
- Also considered as the original and most effective
type of patrol.
Methods of foot patrol;
a. fixed post patrol- used for traffic, surveillance
parades and other special events.
b. Moving foot patrol- used where there is
considerable foot traffic with crimes area and
special hazards area.
Philippine settings of foot patrol
August 7, 1901- first operation of foot patrol in the
Philippines
March 10, 1917- second recorded operation
Advantage of foot patrol
a. Closer observation of persons and things
b. Maintain better personal contacts with the
citizens and develop police community
relation
c. Can enter or penetrate small alleys and
streets
d. Uniform patrolman serves as deterrent factors
to the possible perpetrators
e. Closer observations of surroundings and
conditions and circumstances that may
require police attention.
f. The patrol officer has sufficient time to assess
and estimate the nature and degree of the
incidents.
B) AUTOMOBILE PATROL
- The most economical and most extensively used
and most effective means of transportation for police
patrol. It is equipped with the latest kind of police
gear, it provides rapid, safe and efficient means of
police response.
Methods of mobile patrol
56
a. Marked car patrol car- Marked patrol car is
for the purpose of police “omni presence” or
for the prevention of crime, while the
unmarked car patrol is for apprehension or
arrest of the criminals.
b. Two man patrol car and one man patrol car.
c.
Philippine settings
May 17, 1945-introduction of first automobile patrol
Major Alma Jose- First Chief of mobile patrol bureau
Advantages;
a. It covers wide area
b. Provide faster response to public calls
c. Provide constant availability to public calls
d. Provides an elements of surprise
e. Provide the officer with a needed protection
f. Less tiresome
g. More economical
C. HORSE PATROL
- It is the oldest type of patrol, horse maybe used for
certain patrol problems in jurisdiction that contains
large parks areas or similar places where automobile
cannot go or maybe forbidden. Horse fulfills the need
for greater mobility in places wherein the terrain is
rough.
Common use of horse patrol
a. Park patrol- it provides the rider with a
higher and better place of vision for the
purpose of observation
b. Beach patrol- good in controlling crowds
c. Posses search duty-used in mountainous area
 d. Parade and crowd control- their height and
size has a strong.
D. DOG PATROL
- The key to successful used of police dogs in
patrol is based on;
a. Understanding and wiling master
b. Proper selection and training of dogs
c. Preparing the general public for their use.
Ancient Egyptians- became the first people use
police dogs on patrol to help them to patrol the
treasure in laden tomb.
German shepherds- Best suited for all around police
works.
Neo- The name of the savage dog in Philadelphia that
was paid for 3 dollars for the protection of “ye old
mine”.
Seargent Blitz- The police dog in Savannah, Georgia
that was successful in drug sniffing that the
underworld put out $ 100.000 contact on the dog.
Note; Police dogs should never be used to replace
police officer. They are just supplementary forces
that can aid the officer in the better performance of
his duties.
Use of dog patrol;
1. Narcotics detection
2. Customs infections
3. bomb detection
E. BICYCLE PATROL
- Simple And inexpensive means of silent
transportation to carry police officer throughout their
district
Small motorized vehicle- Used for routine patrol to
replace to augment foot or automobile patrol under
conditions when such vehicles is practicable more
than conventional mode of travel. The versatility of all
vehicle make it an indispensable patrol unit for
covering such places as shopping malls pathways
and trails.
Philippine settings;
1939- Introduced by the Manila police department to
augment the foot patrol coverage in the parks and
residential areas.
Advantage;
1. Covers area too widespread for foot patrol
and areas not accessible for the patrol cars.
2. Combined mobility and stealth
3. Highly effective in combating theft, burglary
and vandalism
4. Effective for pain cloths patrols officers in
conducting surveillance in high crimes areas.
5. Inexpensive to operate.
F.MOTORCYLE PATROL
-it is adaptable to traffic control and enforcement,
parade and escorts. Speed and mobility in
maneuverability are outstanding characteristics of
the motorcycle that make it valuable police vehicles.
Philippine setting;
1909- first used of motorcycle patrol in
Philippines
Disadvantage of motorcycle patrol;
57
1. Used in fair weather only
2. More hazardous caused greater number of
accidents and risk on the part of patrol
officers usually quite serious.
G. BOAT AND AMPHIBIANS/BAY AND RIVER
PATROL
-Used to patrol the beaches, shorelines, and inland
waters to prevent smuggling of people and
contraband from coastal waters into inland harbors
areas.
Philippine setting;
Western Police District- introduced this type of patrol
and used in anti-smuggling operation.
H. AIR/HELICOPTER AND FIXED WING PATROL
- If the area to be served in large enough, air patrol
can actually be as economical as the automobile. The
more used it receives the lower is the cost per mile.
1929- NYPD AIR SERVICE DIVISION at Glen Curtis
Airport (la guardia field by using Savioia Marcheti
bird plane)
1930- Creation of the first airborne unit U.S. NYPD.
Fixed wing patrol-Ex. Cessna 172- developed by
word association Inc. in Southern California
- Referred to as “sky sentinel”
- Excellent used in patrolling long streets,
the highways for transportation of people and
equipment for search and rescue.
Advantages of fix wing:
1. It more economical than helicopter cost less
to operate.
 2. Can travel at airspeed as low as 35 miles per
hour
3. Can go at least 40 miles per hour faster than a
helicopter in cases of hot chase.
4. New type of muffler that causes the engine to
be unheard when flying at height of 100ft.
5. Can remain airborne for 7-8 hours.
Disadvantage of fix wing patrol;
1. Lack of landing fields and take off spot in
urban areas.
Helicopter patrol- Used for rescue, medical,
evacuation, traffic control, general patrol, criminal
apprehension, crime prevention and repression,
emergency transportation, surveillance and search.
Advantage of helicopter patrol
1. Being able to travel at lower speed, to hover
when necessary and to land in otherwise
accessible places because of its vertical takes
off and landing capabilities.
2. Maybe flown at lower attitudes
3. Can be used when marginal visibility
conditions exist.
Things to be consider in the utilization of
helicopter patrol;
1. Geography (number of sq. miles to be
covered)
2. Terrain
3. Rate and type of crime in that area
4. Number and type of people in the area.
1.FIXED SURVEILLANCE- In line with pro-
active patrol concept this is accomplished in
person with aid of television or stop frame
photography.
- Either the used of monitors at a central
location, it is possible to watch several
location all the same time and dispatch a field
unit to whichever location in need of
immediate response.
a. Television patrol
- Introduced in a comic strip “dicky tracy”
- First used in West Germany for traffic control
- This type of operation is only adaptable to
cities/areas containing great concentration of
people or traffic (as well as control of
prisoners in jail)
J. DECOY PATROL-A low visibility police patrol
aimed to protect VIPs key officials in the
government and the representatives of the
foreign states for any possible attack, assault or
assassination. This is on the forms of UN-
uniformed policemen staying behind the person
being protected to deter and apprehend possible
assassins.
PREPARATION FOR PATROL
1.General preparation; attitude preparation- It is the
first and foremost preparation for patrol duty
(positive attitude)
2.Pre-patrol preparation- Prior to go out in patrol, you
must be arm with knowledge and equipment, your
vehicle, partner, uniform, etc.
3.In field preparation- “Debriefing/ conference” with
the officer, whom you are relieving to assume
continuity in coverage of the jurisdiction.
4.Vehicle inspection- the emergency nature of police
works demands that the police vehicle be in the best
working condition ass possible.
5.Districts orientation tour- Once in the field take a
general orientation to the sights and sounds and the
normal pattern that presents.
FOOT PATROL TACTICS
58
A. Police should develop the friendly attitude
while on the foot patrol because they must
perform community relation task for the
department in addition to their usual patrol
duties.
B. Maintaining a free flow of pedestrian’s traffic
is just important as keeping vehicular traffic
movement.
C. When walking on beat, policeman should not
develop a route but see to it that their area is
given sufficient coverage during their tour of
duty.
D. The entire ON duty time of the policemen
belongs to the department and people in
general; it should be therefore spent
according.
E. The policemen on beat should walk his beat
from one place to another so that it will
appear to the observer that he is patrolling
the area and not just loitering.
F. When patrolling during nighttime, policemen
should always approach each building with
cautions, always assume the possibility that a
felon might be lurking inside.
G. Know the personalities in the patrol area
particularly the wanted persons, known
felons, drug users and pushers and the
business establishment which usually fail
prey to armed robbery or burglary.
H. In patrolling walk close to the curb during the
day and close the building at night. The
reason offered for this is that objective of
daytime patrol is to contact and to be seen by
as many people as possible and the objective
of night time foot patrol is to be seen as few
people as possible and to catch criminals
before they are being aware of police
presence.
I. Patrol officer should keep in mind that police
patrol means service as well as protection,
they should never hesitate therefore,
whenever practicable to offer their services
 in what ever may consistent with the purpose
of law enforcement.
VEHICLE PATROL TACTICS
A. When on vehicle patrol policemen should get
out of their car frequently in order to be
visible and accessible to the public they
should never used their car in isolating
themselves from patrol duties.
B. When conducting solo patrol, frequently
contact should be made with communication
officer or other field units. When working in
pair or more patrol officer should work as a
team for purpose of field contacts, issuance of
citations checking open doors and
responding to calls for assistance.
C. Operate the vehicle at normal speed,
consistent with traffic conditions; A patrol
officer is to no value when driving at high
speeds.
D. Patrol the districts so that the greatest
number of people, frequently turning corners
and covering the side streets as well as the
main thoroughfares will see the vehicle.
E. Whatever patrol patterns is being used,
patrollers should do it in irregular and
unpredictable manner.
F. The entire district should be given ample
attention with emphasis to those places that
require special attention because of high
crime frequency.
G. Always assumes the possibility that a crime
will be committed in the most illogical places
at the most unusual time of the day.
Plain clothes patrol
- This type assignment is particularly effective
for “saturation” coverage of high crime
areas. It provides extra coverage without
alarming the occupants with an unusual
number of police.
- For this kind of patrol, policemen should be thief burglaries on the premises or in neighboring
dresses to fit the accession and wear offices and factories
whatever clothing is the most of the day and c.Criminals often use coveralls and maintenance
fit the type of activity to be covered. uniforms as disguise to gain entry to buildings, and to
deceive police officers when they are confronted.
Checking Business Premises
Precautions
Part of the patrol officers’ regular work is 1. Approach the building quietly in your
checking of business premises. The following are the vehicle, ensuring that you do not
tips that could help the officers be effective on their squeal tire when turning corners or
coming to a stop.
jobs:
2. When you leave the police vehicle to
check premises, never travel more
Preparations
than two blocks on foot.
3. Take advantage of the darkness by
1.If your department doesn’t have a “store file” or
walking close to the building and
“merchant index,” create one for our personal use.
remaining in shadow.
The idea might catch on. Use it to record:
4. Don’t allow your keys, flashlight,
a.Name and address of business.
whistles or other equipment to dangle
b.Name address, and telephone number of key
loosely
holder (person to be notified in case of emergency)
5. Watch for unfamiliar vehicles.
c.Alternate key holder’s name and phone number
6. Take short, light steps
d.Usual business days hours of operation
7. Check the rear doors and windows
e.Name and phone number of security company, if
first.
any
8. Minimize the use of your flashlight.
f.Date last checked
Hold it out at army’s length to present
2.Learned the interior layouts of all stores in your
a false target to armed burglars
area which are likely burglary targets so that you will
9. Check vacant buildings for missing
know if something is out of place. A burglar may
children, vagrants, fugitive, etc.
place a partition or a display counter in front of a safe
to shield him from the view of passersby.
Checking a Building
3.Pay close attention:
1. Don’t check all the doors in any
a.the location and type of safes, cash register and
business district at one time. Cover a
alarm systems
portion, move to another area and
b.the routine habits of the staff
return to the original district to
c.opening and closing times
surprise any offenders who may have
d.the methods of locking windows and doors
moved in behind you.
3.Get to know the janitors and maintenance staff
2. Always look for the unusual and
working on business premises in your area.
out-of-place.
a.They know the building they work in intimately and
3. When checking doors, check the
can provide useful information to you.
hinges carefully before gasping the
b.Their legitimate presence in a building after
handle. If the door is partially latched
normal working hours offers them a cover to commit
59
 and pulled in the wrong direction, it
will lock; you will be unable to
determine if there has been an illegal
entry.
4. When checking window, attempt to
push them open and examine around
the edges for tool marks.
5. Check skylights if they are easily
accessible
6. Check sidewalk elevators and grating
for signs of tampering removal or
damage.
7. If the night or alley lights are not
illuminated and appear to have been
broken or tampered with, call for
assistance immediately before
checking further.
8. If safe lights are not lit or appear to
have been move, use craft or be
cautious. Often armed or experience
criminals turned it or move the safe
lights.
9. Inspect all possible points of entry,
including roofs and any location
where tunnels might have been dug.
Use your flashlight to check for fresh
pry marks around locks.
10. Be alert for the absence of animals
such as alley cats or dogs which you
normally expect to find in the area.
They may been scared off by a
prowler.
Checking Unsecured Premises
1. Call assistance, both as a backup and
your witness in the event or properly
is missing.
2. Conduct a thorough examination of
the premises.
3. Lock the door upon leaving
4. If your department has an official
“notice to secure premises” card,
leave it inside in a visible place.
5. Do not hang it on the outside door
handle or do not place it in a location
where it can be seen from outside.
6. If you cannot lock the door, contact
the owner.
7. Note the date and time of your
inspection in notebook and fill out
any departmental form which may be
required.
8. If the store has been burglarized,
notify your dispatcher and the owner
immediately
a. Remain at the scene until the owner
or his representative arrives.
b. Do not allow the owner to check the
premises himself
9. Avoid entering a room with a light
source to your rear. You will present
a silhouette in the darkness which will
make you an excellent target.
10.
Checking Suspicious Persons
Identification
1. Suspicious person can be identify by their:
a. Appearance
b. Conduct
c. Attitude
d. Presence in unusual or inappropriate
location
2. They are often seen loitering about stores,
warehouses, banks, service stations, bus
stations, schools, theaters, railroad stations,
and hotels for no readily apparent reason.
Checking Suspicious Situations
Warning Signs
1. Vehicles parked improperly or with motor
running outside banks, stores or other
60
business premises. They could be getaway
cars for crimes in progress.
2. Stacked boxes or ladders placed against the
side or rear of buildings
3. Store or business interiors in which large
pieces of furniture or display have been
moved. This may an attempt to conceal a
tunnel or safe-checking operation.
4. Banks or stores where people are seen
entering but not leaving. This could indicate a
holdup or hostage situation.
5. Parked vehicles in which persons are
apparently sleeping. These subjects may be
look-outs, missing or wanted persons seeking
shelter, or they may be attempting suicide.
6. Any other activity or situation which does not
reflect normal behavior or routine activity.
Criminal Subterfuges (trick employed to conceal
criminal act)
1. Criminals may try to lull (deceive) you into
thinking nothing is happening while a crime
is in progress.
2. To counteract such tactics:
a. Watch for reflection in store windows.
b. Check rearview mirror as you drive
past scene where criminal activity
may be taking place.
c. Pretend to write reports or notes
while keeping suspect in view.
3. Possible international distractions:
a. Faked fights or arguments which
erupt “spontaneously” as you
approach
b. Couples amorously intertwined in
parked cars (they may be lookouts)
c. Persons who encourage crowd to
gather by giving speeches
expressing outrageous political or
religious views.
 d. Any person who attempts to attract
police attention for no apparent
reason
4. In these situations, approach slowly and
deliberately, keeping all the parties involved
in view as long as possible.
5. Never rush blindly into the situation, Stay out
of reach of the subjects and make your
presence known by calling out.
6. Glance around the surrounding area for signs
of suspicious activity.
“Gut Feelings”
1. Do not ignore your so-called “gut feelings”
2. Hunches are often important message or
warnings which are based upon information
or experience recorded in your subconscious
mind.
3. Although they may not seem logical, your
hunches will often prove to be correct.
They should be acted upon-with discretion-in
appropriate circumstances.
Check On Public Hazard
1. Vacant buildings which juveniles may use as
a playground.
2. Ditches or open holes, particularly at
construction sites, where deep water as
accumulated.
3. New construction
4. Unfenced swimming pools
5. Abandoned wells or shafts
6. Old refrigerators with locks
7. utility poles which are mounted with cleats
(supports or rope) close to the ground
8. Unattended construction machinery
9. High scaffolding which can be reached by
ladders
10. Storage magazines for explosives. (Often
stored in steel boxes in open fields near
construction sites. Check to ensure that the
boxes locked and that all safety regulations
are being complied with)
11. Defective roadways, street lights or
sidewalks.
12. obstructed fire escapes
13. Broken water mains (can cause a roadway to
sink)
14. Leaking gas mains (danger of explosion)
15. Any object or situation which may present a
hazard to children
Courses of Action
1. Contact the owner of the property and the
appropriate government agencies
2. If the owner is reluctant to make
improvements because they are not required
by law or municipal regulations, point out the
severe consequences he would face in a
successful civil action for damages.
3. Warm youngsters who live or play in the
vicinity, and their parents, of the danger that
the hazard presents.
4. If necessary, request approval from your
superior to secure the area from public
access until action has been taken to
eliminate the hazard.
PATROL MANAGEMENT
Reactive patrol - It is the old system of police patrol
activity which consists of continuously driving around
the area of patrol waiting for something to happen
and to react accordingly in case something
happened.
Proactive Patrol - It is the more economical
alternative patrol system, which has an objective
approaches against criminality as much as
practicable, it addresses crime at its very root before
it is able developed into a felonious act.
61
Participative law enforcement - It is a system where
the citizenry and the police work together to reduce
crime, prevent juvenile delinquency and criminal
behavior, maintain the peace and reduce local
problems which are the mutual responsibility of the
police and the people.
Prevention is the objective aimed towards ways and
means to reduce the desire of the human being to
commit crime.
Repression, on the other hand is the act of
preventing the actual commission of crimes.
Repression is leveled on the prevention of the very
act itself which constitutes crimes.
Police Omnipresence -It is a crime repression
activity of the police which is accomplished by
making their presence known in such a way that even
if they are longer presented in certain location,
would be criminals would still have the impression
that they are still around and would therefore refrain
from committing an offense.
COPS - refers to Community Oriented Policing
System.
It is the deploying of policemen in police
blocks to provide police and public safety services. It
also involves the breaking down of large and
impersonal police departments into small units to
create as series of mini-police precincts, which are
responsive to smaller communities.
Objectives of PNP’s New COPS
1. To enhance police visibility in order to reach
out to the community to serve the resident a
policing out.
2. To improve police community relation to gain
public acceptance, build mutual respect and
trust and promote cooperation.
 3. To attend sustained and integrated police-
community participation, in crime prevention
and suspension.
Police block - This is the NCOB (New Cops on the
Block) Center of Command and Control its activities
and the police base from which the citizen may seek
assistance whether in person by radio or telephone.
“House Visitation” - It is a function of NCOB where
police officers on patrol visit every house and work
place to offer crime prevention advice and to
organize the neighborhood crime swatch groups.
“Street Questioning” method - It is a method
whereby policemen on patrol may interview within
the bounds of law suspicious personalities at random
in order to serve as a deterrent to those intended to
commit a crime.
Police social service of the PNP - It is a project that
concerns a wide variety of activities such ad physical
fitness and sports development and formation and
education and livelihood projects.
The following are some of the benevolent services
performed by the police patrol:
1. Midwife duties for childbirth
2. Render first aid to accident victims
3. Get relief assistance to disaster victim.
4. Mediate in family quarrels
5. Deliver of death message.
“Team Policing” - It is a grassroots approach
undertaken to bring the people and the police
together in a cooperative situation. Its distinguish
feature is the establishment of neighborhood crime
watch groups to encourage the people to report
crimes and to assume greater interest sand
responsibility in crime preventio0n and suspension.
Four kinds of inspection conducted by policemen b. Dispersal;
on patrol. c. Prevention of reentry or entry;
d. Arrest of law violators; and
1. building inspection, e. establishment priorities.
2. crime prevention follow-up,
3. house inspection and State the essential step that must be taken by the
4. miscellaneous inspection. police during a disaster response.
Patrol Hazard - This is a term used frequently to 1. Assess the nature and extend of the disaster
describe a specific condition or place that requires a or calamity.
2. Communicate information in the fastest
patrol officer’s special attention.
means available.
3. Administer urgently needed first aid and
Importance of Vehicle inspection for patrol
rescue activities.
4. Establish s command post.
The emergency nature of police work
5. Contain the area.
demands that the vehicle they use be in the best 6. Maintain open emergency lanes/streets.
condition as possible not only routine patrol driving 7. Evaluate survivors and people from danger
but also for pursuit operation. Hence, there is a need area.
for regular vehicle inspection. 8. Provide public information services.
9. Establish coordination with other government
agencies.
10. Provide access area for authorities.
Purpose of the District Orientation Tour in 11. Record the events.
preparing for patrol
Its purpose is to familiarize and orient a Keys to effective law enforcement at labor strikes
policeman about the pattern and characteristics of his 1. Exercise strict neutrally and maximum
patrol area before he conducts actual patrol. tolerance.
Police surveillance - It is the process of keeping 2. Initiate friendly dialogue between
under observation a person; a place or an object contending parties.
obtains information material to the solution of a case. 3. Seek cooperation from both sides.
It is also used to detect some form of criminal
behaviors.
Primary line units concerned with the
Purpose of the police at the scene of civil accomplishment of the police operational tasks
disturbance a. patrol,
During civil disturbances, the police; protect b. investigation,
lives and properties of everyone at the scene; c. traffic, vice, and j
d. juvenile patrol.
enforces the law; and restores peace and order.
Objectives of the police at the scene of unlawful Secondary or auxiliary units concerned with the
assemblies service task
a. Containment; a. records,
62
 b. property custodian,
c. jails,
d. crime laboratory services,
e. transportation, and
f. Communication.
Administrative or managerial units
a. personnel,
b. intelligence,
c. planning,
d. budgeting, and
e. training in community relation.
Participation of patrol in vice versa control
necessary
Patrol participation in vice control is
necessary in order to lessen the force needed in the
vice-division; to increase its efficiency; to conserve
time and energy of its members; and focus its
attention to the serious vice violations.
Different types of call response by the police
patrol
ROUTINE CALL – the mobile car is required to
observed all traffic laws and rules and does not
normally use its flashing lights and siren while on its
way to the scene. This includes when the police
responds to provide police car transportation.
Police force organized along semi-military lines
Due to the nature of work they perform, the
manner in which they are expected to perform their
duties, and their close adherence to a rigid chain of
command with specified assignment of duties and
responsibilities and functional job descriptions that
distinguish between the line and staff authority.
Distinction between the line and staff functions
Line functions - such as patrol and criminal
investigation are those that are directly responsible
for accomplishing police goals and objectives.
Staff, auxiliary or support functions - are
those that are designed solely to support and
enhance the operations of the units. They usually
include record, communications, personnel, training,
property maintenance and the like.
INTEGRATED PATROL SYSTEM (IPS) OF THE
PNP
- a concerted effort of the whole PNP
organization with other government agencies. The
purpose is for the effective performance of the
general role of the PNP which is to deliver the basic
public safety services to the community.
Three (3) Public Safety Bureaus
1. PNP- Philippines National Police
2. BFP- Bureau of Fire Protection
3. BJMP – Bureau of Jail Management and
Penology
Basic PNP Functions
Crime Prevention – including crime suppression;
Crime Solution – covers investigation of crimes; and
Traffic Management – covers direction and control,
and traffic accident investigation.
Crime Prevention – the basic police
function; the technique of eliminating the desire of
the people to commit crime. It can be done through
Police Visibility. Crime Deterrence is actually the
essence (real meaning) of Police visibility because:
1. In crime prevention, the psychological tool of
the police is VISIBILITY and OMNIPRESENCE;
and
2. Visibility and omnipresence is applied by the
police for the purpose of:
a. making their presence felt;
63
b. giving a feeling of security to law
abiding citizens; and
c. providing a feeling of fear to would
be offenders.
General Objective of Patrol Activity
The general objective of patrol activity is to
present the commission of crime by destroying the
opportunity of potential offenders thru constant and
alert patrolling.
With these, patrol officers should have a
detailed understanding of the anatomy of crime or
what makes up a criminal act. The anatomy of crime
states that: crime takes place if the three (3) elements
or ingredients are present at the same time and place
which are: Instrumentalities, Motive and Opportunity.
To explain further:
1. Instrumentality – the means or instrument
used in the commission of crime such as:
firearm; fan knife; poison (or any obnoxious
substance); Hammer; motor vehicle; a
document, etc.
2. Motive – the reason or cause why a person or
group of persons will perpetrate a crime or
the purpose of aim of doing something.
Examples are: economic gain; jealousness;
covetousness/greediness; revenge; gratify
desire; and win a competition.
3. Opportunity – it refers to the chance or twist
of fate; consist of the acts (whether by
omission or commission) by a person (the
victim) that enables another person or group
of persons (the offenders) to perpetrate the
crime. Opportunity is synonym with
carelessness, acts of indiscretion, and lack of
crime prevention or lack of consciousness on
the part of the victim. Illustrative examples
are:
a. Leaving one’s home or car
unattended for a long time.
b. Walking all alone in well-known
crime prone alley.
 c. Wearing expensive jewelries in slum
area.
d. Readily admitting a stranger to one’s
residence and the like.
Further, once crime took place, it can be
further explained by using the interaction of these
three (3) factors: Criminal Tendency, Total Situation,
and Resistance to Temptation. Criminal tendency is
innate to every human being. Total situation speaks
of the environmental circumstances. Resistance to
temptation could also be innate to a person which
could be attributed to his cultural and educational
upbringing.
Freak Crime Accident - There are situations when all
the three elements of the crime are present and
merged at the same time and the same place:
however the victim is not the intended one due to
error in persona (mistaken identity). This is called a
freak crime accident. Similarly, the public still need
to be protected against these kinds of crimes.
Police Visibility
Police visibility can be done in three (3) ways:
a.physical presence by being visible as police and
easy to locate police units;
b.patrolling scheme through mobile, integrated, and
widespread, supportive, and redundant coverage;
and
c.response which should be proper, adequate and
timely (ideal is 5 minutes response time).
Further, the Police Visibility Program of the PNP can
be accomplished thru the use of the Integrated Patrol
System (PNP-IPS). The PNP-IPS has the following point in the Police Station Desk; capable of
features: providing a visual IPS situation because it
shows the: area of responsibility (AOR); Real
➢ Pre-emptive Time Current Situation; and Real Time Status of
➢ Widespread and Forward the IPS. The importance’s of the
Deployment Situation/Locator Map (S/LM) are: for OTS (on
➢ Force Mixture the spot) assessment of the situation; and for
(complementary & OTS shifting of patrol forces to deal with a
supportive) situation.
➢ Cross checking of
Deployment 3. PCP – Led by a police commissioned officer
with a rank of Chief Inspector or
➢ Force Multiplier
➢ Supports the COPS Superintendent with a minimum of 30
personnel including the PCP Commander
divided in 3 shifts of 8-hours duty. More often,
Components of the IPS it is headed by Senior Police Officers SPOs)
due to lack of commissioned officers.
A. Fixed Components – These include the
following: Police Station HQ: Police B. Patrol Components – the patrol components of
the IPS are: Air Patrol; Line Beat Patrol; Mobile
Community Precincts (PCP); Traffic Post; and
Patrols; Motorcycle Patrol; Bicycle Patrol;
Visibility Posts – police outposts. Reaction Unit Patrol (SWAT); and Detective
Repressive Patrol.
1. Station Desk (SD) – plays the most
important role in the implementation of the Police Beats (PBs) – These are consist of any
police mission – to serve and protect the contiguous or adjacent area defined by identifiable
community. Further, it serves as the three boundaries within the AOR of a PCP where an officer
Cs of the police force: communication; can effectively patrol during his tour duty; it is an
coordinating; and center/command post. area that can be effectively patrolled on foot and
Being the 3 Cs of the police force, the SD police officers can respond to calls for police
serves as: assistance within a matter of minutes.
a. Nerve center of the IPS
b. Transmitter of the police station 1. Mobile Patrol (MP) – The SOPs are similar to
c. Police station’s administrative nerve the earlier discussions under the
center AUTOMOBILE TYPE of patrol. In cases where
d. Disaster Coordinating Council (DCC) a vehicle is stopped, the following 10 Rules
e. Showcase of the Station’s efficient in Stopping Vehicles should be applied:
operational capabilities. a. During daytime, select the widest portion
f. Monitoring assistance center during of the road where to stop a motorist.
elections and other political events b. Signal the motorist to pull closer to the
right side of the curb with the patrol car
Situation/Locator Map (w/ magnetic parked behind the violator’s vehicle.
equipment) – also called spot map; the key-
64
 c. Observe flow if traffic coming from behind
before opening the door and alighting
from the patrol car.
d. In issuing a citation, occupy the right side
of the vehicle using the hood to
accomplish the citation.
e. At nighttime, select a well-lighted place to
stop a motorist.
f. Never stand to do anything in front of a
stopped vehicle with its engine running
and its driver still at the vehicle.
g. Never stand to do anything between the
stopped vehicle and the patrol car if the
driver of the stopped vehicle is at the
wheel.
h. Never stand on the way of the door of the
stopped vehicle especially if he is
ordering a suspicious driver to get out of
the vehicle.
i. Never allow a person being interrogated
to stand on the firearm side.
j. Never allow an apprehended suspect to sit
aside the patrol car on the side where the
policeman’s f/a is tucked.
2. Detective Beat (DB) or Detective Beat
System (DBS) – DB is a contiguous area
where a team of police investigators is
assigned with a specific task of conducting
follow-up investigation to all complaints,
reports, referrals, and other request with the
end-in-view of full compliance and/or the
filling of case.
The Purpose of DBS is to provide the police
organizational and operational framework in truly
effecting mechanisms toward enhancing the
efficiency and effectiveness of the PNP’s
investigation capability.
Nature of DBS:
a. DB is concerned with the crime solution
angle while the PB has the primary role of
the crime prevention control.
b. DB may be different from PB but the
former complements the latter is serving
and protecting the community.
c. PB occupy a particular AOR while the
detectives have the primary
responsibility of 1st response in all cases
reported for investigation purposes.
d.
Composition of DBT
a. Assume primary responsibility or
jurisdiction in conducting CSO within
their AOR unless otherwise directed by
competent authorities for special cases
requiring intervention of specialized PNP
units.
b. Investigator/Detective is responsible for
case build-up, filing criminal charges,
arrest of offender, monitoring/tracking of
cases and court appearance.
c. Perform all other duties and function to
accomplish their assigned task.
Operational Guidelines for the conduct of Patrol
The following are the guidelines normally
observed by the PNP in the conduct of patrolling not
necessary under the IPS:
1. Pre-patrol (Pre-deployment phase)
a. Fall in information in ranks.
b. Roll-call-accounting of patrol
elements by the Patrol Commander.
65
c. Inspection of uniform, appearance
and equipment by the PC.
d. TI & E (Troop information and
education) and the dissemination of
instruction/orders by PC.
e. Reading of assignment of PBs by
Sarhento de Mesa or field duty officer
(FDO)
f. Issuance of equipment to Pos (Patrol
Officers) and PTs (Patrol Teams).
g. Report to higher headquarters (HQ)
by FDO.
2. Deployment Phase
a. Report to SD by the Pos (Patrollers)
b. Pos make patrol plan and follow
patrol procedures
c. Adopt the buddy-buddy system.
d. Make situation report on an hourly
basis upon reaching the end of their
line beat.
e. Report and/or record in the PSR
(patrol sheet report) all unusual
incidents
3. Post-Patrol (Post-deployment Phase)
a. Regrouping and formation
b. Accounting
c. Inspection
d. Debriefing/submission of DPR (daily
patrol report)
e. Recall of equipment issued
f. Dismissal by the PC
After which, the patrol commander collects
the DPR and submits it to the HQ for consolidation
and reference
C. Auxiliary Components – In the Philippines, the
police are the members of the PNP with two
(2) statutory characteristics:
1. National in scope and
2. Civilian in character
Who are the members of the Auxiliary Police (or
Auxiliary Components of the IPS?
1. Private Security Guards
2. Traffic Enforcers and Aides
3. Junior Police
4. Law Enforcement Services Cadets
5. Barangay Chairmans and Tanods (Barangay
Public Safety Officers (BPSO))
6. Civilian Volunteer Organizations (CVOs)
such as civilian volunteer radio
communications, and volunteer public utility
vehicles (PUV) drivers and Non Government
Organizations (NGOs) like Bantay Bayan,
Bayan Muna, etc.
POLICE COMMUNICATIONS
As pointed earlier, communications is
inseparable in police managements and
administration. In fact, Payton stated in his book,
Patrol Procedure that “Police communications are the
backbone of police tactics. Without proper
communications, the modern police department
would be lost.”
Historical Development of Police
Communications
Communications has always been a part of
law enforcement. Since man’s existence on this earth,
there has been a need for a system by which a man
could warm his fellowman of existing or pending
danger or send him messages.
In primitive times, the pounding of hollow
logs or the beating of animal skin drums was used
to convey a message. Later man discovered that
when he cut the tip from the horn of an animal and
blew through it, the sound carried for quite a
distance. We find its use mentioned throughout the
bible, and it was certainly the main warning
instrument used in the “Hue and Cry” even into the
twelfth century. In the orient, the brass gong and
finally the bell became the warning instrument.
In western civilization, until very recently, the
church bell, high in the steeple, not only called the
people to church services but also warned the town
or village of imminent dangers. The American Indian
used smoke signals, bird’s class and drums in his
effort to communicate and send out warnings.
I n the history of Anglo-American police
patrol, we find the horn replaced by the hand-bell
and rattle, and then finally by the metal whistle.
Significant dates and events in the development of
Police Communications
1877 – The Albany New York Police Department
installed five telephones in the mayor’s office
connected to precinct stations.
1880 – The Chicago Police Department installed the
first “Police Call Box” on City Street. Only officers
and “reputable citizens” were given keys to the
booth. Before this time a signal box was used that
would signal the emergency without voice
communications. Detroit made such installations in
1884 and Indianapolis in 1895.
1883 – The Detroit, Michigan Police Department
installed one police telephone. This was significant
when one considers the fact that there were only
seven telephones in the whole city at that time. In
1889, the department established a new division to
handle communications. It was called the Police
Signal Bureau.
A code wheel was installed in the box so that
when the beat man called in for his time check, it
would register at headquarters with the proper signal
for that call box. This insured that the beat officer was
in fact at the location from which he claimed to be
calling.
66
1916 – The New York Harbor Police installed spark
transmitters so they could communicate with their
police boats while they were patrolling the harbor.
1923 – The Pennsylvania State Police installed point-
to-point radio telegraph between their headquarters
and various post throughout the state.
1928 – On April 7, 1928, the world’s first workable
police radio system went on the air. The Detroit
Police Department went on the air as station W8FS.
The transmitter was installed on Belle isle in the
Detroit River, and the receiver was installed in
cruiser No. 5.
By 1927 the prohibition era had sent the
development of big time crime and gangsters were
making wide use of automobiles as “get-away cars”.
The police were under great pressure to control the
situation, but always arrived at the scene too late.
Commissioner Rutledge then persuaded Robert L.
Batts, a young radio technician and student at Purdue
University, to come to Detroit and work on a radio
receiver that would operate in a police car. It was
through this effort that the first workable police radio
set up was developed.
1929 – In September 1929, the Cleveland Police
Department went on the air with a few cars, and in
December of the same year, Indianapolis became the
third police department in the world to set up a
workable police radio system.
1930 – The Michigan State Police became the first
state police organization to go on the air in October
of 1930. It proved very effective in apprehending
bank robbers and other gangsters.
1931 – The first police motorcycle was equipped with
a radio by the Indianapolis Department in September
1931.
1933 – In March 1933, the Bayonne New Jersey Police “to enable the supervisor at headquarters to 2. Conduct a Survey- the survey must be done by a
Department went on the air with the first two-way, maintain contact with personnel under his TECHNICAL TEAM
mobile police radio system. command and to translate into action those a. Conduct pre-survey conference with the COP
measures necessary to protect the lives and and city/municipal officials to determine the:
1934 – By 1934, so many police departments have property of the community… Orders o funding
police radio systems that they were being as inter- originating at Headquarters are received at o type of system desired and
city communications for all types of general police various points in the community by the field o kind of support the system may need
messages. The Federal Communications Commission force and carried into execution.” b. The technical survey should be conducted to
had to intervene and establish strict control on police reveal:
radio communications, restricting non-emergency STEPS in planning a Police Communication o location of the precincts
messages to wire communications. System o limits/boundaries of areas to
1. Determine the Basic Need – is there a need for – be patrolled
1935 – Because the police departments did not a. portable two-way radio o Obstructions of radio and
understand the government restrictions, they (at first) b. radio transceivers in mobile patrol cars telephone transmission –
refused to obey them and police radiomen from all c. radios transceivers for police officers on foot interferences, frequency and
over the country banded together to form the APCO patrol. drifts and harmonics.
(Association of Police Communications Officers). (It d. telephone system
was later changed to the Association of Public-Safety - manual telephone exchange Questions that must be answered
Communications Officers). - semi-automatic telephone exchange during the technical survey include but not
- National Direct Dial (NDD) limited to:
1939 – Daniel E. Noble, of Connecticut College, - International Direct Dial (IDD) a. Is the radio and/or telephone
developed the first FM mobile tow-way transmitters traffic light or heavy?
and receivers for the Connecticut State Police. This Standard Modern Police Communication System b. Are 2-way radios needed?
was to bring about a change in the whole mobile Requirements: Modern Communication system c. Is duplex needed or simple is not
radio picture. (FM means Frequency Modulation). requires OPERATION CENTER or BAS and the enough?
communication room at the base contains the d. What is the degree of
1940 – Motorola President, Paul Galvin, saw, the following: maintenance needed for the
value of FM over AM for mobile police - Radio transceivers with control equipment?
communications, and hired Dan noble to develop panels and mikes d. Analysis of the survey
two-way FM for Motorola Police Radio Sales. One of - Telephone trunk lines and o Compatibility of the equipment
Nobles first developments was the remarkable switchboards and system
Differential Squelch Circuit, which demonstrated - Monitor receivers o Cost of the equipment:
greatly increased range in fringe areas. - Inter-city radio controls - Is there an available
- Paging and recall systems fund to support the
1945 – The Federal Communications Commission - Fax machines quality of the system
allocated frequencies for FM, and it became the - Alarm and indicator systems that is needed?
established system for police radio communications. - Intercoms - Is there an alternative if
- Closed circuit TV the first option can not
PLANNING A POLICE COMMUNICATION - Traffic control panel be realized?
SYSTEM -Computer with Land area network (LAN) and
modem (for internet access) 3. Draft the PCS and Propose the plan – The
Purpose of police communication system is: technical team prepares an output (summary
67
 report) of their survey and submits this to the pair of sidebands for each modulation frequency. Radio is the system of communication
local government. The report is actually a project This produces the complex variations that employing electromagnetic waves propagated
proposal or feasibility study which includes the emerge as speech or other sound in radio through space. Because of there varying
recommendations of the technical team such as: broadcasting, and in the alternations of light and characteristics, radio waves of different lengths are
4. Choice and Acceptance – The report of the darkness in television broadcasting. used for different purposes and are usually identified
surveying team (technical team) is then by their frequency.
transformed into a feasibility study. The B. RADIO TRANSMITTER-Essential components of 1.The shortest waves have the highest frequency, or
feasibility study is submitted to the Reviewing a radio transmitter include the ff. number of cycles per second;
Team, which is composed of the Local Chief 1. An oscillation generator for converting 2.The longest waves have the lowest frequency, or
Executive (LCE), the COP and other concerned commercial electric power into oscillations of fewest cycles per second
authorities in the locality, for evaluation and a predetermined radio frequency;
decision making. After evaluation, the reviewing 2. Amplifiers for increasing the intensity of RADIO WAVES
team must accept the proposal or choose an this oscillations while retaining the decide Radio waves range from a few kilohertz to
alternative form the options recommended by the frequency; and several gigahertz. Waves of visible light are much
surveying team. 3. A transducer for converting the information shorter. In a vacuum, all electromagnetic waves
5. Implement Action and Checklist – if the to be transmitted into a varying electrical travel at a uniform speed of about 300,000 km. (about
proposal or a corresponding alternative has been voltage proportional to each successive 186,000 mi) per second.
chosen and accepted by the reviewing team, the instantaneous intensity. For sound
technical team must then set priorities and transmission, a microphone is the transducer;
prepare a checklist of tasks to be performed. for picture transmission the transducer is a Radio Designation Abbr. Wavelength
6. Appointment of Action Official – In the checklist photoelectric device Frequency
of priorities, among the first tasks to be 8. Training of Technicians, Dispatchers, and
performed is determining the person who will be other users – Training of Technicians and other 3-30kHz Very low VLF 1000,000-
appointed as the Action Official – the coordinator Users of the system to be installed may be done frequency 10,000m
of the project of installing the planned PCS. thru formal schooling or thru on- the-job
7. Procurement of equipment – In the (OJT).technicians and Dispatchers should be
30-300kHz Low LF 10,000-
procurement of equipment that will be used for trained with the standard radio, telephone and
the PCS, bidding must be conducted as standard other communication procedures. They must be frequency 1,000m
operating procedure (SOP) .In bidding, the also updated with the laws, rules and regulations
proposed equipment to be bought and use is for public communication. 300-3,000 Medium MF 1,000-100m
advertised. At least 3 dealers or suppliers of such 9. Coordinating Center and Service Shop: An kHz frequency
needed articles respond by furnishing a office for the action official and communication
quotation (itemized price list) and then submits it engineers who will supervise the installation of 3-30 MHz High HF 100-1 m
to the action official. The action official has the the communication must be established. This is frequency
discretion to choose the dealer or supplier who important in order to have a formal setting of (short wave)
offers the lowest quotation. Procurement of decision making while the system is about to be
needed equipment is then awarded to the dealer installed or is already in the actual process of 30-3000 Very High VHF 10-1 m
chosen by the action official modulated to vary installation MHz frequency
the carrier wave. An amplitude-modulated signal 10. Checking, Alignment and Installation of
consists of the carrier frequency plus two Equipment 300-3,000 Ultrahigh UHF 1m -10 cm
sidebands resulting from the modulation.
MHz frequency
Frequency modulation produces more than one POLICE RADIO COMMUNICATION
68
3-30 GHz Superhigh SHF 10-1 cm
frequency
30-300GHz Extremely EHF 1 cm-1 mm
high
frequency
kHz = 1 kilohertz = 1,000 Hz
MHz = 1 megahertz = 1,000 kHz
GHz = 1 gigahertz = 1,000 MHz
A typical radio communication system has
two main components, a transmitter and a receiver.
The transmitter generates electrical oscillations at a
radio frequency called the carrier frequency. Either
the amplitude or the frequency itself may be the
option on the radio dial for AM or FM stations; the
signals are very different, so both kinds may not be
received simultaneously.
RADIO RECEIVER – The essential components of a
radio receiver are:
1. An antenna for receiving the electromagnetic
waves and converting them into electrical
oscillations;
2. Amplifiers for increasing the intensity of these
oscillations;
3. Demodulator or detection equipment for
demodulating;
4. A speaker for converting the impulses into
sound waves audible by the human ear (and
in television a picture tube for converting the
signal into visible light waves); and
5. In most radio receivers, oscillators to
generate radio-frequency was that can be
“mixed” with the incoming waves.
THE CONVENTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS AND
COMMAND CENTER
Most police communication centers operate
in a two-stage manual process. The following is the
SOP when a call is made to the police department.
1. The officer at a complaint desk position, first
determines the need for police action, and
then records the details on a card.
2. The card is then routed to dispatch console
where the operator has control of one or
more radio channels.
a. In the similar organizations, this usually
accomplished by handling the card from one person
to another.
b. In larger departments it is customary to
use a conveyer belt system between the two
oppositions.
3. The operator at the dispatch console then
establishes radio contact with the patrol
unit and relays the detail of the complaint.
4. The dispatcher also has the duty of
maintaining a record of the status of the
police vehicles under his control. If
information is needed from the records
division or from come computer source, the
operator must then phone this information.
THE POLICE RADIO DISPATCHES
Radio dispatcher is the personnel in a police
communication center or coordinating center task to
receive and transmit radio messages. Before a
policeman or a civilian can become a radio
dispatcher, he must be trained formally or through an
OJT. The dispatcher is also called radio coordinator
or radio operator
Benefits of employing a trained radio dispatcher:
1. Easy of understating of radio messages
2. Elimination of errors
3. Minimum communication time
4. Development of professional attitude in
sending and receiving messages
5. Inter-service cooperation
6. Conservation of equipment
69
Basic Qualifications of a Radio Dispatcher of
Operator
1. Ability to speak clearly and distinctly at all times
2. Ability to reduce rambling and disconnected
material into concise and accurate messages
3. Ability to think and act promptly in emergencies
4. Ability to analyze the situation accurately and to
take an effective course of action
5. Thorough understanding of the capacities of the
communication system
6. Adequate understanding of the technical operation
of his own system to allow intelligent reporting
of equipment failures
7. Physical and mental ability to work effectively
under all conditions
encountered
8. Knowledge of the rules and regulations applying to
dispatcher’s responsibilities
Voice Qualities of Effective Radio Dispatcher –
The three characteristics of a person’s voice are:
1. Loudness or volume – depends on the size of the
human voice box
2. Pitch or voice frequency – the level of the voice
which depends on the number of cycles per
second emitted by the speaker (high pitched is not
pleasant and clear in talking through a mike)
3. Timbre – the quality of a speech sound that comes
from its tone rather than its pitch or volume.
Voice Requirements of Effective Radio Dispatcher
1. Alert – give impression of alertness, being
enthusiastic and interested in the person calling
2. Pleasant – create a pleasant office image with voice
with a smile since pleasantness if contagious
3. Natural – use simple straightforward
language; avoid repetition of mechanical words or
phrases; avoid technical terms and slang
4. Distinct – speak clearly and distinctly; move the
lips, tongue and jaw freely; talk directly to the
telephone
5. Expressive – a well modulated voice 10. Performs other tasks assigned by the COP originator that his message has been
carries best over the mike; use normal or by his immediate superior received and is understood.
tone of voice; not too loud nor too soft;
vary the tones to bring out the meaning of POLICE RADIO (AND TELEPHONE) LANGUAGE
sentences and add color and vitality to The following are key terms that help you understand RADIO PHONETIC ALPHABETS
what you say. and observe proper radio and telephone procedures:
1. TRANSMISSION: A communication (formal LETTER MILITARY OTHER LAW
Duties and Responsibilities of Radio message) sent by one police unit and ENFORCEMENT
Dispatcher – While on duty, the police intended for reception by another police AGENCIES
dispatcher must strictly observe the unit.
A ALPHA ADAM
following: 2. ANSWER or FEEDBACK: A transmission
1. Sign in the log book made by a station called in response to the B BRAVO BOY
2. Check the working condition of the call received.
communication equipment 3. CALL SIGN: A call sign is a word, or a C CHARLIE CHARLES
3. Check all transmitted and received combination of words, intended for
messages to and from coordinating transmission by voice means, and it D DELTA DAVID
agencies in order to know and to be identifies the command, unit, or authority of
aware of what has happened during the the radio station. E ECHO EDWARD
past few hours. 4. NET CALL SIGN: The collective call sign that
F FOXTROT FRANK
4. Keep records and logs individually, represents all the radio stations operating
including all messages received and/or together on a particular radio net G GOLF GEORGE
transmitted to and from the (ROTACOM, DELTACOM, etc).
communication center or from within his 5. NET CONTROL STATION: A radio station H HOTEL HENRY
own communication system. appointed by higher authority to direct and
5. Keep abreast and stay alert to all incidents control the operation and flow of all traffic I INDIA IDA
happening with the communication handled on the radio net.
network 6. PROWORD: A pronounceable word or J JULIET JOHN
6. Handles radio traffic (messages) at all phrase that has been assigned a meaning to
times with meticulous care and accuracy speed up message handling on radio nets K KILO KING
7. Maintains log entries accurately and neatly that use radio and telephone.
L LIMA LINCOLN
on records of events, and maintains 7. ABBREVIATED PLAINEDRESS MESSAGE: A
neatness of his equipment and radio message that has certain elements of the M MIKE MAMA
room. message heading omitted for speed of
8. Coordinate with other communication handling. Anyone or all of the following N NOVEMBER NORA
agencies, offices and branches both of may be omitted: precedence, date, date-
local and national government in time of time group, and group count. O OSCAR OCEAN
emergencies such as serious 8. RECEIPT: A communication sent by receiving
disturbances, riots and national operator indicating that the message or P PAPA PAUL
calamities. other transmission has been satisfactorily
Q QUEBEC QUEEN
9. Coordinate with the fire department received.
requesting for immediate assistance in 9. ACKNOWLEDGMENT: A separate message R ROMEO ROBERT
the event of conflagration originated by the addressee to inform the
70
S SIERRA SAM A. Accuracy – it is the correctness and 10-5 Relay message
truthfulness of what is being 10-6 Busy/QRL
T TANGO TOM communicated. Inaccuracy oftentimes 10-7 Stop transmitting/QRT
causes miscommunication. The major 10-8 Monitor/Qrx
U UNIFROM UNION cause of inaccuracy is haste and 10-9 Repeat/One more time
impatience. The old saying that “haste 10-10 Over and out
V VICTOR VICTORY
makes waste” certainly applies to police 10-11 Inquire
W WHISKEY WILLIAM
communications. 10-12 Stand by
B. Brevity – This means using few words. 10-13 Road & weather condition
X XRAY XRAY Due to the expanding volume of radio 10-14 To pick up
traffic, it is essential that there be no 10-15 Answer/reply
Y YANKEE YOUNG necessary or repetitious words in the 10-16 Problem]
transmission. 10-17 Request/Please/Kindly
Z ZULU ZERO C. Courtesy – Courtesy refers to politeness 10-18 Record/Log
of the words being used in 10-19 Come back/Go back
WALKIE-TALKIES communication. As the old adage points 10-20 Location/QTH
The slang term for the two-way radio systems out, “Courtesy begets courtesy.” 10-21 Call by the telephone
developed by Motorola in the 1930’s designed for “Anger begets anger.” The practice of 10-22 Disregard/Cancel
home and police radios. Today, it is known as two- courtesy is actually a practice of good 10-23 Arrived at scene
way hand held radio (HHR) or radio transceiver. human relations. In radio 10-24 Follow-up/Make a report
Features and advantages of walkie-talkies: communication, courtesy can be shown: 10-25 Meeting/Eyeball
1. Portable and easy to operate; 1. by saying thank you (but this may 10-26 Subject/Victim/Casual ty
2. The foot patrolman can both send and take valuable air time); 10-27 Change frequency/Driver’s
receive messages quite easily; and 2. in the tone of the voice; License
3. Enables patrol officers to call for 3. by avoiding humorous comments 10-28 Plate No. of vehicle
immediate assistance. over the air when somebody “goofs up” 10-29 Verify/Observe/Check record
or 10-30 Water supply/H2O
TECHNIQUES IN RADIO COMMUNICATION 4. by avoiding “jamming up” when 10-31 Approval/Result
Though radio communication is not complex, police officers are on the air. 10-32 Armed/Man with gun
there are still problems that are usually encountered 10-33 Emergency/Urgent
by police operatives. One problem is the massive use Clarity, the Second “C” 10-34 Crime in progress/Riot
of the airwave by both police and civilian “C” in radio communications also stands for 10-35 Red alert
communication groups. To reduce or eliminates “Clarity” which is often mentioned in report writing 10-36 Correct time/QRT
these problems, basically, police operatives should and note taking but it is also an essential in police 10-37 Eat food/Reload/Fill fuel
be familiar with proper use of the equipment, and to communications. 10-38 Local police/Military
adhere to the basic rules of radio procedure. 10-39 Hurry up/Use light- siren
TENCODES 10-40 Roving/Silent monitoring/QRU
One of the best ways to insure the proper use 10-0 Caution/Safe tracking 10-41 Operatives/Members
of air time is to follow the ABC’s of radio 10-1 Hard copy 10-42 Disengage/Cancel
transmission stated by Payton 10-2 Clear copy 10-43 Information
10-3 Slow down 10-44 Regards
THE ABC’S OF RADIO TRANSMISSION 10-4 Roger/Positive/QSL 10-45 Vehicle/Mobile
71
10-46 Assist motorist 10-87 Female/YL 10-128 Operator
10-47 Crew needed 10-88 Limaline No. 10-129 Son/Daughter
10-48 Excavation/Road repairs 10-89 Person found 10-130 Secretary
10-49 Traffic situation 10-90 Robbery/Theft 10-131 Extension
10-50 State complete details 10-91 Unnecessary use of radio 10-132 Driver
10-51 Wrecker needed 10-92 Anti-narcotics case 10-133 Wife/XYL
10-52 Ambulance needed 10-93 Address 10-134 National Officer
10-53 Heavy traffic/Road block 10-94 Drug racing 10-135 Regional officer/Group
10-54 Investigation needed 10-95 Operation 10-136 NTC
10-55 Electric power 10-96 Visitor/Jammer/QR 10-137 NBI clearance
10-56 Intoxicated person/Alcoholic 10-97 Radio check/QSA 10-138 Police clearance
behavior 10-98 Call sign/QRA 10-139 Necessary papers
10-57 Hit and run 10-99 Home/House 10-140 I.D.
10-58 To direct road traffic 10-100 Office 10-141 Organization base
10-59 Convey/Companion 10-101 Statement of account 10-142 Thank you/TNX
10-60 Hospital 10-102 Treasurer/Collection 10-143 I love you/QLY
10-61 Doctors/Medical Team 10-103 Money 10-144 Welcome
10-62 Medicines 10-104 Change
10-63 Assignments completed frequency/QSY Clarity can best obtained through two main areas:
10-64 Message 10-105 Reactivated/Mechanic 1. Semantics – What is semantics? Webster
10-65 Assignment tasks 10-106 Modulation lists it as: “significant meaning, the science
10-66 Necessary/Needed 10-107 Antenna of meanings as contrasted with phonetics,
10-67 Male/YM 10-108 Radio license the science of sounds.”
10-68 Deliver/Dispatch 10-109 Uniform/Attire Proper semantics would be the
10-69 Received message 10-110 Equipment transference of thoughts or ideas between
10-70 Fire alarm 10-111 Radio (portable) people through communication without a
10-71 Nature of fire 10-112 Base radio loss or perversion of the original meaning
10-72 Demo/Rally 10-113 Booster and intent.
10-73 Fire trucks 10-114 Power supply a. Two ways to improve semantics.
10-74 Negative 10-115 Battery pack Learn through experience what the
10-75 Permission 10-116 Repeater/Phone patch most common errors are. If an
10-76 Proceed to 10-117 Computer officer tries to communicate with
10-77 Time of arrival 10-118 Rotator someone and finds that he is
10-78 Assistance needed 10-119 Coax cable misunderstood or has trouble
10-79 Dead person 10-120 Gun shot/Stab wound getting the idea over to him, he can
10-80 Kidnapping case 10-121 Heart attack give the problem some thought
10-81 Carnapping case 10-122 CVA (stroke) with the intent of finding a better
10-82 Reservation prepare 10-123 Fracture way of expressing it next time. He
10-83 Vehicle found 10-124 OB emergency can talk to others and find out how
10-84 Estimated time of departure 10-125 Hypertension they would express this thought, or
10-85 Will be late 10-126 IN patient just listen to others when they try to
10-86 Missing person 10-127 OUT patient
72
 communicate in the same or similar
situations.
b. Think before Talking – An officer
should always put his mind in gear
before releasing the clutch of his
tongue. Too many officers grab for
the mike, press the transmitter
button then think of what they want
to say. This is quite easy to do when
they think of what they want to say.
This is quite easy to do when the
situation involves an urgent matter.
The important thing to remember is
that the message be received and
UNDERSTOOD, or the time made
precious by the emergency would
be wasted.
2. Phonetics – Phonetics is the “science of
sounds” – the understanding of a
communication through the proper sounding
of words. There are three main areas of
phonetics that hinder good police
communications.
a. Radio interference and distortion
–This can be corrected to some
extent by the proper adjusting of
the “Squelch” control. Changing
position and having the message
relayed by other units can also
help.
b. Poor Pronunciation – An officer
should not transmit over the air if he
has gum in his mouth or is eating
his lunch. If it is an emergency, he
must spit them out for the sake
clarity. He should face the mike at
all times, and talk about two inches
from the mike. If he is speeding
with the siren going, he may cut out
the noise by placing the mike on
the side of his throat and then
transmitting his message.
c. Similar Sounding words and
letters – There are many words in
English language that have similar
sound.
Phonetics May be Improved Through the
Following:
1. Not speaking too fast or slovenly (carelessly).
Talk with the mouth open. Mouth the words.
2. Use the phonetic alphabet when the word is
likely to cause trouble. Unusual surnames should
be spelled phonetically.
3. Use Similes (description). This can be done by
saying that something is like something else. The
name WOOD could be pronounced “WOOD as in
FIREWOOD”. Associations can also be used, e.g.
“GREEN like GRASS”. “A” as in “apple”, “B” as in
“boy”, etc.
OTHER AIDS TO BETTER COMMUNICATION
In addition, Payton recommends the
following for better radio (two-way transceiver)
communications:
1. Don’t assume anything – Matters are not all
of a serious nature. Make sure that it is plainly
stated, and all the important facts are
included.
2. Don’t make extra long transmissions.
Taking breathing spells may allow someone
cut in (break in) in case of emergency. It will
be easier on the person who is copying
(receiving the message).
3. Don’t hang your hat on the mike. Sometimes
the weight of the hat will depress the mike
button, and two things can result:
Interference with other message
transmissions; and everything the officers
says to his partner will be broadcast.
4. Don’t shout into the mike. If the voice
transmissions are weak, turn up the volume.
73
5. Pronounce the words slowly and distinctly.
– The normal speaking rate is between 40 and
60 words per minute.
6. Proper use of the microphone. Keep the
microphone about 2-3 inches away from the
mouth in order to maintain a proper
modulation level, and speak across the face
of the microphone.
7. Keep your voice as emotionless as
possible. This is because the monotone voice
has the greatest intelligibility.
8. Be impersonal. A police radio station is not
licensed for person-to-person
communication, so personal names should
not be used. Refer to the person being called
by his radio call number or car number.
9. Use the Standard Phonetic Alphabet. Since
numbers are often confused when spoken
over the radio, use the Standard Phonetic
Alphabet for Numerals developed by the Bell
Telephone Company. Always use “zero”
instead of “oh” for the number “0”
1 – Wun 4 – Fo-wer 7 –
Sev – ven 0 – Zero (never oh)
2 – too 5 – Fie-yiv 8 – ate
3 – Thuh-ree 6 – siks 9 – Nie-yen
POLICE PLANNING
DEFINITION OF TERMS
PLAN- an organized schedule of sequence by
methodical activities intended to attain a goal and
objectives for the accomplishment of mission and
objectives. It is a document containing the means and
ways of attaining a goal or objectives.
GOAL- a general statement of intention and typically
with time horizon of a year or more.
PLANNING
- It is the process of determining the problem
of the organization and coming up with the
 proposed resolutions and finishing the best
solution.
- Planning is the conceptual idea of doing
something to attain a goal or objective.
- It is also the process of combining all aspects
of the department for the realistic anticipation
of future problem and the analysis of the
strategy and its details.
- It is an act determining policies and
guidelines for police activities, operations
and providing controls for such activities in
the department.
- The used of rational design or pattern for all
departmental undertaking rather than relying
on chance.
POLICE PLANNING
- It is an attempt by the administration to locate
anticipated resources to met anticipated
service demands.
- The systematic and orderly determination of
facts and events as basis for policy
formulation and decisions affecting law
enforcement management.
- It may refer to the attempt of the police
administrators to allocate anticipated
resources to meet the potential demands of
law enforcement.
POLICE OPERTIONAL PLANNING- it is the
process of formulating coordinated sequence of
methodical activities and allocation of resources to
line unit in order that it can attain mandated
objectives or mission.
OBJECTIVE- a specific commitment to achieve a
measurable result with in specific period of time.
STRATEGY- it is design, method plan to attain a
stated goal or objectives.
TACTICS- it is a specific design, method or course of
action to attain a particular objective in consonance
with strategy.
PROCEDURE- a sequence of activity to reach
appoint or to attain what is desired.
POLICY- a products of prudence or wisdom in the
management of human affairs.
GUIDELINESS- a rule of action for the rank and file
to show them how they are expected to obtain the
said effects.
POLICE VISION- a statement on how the
organization will look like in the future. It is a picture
of what an organization wants to be.
OBJECTIVES OF POLICE PLANING
1. To increase the chances of success by
focusing on the results and not on
objectives.
2. To force analytical thinking in the
evaluation of alternatives for better
decision.
3. To established a frame work for
decision making consistent with the
goal of the organization.
4. To orient people to action instead of
reaction.
5. To modify the day today operation,
management to further focused
operation/management.
6. To help or avoid crisis and provide
decision making flexibility
7. To provide basic for measuring
original accomplishment or
individual performance.
8. To increase employees/personnel
involvement and improve
communication.
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANNING/LEVEL OR
HIERACHY OF PLANNING
1. Strategic or long range planning
a. it relates to plans which are strategic or long
range in application it determines the
original goals and strategy.
b. It refers to the process of determining how to
pursue the organization long-term goal with
the resources expected to be available.
74
2. Intermediate or medium range planning
a. relates to plan that determines quantity and
quality of efforts and accomplishment. Its
application has a medium duration.
b. It refers to the determining the contributions
on efforts that submits to make or provide
with allocated resources.
3. Operational short range planning
a. refers to the productions of plants, which
determines the schedule of special activity
and our applicable from one week to less
than a year duration.
b. It refers to the process of determining how
specific task can be best accomplished on
time with available allocated resources.
CHARACTERSTCS OF GOOD PLANS
1. goals and objectives are clearly defined
2. It is written with single simplicity; directness
and clarity.
3. It is flexible
4. the plant is possibly attainable
5. It provides standards of operation
6. It emphasized on the economy in terms of
reasons needed for implementation
7. It anticipates effect for future operation.
FACTOR AFFECTING PLANNING
1.Condition-Political atmosphere
- Public opinion
- ideological aspiration
-peace and order
- national community and ethics
- behavior and discipline
2. Time
- Time available to establish a plan before putting
it into effort
- time when the plans effect
- time interval that must be provide in plans
- time allotted for revising or modifying a plan
3. Resources
 4. Skills and attitude of operators or the
managers
5.social and political environment
6. Physical facilities
7. Collection and analysis of data
Advantage in planning
a. competition
b. relief from pressure
c. coordination
Responsibility in planning- Broad policy planning
shall be the responsibility by the PNP director
general. The commander at each level of command,
however, shall be responsible for establishing
internal operation policies to achieve the objective
and mission of the national police in his particular
units. This requires a clear definition of work to be
done which is to do it and how it will be done. He
shall responsible for;
a. P-lanning
b. O-rganizing
c. S-taffing
d. D-irecting
e. CO-ordinating and controlling
f. R-eporting
g. B-udgetting
For the aforementioned unit within the
existing policies and available resources. For
maximum effectiveness, he shall be
responsible for the technical operation of the
unit and the management of its personnel.
TYPES OF PLAN
To properly achieve the administrative
planning responsibility within the unit, the
commander shall develop units’ plan relating
to: (a) Policies or procedures (b)Tactics (c)
operations (d) extra office activities (e)
management PTOEM.
A.POLICY OR PROCEDURAL PLANS-SOP
shall be plan to guide members and routine
and fields operation in some special
operation in accordance with the following
procedures;
1. Field procedures-procedures
intented to be use in all situation of all
kinds should be outlined as guide to
officers and men in the fields.
Procedures that relate to reporting,
dispatching, raids arrest, toping
suspicious person, receiving
complaint. Touring beat,and the
investigation of crimes and so
on.Examples; the use of physical
force and clubs restraining device,
fire tear gas, night stick and the like
in dealing with group of individuals.
2. Headquarters procedure- to be
included in this procedure are the
duties of the dispatchers, jailer, patrol
and other personnel concern, which
maybe reflected in the duty manual.
Procedures that involved coordinated
action on the activity of the several
officers; However, shall
established separately as in case of
using telephone for local/ long
distance calls, the radio teletype and
other similar devices.
3. Special Operating Procedures- it
includes the operation of the special
units charged with the searching and
preserving of physical evidence in
the crime scene and accident scene
the control of licenses, dissemination
of information about wanted persons,
inspection of the PNP headquarters
and the like.
75
B. TACTICAL PLANS- These are the
procedures in coping with specific
situation of known location included this
category are plans for dealing with an
attack against buildings with alarm
system and an attack against the PNP
headquarters by lawless elements. Plans
shall like wise be made for blocked and
jail emergencies, community activities
such as parade, religious assembly,
contest and the like.
C. OPERATIONAL; PLANS- This are
plan for the operations of special division
like the patrol, traffic, vice control,
juvenile control, investigation divisions.
Operational plans shall be prepared
accomplish each and every primary
police task. Example; patrol activities
should be planned, the force must be
distributed among the shift and
territoriality among bits, and proportion
to the need of the service. Special details
must plan to meet an expected needs and
be
so on. Likewise in crime prevention
program, traffic, juvenile and vice control
campaign must be planned and
assignments made to assure the
accomplishments of the police purpose in
meeting both average and irregular
needs. Plans for operations of special
divisions consist of two types namely;
1. Those designated to met every day,
year around needs, which are regular
operating program of the divisions and;
2. Those designed to meet unusual need;
the result of intermittent an expected
variation in activity that depend their
attention.
Types of operational plans:
1. Regular operating programs- The
operating division or units shall have
specific plans to meet current needs.
The manpower should be distributed
throughout the hour of operation and
throughout the area of the
jurisdiction in proportion to needs.
Assignment scheduled should be
prepared that integrates such factors
as relief day, lunch period and hour
nature and location of regular works.
Plan shall also assure suitable
supervision, which become difficult
when regular assignment is
interrupted to deal with those short
time periodic needs.
2. Meeting unusual needs- the
unusual needs may arise from any
field of police activity and is nearly
always not in detective, vice and
juvenile divisions by temporary re-
adjustment of regular assignments.
For example; sudden upsurge of
robberies may result in case loads
beyond the capacity of the detective
assigned, Some of this case may be
assigned to other detectives with less
workload.
D. EXTRA OFFICE PLANS- The active
interest and participation of individual
citizen is so vital to the success of the
PNP programs that the international
police shall continuously seeks to
motivate, promote and maintain an active
public concern in its affair. Plan shall be
made organize the community to assist in
the accomplishment of objectives in field
of traffic control, organized crimes and
juvenile crimes.
E. MANAGEMENT PLAN- management
plan should map out in advance all
operations involved in the organization,
management of personnel and material
in the procurement and disbursement of
money such as the following;
1. Budget planning- Present the money
needs for personnel, equipment and
capital investments must be estimated
and plans for supporting budgets
request that must be made if needed
appropriation are obtained.
2. Accounting procedures- shall be
established an expenditure report shall
be provided to assist in making
administrative decisions and in holding
expenditures within the appropriations
3.Specification of the purchasing
procedures- shall be drawn in supplies
and purchasing procedures shall
likewise to establish to ensure the
checking of deliveries against
specifications of orders.
4. Personnel- Procedures shall establish
to assure the carrying out of personnel
program and allocation of personnel
among the components organizations
unit in proportion to needs.
76
5. Organization- A basic organization
plan of command shall be made and
posted for the guidance of the force. For
the organization to be meaningful, it shall
be accompanied by a duty manual,
which shall define relationship between
the component units in terms of specific
responsibilities. The duty manual should
incorporate rules and regulations.
STEPS IN PLANNING
a. Frame of reference- This shall be
based in a careful; view of the matter
relating to the situation for which
plans are being developed. Opinions
or an idea of person who may speaks
with authority on the subjects and
view of the police commander other
government officials and other
professional shall be considered.
b. Clarifying the problems- this calls to
the identification of the problems,
understanding both records and its
possible solutions. A situation must
exist for which something must be
done.
c. Collection of all pertinent facts-
attempt should be made to develop a
plan and all facts relating to it have
been gathered. In the series of
robberies, on cases in file shall be
carefully reviewed the modus
operandi of suspect, types of victims
such as other information as may
necessary.
d. Developing alternative plans- in the
initial phases of plan development
several alternatives measure shall
appear to be in logical orders.
 e. Analyzing the facts- after all data
have been gathered a careful analysis
and evaluation shall be made. Only
such as facts as may have relevance
shall be considered.
f. Selecting the most appropriate
alternatives- A careful consideration
of all facts usually leads to the
selection of the best alternative
proposal.
g. Selling the plan- A plan to be
effectively carried out should be
done by a concerned person at the
appropriate level of the plan
development.
h. Evaluating the effectiveness of the
plan- the result of the plan should be
determined. This is necessary in
order to know whether the plan was
correct, which phase was poorly
implemented and whether additional
planning maybe necessary. Also the
effect of the executed plan on other
operations and on total police
operations shall be determined.
PNP Doctrine- it is the authoritative statement of
principles prescribing the proper acquisition used
and employment of PNP human materials resources
to achieved planned objective. This is largely based
on knowledge gained through time- honored police
experienced, studies, analysis and test.
CATEGORIES OF POLICE DOCTRINE
a. Primary doctrine
1. Fundamental doctrine- It is the basic principle in
planning, Organization management of the PNP in
support of the overall pursuits of the PNP vision,
mission and strategic action plan of the attainment of
the national objective.
2. Operational doctrine- These are the principles
and rules governing the planning, organization,
direction and employment of the PNP forces in the
accomplishment of basic security operational mission
in the maintenance of peace and order, crime
prevention and suppression, internal security and
public safety operations.
3. Functional doctrine- this provides guidelines for
the specialized activities of the PNP in the broad field
of interest such as personnel intelligence, operations,
logistics, planning, etc.
b. Secondary doctrine
1. Complimentary doctrine- Doctrine formulated
jointly by two or more bureau in order to affects a
certain operation with regards to the public safety
and peace and order. This essentially involves the
participation of the other bureaus such as; BJMP, BFP,
PPSC, NBI and other law enforcement agencies.
2. Ethical doctrine- It defines the fundamental
principle governing the rules of conduct, attitude,
behavior and ethical norm in the PNP.
Basis of police doctrine- Police doctrines are
principally based on the vision and the mission of
police organization
Samples of Doctrines:
1. Doctrine of command responsibility
2. Doctrine of maximum tolerance
3. Doctrine of chain of command
4. Doctrine of public accountability
77
5. Doctrine of transparency
6. Doctrine of poisonous tree
CIVILIANIZATION
1. Legal mandate;
a. Sec. VI art. XVI of the Philippine
constitution. The state shall establish a
single police force, which is national in scope
and civilian in character.
b. Sec. 2 par. 2 of R.A 6975- the police shall be
organized trained and equipped primarily for
the performance of police functions. It is
national in scope and civilian in character
shall be paramount, no element of the police
shall be military nor shall active members of
the AFP thereof occupying any position.
c. Sec. 72 R.A. 8551- transitory provision on
civilianization shall be effected within three
years after the affectivity of the said activity.
2. Civil- observing social properties, decently,
polite not rude of or pertaining to civil or
every day life. Distinguished from
ecclesiastical, naval, military. It is pertaining
to citizens or to the state or the relation
between citizens as regulated by law.
3. Civilian- One who follows the pursuit of civil
life.
4. Military- pertaining to armed or to welfare,
martial or warlike. Do or carried on by force
or arms by a body of armed men or soldier.
5. Militarism- A system emphasizing and
aggrandizing the military spirit and the need
for constant preparation of war.
6. Police- Body of civil officers, especially in a
city. Organized under the authority to
maintain order or enforce the law. The whole
system of the internal regulation of the state
or the local Government of a city or town
maintains and enforces the law and orders,
prevent, detects or deals with crime.
IV. POLICE OPERATIONS AND TACTICS
1. General emergency plan- a set of procedures to
meet varying degree of emergency while at the same
time providing continuous police coverage of areas
not affected by the emergency.
2. Specific emergency plan- A subtype of plan to
meet unusual needs which is similar to GEP but it is
basically designed to an specific situation.
3. Insurgency- A condition resulting from a revolt or
insurrection against a constituted authority or
government which falls short or into civil war.
4. Crowd- a large number of people gathered or
collected together who think and act as one.
5. Mob- A crowd whose members, under the
stimulus of excitement or agitation, lost their sense of
reasons and respect for law and commit or are ready
to commit lawless acts.
6. Riot- A tumultuous or violent disturbance of peace
by an unlawful assembly of persons, with intent to
help one another in the execution of some private
enterprise to the terror of the public.
7. Subversion- action designed to undermine the
military, economic, psychological, moral or political
strength of a regime
8. Rally- a group which belongs from the members
of crowd or mob who are fighting for their own belief
and ideology.
9. Demonstration- A condition/ assemblance of
person’s exhibition sympathy with against a cause,
social condition or movement. There is an organized
leadership and observing discipline or they are non-
violent.
Psychological influences on how the crowd
emerged or exist
Stage 1.
a. Milling and consultation
b. Situation is converted into one in there is a
problem and no answer.
Stage 2
a. crowd members lost their individuality and
new functions as a single unit
b. Agitations and opportunist have taken their
positions to get results
c. Cohesion of the units is complete
Stage 3
a. Mob is created where rationally is lost and all
members are just waiting about the vent that
will take place
b. Situation maybe on the full control of the
leaders
Types of crowd;
1. Casual crowd- Who happened to be present
on a certain place but not organizes.
2. Cohesive crowd- they are assembled for
some specific purpose
3. Expressive crowd- expressing themselves,
held together for some common purposes,
held same attitude.
4. Aggressive crowd- has also strong
leadership, doing aggressive action.
Raid- it is a small scale attack focused on surprised
invasion of building and area primarily for the
purpose of obtaining evidence in “Inflagrante
delicto”.
Three objectives of raids;
1. Effects or make the arrest
2. To obtain evidence of illegal activities by
surprising the offenders in “Inflagrante
delicto”
3. To recover stolen properties
Factors affecting the success or effectiveness of a
raid;
1. Size of a raiding team- 7 to 12 is an ideal
number
2. The speed and quickness
3. Elements of surprise
78
4. Superiority of arms
5. Simplicity of plans and operations
Qualifications of raiding teams;
1. Leadership
2. Tactfulness
3. A good judgment-discretion
4. Coolness and stability
5. Steady nerve and mental stability
6. Experience
7. Discipline
Composition of a raiding team;
1. The raid commander
2. The assistant raid commander
3. Covering or surrounding party
4. Going in detail or surrounding party
5. In charged of rendering in operative the
subjects vehicle, if any
6. In charge of raiding vehicle
7. The recorder who should keep an accurate
record of the rigid gathered evidence, make
inventory and shall testify in court
8. The photographer
Elements of Raid;
1. Mission
2. Reconnaissance- preliminary survey of
enemy held area
3. Plan
4. Instruction- orientation, briefing, debriefing
5. Orders
6. Execution
Don’ts in the conduct of raid;
1. Don’t take unnecessary chances
2. Don’t under estimate the ability or courage of
criminal elements
3. Don’t raid when not properly prepared
4. Don’t endanger the life of the bystander
5. Don’t use raiders not well acquainted with
one another
 6. Don’t forget gas mask when employing tear
gas or any chemical agent
7. Don’t unnecessary rough with the subject
8. Don’t shot to kill unless very important/
imperative
9. Don’t touch the evidence unless seen by
witness or owner of the premise
VIP Security- types of security given to a higher
person of the state. The people authorize to be given
special protection.
Objectives of protection extended to VIP’s
1. Avoid VIP from embarrassment
2. Piracy of principal must be protected
3. Protective measures is not an interference
but defensive.
Rules on VIP Security
1. Anticipate- to recognize what is possible
threat and anticipate that there is always
danger
2. To recognize- to observe that the danger
already exist
3. To neutralize- to control or to prevent the
danger
4. To investigate- investigate the existence of a
threat and the overt acts of a people
Principles of VIP security
1. Sound off- means using signals, passwords,
alertness
2. To cover principal
3. Evacuate principal
4. To neutralize threat
Riot control (Civic disturbance control)
Military principle;
1. Training
2. Organization
3. Tactical deployment
Police principle
1. Show of force
2. Employment of formation
3. Seizure of mob leader
4. Non- lethal weapon
5. Fire power, if absolutely necessary
6. Training
POLICE INTELLIGENCE AND SECRET SERVICE
INTRODUCTION
A Chinese philosopher, SUN TZU, once said,
“THE ART OF WAR”
“If you know your enemy and know yourself, you
need not fear the results of hundred battles. If you
know yourself but not the enemy, for every
victory, you will suffer defeat. If you know neither
yourself nor the enemy, you are fool who will
meet defeat in every battle.”
This old saying or principle is true in the
Military or Police Intelligence. This has a standing
and valid statement, the validity of which does not
change through the passing of time. The need of
intelligence is always important and apparent as the
study of history continues.
I. HISTORY OF INTELLIGENCE
1. MOSES- one of the first recorded formalized
intelligence efforts, with format can be found
in the Holy Bible (Numbers 13:17). The
scriptures also named the 12 intelligence
agents that all those men were from the tribes
of Israel and Moses sent them to spy out the
land of Canaan, and said unto them (Numbers
13:17-20).
2. RAHAB-the harlot of Jericho (Joshua 2:1-21)
who sheltered and concealed the agents of
Israel, she made a covenant with the agents
and duper their pursuers. She was not only an
impromptu confederate of immense value for
the Jewish leader of far distant day, it also
79
established a plot-pattern which is still of
periodic relief to motion picture produces.
3. DELILAH-she was an impromptu intelligence
agent of the Philistines. She allowed Philistine
spies to hide in her house (Judges 16:9) and
used her feminity to gain intelligence from a
powerful enemy.
4. SUN TZU-the East was ahead of the West in
the raft of intelligence in 400 B.C., rejecting
the oracles and the sees. He takes a more
practical view. According to him, what is
called foreknowledge cannot be elicited from
spirits, or from gods, or from analogy with
past events nor from calculations. He wrote,
“It must be obtained from men who knew
the enemy situation.”
OTHER GREAT MEN WHO USED INTELLIGENCE
IN HISTORY
1. ALEXANDER THE GREAT-while
marching in Asia, he investigated all the
letters and the detection of the
malcontents whether the legitimate
cause were exposed. Hints and rumors
of disaffection growing among his allies
and mercenaries. He sought the truth
and got it by simplest expedient. He
devised the first “letter sorting” and
opening to obtain information.
2. SERTORIUS, QUINTUS-the Roman
general in Spain and possessor of the
white fawn that tried to follow Polyaenus,
everywhere. The fawn was used as
intelligence agent. His intelligence
agents credited their information to the
supernatural power of animals.
3. AKBAR-The “Great Mogul” and
sagacious master of Hindustan who
employed more than four thousand
agents for the sole purpose of bringing
him the truth that his throne might rest
upon him.
4. GENGHIS KHAN-he used intelligence
to conquer China and invade Cathy. He
instructed his generals to send spies and
used prisoners as sources of information.
The leader of the so-called Mongol
conquerors and used effective
propaganda by spreading rumors of
Mongol terror.
5. FREDERICK THE GREAT-the father of
organized military espionage. He
established rules for obtaining and using
every grade of spy or intelligence and
divided his agents into four classes:
a. Common spies-recruited among
poor folk, glad to earn small sum or to
accommodate a military officer.
b. Double spies-the low informers and
unreliable renegades of value chiefly
in spreading false information to the
enemy.
c. Spies of consequences-couriers and
noblemen, staff officers, and kindred
conspirators, invariably requiring
substantial bribe or bait.
d. Persons who are forced to undertake
espionage against their will.
6. HANNIBAL-the Carthaginian General
considered as one of the brilliant
military strategist. He developed an
effective intelligence system for 15 years
in Rome. He roamed around the city
often disguising as beggar to gather
first-hand information. Hannibal’s
invasion of Italy, his brilliant and futile
raid in history, gained him many
victories and nearly bled Rome to death.
7. GAIUS JULIUS CAESAR-during his time,
his staff of each legion includes ten
“speculators” who served as
information-collecting agency. The
“speculators” were the first intelligence
personnel to appear definitely in a
military organization.
8. KARL SCHULMEISTER-Napoleon’s
military secret service and Napoleon’s
eyes. He began his career in offensive
espionage. Under a cover role, he was
able to infiltrate the Austrian General
Staff and studied the characters of the
Generals. His royal foes selected to
defeat him.
9. WASHINGTON, GEORGE-conspirators
under oath abound in the history of
every nation. He, as grand master,
mobilized the free masons of the
colonies at the outbreak of the American
war of independence.
10. FRANCIS WALSHINGHAM OF
ENGLAND-under Queen Elizabeth, he
organized the first National Intelligence
Service. He employed spies on the staff
of the Admiral in Command of the
Spanish Army and able to obtain
information regarding Spanish Army as
to their ships, equipment, forces and
stores. He protected Queen Elizabeth I
from countless assassins.
11. RICHELIEU (France)-he introduced the
network of covert collectors who
transmitted prompt and accurate
information to Paris regarding the
activities of the rebels and dissidents of
the kingdom.
12. LOUIS XIV-he systematized political
policy, continuous surveillance, postal
censorship and military organization.
13. NAPOLEON BONAPARTE-believes
that “One spy in the night place is worth
20,000 men in the field.” He also
organized two bureaus of interest.
a. Bureau of Intelligence-consolidated
all incoming information regarding
the enemy for presentation to the
80
emperor and to obtain information as
desired.
b. Topographic Bureau-maintained a
large map which covers the latest
information regarding both enemy
and friendly forces.
14. WILHELM STIEBER-he incorporated
intelligence in the General Staff Support
System. He contributed to the science of
Military Censorship and organized
Military Propaganda. He worked as a
census taker and developed an informal
format in the gathering of data.
15. ALFRED REDL-one of the most brilliant
intelligence agents, though he was
homosexual. Chief of the Austro-
Hungarian secret service and at the
same time agent of the Russia (convicted
of treason in 1913-he committed
suicide). His treason led to death of
500,000 agents and soldiers combine in
his 13 years espionage episode.
16. BRAHMA KAUTILYA-in ancient India,
he overthrow the Nanda Dynasty and
established the first Mayuryan King in
the Indian throne. He recommended to
his king that “for the ruler to succeed,
the ruler should strike at his enemy’s
weak points by means of spies.”
17. JOSEPH FOUCHE OF FRANCE- French
statesman, known as the “Father of
Modern Political Espionage. He was
born on May 21, 1759, near Nantes.
Trained for the priesthood, he never
took orders, instead becoming a
teacher. He rose to become the most
feared and respected intelligence
director in French history. Created a
network of agent and his assistance
founded the modern system of spying on
spies, which later known as “counter
espionage.”
 18. Gen. Willian Donovan- in June 1942,
Pres. Roosevelt established the Office of
Strategic Services (OSS) with Donovan as in-
charge. The OSS was builder of a central
intelligence system and considered as
forerunner of the CIA. The exploits of the OSS
became legendary in WWII.
19. Edward I, King of England- in 1725, he
organized a systematic police system called
“Watch and Ward” and by Royal
Proclamation, the profession “State Informer”
was created in 1734 enjoining all informers
to expose criminal activities and be
compensated.
20. Joseph Petrosino- he was a member of
the New York Police Department in early
1900 and was the head of the Italian Squad.
Through extensive intelligence network, he is
credited to smash the Black Society.
INTELLIGENCE AND THE WORLD WAR
A. World War 1
1. 1900- Europe power4s developed
modern staff systems and place
intelligence on the same level with
personnel, operations and logistics.
Intelligence then functioned in time of
peace and war. Intelligence during this
period, concentrated on information ab
out armed forces of the enemy and their
capabilities.
2. Aircraftwas introduced as a tool of
conducting aerial reconnaissance.
3. Wireless Telegraph was used wherein
Codes and Ciphers were applied.
4. Army Intelligence rapidly expanded
during this period.
5. “Agent Provocateur”- was employed
by the purpose of internal security and
political repression. Spying was always
the specialty of the Russians.
6. German Intelligence- gained a high
reputation for offensive effectiveness
through Europe but declined at the
outset of the war.
7. British Intelligence- succeeded greatly
by means of censorship and its Code
Room combined with skillful use of
covert agents.
8. US expanded their Naval Intelligence
wherein Domestic
Counterintelligence became a 4. US Intelligence- in 1941, the US
principal activity.
B. US THREE (3) BRANCHES OF INTELLIGENCE
1. Positive Branch- functions of collecting,
evaluating and disseminating
intelligence. Prepare situation estimate
and translate documents.
2. Negative Branch- counterintelligence
functions: investigate disloyalty and
sedition; investigate graft and fraud in
organization.
3. Geographic Branch- produces maps,
photographs and terrain studies.
Sections: Administration, Collection by
attaches and troop codes, and ciphers
C.INTELLIGENCEDURING WORLD WAR II
1. German Intelligence- started the war
with the world’s best organized
intelligence service through advance
preparation of intelligence accompanied
by troop movement.
2. Japanese Intelligence- failed because it
was not provided with sufficient number
of trained personnel to assemble and
evaluate the mass of materials which
were collected although Japanese
81
Intelligence was involved in short war
and defensive in nature.
3. British Intelligence- its achievement
was in delay in the use of German V-
Bomb. The operation was conducted
with the OSS and through penetration
and technical intelligence; they
discovered Peenemunde, the V@
guided missile research project of Nazi
Germany.
Strategic service was established to
research and analyze military, political
and economic information as it affected
the security of the country.
D. POST-WAR PERIOD: THE SUPERPOWER
1.SOVIET INTELLIGENCE
a.Soviet Intelligence system- described as
omnipotent and omnipresent for its vast intricate
organization involving millions of people.
b.Soviet Counterintelligence- “Iron Curtain”- no
one may cross the borders of USSR without being
detected-all communications are rigidly controlled.
Its contribution to modern intelligence was the
dissemination of false information designed to
mislead and confused opponents and prospective
victims.
c.GRU-Military Intelligence Organization- it is
concerned with political events and economic
conditions and also collects information for
intelligence purposes all over the world. It directs
foreign sabotage and maintains network of agents in
military and special agents.
d.MGB-Military Intelligence &The Ministry of
State Security-formerly NKGB, was concerned on
political espionage and propaganda abroad and for
the control of espionage activities of foreign
communist countries.
e.KGB-it resumed the former function of the old
MGB. It is now the official secret police agency of the
Soviet Union in charge of the state security
(Commission of State Security).
KomissijaGosudartssyennojBezopasnosti or
KomitetGosudartsvennoyBezopasnosti.
2.BRITISH INTELLIGENCE SYSTEM
a.British Military Intel (MID)- it is divided into 20
different departmenst.
b.MI5-devoted to counterespionage and security.
c.Special Branch of Scotland Yard-it is charged
with guarding the Royal family and important British
Officials and visiting foreign dignitaries.
3.FRENCH INTELLIGENCE
a.SDECE De Documentation Exterieure Et Der
Contre Espionage (SDECE-Foreign Intelligence
and Counterintelligence Service)-this is under the
Prime Minister
b.Gen. Charles De Gauelle-he set up the Bureau
Central Renseignements et d’ Action (BCRA Cenral
Office for Intelligence and Action) in London in 1940.
It is an expansion of the Service De Reassignments
(SR-Intelligence Service) which is a part of the old
Renzieme Bureau (Second Bureau) of the French
General Staff.
c.SDECE-concerned on Strategic and
Counterintelligence.
d.SureteNationale-part of French Intelligence
Service
4.GERMAN INTELLIGENCE
Red Gestapo-the security service organized by East
Germany to combat the covert activities of the West
Germany Group when it was still divided by the
Berlin Walls.
D.GREAT BETRAYALS
1.Judith Coplon-a political analyst of the Department
of Justice who was accused of taking unlawful
possession of government documents and spying for
a foreign power (Russia). She was well-known
communist activist.
2.Dr. Emil Julius Klaus Fuchs-he was accused of
releasing American Atomic Secrets to the Soviet in
1945 and British in 1947. He detailed knowledge of
the construction of Atomic Bombs.
3.Ernst Hilding Anderson-in 1951, a Royal Navy
provided military secrets to a foreign power and was
found guilty and sentenced to life imprisonment.
II. NATURE OF INTELLIGENCE FUNCTIONS
A. DEFINITON (L- intelligentiappr. of intelligere:
understand)
1. General Definition (Webster)
a. It is the capacity of understanding and for
other forms of adaptive intellect of
behavior, the mind in operation.
b. Or it refsers to knowledge of an event,
circumstances, etc., received or imparted
the gathering or distribution of
information; or the staff of persons
engaged in obtaining such information.
2. Microsoft Encarta Dictionary
a. Ability to think and learn: the ability to
learn facts and skills and apply them,
especially when this ability is highly
developed.
b. Secret information: information about
secret plans or activities, especially those
of foreign governments, the armed
forces, business enemies, or criminals.
c. Gathering of secret information: the
collection of secret military or political
information.
d. People gathering secret information:
an organization that gathers information
about the secret plans or activities of an
adversary or potential adversary and the
people involved in gathering such
information.
3. Government Survey Reorganization
Commission Task Force
82
• intelligence means the collection,
processing, collation,, interpretation,
evaluation and dissemination of
information with reference to national
security.
4. Dictionary of Military Terminologies
• intelligence is the end product resulting
from the collection, evaluation, analysis,
integration of all available information
which may have immediate or potential
significance to the development and
execution of plans, policies and
programs.
• Or intelligence may be defined as the
product resulting from the collecting of
information concerning an actual and
potential situation and condition relating
to foreign activities to foreign or enemy
held areas.
B. OBJECTIVE OF INTELLIGENCE
• to ensure rational and timely decision-
making.
C. GENERAL FUNCTIONS OF INTELLIGENCE
1. The collection or procurement of information.
2. The evaluation of the information which then
become intelligence.
3. The dissemination of intelligence to those who
need it.
D. OTHER FUNCTIONS OF INTELLIGENCE
1. To serve all branches of government.
2. To procure and obtain political, economic,
psychological, sociological, military and other
information, which may bear upon national
interest and which had been collected by the
different governmental departmental and
agencies.
3. To collect, when necessary, supplemental
information whether at its own instance or at
 the request of any governmental agency and
official from other various sources.
4. To integrate, analyze, process and
disseminate to authorized governmental
agencies and officials in the form of report or
strategic interpretative studies.
E. PRINCIPLES OF INTELLIGENCE
1. CRITERIA
a. Universality of application- it should
apply to as many phases and aspects of
intelligence as possible.
b. It must be broad- it should truly be a
general rule.
c. It must be important (indeed essential to
intelligence)- if a guide is truly important
and essential, then its violations should
bring its own immediate penalties.
d. They must not be mutually exclusive,
instead each should complement the
other.
2. PRINCIPLES OF INTELLIGENCE
a. The principle of Objective (thoroughly
and carefully planned) - in intelligence,
only the well-guided succeed. It is a basic
intelligence concept that there should be
unity between knowledge and action.
b. The principle of interdependence-
intelligence is artificially subdivided into
component elements to insure complete
coverage, eliminate duplication and to
reduce the overall task or manageable
size.
c. The principle of Continuity- it is
necessary that coverage be continuous so
that the shape of what happens today
could be studied in the light of what
happened before, which in turn would
enable us to predict the shape of things to
come.
d. Principle of communication-
intelligence adequate to their needs must
be communicated to all the decision-
makers in manner that they will
understand and from that will permit its
most effective use.
e. The principle of usefulness-intelligence
is useless if it remains in the minds, or in
the files of its collectors or its producers.
The story must be told and it must be told
well.
f. The principle of flexibility (ability to
adapt to new situation) - intelligence
must have the ability to change or be
changed according to circumstances.
Hence, alternative must be drawn.
g. The principle of selection (fits the
needs of the commander) - in
intelligence, is should be essential and
pertinent to the purpose at hand.
h. The principle of timeliness-
intelligence must be communicated to the
decision maker at the appropriate time to
permit its most effective use.
i. The principle of security (requires
constant security measures) - security
is achieved by the measures which
intelligence takes to protect and preserve
the integrity of its activities.
F. INTELLIGENCE AXIOMS
1. Crucial to national security
2. Essential to all operations
3. Responsible to all government operations
4. Intelligence of the government should be prior
to that of the enemy
H. FOUR “I’s” OF INTELLIGENCE
1. Interest- a feeling of attraction
2. Integrity- honestly complete
3. Ingenuity- original truth, in accordance of law
83
4. Intelligence- capacity to know what is right or
what is wrong
I. PRINCIPAL AREAS OF INTEREST IN
INTELLIGENCE
1. Military- offensive and defensive tactics, war
plans, strategic concepts and tactical
principles, organizations, installations,
industrial lease, armed forces, command
structure, command personnel, material,
tactics, morale etc.
2. General- topographical and hydrographic
characteristics, historical backgrounds.
3. Diplomatic- foreign policies, alliances,
diplomatic establishment, foreign service
personnel technique of conducting foreign
relations, etc.
4. Political- ideology, traditions, institutions,
personalities, area of friction.
5. Economic- financial, commercial, industrial,
mining and agriculture.
6. Communication and transportation-
telephones, telegraphs, wireless, railways,
shipping, automobiles and truck, highways,
aviation, ownership, policies, organization,
personnel, etc.
7. Social- nationality structure, classes and
caste, historical factors, census, personal
aspects, characteristics and mentality of
people forces, social legislation, radio
television, press, motion picture, etc.
8. Intelligence community- method and
personnel of completing intelligence system.
III. CATEGORIES OF INTELLIGENCE
1. National Intelligence- the total product of
intelligence developed by all governmental
agencies that cover the broad aspects of
National Security and National Policy.
2. Department Intelligence- intelligence used by
the various departments for the advancement of
each departments/agencies.
3. Military Intelligence- this is used in the
preparation of military policies, plans and
programs. It includes strategic and line
intelligence.
4. Police intelligence- it refers to evaluated and
interpreted information concerning organized
crime and other major police problems.
5. Technical intelligence- this concerns foreign
technical developments, which have a practical
military application and the physical
characteristics, performance, capabilities, and
limitations of material and installation used by
and for foreign.
A. MILITARY INTELLIGENCE
• It refers to evaluated and interpreted
information concerning an actual or possible
enemy or the operations including weather
and terrain, together with the conclusions
drawn there from.
Three (3) Broad Fields of Military
Intelligence
1. STRATEGIC INTELLIGENCE- it is usually
descriptive in nature, accumulation of physical
description of personalities, modus operandi, etc. It
does not have immediate operation value but rather
long range that may become relevant to future
police/military operations.
Components of Strategic Intelligence
1. Political Intelligence
2. Economic Intelligence
3. Transportation and Communication Intelligence
4. Sociological Intelligence- deals with the
demographic and psychological aspects of
groups of people such (a) population and
manpower; (b) characteristics of the people; and
(c) Education
5. Biographical Intelligence- deals with the
individual personalities having actual possession
of power.
6. Armed Force Intelligence
7. Geographical Intelligence- deals with the 2. Perceptive about people- good judge of
progress of research and development as it character.
affects the economic and military potential of a 3. Flexibility/adaptability- able to work with
nation. others, even under difficult conditions.
8. Scientific Intelligence- deals with the advances in 4. Can distinguish between fact and fiction;
science and technology and its effects to the between essentials and non-essentials.
affairs of the government. 5. Possess inquisitiveness or an inquiring mind.
6. Have ingenuity- able to improvise, looks for
2. LINE Intelligence (Combat/Tactical) - required solutions (resourceful)
by the commander to provide for planning and 7. Observant and alert
conduct of tactical operation. 8. Able to express ideas clearly, briefly and
What are the intelligence information to be interestingly
determined? (PWET) 9. Discipline- susceptibility to operational
1. People control; good sense of time
2. Weather 10. Patient and hardworking
3. Enemey 11. Good memory
12. Integrity
4. Terrain
13. Objectivity- should not be carried away by
prejudice or bias.
COUNTER Intelligence- covers the activity denoted
14. Discreet-knows when to keep mouth; does
and destroying the effectiveness of hostile foreign
not brag about what he knows or important
activities to the operation of information against
connections.
espionage, and sabotage.
C. INTELLIGENCE COMMUNITY
It is also known as negative intelligence it is
1. FACTORS IN CREATING INTELLIGENCE UNIT
an activity dedicated to the concealment and
1. Size of the community
protection of one’s own information from the
2. Extent of organized crime in the community
adversaries intelligence operation. It is a defensive
3. Probable frequency and seriousness of the
function of intelligence.
activity of civil disturbances.
B. THE INTELLIGENCE OFFICER
4. Breaches of integrity on the part of any
1. Attributes Common to Intelligence Directors
member of the force or unit.
1. Exceptional organizing ability
2. LOCAL INTELLIGENCE
2. Ability for intelligence work
ORGANIZATION/UNITS-intelligence community
3. Flair for intelligence work
refers to the agencies or organization of the
4. Prodigious memory
government which has intelligence interest and
5. A sense of history
responsibilities.
6. Broad knowledge of many subjects, to
D. POLICE INTELLIGENCE
include complex technical matters
It is defined as the end product resulting from
7. Insatiable curiosity
the collections, evaluation, analysis, integration and
8. What might be called “intellectual
interpretation of all available information regarding
ruthlessness and cold cynicism.”
the activities of criminal and other law violators for
2. Desirable Qualities of an Intelligence Officer
the purpose of affecting their arrest, obtaining of
1. Knowledge ability-intelligence and mental
capacity
84
evidence, and forestalling their plans to commit
crime.
Intelligence has herein referred to means
Police Intelligence distinguished from military
intelligence. The deviation is more on the approach
rather than principle. The fundamental intelligence
cycle is still the same, by that used in police or
military intelligence.
Cardinal Principle in Police Intelligence
The cardinal principle in police intelligence
at all levels is the proper, economical and most
productive use of personnel and equipment
employed and/or utilized in planning the collection
of information and dissemination of intelligence.
Three Major Categories or Types of Police
Intelligence
1. STRATEGIC INTELLIGENCE- primarily
long-range in nature with little or no
immediate practical value.
2. COUNTER-INTELLIGENCE- defending of
the organization against its criminal enemies.
(Defensive effort)
3. LINE INTELLIGENCE- of an immediate
nature and necessary for more effective police
planning and operations. (Offensive effort)
Main Objectives (Police Intel)
1. To detect criminal activities.
2. To discover the identities of person/s who
frequently visits an establishment and to
determine their relationship.
3. To discover the habits of a person who lives
in or frequents in the place.
4. To obtain evidence of a crime or to prevent
the commission of a crime.
5. Basis for search warrant.
6. To apprehend persons in the commission of
an offense.
Purposes of Police Intelligence
1. Check the condition of the community
relating to crime, vice, juvenile delinquency
and indications of subversion and
insurgency.
2. Determine through CI applicants on matters
pertaining to personnel security, physical
security and document security of the police
organization.
3. Determine the follow-up leads and helps in
the solution of individual criminal cases.
4. Identify criminal elements and other law
breakers as well as their associates.
5. Check the quality and effectiveness of the
operation of the police (PNP) forces.
6. Check on the security conditions of PNP
personnel, funds, equipment and materials.
7. Help in crime control prevention.
8. Serve as a tool of management for planning
and organizational employment purposes.
Immediate Areas of Interest in Police Intelligence
1. Crime prone community relating to vices,
juvenile delinquency, crime and indication of
subversion and insurgency.
2. All matters pertaining to personnel security,
physical security, and classified documents.
3. Cases under follow-up
4. Personalities directly or indirectly involved in
criminal activities.
5. Personalities, places, events involved in
insurgency and subversion.
6. Police operation regarding its effectiveness
and quality.
7. Police personnel, its equipment, funds and
materials.
8. Aspect of crime prevention and control.
9. Aspect of management for planning and
organizational improvement.
General Activities in Police Intelligence
1. Strategic Intelligence
2. Line Intelligence
3. National Intelligence- the integrated
product of intelligence developed by all the
governmental branches, departments
85
concerning the broad aspect of national
security and policy. It is concerned to more
than one department or agency and it is not
produced by single entity and used to
coordinate all the activities of the government
in developing and executing integrated and
national policies and plans.
4. Counter-Intelligence
5. Undercover Work
Functional Classification of Police Intelligence
1. Criminal Intelligence- any knowledge
essential to the prevention of crimes and
investigation, arrest, and prosecution of
criminal offenders.
2. Internal Security Intelligence- any
knowledge essential to the maintenance of
peace and order.
3. Public Safety Intelligence- it refers to any
knowledge essential to ensure the protection
of lives and properties.
E. CONCEPTS IN POLICE INTELLIGENCE
1. Information- raw data or unevaluated
material of every description derived from
observation, communication, reports, rumors,
imagination, and other sources from which
intelligence is produced; Any knowledge,
data, news, opinions, or the like transmitted
from a person to another; and/or any
communicated knowledge by others
obtaining by personal study, investigation,
research, analysis, observation.
2. Intelligence information- any information
gathered or received which is of intelligence
interest.
3. Knowledge (synonymous to intelligence)
1. Information in mind: general awareness
or possession of information, facts, ideas,
truth, or principles.
 2. Specific information: clear awareness or
explicit information, for example, of a
situation or fact
3. All that can be known: all the information,
facts, truth, and principles learned
throughout time
4. Organization- the intelligence personnel or
the intelligence unit.
5. Source- where the information is obtained.
This can be from: an informant; a syndicate;
an intelligence broker; double agent; and/or
another police agency that has the needed
information on file.
F. GENERAL CLASSIFICATION OF SOURCES OF
INFORMATION
1. Open Sources- The information may be
obtained from news files, libraries,
magazines, books, or non-classified files in
certain public or private offices. 99% of the
information collected is coming from the
open sources. This can be from: Enemy
activity; POW; Civilians; Captured
Documents; Map; Weather Forecast; studies,
researches, report etc.; Agencies; Informants
and informers.
2. Close Sources- They can be located inside a
building, safe, or vaults, 1% of all information
is from close sources. This can be from:
Surveillance; Casing; Elicitation; Surreptitious
entry; Employment of technical means
(bugging and tapping); Tactical
interrogation; Observation and description.
IV. INTELLIGENCE CYCLE
A. Planning and Supervision
1. The IO must have thorough knowledge or the
available sources of information, the
collecting agencies and type of information
the latter can provide.
2. He must understand the operations of the
command in order to provide the particular
intelligence requirements.
3. He must have thorough knowledge of the
tactics, organizations, and characteristics of
the enemy.
4. He must be especially competent in the fields
of acquisition of operations.
5. He should also have a basic understanding of
the weather elements and their influence
upon personnel, material and terrain.
B. Five Successive Steps Comprising the
Collection Planning
1. Determination of the intelligence
requirements
2. Determination of priority, which will be
assigned, to these intelligence requirements.
3. Balancing the intelligence requirements with
available collection agencies to arrive at
equitable allocation of collection efforts.
4. Selecting the collecting agency to be
employed and the issuance of collecting
directives.
5. Supervision and inspection to ensure that the
collection directives are carried out properly.
C. Mission- the focal point of the intelligence
operation; a particular task given to a person or
group to carry out; or one which should be
accomplished.
D. Phases of the Intelligence Cycle
Phase 1- Directing Collection Effort- In this phase,
the Intel Staff Officer or Unit commander determines
the required or important information relevant to
mission.
Then these requirements will be distributed to the
different collection agencies by direction or by
request.
1. Determination of Intelligence requirements.
Categories of intelligence requirements in
relation to use:
86
a. Executive- intelligence required by the
executive, governmental and military
commanders.
b. Contributory- intelligence required to
complete the staff process: make staff plans
and estimates that contribute to the decision
and policy making.
c. Operational- additional intelligence required
in planning and carrying out effectively the
decisions and policy require implementation.
d. Collateral- higher or adjacent echelons of the
government or military establishment may
require information.
Categories of intelligence requirements by type:
a. Basic- general reference materials for use in
the planning regarding the enemies, or
potential enemies, capabilities- static
comprehensive.
b. Current- temporary in nature and narrower in
scope. Information required to scope with the
current objectives.
c. Estimative Intelligence- determines the future
courses of action; required in the executives
to plan future military operations and
policies.
2. Determination of the essential elements of
information (EEI)
EEI is an item of intelligence or information of
the characteristics of the area of operations
and the enemy, which the commander feels
needed before he can reasonably arrive at a
decision
3. Establishment of priorities ( P.I.R’s)
This is necessary to decide which items of
information are more important- a system of
priority is needed; critical importance and
lesser importance; EEI- highest priority
intelligence requirements; indicates the
intelligence requirements essential to
planning.
Selection of collecting Agencies:
 a. List all available sources; exploitation of
collecting agencies;
b. Collection will be assigned in accordance with
capabilities;
c. Collection directives prepared once the
proper collecting agency has been selected to
exploit a particular source;
d. Collection directives do not limit the activities
of the collecting agency; and
e. Criteria for the selection of collecting agency-
suitability; capability, confirmation, timeliness
and balance.
Purpose of the collection plan:
a. To ensure logical and orderly analysis of the
intelligence requirements.
b. To establish a workable collection scheme
based on the analysis of the intelligence
requirement.
c. To provide definite and precise directives to
collecting agencies.
d. To avoid possibility of omission, conflict, or
unnecessary duplication of collecting effort.
Phase 2- Collecting the information- In this phase,
the collecting agency determines what specific
information is to be collected, by whom and for
whom. After the collecting activity is carried out, the
collected information is then submitted for
processing.
1. Steps in the Collection of Information:
a. Determines collecting agencies
b. Send order or request
c. Supervise collection efforts
d. Use of tools or techniques in collection
e. Ensure timely collection
2. Criteria of Collecting Agencies/Units:
a. Capability
b. Balance/Suitability
c. Multiplicity
3. Two Basic Collection Strategies:
a. Resource Integration- one agent
b. Agent Mixed Redundancy- 3 or more
agents assessing for the same What to consider in collection planning?
assignment a.Personality- persons involve; suspects, social
4. Collecting Agencies: status, etc.
a. Government agencies/offices- variety b.Organization- group committing the crime:
of information KuratongBaleleng, Pentagon, etc.
b. Intelligence units/agencies c.Resources/Equipment- used in committing the
c. Organizations crime: fire arm, transportation facilities, etc.
5. Who is tasked to collect information? d.Activity- modus operandi/crime activities, tim of
a. Intelligence officers/agents- regular the attack, victims, places of attack , etc.
members
b. Civilian agents- informers and Phase 3 Processing the Collected Information-
informants here, the collected information is transformed into
c. Assets- establishment or institution intelligence. Processing collected information
which assists in providing information. involves three stages, to wit:
6. Methods of collection 1.Recording- it is the reduction of information into
a. Overt- open writing or some other form of geographical
b. Covert- secret representation and the arranging of this information
7. Trade crafts or instruments used in the into groups of related items.
collection 2.Evaluation- the determination of the pertinence of
a. Photography the information to the operation reliability of the
b. Surveillance source of or agency the accuracy of the information;
c. Elicitation or examination of raw information to determine
d. Interview/interrogation intelligence value.
e. Personnel security investigation
f. Sound equipment- tapping and Evaluation to determine:
bugging a.Pertinence (usefulness) -does it hold some value
g. Use of an artist to current operation? Is it needed immediately?
h. Surreptitious entry b.Reliability (dependable)- judging the source of
i. Communication information
8. Collection Planning- The continuous c.Credibility (truth of information)- is it possible
process which ultimately coordinate and for the reported fact or event to have taken place? Is
integrate the efforts of all collecting the report consistent within itself? Is the report
agencies/units. confirmed or corroborated by information from
different sources or agencies? If the report does not
Steps Comprising Collection Plan agree with information from other sources, which one
a. Planning and supervision of collection is more likely to be true?
efforts/activity Interpretation- it is establishing the meaning and
b. Determination of intelligence priorities significance of the information. It involves the
c. Selection of collecting Agencies following:
d. Supervision of the collection activities Analysis- the determination of significance of
(a.k.a. direction) information relative to the information and
87
intelligence already known and drawing deductions agency, unit or command to effect or implement the 4. Processor- basis for evaluation and
about probable meaning of the evaluated mission. interpretation.
information. Dissemination is through-
Integration- is the combination of the elements 1. Annexes- to attachments addition to INTELLIGENCE OPERATION
stated in assessment with other known information or documents It is the result of intelligence planning.
intelligence to form a logical feature or hypothesis for 2. Briefing Planning is always ahead of operation although an
enemy activities or information of the operational 3. Estimate operation can be made without a plan. It is usually
area and characteristics of the mission of the 4. Message due to sudden and inevitable situations but definitely,
command. 5. Reports this is poor intelligence management.
Deduction- the formulation of conclusions from the 6. Situation A. TASKS INVOLVED IN POLICE INTELLIGENCE
theory developed, tested and considered valid; 7. Overlaps OPERATION
determination of effort and meaning of the 8. Summaries 1. Discovery and identification activity.
information. 2. Casing- surveillance/ reconnaissance
Criteria of dissemination: 3. Liaison program
EVALUATION GUIDE 1. Timeliness 4. Informant Management
Reliability of Accuracy of Sources of 2. Propriety- the message must be clear, 5. Clipping Services
Information Information Information concise and complete, as well as in the 6. Debriefing
A- Completely 1- Confirmed T- Direct proper form for the receiver to readily 7. Relevant Miscellaneous Activities
reliable by other observation by understand its contents. It must be 8. Utilization of information for planning and
sources the commander disseminated to the correct user, presented organizational employment purposes
and chief of a unit in a form that leads itself to immediate use B. CYCLES OF INTELLIGENCE
B- Usually 2- Probably U- Reports by and distributed by the most effective means 1. Mission and Target
reliable true penetration agent appropriate to both time and security Infiltration- the insertion of action agent
or resident agent requirements. inside the target organization (penetration
C-Fairly 3- Possibly V- Report by agent)
reliable true PNP/AFP troops Methods of Dissemination: Penetration- recruitment of action agent
involved in 1. Fragmentary orders from top to bottom of the inside the target organization (agent in place)
encounter command. 2. Planning
D-Not usually 4-Doubtfully W- Interrogation 2. Memorandum, circulars, special orders, etc. 3. Spotting
reliable true of capture enemy 3. Operations orders, oral or written. 4. Investigation
agent/foreigner 4. Conference- staff members. 5. Recruitment- the only qualification of the
E-Unreliable 5- Improbable- X- Observation of 5. Other report and intelligence documents. agent is to have an access to the target.
government and 6. Personal contact. 6. Training
civilian employee 7. Briefing
or official Users of intelligence 8. Dispatch
F-Reliability 6-Truth cannot Y- Observation by 1. National leaders and military commanders- 9. Communication- technical: telephone,
cannot be be judged a member of the formulation and implementation of national cell/mobile phone, radio, etc; non- technical:
judged populace policies. personal meeting drops, etc.
Z- Documentary 2. Advisors and staff- preparations of plans and 10. Debriefing
estimates. 11. Payments: buy his life not his job; regulatory
Phase 4- Dissemination and Use- final phase of the 3. Friendly nations or other branches of the and dependability that counts not the amount
cycle. Processed information is disseminated to the armed forces. pay no bonuses; and supplement the agent
88
 income from regular sources enough to ease
his financial worries but not enough to cause
him live in style.
12. Disposition- any activity on rerouting,
retraining, retesting and termination
13. Reporting
14. Operational testing
C. OVERT OR OPEN METHOD (OVERT
INTELLIGENCE)
The information of document is produced
openly without regards as to whether the subject of
the investigation become knowledgeable of the
purpose for which it is being gathered.
D. COVERT METHOD (Covert Intelligence)
The information is obtained without
knowledge of the person against whom the
information or documents may be used, or if the
methods of procurement are done in an open
manner.
E. PURPOSES OF OVERT AND COVERT
INTELLIGENCE:
1. Check the conditions in the community
relating to crime, vice, juvenile delinquency
and identification of organized crimes.
2. Determine through counter intelligence the
applied matters pertaining to personnel
security, physical security and document
security of police organization.
3. Determine the follow-up leads and help in the
evaluation of individual criminal cases.
4. Identify criminal elements and other
lawbreakers as well as their associates.
5. Assists in the arrest of wanted criminals.
6. Check on the quality and effectiveness of the
operations of police forces.
7. Check in the security conditions of the police
forces, funds, equipment and materials.
8. Help in crime control and prevention.
9. Serves as a toll of management for planning The essence of procurement is ACCESS,
and organizational improvement. someone or some device has to get close enough to a
thing, a place or a person to observe or discover the
F. OVERT METHODS OF GATHERING desired facts without arousing the attention of those
INFORMATION who protect them. The information must then be
1. Interview delivered to the people who want it. It must move
2. Interrogation quickly or it may get stale, and it must not get lost or
3. Instrumentation disintegrated in route.
4. Research
5. Investigation
6. Debriefing
K. PROCURING AGENTS
G. COVERT METHODS OF GATHERING 1. Agent in Place- one who has been recruited
INFORMATION by an intelligence service within a highly
1. Elicitation sensitive target and who is just beginning his
2. Casing- surveillance and reconnaissance career or have been long outsider or insider.
3. Observation and description 2. Double Agent- an enemy agent, who has
4. Cover and undercover assignments been captured, turned around and sent back
5. Photography where he came from as an agent of his captor.
6. Personal background investigation (PBI) 3. Expendable agent- an agent through whom
false information is leaked to the enemy.
H. TASK OF PROCUREMENT AND COLLECTON 4. Penetration agent- an agent who infiltrates
OF INFORMATION- procurement represents the and reaches the enemy to get information and
collection of information from overt sources such as: would manage to get back alive.
1. Newspapers 5. Agent of influence- an agent who uses
2. Magazines influence to gain information.
3. Radio intercepts 6. Agent provocation
4. Public and private libraries
5. Public & private establishments L. THEORY AND PRACTICE OF DOUBLE CROSS
6. General public SYSTEM (DOUBLE AGENT)
7. Other sources similar in nature 1. To control the enemy system, or as much of it
as we could get our hands on.
I.PROCUREMENT- is the aggressive effort to 2. To catch fresh spies when they appear.
acquire certain specific information that may not be 3. To gain knowledge about other personalities
readily available. To this end, a number of means and method of the enemy’s intelligence
may be used such as: service.
1. Classical Intelligence- utilizes human being 4. To obtain information about the codes and
to gather information. cipher works of the enemy.
2. Modern/ Technical Intelligence- employs 5. To get evidence of enemy plans and
machine and humans such as satellites, intentions from the questions asked from
electronic gadgets to gather information. them.
J. ESSENCE OF PROCUREMENT
89
 6. To influence enemy plans by answers sent to
the enemy.
7. To deceive the enemy about our/your plans
and intentions.
METHODS USED IN ACQUIRING INFORMATION
(FOREIGN AGENTS)
1. Stealing or purchasing information from
employees.
2. Getting information from records or other
sources.
3. Using various methods of reproducing
documents, equipment, or models.
4. Using “front” as commercial concerns, travel
agencies, associate business groups, and
other organizations to obtain confidential
information or data, which can be valuable to
the user.
5. Using various forms of threats to obtain
information.
6. Using black mail technique (homosexual,
adultery, etc. )
7. Using various means to extract information
from members of the family or close friends
of the employee.
8. Picking information by personal observation
of production, operation, test runs, shipment
of finished products, or confidential products
or papers.
9. Picking information in social and other
gatherings.
10. Attempting subversion by offers of money or
using the emotions such as love, hatred,
desire for powers and others.
11. Penetration and operational tactics.
A. ELICITATION- it is a system or plan whereby
information of intelligence value is obtained
through the process of direct communication
where one or more of the parties to the
communication is/are unaware of the specific
purpose of the conversation
Characteristics:
1. Subject is not aware of the true reasons or
extent of your interest in his information.
2. You have a little control of the subject.
3. Elicited information usually consist of isolated
fragment of information.
Phases:
1. Determination of the mission.
2. Selection of the subject.
3. Accomplishment of the mission.
Devices in the conduct of elicitation
1. Approach- the process of setting people to
start talking
2. Probe- the process to keep the person
(subject) talking incessantly.
Purpose of Elicitation
1. To acquire information which is unbelievable
through other channel
2. To obtain information which although
unclassified , is not known publicly.
3. To provide operational information and
background data on potential source of
information.
4. To assist various individuals.
Planning and Preparation
1. Determine what information is necessary or
essential.
2. Determine who has access to the information.
3. What are the vulnerabilities to elicitation?
4. How susceptible the subject to elicitation?
5. Outline elicitation points prior to meeting and
prepare specific questions know your
subjects well.
Types of Approach:
1. Flattery- people are susceptible to praise.
Variants:
a. Teacher-pupil Approach- subject is
treated as an authority. Request him/ her
to enlighten you and solicit his/her
viewpoint and opinion.
b. Kindred Soul Approach- subject is
placed in a pedestal having some
90
specialized quality and you flatter
him/her by showing enough concern for
his/her welfare to pay special attention to
his enjoyment.
c. Good Samaritan Approach- sincere and
valid offers of help and assistance are
made to the subject.
d. Partial Disagreement Approach- seek
to produce talking by the word “I’m sure”
if I fully agree.
2. Provocative Approach- discover a wide
range of conversational gambits/
Variants:
a. Teaser Bait Approach- elicitor
accumulates the sources of knowledge
about a particular subject.
b. Manhattan from Missouri Approach-
elicitor adapts an unbelievable attitude
above anything. He questions all
statements and opposition.
c. Joe Blow Approach- it is “I know the
answer to everything” approach. The
elicitor adapts the attitude of being
approachable to any field.
d. National Pride Approach- it is natural
propensity of all persons to defend their
country and its policies.
Types of Probe:
1. Competition Probe- effective when used in
connection with the teacher-pupil approach.
2. Clarity Probe- used to elicit additional
information in an area which the response is
not clear.
3. High Pressure Probe- it serves to pin down a
subject in a specific area or it may be used to
point out contradictions in what the subject
has said.
4. Hypothetical Probe- it represents a
hypothetical situation and to get the subject
to react to the hypothetical situations.
B. CASING- literally means putting a thing, or place
in a case. As used in intelligence operation- the
continuous monitoring of a place or area at a given
period of time.
Purposes:
1. It aids in the planning and operation by
providing needed information.
2. It assists the agent handler to instill
confidence in his agent during briefing phase
by being able to speak knowing about the
area of operation.
3. It is also considered a security measures
because it offers some degree of protection
for those operating in an area unfamiliar to
the intelligence personnel.
General Principle:
1. Know the best route to get there (location).
2. Know how to conduct yourself without
attracting attention.
3. Know what security hazards are in the area
and how can be avoided or minimized.
4. Know the best route extricate from the area of
casing.
Methods of Casing
1. Map Reconnaissance- may not be sufficient
but it can produce a certain amount of usable
information.
2. Personal Reconnaissance- the most
effective method and will produce the most
essential information since you know just
what you are looking for.
3. Research- much information can be obtained
or acquired through research.
4. Prior Information- your unit and the other
units may have file report that they may
provide you with relevant information.
5. Hearsay- information usually gains by the
person operating in the area and performing
casing job.
Information Desired in Casing
1. Area condition and habit
2. Active opposition 5. To obtain needs upon which to conduct
3. Disposal plan- disposal of the information additional investigation.
(and materials) in case of possible 6. To check on source of information.
compromise 7. Locate addresses, or places frequented by
4. Escape and evasion subject as well as his associates.
Five Fundamentals Principles/ Guidelines in the 8. To obtain detailed information about the
Conduct of Casing nature, scope of subject’s activities.
1. To gain contact as soon as possible and 9. To secure basis for securing search warrant.
maintain continuously. 10. To provide protection.
2. Maneuver freely in conformity with Terms used:
operations (dry run). 1. Pre-surveillance Conference. A conference
3. To fight only when necessary. held among the team members, police
4. To report all items of information. intelligence unit before a surveillance is
5. To develop the situation. conducted.
Steps (Basic Procedures) in the Conduct of 2. Stake out. The observation of places or areas
Casing: from a fixed point.
1. Preparation of general location map. 3. Tailing or shadowing. It is the observation
2. Sketch of the adjoining establishment and of a person’s movement.
prominent features. 4. Undercover man.A person trained to
3. Specific Sketch of floor plan of main target observe and penetrate certain organization
and its description. suspected of illegal activities and the later
4. Photographs of the casing target (general and reports the observation and information so
specific views)/ that proper operational action can be made.
Difference between Surveillance and 5. Liaison program. This is the assignment of
Reconnaissance trained intelligence personnel to other
Surveillance is continuous while agencies- in order to obtain information of
reconnaissance is intermitted (mission or operation) police intelligence value. (Agencies like the
while reconnaissance has general objectives while press, credit agencies, labor unions,
surveillance has specific objectives. telephone companies, etc.)
C. SURVEILLANCE- a form of clandestine 6. Safe house. It is a place, building, enclosed
investigation which consist of keeping persons, place mobile, or an apartment, where police
or other targets under physical observation in order undercover men meet his action agent for
to obtain evidence or information pertinent to the debriefing or reporting purposes.
investigation. It is also used to gather information 7. Drop. It is convenient, secure, and
over a wide area and takes a longer time frame. unsuspecting place where a police,
General Objectives and Purposes Objectives undercover man, informer, or informant by a
1. To confirm or deny allegations. pre-arrangement leaves a note, a small
2. To identify persons involved in certain package, an envelope to item for the action
activities. agent, supervisor or another agent.
3. Provide background information for 8. Convoy. An accomplice or associate of the
undercover assignment. subject.
4. Develop leads to vital information.
91
 9. Decoy. Any person almost similar to the
subject used to avoid or elude surveillance.
10.Contact. Any person or subject picks or deals
with while he is under surveillance.
11.Made. When subject under surveillance becomes
aware that he is under observation and identifies the
observer burnout.
12.Lost. When the surveillants do not know the
whereabouts of their subject or the subject had
eluded the surveillants.
13. Rabbit (hare). Term referring to the subject of
shadowing and tailing.
14.Test for tailing. The common trick of the subject
(rabbit) when he becomes conscious that he is being
tailed.
Types of Surveillance:
1. According to Intensity and Sensitivity
a. Discreet- subject is unaware that
he/she is under observation.
b. Close- subject is aware that he/she is
under observation varied on each
occasion.
c. Loose- applied frequently or
infrequently, and period of
observation varied on each occasion.
2. According to Method
a. Stationary- observation of place
usually a bookies stall, gambling
joint, or a residence where illegal
activities are committed (fixed point
position).
b. Moving-surveillants follow the
subject from place to place to
maintain continuously watch/ observe
of his/ her activities.
c. Technical- uses communication and
electronic hard wares, gadgets,
systems and equipment.
Special Methods applied:
1. Wire tapping
2. Concealed microphones
3. Tape recorder 8. Be a good talker, able to talk his way out of
4. Television embarrassing presence in the area.
5. Electric gadgets Basic Preparation:
Special Equipment Needed (Technical Supports) 1. Study of the Subject (in case of person)-
1. Camera with telephone lens name, address, description, family and
2. Moving picture camera (Video Cam) relatives, associates, character and
3. Binoculars temperament, vices, hobbies, education, etc.
4. Tape recording apparatus 2. Knowledge of the Area and Terrain
5. Wiretapping devices (concerning places)- maps, national and
6. Other instruments-miniature camera and one religious backgrounds, transportation,
way radio public utilities, etc.
Requirements (Process) for Surveillance: 3. Subversive Organizations- history and
1. Area and Target Study background, biography of the official
2. Surveillance Plan (leaders), identify background of members
3. Selection of Personnel- consider the and former members, method of
following: identification employed by the members,
a. Inconspicuous physical character files and records (nature, location and
b. Ability to remain unnoticed accessibility), meeting, etc.
c. Resourcefulness 4. Cover Story- an assumed identity; fabricated
d. Patience and physical stamina stories.
e. Keen sensory perception and Shadowing or Tailing- it is the act of following a
retentive memory person with the following purposes:
f. Driving ability 1. To detect evidence of criminal activities.
g. Personal courage 2. To establish the associations of a suspect.
h. Area knowledge 3. To find a wanted person.
i. Security consciousness 4. To protect a witness or other persons.
j. Administrative and logistics:
Communication and control and the Methods of Shadowing/ Tailing by Foot
conduct of surveillance 1. One Man Shadowing- commonly used because of
Essential Requirements and Appearance of the the least number of men involved. Consider the
Operative: following if the subject.
1. Be of average size, built and general a.Enters a public lobby, the shadower will follow.
appearance. b.Enters a telephone booth, the shadower will take
2. Have no noticeable peculiarities in the adjoining both and make a dummy call;
appearance. c.Checks in a hotel, the shadower may take an
3. Should not wear conspicuous jewelry or adjoining room;
clothing. d.Leaves the hotel and takas a cab, the shadower will
4. Have nothing about him to attract attention. take also the same conveyance and take a seat
5. Have perseverance and able to wait for behind the subject; and
hours. e.Gets into a theater line, railway ticket line and the
6. Always be alert. like, the shadower will fall in line immediately behind
7. Be resourceful, versatile and quick-witted. the subject so he can hear the reservation or
92
destination. If shadower fails to hear, then he must
ask the teller.
2.Two man Shadow- this is more advantageous
because it permits immediate change and are less
likely to be recognized. One officer will follow the
subject and the other will keep abreast or on the
opposite side of the street.
3.Three Man Shadow or ABC Method
a.A is closest to subject S. He follows S at a distance
depending on the pedestrian traffic.
b.B follows A about the same distance between A and
S.
c.B and C take turns in occupying the A position.
Surveillance Precautions (things to consider):
1. Do not make abrupt or unnatural movements.
2. Do not make use of disguise that will attract
attention.
3. Never stare at the subject.
4. Do not attempt to appear too innocent when
accosted by the subject.
5. Never speak to another surveillant unless
absolutely necessary to accomplish the
mission.
6. Maintain distance.
7. Plan ahead.
8. Be aware on changes of actions.
9. Notes taking should be done in safe areas.
10. Make use of street furniture (telephone
booth, sidewalk, vendors, waiting shades,
etc.)
11. Don’t court women.
12. Don’t take a woman on an undercover
assignment.
13. Don’t claim to be a “big shot”.
14. Don’t fail to provide a person in place who
can vouch for the operative.
15. Don’t spend too much money.
Don’t s in surveillance:
1. Window shopping
2. Use of convoys
3. Stopping immediately on blind corners
4. Getting out immediately on public
conveyances.
5. Retracing
6. Entering mobile housing.
Types of Attention
1. Involuntary- no control and requires no effort.
2. Voluntary- more reliable but not dependable
3. Habitual- little effort with a maximum control.
Factors Involved on Perception
1. Mental capability
2. Educational background
3. Occupation background
4. Empirical background- acquired through
experience
Factors Governing Report
1. Vocabulary- word/s used by an individual to
express himself.
2. Time log- accurate reporting depends
entirely on timeliness, delay in reporting
results in unconscious omissions of details.
3. Recurrence of similar incidents.
5. SKETCHING- it consists of putting ideas in an
accurate pictorial form. It is a means of describing an
object or area to satisfy a particular need.
Methods of Sketching:
1. On the spot
2. Memory method
3. Semi- memory method
E. PORTRAT PARLE- a means of using descriptive
terms in relation to the personal features of
individual and it can briefly describe as a word
description or spoken pictures.
Identification Methods
1. Branding and mutilation
2. Identification parades system
Several methods of acquiring description ability:
1. Learn the meaning of the numerous words
used in describing the various features of the
person.
2. Study and practice the description of the
features, such as the eyes, hair or the nose as
they appear on several different persons.
93
3. Learning a definite order of proceedings
from one picture to another.
The Place of Surveillance-careful study of the
surrounding area should be made. The character of
the neighborhood, the residents and the transients
should be noted. The observation should be selected.
Two types of places of surveillance are:
1. Using a room in a nearby house or business
establishment and remaining undercover.
2. Remaining outdoors and posing who would
normally conduct his business in such area,
i.e., laborers, carpenters, street vendors, etc.
Factors to Consider in Fix Surveillance:
1. Determine base operation/
2. Maintain a thorough, cautious reconnaissance
of the area.
3. Obtain necessary equipment.
4. Assignment of specific duties to each
member of the team.
5. Prepare alternative course of action.
6. Provide for relief teams.
7. Arrange communication signals.
8. Arrange for inconspicuous arrival and
departure of equipment as well as personnel
of the base of operation.
D. OBSERVATION AND DESCRIPTIONS
OBSERVATION- the complete and accurate and
awareness by an individual of his surroundings and
encompasses the use of all major sense to register
and recognize its operational or intelligence
significance.
DESCRIPTION- the factual reporting of what is
observed. Or, it is the actual and factual reporting of
one’s observation or the reported sensory
experience recounted by another.
Psychologists estimated that approximately:
1. 85% of your knowledge is gathered through
sight.
2. 13% of your hearing.
3. 2% through the three senses.
Psychological Processes for accurate observation:
 1. Attention- consists of the psychological
process involved in becoming aware of an
existence of fact/ event.
2. Perception- involved in the understanding
this fact of awareness.
3. Report-involved in identifying the name in
own mind and some fact which has been
perceived, narrated and identified.
Types of Attention
1. Involuntary- no control and requires no effort.
2. Voluntary-more reliable but not dependable
3. Habitual-little effort with a maximum control.
Factors Involved on Perception
1. Mental capability
2. Educational background
3. Occupational background
4. Empirical background- acquired through
experience.
Factors Governing Report
1. Vocabulary- word/s used by an individual to
express himself
2. Time Log- accurate reporting depends
entirely on timeliness, delay in reporting results in
unconscious omissions of details.
3. Recurrence of similar incidents
SKETCHING- it consists of putting ideas in an
accurate pictorial form. It is a means of describing
an object or area to satisfy a particular need.
Methods of Sketching
1. On the spot
2. Memory Method
3. Semi-memory Method
E. PRORTRAIT PARLE- a means of using
descriptive terms in relation to the personal
features of an individual and it can briefly describe
as a word description or spoken pictures.
Identification Methods
1. Branding and mutilation
2. Identification parade system
Several Methods Of Acquiring Description
Ability:
1. Learn the meaning of the numerous words
used in describing the various features of the
person.
2. Study and practice the description of the
features, such as the eyes, hair or the nose as
they appear on several different persons.
3. Learning a definite order of proceedings
from one picture to another.
Utilization of the Portrait Parle
1. Obtain description of suspects from whom the
agent interviews.
2. Identify upon receipt or descriptive
information from other investigative
agencies.
3. Send or disseminate information on person of
CI interest.
Methods of Obtaining Descriptive Information
1. Close observation of the person and accurate
records of the terms describing the features.
2. Information obtained through interviews of
witnesses.
3. Examination of observation of photographs
and sketches.
4. Examination of records.
F.PHOTOGRAPHY- used to have a permanent
record of the subject or of what is being observed.
In intelligence, photography is essential means of
vividly recording and presenting the subject of
casing, surveillance, and other forms of clandestine
operation.
Some of the advantages of photography in
intelligence gathering are:
1. Recording of distant subject or object by
using telephoto lens;
2. Surreptitiously recording images with the use
of hidden and/or miniature cameras;
3. Images recorded can be further analyzed and
reviewed when digital camera is used, etc.
G. CLANDESTINE OPERATION-is a secret action
undertaken by an intelligence/counter-intelligence
organization in behalf of the Government or other
friendly force.
94
Importance
1. The desire to do something
2. The fact that it can be done
3. No other means of obtaining timely and
accurate information requirements.
Two Goals
1. To collect information about hostile opposition
activities.
2. To penetrate the organization in order to
determine its operational directions, its plan
and its intentions against the adversary
sponsors.
Basic organizational Elements for Clandestine
Operations
1. Sponsor- it may be represented by the
project; case; and agent in handler
2. Target(Rabbit)
3. Agent
Classification of Clandestine Agent
1. PRINCIPAL AGENT
2. ACTION AGENT
a. Espionage- (counter
intelligence/intelligence agent) is the
primary and most important human
collector (access agent, legal traveler
and penetration agent)
b. Propagandist- this agent undertakes
action to mold the attitudes, opinions and
actions of an individual group or actions
of an individual, group or nation.
c. Saboteur-an agent who undertake
positive action against unfriendly power
resulting in the loss of used temporary or
permanent of an article, material or
facility.
d. Guerilla-is a member of paramilitary
group organized to grass the enemy
e. Strongman- is an agent available to
provide special protection during the
dangerous phases of clandestine
operation.
 f. Provocateur- an agent who induces an
opponent to act to his own detriment by
desecrating himself or revealing his true
purpose or identity.
g. Cover Action Agent- a fully recruited
agent who is in a senior position usually
within the government who can exert
influence from foreign government upon
direction of the sponsor.
3. SUPPORT AGENT – Ex.Surveillant, processor of
Funds, Safe house keeper, investigator, Procurer of
Supplies, Manager of Storage House,
Communication Officer, etc.
H. COVER AND UNCOVER
COVER- any device utilized by person, organization
to insure that one who does not have the right to
know must be aware of the real purpose of the
mission. Or it is a means by which an individual
group or organization conceals the true nature of its
acts and or existence from the observer.
COVER STORY- a biographical data through
fictional, which will portray the personality of the
agent he assumed: any scenario to cover up the
operation.
COVER SUPPORT- an agent assigned in target areas
with the primary mission of supporting the cover
story.
Importance of Cover:
1. Secrecy of operation against enemy
intelligence
2. Secrecy of operation against friendly
agencies who do not have the need to know
3. Successful accomplishment of the mission.
ESSSENTIAL TYPES OF COVER
1. Natural Cover- using actual or true
background
2. Artificial- using biographical data adopted for
the purpose
3. Cover within a Cover- justification of
existence
4. Multiple Cover- any cover you wish
HAZARDS TO COVER
1. Static or document opposition (ordinary
citizen)
2. Unhostile active opposition (police, security
agencies)
3. Hostile active opposition (enemy intelligence
operatives)
PRECAUTIONS OR GUIDELINES IN CASE OF
COMPROMISE
1. Move out immediately
2. Start new facility for operation and develop it
3. Build entirely new cover
4. Use circuitous routes and provide careful
counter surveillance measures
5. Be specifically careful of former contacts with
non-intelligence personnel
6. Be patient, slowly, and careful.
I. ORGANIZATIONAL COVER- any account
consisting of biographical data which when
adopted by an individual will assume the
personality he wants to adopt.
Objectives of Organizational Cover
1. To camouflage and protect operational
personnel and their activities.
2. To protect installation in which clandestine
activities are based.
Guidelines when Organizational cover is
compromised:
1. Make physical move or relocation.
2. Start new facility for the old operation and let
it grow.
3. Use new personnel.
4. Let old personnel remain in place.
5. Build entirely new cover.
6. When files are relocated, use circuitous
routes to avoid surveillance and other civilian
informants/informers.
7. Be specifically careful when making contacts
with non-intelligence personnel.
8. Be patient.
J. UNDERCOVER ASSIGNMENT-it is an
investigation technique in which an agent
95
conceals his official identity to obtain
information from that organization.
How to plan undercover assignment
1. Determine level which investigation is
intended.
2. Develop appropriate cover and cover story.
3. Selection of qualified personnel.
4. Consideration of all operation details to
include documentation, contact reporting,
housing and convergence.
5. Briefing, coaching and rehearsals.
Uses of Undercover
1. Use independently to get first-hand
information about the subject of investigation.
Example:
a. Security evaluation of every installation.
b. Gain confidence of suspected persons.
c. Agent penetration.
d. Verify information from human resources.
e. Uncover concealed identity.
2. Supplement other investigative techniques
like:
a. Playing ground works for raids and
searches gaining entry.
b. To assists in locating evidence.
c. To install, maintain investigative
equipment of undercover assignment.
Types of Undercover Assignment
1. Dwelling
2. Work
3. Social
4. Jurisdictional assignment
5. Combination assignment
6. Rope job-striking up friendship with the
subject
Factors to be considered in Selecting Cover Story
1. Mutual point of interest
2. Jurisdiction of presents
3. Previous and permanent address
4. Efficiency of role
5. Freedom of movement
6. Means of communication
 7. Social and financial status
8. Optional alternate plan
9. Safe departure
K. UNDERCOVER (ACTION) AGENT
Special Qualification of Undercover Agent
1. Knowledge of the language
2. Background regarding events
3. Knowledge about the customs and habits
4. Physical appearance
5. An artist
Factors to consider in the Selection of Action
(Undercover) Agents:
1. PLACEMENT-location of prospective agent
with respect to the target.
2. ACCESS-the capability or ability of the
perspective agent to obtain the desired
information for the intelligence organization
or to perform the intelligence collection
mission in the area.
a. PRIMARY ACCESS-it is the access of the
desired information.
b. SECONDARY ACCESS-the access to the
desired information through principal
source where the latter has the direct
access.
c. OUTSIDE ACESS-the agent employed
outside the target and merely monitors
information from a third person who is
monitoring information in the area.
Some Motivations of Agents
1. Ideology-believes in the principle of life
2. Patriotism
3. Remuneration
4. Career Development
5. Fear
General Nature of Agent Handling
1. Sharing secret purpose.
2. Agent controls the agent operationally and
administratively.
3. Rapport with each other.
4. Respect with each other.
Basic Agent Management
1. Agent handler must be in charge of the
person.
2. The acts insure the agent adherence.
3. Good rapport must be established between
the agent handler and the agent.
4. The agent handler must constantly reinforce
the agent motivation.
Key Element of Agent Management
1. Direction and Control
a. Leadership
b. Action
c. Personal example
2. Natural Weaknesses
a. Inability to keep secret
b. Need for recognition
c. Stain of dual experience
d. Experience
3. Agent training
4. Agent testing
5. Agent examination
L. CONTROL-authority to direct agent to carry out
task or the requirements in behalf of the
clandestine organization in acceptable
manner and security.
Two Categories of Control
1. POSITIVE CONTROL-characterized by
professionalism and rapport
a. Agent motivation
b. Psychological control
2. NEGATIVE CONTROL-blackmail and threat
a. Disciplinary action-includes verbal
reprimand for poor performance or
insecure action withholding certain
materials, rewards reduction of
agent salary or extreme situation
and threat of terminating personal
relationship.
b. Escrow account-control of an agent
by putting his salary in a bank to be
withdrawn only after fulfillment of
the condition.
96
c. Blackmail
Termination Problems
1. Amount of knowledge the agent has
in the operation and personnel.
2. His inclination to use knowledge to
the disadvantage of the intelligence
service.
3. Moral obligation to the agent the
cause of loss incurred by him as a result
of his connection to the intelligence
service.
PROVOCATION- is the action taken in order to
incite reaction from a known adversary
or to observe adversary.
Purpose
1. Reveal the true status of an assumed
adversary.
2. Make a known adversary take seldom
demanding action.
Provocateur- an individual from enemy forces who is
deliberately introduced in our custody with a
specific mission of causing some unfavorable
action or reaction on our part.
INFORMERS AND INFORMANTS
A. Informant- a person who gives information
to the police voluntary or involuntary without
any compensation.
Informer- is an individual who gives
information for a price or reward. (He may be
in the payroll of the law enforcement agency.)
Informant Net- a controlled group of
person who worked through the direction of
the agent handler. The informant principal or
cut-outs supply the agent handler directly or
indirectly of intelligence information.
B. TYPES OF INFORMANTS
1. Criminal Informants
2. Confidential Informant
3. Voluntary Informant
4. Special Informant
5. Anonymous Informant
SUB-TYPE OF INFORMANTS
 1.Accidental (INCIDENTAL) Informants identified as “probable”must be as thorough as 6. Express appreciation to all information
2.Recruited Informants possible. It must establish possible existing received regardless of its value.
motives as to why this person might assist the 7. Keep on time even through information
DIFFERENT CATEGORIES OF RECRUITED police intelligence community. If necessary, appointment may not.
INFORMANTS conduct complete background investigation 8. Don’t get over anxious; be patient; take your
1.Spontaneous or automatic (CBI). time.
2.Ordinary Run-of the Mill informants 3. APPROACH- this must be done in setting 9. Keep control over the investigation.
3.Special Employee with pleasant surroundings like a confidential 10. Keep what you know to yourself, don’t
apartment which is completely free from any become an informant’s informant.
OTHER CLASSIFICATION OF INFORMANTS: probability of compromise. The place is H. DISMISSAL OF INFORMANTS- considers the
1. Automatic preferably in adjacent city or remote area following:
2. Penetration foreign to the informants living pattern. In here, 1. The handler should avoid antagonizing the
3. Full-time it Is also includes explanation of contract. informant.
4. Rival Elimination 4. TESTING- it should begin with limited 2. Explain properly and humanely the reasons
5. False Informant assignment, with gradual integration into more of dismissal.
6. Frightened Informant important areas. The occasional testing of an 3. If file of the informant exist, dismissal must be
7. Self-aggrandizing informant informant should continue through the entire in writing for future reference.
8. Mercenary Informant affiliation. Some Reasons of Dismissal
9. Double-crosser Informant 1. Ineptitude
10. Woman Informant 2. Security risk
11. Legitimate Informant F. FACTORS TO CONSIDER IN INFORMANT 3. Criminal record or act
D. MOTIVES OF INFORMANT RECRUITMENT 4. Submitting false information, etc.
1. Reward 1. Sex • IDENTIFICATION OF CRIMINAL AND
2. Revenge 2. Health SUUBVERSIVE ELEMENTS
3. Patriotism 3. Ability A. ORGANIZED/SYNDICATED CRIME
4. Fear and Avoidance of Punishment 4. Age GROUPS-means of two or more persons
5. Friendship/ Career Development 5. Education collaborating, confederating, or mutual
6. Vanity 6. Personality helping on one another in the commission of
7. Civic-mindedness G. GENERAL TREATMENT OF INFORMANTS crime.
8. Repentance 1. Avoid the use of derogatory terms in 1. Kidnap for Ransom Groups
9. Competition referring of informants into any type. 2. Bank robbery/Robbery Hold-up
2. Avoid disclosing the identity of the groups
STEPS OF INFORMANTS RECRUITMENT (SIAT) informants, which will in most cases ruin 3. Drug Syndicates
1. SELECTION- it is particularly desired to hispotential. 4. Carnappers
identify and recruit an informant who has 3. Protect the interest of the informants; 5. Terrorist group: Japanese Red Army;
access to many criminal in-groups or remember an investigator is usually just a Al Qaida; Abu Sayyaf; etc.
subversive organizations. Access is probability good as his sources of information. 6. Secessionist movement: MNLF; MILF;
the single most important feature in the 4. Consider all information from known or etc.
consideration of recruiting the potential unknown informants as valuable until B. TERRORISM
informants. proven otherwise. a. An organized pattern of violence
2. INVESTIGATION- the investigation of the 5. Be non-committal (unrevealing) on the value designed to influence government
potential informants who is tentatively of the information received. policy or intimidates the population
97
 for the purpose of intimidating
government policy.
b. It is also a violent criminal behavior
designed primarily to generate fear
in the community or a substantial
segments of its political purposes.
c. It is also a culturally unacceptable use
of threat or violence directed toward
symbolic target to interference
political behavior either directly or
indirectly by affecting attitude,
emotion, or opinion.
C. SUBVERSIVE HINDRANCES- Anything that will
undermine the political, social,
economic and other aspect of the
country.
D.INSURGENCY- is a protected political activity
directed towards completely or
partially controlling the sources of a
country and the creation of an
alternative government through the
use of irregular military force and
illegal political organization.
E.ORDER OF BATTLE (ORBAT)- it is the summary
recording of one’s specific criminal
activities with entries covering
matters with intelligence and tactical
interest, enumeration of personalities
involved in the organizational
movement activities.
F.BACKGROUND CHECK AND INVESTIGATIONS
Needed information:
1. Domestics Backgound
2. Personal Habbit
3. Business History
4. Social and Business Associates
5. Medical History
6. Educational Background
7. Family History
Tracing Victims, Witnesses, Informants, others
1. Telephone Technique
2. Visit the Home
3. Record of Change of Address
4. Mail Covers
5. Mail and Telegram Ruses
Tracing the Fugitive – The approach in tracing
fugitive depends upon the character of the subject
. In case the fugitive is elusive, discreet methods
must be employed. With the experienced
criminal, a more direct approach is permissible.
The following are to be taken:
1. Routine Information
a. Full name and aliases
b. Physical description
c. Modus operandi
d. Motive
e. Associates, past and present including girlfriend
f. Habbits, hang outs, and resorts he is known to
frequent/visit
g. criminal record, photographs and fingerprints
h.residence last known and previous location
i. employment, last known and previous employers
j. relatives , name and addresses
k. driver’s license
l. SSS OR GSIS number
m. handwriting for comparison
2. For immediate Action, the following should be
adapted:
a. Transmission of the information to the other law
enforcement agencies
b. Sending of police ciculars
c. Notification of other agencies possessing
informative records
TACTICAL INTERROGATION
This is used in obtaining information of the highest
degree of credibility at minimum time. The
objectives of interrogations vary and depend
entirely on the situation in which the interrogator
finds himself. He must therefore be fully aware of
the objectives for each interrogation.
A. Definition of Terms
1. Debriefing- The interrogation of a friendly
interrogee who has information at the
98
direction of or under the control of
friendly unintelligence service.
2. Interrogation- The systematic asking of question
to illicit information in minimum time.
3. Interrogation Report- an oral or written
statement of information by the
questioning of an interrogee.
4. Interrogator- Person who does the questioning.
5. Interrogee- any person who is subjected the
interrogation process in any of its forms
and phases.
6.Screening- initial examination of an interrogee to
determine the extent of his knowledge of
persons, places, things, or events in
which we are interested.
7. Source - a person who for any reason submits
information of intelligence interest
usually on a voluntary bases.
8. Suspect- A person believed to be associated with
prohibited activity .
9. Witness- any person who has directs knowledge
of facts concerning an event or activity.
B. Forms of Interrogation
1. Direct – the subject is aware but he may not learn
the true objectives of interrogation. This
is used extensively at the tactical level.
2.Indirect- the subject is not aware. This applied
when time is not so important.
C. Types of Interrogation
1. Screening- this is usually applied immediately
after capture, apprehension or arrest of
subject.Its objective is to obtain
background information about the
interrogee( subject) and determine his
area of knowledge and ability.
2. Formal interrogation (detailed)-this is the
systematic attempt to exploit to an
appropriate depth those areas of
interrogee’s knowledge, which have
been identified in the screening
process.
3. Debriefing-it is a form of eliciting information,
which is generally used when the area of
knowledge of the interrogee is known.
4.Interview – similar to debriefing although it is less
formal and the interrogee is not
necessarily under the control or
employment of the respective
intelligence service
5. Interrogation of Lay Personnel-in this type, the
techniques are similar to interrogation.
However, especial effort must be made
to stablish a common frame of reference
between the interrogator and the subject
.The amount of information obtained will
depends on the interrogator’s inequity
in establishing common terminology on
the source.
6. Technical interrogation-this is the level of
interrogation where the source has
specific in detailed information that
requires a trained expert in the subject
matter to be explored. It usually covers
the specific subject and time is not as
limited as in other interrogation.
D. Phased of Interrogation
1. Planning of interrogation
a. The interrogator must observe the
interrogee without the latter’s
knowledge to determine his
conditions, habits, emotional and
personal appearance.
b. The interrogator must question or
interview any guard, or any person
available who has had contact with
the source to determine the
interrogee’s attitude, circumstances
of capture and how he has been
treated.
c. The interrogator must examine any
document found on the source in
order to determine how to open the
interrogator.
d. The interrogator should begin
immediate screening of the
interrogee in order to determine his
particular area of knowledgeability.
2. Approach (Meeting the Interrogee)- The
first meeting in which it is extremely
critical because the outcome may
depend on the initial impression created
by the interrogator. The main objective
is to develop rapport with the source in
order to gain his cooperation and induce
him to questions to obtain the desired
information.
3. Questioning – This is the heart of the
interrogation.
4. Termination – The termination of the
interrogation will depend on various
factors such as the physical condition of
the subject.
Considerations:
a. The amount of information possessed
by the interrogee is so great that it may
take several sessions to complete the
interrogation.
b. It should be ended on a friendly
manner and leaving in the mind of the
interrogee that he may be further
interrogated.
5. Recording –The interrogator should take notes in
cryptic if possible.
Considerations:
a. The interrogator should not take notes
rapport with the interrogee has been
established.
b. It is desirable to record the
interrogation with a tape recording
device without the knowledge of the
interrogee if the latter refuses to talk
with an interrogator taking notes. The
recorder must be tested before and after
the interrogation.
99
6. Reporting – The end product of an
interrogation is the tactical Interrogation
Report containing the information
gained. Report must be made orally or
in written form depending. Normally, an
oral report is followed by a written
report.
Considerations: The interrogator must:
a.remain objective in his report:
b.state which information is factual and which is
inferred as well as the first hand information and
hearsay;
c.be able to evaluate the source as to his credibility.
E. Interrogation Techniques
Technique of Approach- The purpose is
to gain the cooperation of the source and
induce him to answer question, which will
follow.
1.The “Open technique”
2. The “Common Interest”
3. Record File (we know all technique)
4. Exasperation technique
(harassment)
5. Opposite Personality Techniques
6. Egoist Technique (Pride and Ego)
7. Silent Technique
8. Question Barrage Technique (
Rapid Fire Questioning)
COUNTERINTELLIGENCE
A. COUNTERINTELLIGENCE DEFINED
➢ Aspect of intelligence which in
peace or in war is concerned
with the detection, prevention
and neutralization or espionage,
sabotage , subversion or other
inimical foreign intelligence
activities, by planning and
developing suitable
countermeasures to what such
hostile activities.
 ➢ Covers the activity that denotes
and destroying the effectiveness
of hostile foreign activities and to
the protection of information
against espionage, sabotage and
subversion.
B. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF CI OPERATIONS
1. Conformity to mission
2. Avoidance of publicity
3. Objectivity
4. Confirmation
5. Offense
6. Flexibility
7. Continuity
8. Coordination
C. ONJECTIVES OF CI
1. Prevent enemy sabotage, espionage and
subversion.
2. Security of the command.
3. Denies knowledge to the enemy
4. Aids activities in achieving surprises.
5. Detects possible disaffection, treason, and
sedition, within the military or police forces.
D. ACTIVITIES OF CI
1. Protection of information against espionage.
2. Protection of personnel against subversion.
3. Protection of installation and materials against
sabotage
E. GENERAL TYPE OF CI
1. Passive Measure- those measure which seek to
conceal information from the enemy.
2. Active Measure- those measure which seek to
actively block information from the enemies effort to
gain information or engage in espionage, subversion,
and sabotage.
3.Deception Measure- to deceive the enemy.
F. IMPORTANCE OF CI
1. Denies information to the enemy.
2. Reduces the risk of the commander.
3. Aids in achieving surprises.
4. Increase the security of the command.
5. Decrease the ability of the enemy to
create information about our forces.
G. USE OF CI IN TIMES OF NATIONAL
EMERGENCY
It is recognized that the security and
welfare of the nation must take precedence
on certain civil rights and privileges which
are enjoyed by citizen in a stable, peace time
situation, wartime situation, it becomes
necessary to implement certain restrictive
measure which would inconceivable in time
of peace.
To accomplish security objects, the
counterintelligence effort in the following
areas must be stressed.
1. Denial of all information (classified or
otherwise )to the insurgents by devising
security controls to prevent security
breaches.
2. Formulation and planning of security
training program and implementation of
security controls.
3. Detection identification and elimination of
security breaches and weaknesses.
4. Detection identification and neutralization
or destruction of hostile intelligence,
subversion, sabotage, and terrorist elements
and activities.
5. Monitoring of the populace and activities in
the area of operation for indications of threats
to the nation/host country activities.
H. OTHER CONCEPTS ABOUT CI
COUNTER INTELLIGENCE is also known as
NEGATIVE INTELLIGENCE, a generic term
meaning three different things.
1. Security intelligence – the total sum of
efforts to conceal the following:
a. National police
b. Diplomatic decision
c. Military data
100
d. And any other information of a secret
nature affecting the security of the nation
from unauthorized person.
e. the classification of documents according
to the degree of their secrecy.
f. various screening operation such as:
1. Spreading of deliberately falsified or
bogus information to mislead the enemy.
2. The enactment of legislation to deter
people from ever gain ever trying
unauthorized possession of classified
information.
3. The selection and indoctrination of
trustworthy and security conscious
personnel.
4. A protective plan designed to secure
natural resources and industrial productions
against espionage and sabotage.
2. Counter-espionage – in counter
espionage, negative intelligence becomes a
dynamic and active effort. Its purpose is to
investigate actual or theoretical violations of
espionage laws, to enforce those laws, and to
apprehend violators. It is a job to catch spies
and it is basically a police function.
Aims of counter espionage:
To locate the enemy, to identify the enemy,
and to neutralize the enemy.
3. Counter intelligence - some of its
functions are:
a. Censorship of the following:
correspondence, broadcast, telecast,
telephone conversation, telegrams and
cables, etc.
b. Prevent the dissemination of any
information that might aid an opponent.
c. Maintenance of files of suspects.
d. Surveillance of suspects.
e. Mail reading, wiretapping and recording.
f. Infiltration of the enemy intelligence which
is organized to procure information about its
 method, personal, specific operations and
surprise.
I. CATEGORIES OF CI OPERATION
1. Military Security-measures taken of a
command to protect itself against
espionage, enemy operations, sabotage,
subversion or surprise.
Example:
Secrecy discipline
Special safeguarding of classified
information
Security of troop movement
Special handling of weather and escapes
Counter subversion within the armed forces
Tactical measures in combat area
2. Port Frontier and Travel Security- it has
to do with the application of both military
and civil security measures for CI control at
point of entry and departure, internal
borders or boundaries.
Example:
Security screening and control of frontier
Security control of merchants, seamen and
crew of commercial aircraft
Security control of frontier crossing point
Security control of seaports
3. Civil Security-it encompasses active and
passive CI measures affecting the non-
military nationals permanently
temporarily residing in an area under
military jurisdiction.
Example:
Systematic registration of civilians and
aliens
Control of circulation
Curfew
Surveillance of suspected political
organizations
Security screening of labor
Insurance of passers and permits
Control of internal commerce
4. Censorship-it is the control and Inspection-determines if the
examination of Civil, National armed forces, recommendation or the survey was made
Field press, and POWs (Prisoners of War). 3. Social Investigation (SI)
5. Special Operations –counter subversion, M. SECURITY SURVEY VS INSPECTION
sabotage and espionage. 1. Security Survey-is a counterintelligence
Counter subversion-an action that service conducted in order to assist the
counters those clandestine or covert chiefs of office in determining the security
designs to undermine the military, measures required to protect key
economic, psychological moral or political installations from possible sabotage,
strength of a regime. espionage, subversion and unauthorized
Sabotage-it is an action against material, disclosure of or access to classified defense
premises or utilization to their production information or materials.
which interferes with or absolutely the 2. Security Inspection-is a
national security to prepare for or carry on counterintelligence service conducted in
a war. order to determine degree of compliance
Espionage-refers to the collection of secret with established security policies and
information that a government organization procedures.
does not want any outsiders to know. 3. Circumstances Warranting Security
J.COUNTER-INTELLIGENCE INVESTIGATION-it Survey
is an activity which constitutes the value of a. Activation of an officer or unit
work load and includes specific b. Re-activation of an office or unit
investigation of individual and incidence c. Change of mission, personnel or
which for the most part are conducted in an real estates
overt but discrete manner. d. Indications of laxity in security
K. CATEGORIES OF CI MEASURES e. No record of previous security
1. DENIAL MEASURES-secrecy discipline, survey
document security, camouflage and N. CI AGENCIES
concealment, communications security, 1. Individual Soldier- CI operations depend
or military censorship, counter upon the individual soldier’s ability to carry
reconnaissance efforts. out proper security, camouflage, observation
2. DETECTION MEASURES-PSI, Security Tag and reporting procedures.
or Password, Challenge or Password, 2. All units-to deny the enemy information
Reconnaissance about our own forces, activities location and
3. DECEPTION MEASURES-ruse-use of disposition.
escape and evasion, dummy position, 3. Censorship Units- specialized CI function
fabricated information. due to their assigned task.
L. CI MEASURES TO PROTECT INFORMATION: Commander’s responsibility-the
1. Security-freedom from danger or risk commanders of the units are responsible for
2. Security Survey and Inspection (SSI): the planning and execution of all CI measures
Survey-determine the unforeseen defects designed and implemented to safeguard
of a unit and make recommendations for military information, personnel, equipment
unit’s correction or improvement and and installation within commands. The
101
 commander delegates these responsibilities c. Analyze current intelligence (1.) Original Classification Authority for
to his staff. infrastructure trends assignment of top secret classification rest
CI Staff Officer-the commander’s staff office d. Recommend CI targets for exclusively on the head of the department.
for intelligence is charged with the general exploitation This power may however, be delegated to
staff responsibility for the intelligence and e. Recommend specific operation on authorized officers in instances when the
counterintelligence. It is also responsible for specific CI targets necessity for such arises.
the planning and direction of all CI measures f. Recommend population/resources (2.) Derivative classification Authority for
within the command. control measures top secret classification may be granted to
O. CI BRANCH AND FUNCTIONS g. Ensures installation base security those officers who are required to give
1. CI Mission h. Conduct liaison with other agencies comments or responses to a communication
a. Detection-identify the threat that necessitates Top Secret response.
b. Evaluation-analyzing the data plan COUNTER INTELLIGENCE SECURITY b. Specific Persons Authorized to Classify
c. Counter Action and Prevention- MEASURES-INTELLIGENCE IN SECURITY Top secret Matters
recommend counter measures in OPERATIONS 1. Secretary of Nationals Defense.
neutralizing the target A. THREE (3) TYPES OF SECURITY 2. Chief of Staff and its equivalent to the
2. Categories of CI Operations MEASURES: PNP
a. Counter Human Intel (HUMINT)- it seeks 1 Physical Security-is the 3. Major Service Commanders
to overcome enemy attempts to use placement of security 4. Area of unified commands of the PA,
human sources to collect information or to barriers. PNP, and its equivalent to the AFP and PNP.
conduct sabotage and subversion such 2 Personnel Security- practice
as: CI Special Operations; Liaison; of the “need to know” c. Examples of Top Secrets Documents
Counter Security; and CI Screening 3 Document Security- 1. Very important political documents regarding
b. Counter-Imagery Intel (IMINT)- it Handling and used of negotiations for major alliances.
includes actions taken to determine classified matters and 2. Major governmental projects such as proposal to
enemy SIGNT and related enemy war information. adjust the nation’s economy.
capabilities and activities. These actions 3. Military and Police Defense class/plans.
include: Surveillance radar; Photo .THREE SECURITY RESPONSIBILITIES: 4. Capabilities of major successes of intelligence
thermal and infrared systems. Successful 1. Command Responsibility- By training every services.
counter-IMINT operations rely heavily on individual personnel of the organization 5. Compilation of data individually classified as
pattern and movement’s analysis and (PNP) in the importance of security. secrets or lower but which should collectively be in a
evaluation. 2. Individual Responsibility- To know the higher grade.
c. Counter-Signal Intel (SIGINT)- it defense security of security measures. 6. Strategic plan documents overall conduct of war.
determines enemy SIGINT and related 3. Supervising Responsibility- To motive each 7. Intelligence document revealing major
enemy war capabilities and activities; individual personnel in security procedures. intelligence production effort permitting an
assess friendly operations to identify C.FOUR CLASSIFIED MATTERS evaluation by recipients of the success and
patterns, profiles and developments; and 1. Top Secret(green color code)-The capabilities of intelligence agencies.
recommend and analyze counter unauthorized disclosure of it would cause
measures. exceptionally grave damage to the nation. , 2. Secret (red color code)- the unauthorized
3. Functions of CI Personnel politically, economically and militarily. This disclosure of it would endanger national security,
a. Identity insurgent indicators category is reserves for the nation’s closest causes serious injury to the interest and prestige of
b. Construct a database on insurgent secrets and is to be used with grave reserve. the nation or of any government activity, or would be
infrastructure a. Classify Authority a great advantage to a foreign country/nation.
102
a. Authority to Classify- same as top secrets
b. Justification of Secrets Grading
1. It materially influences a major aspect of military
tactics.
2. It involves a novel principle applicable to existing
important projects.
3. It is sufficiently revolutionary to result in major
advance in existing techniques or in the performance
of existing secrets weapons.
4. It is liable to compromise some other projects
already graded.
c. Specific Persons Authorized to Classify Secret
Matters
1. Commanders of Infantry battalions
2. Persons enumerates under Top Secret
3. Special and personnel staff of GHQ.
4. Gen. and Special Staff of Major Service Area
and Unit Commanders.
5. Superintendent of the PMA and PNPA.
6. Commanders of posts, depots station of
separate units.
7. Chief of military mission of group.
8. Armed Forces attached.
9. Commandants of Service Schools.
d. Examples of Secret Documents
1. Those that jeopardize or endanger
intelligence relations of a nation.
2. Those that compromise defense plans,
scientific or technological development.
3. Those that reveal important intelligence
operations.
4. War plans or complete plans for future war
operations not included in top secret.
5. Documents showing disposition of forces.
6. New designs of aircraft projections, tanks,
radar and other devices.
7. Troop movement to operational areas.
8. Hotel plans and estimates.
9. Order of battle information
3. Confidential (blue color code)-the unauthorized
disclosure of it would be prejudicial to the
interest and prestige of the national or
governmental activity or would cause
.administrative embarrassment or unwanted
injury to an individual or would be of
advantage to foreign countries/nations.
a. Justification for Confidential Grading
(1)It is more than a routine modification or logical
improvement of existing materials and is
sufficiently advanced to result in substantial
improvement in the performance of existing
CONFIDENTIAL weapons.
(2)It is sufficiently important potentially to make it
desirable to postpone knowledge of its value
reaching a foreign nation.
(3)It is liable to compromise some other project
already so graded.
b. Specific Authorities to Classify Confidential
Matters- any commissioned
personnel/officer.
c. Examples of Confidential Documents
1. Plans of government projects such as roads,
bridges, building, etc.
2. Routine service reports like operations and
exercise of foreign power.
3. Routine intelligence reports.
4. Certain personnel records, staff members, etc.
4. Restricted (white or no color, yet prior to release,
clearance with the records custodian)-
requires special protection other than those
determined Confidential, Secret, and Top
Secret.
a. Authority for classification- shall be the same
as for Confidential Matters.
b. Reproduction- is authorized.
c. Transmission- shall be through the normal
dissemination system.
d. Destruction- shall be the same as for that of
Confidential Matters.
NATIONAL SECURITY AND ITS THREATS
103
A. BASIC TO NATIONAL SECURITY
National Interest- Each nation, regardless of
creed or form, has their national interest to
protect and to advance. For national interest,
people would willingly go to war to succeed
or perish.
National Interest has been defined in many ways.
But for our purposes, we take the content of
national interest to mean the general and the
continuing end for which a nation acts. The
term “national interest” is used to refer to the
general concept of national security and well-
being. National are what the decision making
body in government determines which
beliefs, matters or dictates of conscience are
important to the maintenance of the nation.
NATIONAL PRINCIPLES AND POLICIES
1. That our country shall be a Republican State.
2. That the defense of the State shall be the
concern of all citizens.
3. That we, as a people, renounce war to further
our national interest.
4. That our government shall promote social
justice.
5. That as a matter of concept, civilian authority is
supreme at all times over the military.
This concept is actualized when the
President assumes at the same time the
position of the Commander-in-Chief of
the AFP.
National Strategy- In furtherance of our national
principles and policies the leaders of our
nation are then able to formulate
strategy.
Generally almost all will define national strategy
as: The Art and Science of developing
and using the political, economic, and
psychological powers of a nation,
together with its armed forces, during
peace and war, to secure national
objectives. It is the long-range plan
 through which a nation applies its
strength towards the attainment of its
objectives.
NATIONAL POWER- the elements of national power
are numerical strength and character of
population, cultural development,
character of government, geographical
location, resources, economic
development and military potential. The
degree to which a nation is strong or
deficient in these elements is normally a
measure of the national power.
COMPONENTS OF NATIONAL POWER
1. Political Strength stems from the character of
the people and from the type and stability
of the government and the sounders of its
foreign policy.
2. Economic Strength stems from a combination
of factor such as geographic location,
climatic conditions, supply of natural
resources, industrial capacity, internal and
external communication systems,
international trade, and the size, health and
technical competence of the population.
3. Cultural Strength from the natural unity, the
social and moral fiber of the people and the
things they believe in, and from the nature
and vigor of national institutions-political,
social, religious, educational, scientific and
cultural.
4. Military Strength is the ability of a nation to
exert pressure by armed force in
furtherance of national policy. It consist of
the strength of all the armed forces in
combination with other elements of national
power, depending heavily on natural
resources, economic strength, a broad
base of war industries and a vigorous.
POLICE PERSONNEL AND RECORDS
MANAGEMENT
Police Personnel Management (Human
Resources Management) may be defined as that area
of management concerned with human relations in
the police organization. As an overview, Police
Personnel Management uses planning, organizing,
directing and controlling of day-to-day activities
involved in procuring, developing and motivating
them and in coordinating their activities to achieve
the aims of the police.
Efficient management of human resources in
any organization can spell the difference between its
success and failure to attain its objectives or goals.
The need for a more efficient management of
human resources is very demanding today. The
success of every organization is for the organization
to overcome the demands in human response
brought about by several factors.
Purpose of Police Personnel Administration
The prime objective of an effective police
personnel administration is the establishment and
maintenance for the public service of a competent
and well-trained police force, under such conditions
of work that this force may be completely loyal to the
interests of the government of all times.
104
Objectives of Personnel Management
The management of human resources is
delegated to the unit of organization, known as
Human Resource Department (HRD). This is to
provide services and assistance needed by the
organizations’ human resource in their employment
relationship with the organization. An important task
of the Human Resource Department is winning
employee’s acceptance of organization’s objectives.
The objectives are:
1. To assist top and line management achieves
the organization’s objective of fostering
harmonious relationship with its human
resource.
2. To acquire capable people and provide them
with opportunities for advancement in
self-development.
3. To assist top management in formulating
policies and programs that will serve the
requirements of the police organization and
administer the same fairly to all members.
4. To provide technical services and assistance
to the operating management in relation to
their personnel functions in promoting
satisfactory work environment.
5. To assist management in training and
developing the human resources of the
organization if it does not have a separate
training department to perform its functions.
6. To see that all police members are treated
equally and in the application of policies,
rules and regulations and in rendering
services to them.
7. To help effect organization development and
institution building effort.
Operative Functions of Police Personnel
The primary function of Personnel
Department is commonly Personnel Operative
Functions. These are the following:
1. Police Personnel Planning – is a study of the
labor supply of jobs, which are composed
with the demands for employees in an
organization to determine future personnel
requirements, which either increase or
decrease. If there is an expected shortage of
personnel the organization may decide to
train and develop present employees and/or
recruit from outside sources.
2. Police Recruitment - is the process of
encouraging police applicant from outside an
organization to seek employment in an
organization. The process of recruitment
consists of developing a recruitment plan,
recruitment strategy formulation job
applicants search, screening of qualified
applicants, and maintaining a waiting list of
qualified applicants.
3. Police Selections (screening) - is the
process of determining the most qualified
police applicant for a given position in the
police organization.
4. Police Placement- is the process of making
police officers adjusted and knowledgeable
in a new job and or working environment.
5. Police Training and Development – refers
to any method used to improve the attitude,
knowledge, and skill or behavior pattern of
an employee for adequate performance of a
given job. It is a day-to-day, year round task.
All police officers on a new position undergo
a learning process given a formal training or
not. Learning is made easier for officers when
the organization provides formal training and
development. It reduces unnecessary waste
of time, materials, man-hours and equipment.
6. Police Appraisal or Performance Rating -
performance rating is the evaluation of the
traits, behavior and effectiveness of a police
officer on the job as determined by work
standards. It is judgmental if it is made a tool
in decision-making for promotion, transfer,
pay increase, termination or disciplinary
actions against police officers. It is
developmental in purpose when the
evaluation is used to facilitate officer’s
improvement in performance or used to
improve recruitment, selection, training and
development of personnel.
7. Police Compensation - Financial
compensation in the form of wages of salaries
constitutes the largest single expenditure for
most organizations. In Metropolitan Manila
and other urban centers, wages of salaries
represent the sole source to meet the basic
needs of food, clothing and shelter. It also
provides the means to attain that standard of
living and economic security that vary in
degrees upon a person’s expectations.
POLICE PERSONNEL PROGRAMS AND
POLICIES
Nature of Personnel Programs
Personnel Programs refers to the activities
programmed to implement the organization
philosophy or creed and the personnel philosophy of
central managers in relation to people so as to
accomplish organizational objectives. It serves as a
fundamental guide for personnel practices and
personnel policies used in an organization for
maintaining harmony between management and
employees. A good personnel program covers all the
operative functions of personnel.
Factor to Considered in Personnel Program
The following factors should be taken into
consideration in the preparation of a personnel
program.
▪ objectives of the organization
▪ organizational philosophy of central
management in relation to personnel,
▪ financial conditions and physical facilities of
the organization
105
▪ cultural background and tradition of the
people
▪ community and employees
▪ governmental factors.
Police Personnel Policies
1. Acquiring competent personnel - includes
human resources planning, job description
and job specification, police recruitment,
selection, placement, transfer, layoffs, and
separation.
2. Holding and retaining competent police
personnel - gives depth and meaning to
good management philosophy, and involves
the granting of fair wages, reasonable
working hours, and other employee benefits
and services. These activities include the
determination of an equitable wage and
maintenance of an incentive system. This area
also concerned with securing greater officer
participation in activities and with
strengthening officer morals and
effectiveness. All these help make the
organization a “good place to work in.”
3. Developing and motivating personnel -
deals with the education of the police officers,
the appraisal of work performance, their
promotion, and the suggestion system, which
enables them to develop so they can rise to
the police organization’s desired standards of
performance.
4. Labor and human relations - involves the
development of harmonious relations
between management on one hand and
individual police officer the on the other
hand. It also concerns the observance and
application of laws and court decisions
affecting human relations, and relationships
with other government law enforcement
agencies.
5. Efficient administration of the program
with adequate budget – this is to achieve a
 favorable climate for police officers. Good
human relations should be the attitude in the
applications, implementation and
interpretation of the organization’s policies,
rules and regulations. The important tools in
this area are records and reports, personnel
research and statistics, and evaluation of the
effects of current policies, activities, and
programs.
POLICE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
Nature of Police Policies
Policies are tools of police management,
which give life and direction to the police program of
activities and set limits within which action is to be
pursued by the personnel concerned. Policies define
the authority and the responsibility of subordinates.
They help the personnel understand their mutual
relationships. They are ahead to guide the men on
the operational level, authority, and responsibility
and to enable them to arrive at sound decisions.
POLICY refers to a general plan of action that
serves as a guide in the operation of the organization.
It makes up the basic framework of management
decisions that set the course what the organization
should follow. It defines the authority and
responsibility of supervisors in their job of directing
group efforts and implementing personnel programs.
Policies form a code of procedure in that they
broadly indicate the best method of conducting any
portion of the work at hand. They assist police
officers in problem solving and decision-making.
While policies must be consistent, they must be
flexible enough to permit adjustments when the need
for change arises.
Types of Police Policies
According to origin, policies are classified
as:
1.Originated Policy - This type of policy comes from
top management level and is intended to set up
guidelines in the operation of the police organization.
2.Appealed Policy - This type of policy is born when
problems arise at the lower levels of the organization
and the man in charge does not know how to meet
the problem. He then appeals to his superiors for
guidelines and for guidance.
1. Imposed Policy - This type of policy comes
from the government in the forms of laws,
administrative orders, and rules and
procedures or contract specifications.
According to their subject matter, policies may be
classified into:
1. General Statement of Principles - policies
stated in broad terms, such as statement of
objectives, philosophy and creed. Others
stress in general terms management traits,
such as fairness in dealing with officers,
understanding and humane treatment of the
work force.
2. Specific Rules - cover specific situations.
They are more direct and are less flexible.
They are more rigid in nature.
Dissemination of Policies
To be effective, personnel policies must be
understood by all concerned including the managers
and supervisors who are to interpret and implement
them to the employees who will be affected by the
policies. Various means are used by communicate
personnel policies to employees. The most common
are police handbooks, manuals, publications,
memoranda, and circulars, bulletin boards, meetings
and conferences.
Police Handbooks - These handbooks are
distributed to all personnel, and contain among other
things, information about the benefits and services
that the organization grants to its officers, the
organization’s history, its organizational structure, its
officers, and other information useful to the officers in
understanding their relationship with the
organization.
106
Police Manual - A policy manual covering all
police personnel policies and procedures, if made
available to managers and supervisors, will be a
great help in their decision-making and employees
relationship.
Memoranda and Circulars - Memoranda and
circulars are another common means of
communicating police policies to all officers. They
can be issued fast and they provide the greatest
assurance of reaching every employee. They are
built in means by which every member of the
organization is reached.
Bulletin Boards - Organizational policies,
rules and regulations, and activities may be typed out
of mimeographed and the posted on bulletin boards.
If strategically located and well managed, bulletin
boards are an effective medium for transmitting
newly issued policies, rules and regulations to police
officers.
Meetings or Conferences - Meeting or
conferences are often held to inform officers about
new policies, their objectives and implementation.
One advantage of this type of policy dissemination is
that it gives the officers the opportunity to ask
questions and request clarification on vague and
doubtful points. It is effective to smaller departments,
as they accommodate small groups and allow the
scheduling of meeting at very convenient hours.
Police Publications - Communication has
gained such importance to and attention by
management in recent years. To meet the needs of
communicating with officers, police organizations
have been spending amount of money on
publications, internal or external.
PERSONNEL PROGRAM
 It refers to the activities programmed to
implement the organizational and personnel
philosophy of central managers in relation to people
so as to accomplish organizational objectives. A
good personnel program covers all the operative
functions of personnel.
OBJECTIVES OF PERSONNEL PROGRAM
1. To maximize the use of human organization.
2. To forecast present and future manpower
requirements.
3. Develop appropriate personnel programs.
4. Develop personnel policies and strategies.
FACTORS CONSIDER IN PERSONNEL PROGRAM
1. Objectives of the organization
2. Organizational philosophy of central management
in relation to personnel
3. Financial conditions and physical facilities of the
organization
4. Cultural background and tradition of the people
GUIDELINES FOR A SATISFACTORY PERSONNEL
PROGRAM
The personnel program becomes the strategy or plan
of the organization to connect the fullest utilization of
its human resources. The personnel program may be
rated as satisfactory when:
1. The human resources policies are written and
observed by all
2. The personnel program has the full support of the
heads and subordinates
3. Research covering organizational policies,
personnel practices, and personnel strategies are
undertake on a continuing basis
4. The organization has definite human resource
procurement plan, recruitment, selection and
placement of employees
5. The organization has a training and development
program for all employees
6. The grievance machinery of the organization is
understood and efficiently
working to the satisfaction of the organization’s
members
7. Continuing researches are made by the
organization on wages and salaries
8. Periodic audit of every employee is made to
discover employees strength and
weaknesses
9. The organization provides substantial employee
benefits and services
10. The organization through its managers maintain
good relations with their
immediate subordinates
PERSONNEL POLICIES
Personnel policies provide standard
assessment or actions when heads have to make a
decision. This will also define the boundary or
limitation of actions to be taken by the heads or
superiors concern. Good personnel policies should
adequately meet the needs of the organization’s
human resources in attaining the purpose of the
department or organization. The policy covers five
areas namely:
1. Acquiring competent personnel
2. Holding and retaining competent
employees
3. Developing and motivating employees
4. Labor and human relations
5. Efficient program administration and
adequate budget
FORMULATING A PERSONNEL PROGRAM
Personnel program is a management guide
for handling its relationship with employees and in
maintaining their cooperation. It is not however, a
remedy for all personnel problems. Its success
depends on how efficiently administered and on the
degree of satisfaction it gives to the employee. For
the personnel program to be effective and increase
satisfaction to employees it should consists the
following requirements:
107
1. It must have a full support from top management
with adequate budget
2. The program must be formulated to meet the
needs of the organization and its objectives
3. As a guide for executive leadership, it must gain
the cooperation and
confidence of managers and supervisors in its
implementation
4. The program must motivate employees for
greatest achievement
5. The organization must have a workable structure
6. Efficient administration by a capable personnel
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
A policy has been defined as a general plan
of action that serves as a guide in the operation of the
organization. It defines the authority and
responsibility of the heads in their work of directing
group efforts and implementing personnel program.
While policies must be consistent they must be
flexible enough to permit adjustments when the need
arises in an organization, why policies are needed?
1. To provide direction to the program of activities
covering the needs of the organization and its human
resources
2. To provide definite guidelines to achieve
consistent treatment for all employees
3. Policies serve as standards of performance
4. Policy statements are needed to allow
subordinates executives to make fair and consistent
decisions on recurring problems
5. To help build employee enthusiasm and loyalty
CHARACTERISTICS OF GOOD POLICIES
1. It must be developed through the active
participation of top management
2. It must be in accordance with the law
3. The rules, regulations, and procedures will
provide the interpretation
regarding its implementation
4. It must be long range, but flexible to a certain
degree
5. It must define the authority and responsibility for
its administration
6. It should be easily comprehend
7. It must cover all important points relevant to the
organization’s objectives
8. It must be widely acceptable, responsible and
enforceable
9. It must be communicated to all concerned
IMPORTANCE OF PERSONNEL POLICIES
1. Employees orientation and training
2. Administering disciplinary action
3. Handling complaints and grievances
4. Delegation and centralization of responsibility and
authority
5. Enabling the supervisors and managers to
develop confidence in themselves
in their day-to-day interactions with their
subordinates
JOB ANALYSIS
It is the identification of the different jobs in
an organization from one another in which each
category is given a specific title.It is the determining
of duties, responsibilities and skills pertinent to each
job category by analyzing each position in terms of
duties and responsibilities involved. This also
includes inter-relation of different job.
IMPORTANCE OF STUDYING JOB ANALYSIS
1. This will help the superior or heads to evaluate the
member of their organization such as qualifications,
performance, and worker’s conditions.
2. To learn the methods and mechanics of analyzing
the different jobs in the organization and be able to
write job descriptions and job specifications.
3. To comprehend the importance of knowing the
duties, responsibilities and requirements of each job
as a tool in employee selection and hiring. This also
includes the appraisal of the employee’s job
performance.
METHODS IN JOB ANALYSIS
1. The questionnaire method each employee is given
a set of questions. In answering this, he describes his
job, its operation, his duties and responsibilities.
Questionnaire are commonly standardized or
structured in such a way that those filling them up can
either check items that apply to a job or rate items in
terms of their relevance to a particular job.
2. The interview method: It is frequently used in
gathering facts about jobs performed in the
organization. The job analyst usually conducting
background investigation either in the work place or
directly to the office of the head.
3. The questionnaire and interview method: The
primary purpose is to eliminate the possibility of
error on the part of the job analyst information
received may display discrepancy.
4. The observation and interview method: This could
be conducted either structured or unstructured
visitation to the work place.
POLICE JOB DESCRIPTION
After a job is analyzed, the facts about it are
gathered, summed up, and recorded in the job
description and job specifications.
Job description may be defined as an abstract
of information derived from the job analysis report,
describing the duties performed, the skills, the
training, and experience required the
responsibilities involved, the condition under which
the job is done, and relation of the job to the other
job in the organization.
POLICE RECRUITMENT, SELECTION, AND
PLACEMENT
On Police Recruitment
The first step in the recruiting procedure, and
the one that should receive greatest emphasis, is that
of attracting well-qualified applicants. The best
selection devices available are of little value if the
108
recruiting effort has failed to attract candidates of
high caliber. Widespread publicity directed at the
particular element of the population which it is hoped
will be attracted to the examination is the best
method of seeking outstanding applicants.
Recruitment in the police service is
dependent on the availability of national or regional
quota of the PNP, which is determined by the
NAPOLCOM.
Standard Policy on Selection and Appointment
There shall be a standard policy for the
selection of policy personnel throughout the
Philippines in order to strengthen the police service
and lay the groundwork for police
professionalization.
The general qualification for initial
appointment to the police service shall be based on
the provisions of Republic Act No. 8551, which states:
No person shall be appointed as uniformed
member of the PNP unless he or she possesses the
following minimum qualifications:
1. A citizen of the Philippines;
2. A person of good moral conduct;
3. Must have passed the psychiatric or
psychological, drug and physical tests to be
administered by the PNP or by any government
hospital accredited by the Commission for the
purpose of determining physical and mental
health;
4. Must possess a formal baccalaureate degree
from a recognized institution of learning;
5. Must be eligible in accordance with the
standards set by the Commission;
6. Must not have been dishonorably discharged
from military employment or dismissed for
cause from any civilian position in the
Government;
 7. Must not have been convicted by final
judgment of an offense or crime involving
moral turpitude;
8. Must be at least one meter and sixty-two
centimeters (1.62m) in height for male and one
meter and fifty-seven centimeters (1.57m) for
female;
9. Must weigh not more or less than five
kilograms (5kgs) from the standard weight
corresponding to his or her height, age, and
sex; and
10. For a new applicant, must not be less than
twenty-one (21) not more than thirty (30) years
of age. Except for the last qualification, the
above-enumerated qualifications shall be
continuing in character and an absence of any
of them at any given time shall be a ground for
separation or retirement from the service:
Provided, that PNP members who are already
in the service upon the effectivity of these
Implementing Rules and Regulations shall be
given five (5) years to obtain the minimum
educational qualification and one (1) year to
satisfy the weight requirement.
For the purpose of determining compliance
with the requirements on physical and mental health,
as well as the non-use of prohibited or regulated
drugs, the PNP by itself or through a government
hospital accredited by the Commission shall conduct
regular psychiatric, psychological, drug and physical
tests randomly and without notice.
After the lapse of the reglamentary period for
the satisfaction of a specific requirement, current
members of the PNP who shall fail to satisfy any of the
requirements enumerated under this Section shall be
separated from the service if they are below fifty (50)
years of age and have served in Government for less
than twenty (20) years or retired if they are from the
age of fifty (50) and above and have served the
Government for at least twenty (20) years without
prejudice in either case to the payment of benefits
they may be entitled to under existing laws. (Section
14, RA 8551 – IRR)
On Selection Procedures
The purpose of the selection process is to
secure these candidates who have the highest
potential for developing into good policemen. The
process involves two basic functions. The first
function is to measure each candidate’s qualifications
against whose ideal qualification that are established
chiefly through job analysis. The second function,
because of the comparative nature of the merit
system, is to rank the candidates relatively on the
basis of their qualifications.
The Screening Procedures
Preliminary Interview - the applicant shall
be interviewed personally by the personnel officer. If
the applicant qualifies with respect to the
requirements of citizenship, education and age, he
shall be required to present the following:
▪ Letter of application if none has been
submitted
▪ An information sheet
▪ A copy of his picture (passport size)
▪ Birth Certificate
▪ Transcript of scholastic records and/ or
diploma
▪ Fingerprint card, properly accomplished.
▪ Clearance papers from the local police
department PNP provincial headquarters,
city or municipal court and city or
provincial prosecutor’s office and his
hometown police department, NBI, and
others that may be required.
Physical and Medical Examination - in
order to determine whether or not the applicant is in
109
good health, free from any contagious diseases and
physically fit for police service, he shall undergo a
thorough physical and medical examination to be
conducted by the police health officer after he
qualifies in the preliminary interview.
Physical Agility Test - the Screening
Committee shall require the applicant to undergo a
physical agility test designed to determine whether
or not he possess the required coordination strength,
and speed of movement necessary for police service.
The applicant shall pass the tests like Pull-ups-6 Push-
ups-27, Two minutes sit-ups-45, Squat jumps-32, and
Squat thrusts-20
The Police Screening Committee may
prescribe additional requirements if facilities are
available.
Medical Standards for Police Candidates
1. General Appearance – the applicant must be
free from any marked deformity, from all
parasite or systematic skin disease, and from
evidence of intemperance in the use of
stimulants or drugs. The body must be well
proportioned, of good muscular
development, and show careful attention to
personal cleanliness: Obesity, muscular
weakness or poor physique must be rejected.
Girth of abdomen should not be more than
the measurement of chest at rest.
2. Nose, Mouth and Teeth – Obstruction to free
breathing, chronic cataract, or very offensive
breath must be rejected. The mouth must be
free from deformities in conditions that
interfere with distinct speech or that pre-
dispose to disease of the car, nose or throat.
There shall be no disease or hypertrophy of
tonsil or thyroid enlargement. Teeth must be
clean, well cared for and free from multiple
 cavities. Missing teeth may be supplied by
crown or bridge work, where site of teeth
makes this impossible, rubber denture will
be accepted. At least twenty natural teeth
must be present.
3. Genitals – must be free from deformities and
from varicole, hyrocole, and enlargement of
the testicles, stricture of urine, and retained
testicles. Any acute and all venereal diseases
of these organs must be rejected.
4. Varicose Veins - a marked tendency to their
formation must be rejected.
5. Arms, Legs, Hands and Feet – must be free
from infection of the joints, sprains, stiffness
or other conditions, such as flat foot, long
nails or hammer toes which would prevent
the proper and easy performance of duty.
First (index) second (middle), and third (ring)
fingers and thumb must be present in their
entirely. The toe must be the same.
6. Eyes – the applicant must be free from color
blindness, and be able to read with each eye
separately from standard test type at a
distance of twenty feet. Loss of either eye,
chronic inflammation of the lids, or
permanent abnormalities of either eye must
be rejected, 20/20 or 20/30 in one eye, with
binocular vision of 20/30.
7. Respiration – must be full, easy, regular, the
respiratory murmur must be clear and
distinct over the lungs and no disease of the
respiratory organ is present.
8. Circulation – The action of the heart must be
uniform, free and steady, it’s rhythm and the
heart from organ changes. Blood Pressure –
systolic maximum 135; diastolic 90; pulse
pressure 15 to 50. Brain and nervous system
must be free from defects.
9. Kidneys – must be healthy and urine normal.
Character and Background Investigation -
the Screening Committee shall cause a confidential
investigation of the character and from among
various sources.
Psychological and/or Neuro-Psychiatric
Test - in order to exclude applicants who are
emotionally or temperamentally unstable, psychotic,
or suffering from any mental disorder, the applicant
shall take a psychological and/or neuro-psychiatric
test to be administered by the NBI, the PNP, or other
duly recognized institution offering such test after he
has qualified and met all the requirements above.
The Oral Interview - the Screening
Committee shall interview the qualified applicants for
suitability for police work. The interview shall aid in
determining appearance, likeableness, and affability,
attitude toward work, outside interest, forcefulness,
conversational ability, and disagreeable mannerism.
POLICE APPOINTMENT
Any applicant who meets the general
qualifications for appointment to police service and
who passes the tests required in the screening
procedures shall be recommended for initial
appointment and shall be classified as follows:
1. Temporary – if the applicant passes through
the waiver program as provided in under R.A
8551.
2. Probationary – if the applicant passes
through the regular screening procedures.
3. Permanent – if the applicant able to finish the
required field training program for
permanency.
Appointment in the PNP shall be affected in the
following manner:
A. PO1 to SPO4 – appointed by the PNP
Regional Director for regional personnel or
by the Chief of the PNP for National Head
110
Quarter’s personnel and attested by the Civil
Service Commission (CSC)
B. Inspector to Superintendent – appointed by
the Chief PNP as recommended by their
immediate superiors and attested by the Civil
Service Commission (CSC)
C. Sr. Supt to Dep. Dir. Gen. – Appointed by
the President upon the recommendation of
the Chief PNP with the endorsement of the
Civil Service Commission (CSC) and with
confirmation by the Commission on
Appointment (CA).
D. Director General – appointed by the
President from among the most senior
officers down to the rank of Chief
Superintendent in the service subject to the
confirmation of the Commission on
Appointment (CA). Provided, that the C/PNP
shall serve a tour of duty not exceeding four
(4) years. Provided further, that in times of
war or other national emergency declared by
congress, the President may extend such tour
of duty.
Waiver for Appointment - Waivers for initial
appointment to the police service shall be governed
by Section 15 of Republic Act 8551, IRR.
Appointment by Lateral Entry -In general, all
original appointments of Commissioned Officers
(CO) in the PNP shall commenced with the rank of
inspector to include those with highly technical
qualifications applying for the PNP technical services,
such as dentist, optometrist, nurses, engineers, and
graduates of forensic sciences. Doctors of Medicine,
members of the Bar and Chaplains shall be appointed
to the rank of Senior Inspector in their particular
technical services. Graduates of the PNPA shall be
automatically appointed to the initial rank of
Inspector. Licensed Criminologist may be appointed
to the rank of Inspector to fill up any vacancy.
POLICE TRAINING
The Need for Police Training
Organized training is the means by which
officers are provided with the knowledge and the
skills required in the performance of their multiple,
complex duties. In order that the recruit officer may
commence his career with a sound foundation of
police knowledge and techniques, it is most
important that the entrance level training he soundly
conceived, carefully organized and well-presented.
Training and the Changes in Police Works
During the past decades tremendous changes
in police work have occurred. Advances in
technology of communications and equipment,
public relations and employee relations as well as
total evolution in the whole social structure have
made a law enforcement work more complex and
difficult to pursue. The ordinary officer must be
briefed and oriented on new changes and
developments that affect his job and the recruit must
be given a new solid foundation contemporary with
the needs of the time. Policemen do not stay trained.
If they do not forget what they have learned, it is
continually made absolute by improved technology
and social changes, and requires frequent renewal to
keep it current and useful.
Standards for Police Training
All training programs operated by law
enforcement agencies should limit their enrolment to
law enforcement officers. Training courses should be
set-up, prescribed units of instruction, and arranged
a time schedule. Practical recruit training
subsequent to employment should be provided.
Pre-and-post employment university training.
Responsibility of Training
The training of police officers shall be the
responsibility of the PNP in coordination with the
Philippine Public Safety College (PPSC) which shall
be the premier educational institution for the training
of human resources in the field of law enforcement
(PNP, BFP, BJMP), subject to the supervision of the
NAPOLCOM.
Types of Police Training Programs
The following are the training programs in the police
service:
▪ Basic Recruit Training
▪ Field Training
▪ In-Service Training programs
▪ Department In-service training programs
▪ National and International Conventions on
Policing
The Basic Recruit Training – the most basic of
all police training. It is a prerequisite for permanency
of appointment.
The Basic Recruit Training shall be in
accordance with the programs of instructions
prescribed by the PPSC and the NAPOLCOM subject
to modifications to suit local conditions. This course
is conducted within not less than six (6) months. A
training week shall normally consist of 40 hours of
scheduled instructions.
Full time attendance in the Basic Recruit
Training – Attendance to this type of training is full
time basis. However, in cases of emergency, recruits
maybe required to render service upon certification
of the Regional Director or the City or Municipal
Chief of Police the necessity of such service.
Completion and Certification of Training –
After the Basic Recruit Training, the Regional Director
shall certify that the police recruits have completed
the training and has satisfied all the requirements for
police service.
111
The PNP Field Training – is the process by
which an individual police officer who is recruited
into the service receives formal instruction on the job
for special and defined purposes and performs actual
job functions with periodic appraisal on his
performance and progress.
Under R.A 8551, all uniformed members of
the PNP shall undergo a field training program
involving actual experience and assignment in patrol,
traffic and investigation as a requirement for
permanency of their appointment. The program shall
be for twelve (12) months inclusive of the Basic
Recruit Training Course for non-officers and the
Officer Orientation Course or Officer Basic Course for
officers. (Section 20, RA 8551 – IRR)
The In-Service Training Programs
▪ Junior Leadership Training – for PO1 to PO3
▪ Senior Leadership Training – for SPO1 to
SPO4
▪ Police Basic Course (PBC) – preparatory for
OBC – for senior police officers
▪ Officers Basic Course (OBC) – for Inspectors
to Chief Inspectors
▪ Officers Advance Course (OAC) – for Chief
Inspectors to Sn Superintendent
▪ Officer Senior Education Course (OSEC) –
Superintendent and above
▪ Directorial Staff Course (DSC) – for directors
and above.
POLICE APPRAISAL
Appraisal refers to the process of measuring
the performance of people in achieving goals and
objectives. It is also known as “performance
evaluation system”.
Purposes of Police Appraisal
 1. It serves as guide for promotion, salary
increase, retirement, and disciplinary
actions.
2. It increases productivity and efficiency of
police works.
3. It assimilate supervision
4. It informs the officer of the quality of his work
for improvements
Uses of Police Appraisal
Police appraisal can be useful for personal
decision-making in the following areas:
1. Eligibility to be hired
2. Salary adjustments
3. Determining potential for promotion
4. Evaluation of probationary officers
5. Identification of training needs
6. Isolating supervisory weaknesses
7. Validating selection techniques
8. Reduction in ranks (demotion)
9. Dismissal from service and other disciplinary
actions.
PNP Appraisal System
The Performance Evaluation in the police
service is the responsibility of the NAPOLCOM,
which shall issue the necessary rules and regulation
for the orderly administration of the appraisal
process. Such performance evaluation shall be
administered in a manner as to foster the
improvement of every individual police efficiency
and behavioral discipline as well as the promotion of
the organization’s effectiveness.
The rating system shall be based on the
standards set by the NAPOLCOM and shall consider
results of annual physical, psychological and neuro-
psychiatric examinations.
POLICE PROMOTION
Promotion is a system of increasing the rank
of a member of the police service. It has the following
objectives:
1. To invest a member of the police force with
the degree of authority necessary for the
effective execution of police duties.
2. To place the police officer in a position of
increased responsibility where he can make
full use of his capabilities.
3. To provide and promote incentives, thus
motivating greater efforts of all members of
the police force, which will gradually
improve efficiency in police works.
Under the law, the NAPOLCOM shall
establish a system of promotion for uniformed and
non-uniformed members of the PNP, which shall be
based on:
1. Merit – includes length of service in the
present rank, and qualification.
2. Seniority
3. Availability of vacant position.
The promotion shall be gender fair which
means women in the PNP shall enjoy equal
opportunity for promotion as that of men.
Preferences for Promotion
1. Appropriate Eligibility - Whenever two or
more persons who are next in rank,
preference shall be given to the person who
is the most competent and qualified and who
has the appropriate eligibility.
2. Competency and Vacancy - When
competency, qualification, and eligibility are
equal, preference shall be given to the
qualified member in the organizational unit
where the vacancy occurs.
3. Seniority - When all the foregoing conditions
have been taken into account, and still the
members in the next rank have the same
112
merit and qualification, preference shall be
given to the most senior officer.
Factors in Selection for Promotion
1. Efficiency of Performance – as an aid to fair
appraisal of the candidates’ proficiency, the
performance-rating period shall be
considered. Provided, that in no instance
shall a candidate be considered for
promotion unless he had obtained a rating of
at least “satisfactory”.
2. Education and Training – educational
background which includes completion of in-
service training courses, academic studies,
training grants and the like.
3. Experience and Outstanding
Accomplishment – this includes
occupational history, work experience and
other accomplishment worthy of
commendation.
4. Physical Character and Personality – the
factors of physical fitness and capacity as well
as attitude and personality traits in so far as
they bear on the nature of the rank and/or
position to be filled. This means that the
candidate should have no derogatory records
which might affect integrity, morality and
conduct.
5. Leadership Potential – the capacity and
ability to perform the duties required in the
new or higher position and good qualities for
leadership.
POLICE ASSIGNMENT
Police assignment is the process of
designating a police officer at a particular function,
duty or responsibility.
Purpose of Police Assignment
The purpose of police assignment is to ensure
systematic and effective utilization of all the members
of the force.

Power to make designation or assignment
The Chief of PNP (CPNP), Regional Director
(RD), Provincial Director (PD), and the City or
Municipal Chief of Police (COP) can make
designation or assignment of the police force with in
their respective levels. They shall have the power to
make designations or assignments as to who among
the police officers shall head and constitute various
offices and units of the police organization. The
assignment of the members of the local police
agency shall be in conformity with the career
development program especially during the
probationary period. Thereafter, shall be guided by
the principle of placing the right man in the right job
after proper classification has been made.
Criteria in Police Assignment
1. Those possessing the general qualifications
for police duties without technical skills may
be assigned to positions where any personnel
can acquire proficiency within considerably
short period of time.
2. Those possessing skills acquired by previous
related experiences should be assigned to
the corresponding positions.
3. Those possessing highly technical skills with
adequate experience and duly supported by
authoritative basis shall be given preferential
assignment to the corresponding positions,
which call for highly technical trained police
officers. (Misassignment of personnel falling
under this criteria constitute a serious neglect
of duty of the C/PNP, RD, or the COP, in the
exercise of his administrative function)
4. Those selected to undergo further studies in
specialized courses shall be chosen solely on
the basis of ability, professional preparation
and aptitude.
5. Qualifications of the police officers shall be
examined annually to ascertain newly
acquired skills, specialties, and proficiencies.
6. Those with physical limitation incurred while
in the performance of duties should be
assigned where they can be best used in
accordance with the requirements of the
force.
7. Assignments and reassignments of the police
officers from one unit to another shall be the
prerogative of the authority.
8. To give well rounded training and
experience to police recruits, tour of duties in
various assignments during the probationary
period shall be in accordance with Republic
Act 8551.
POLICE INSPECTION
The purpose of police inspection is to
ascertain the standard policies and procedures,
review and analyze the performance, activities and
facilities affecting operations and to look into the
morale, needs and general efficiency of the police
organization in maintaining law and order.
Types of Police Inspection
1. Authoritative Inspection – those conducted by
the head of subordinate units in a regular
basis.
2. Staff Inspection – those conducted by the staff
for and in behalf of the Chief PNP or superior
officers in command of various units or
departments.
Nature of Police Inspection
1. Internal Affairs – inspection on internal affairs
embraces administration, training, operation,
intelligence, investigation, morale and
discipline as well as the financial condition of
the police organization.
2. External Affairs – it embraces the community
relationship of the organization, the crime
and vice situation of the locality, and the
prevailing public opinion concerning the
integrity and reputation of the personnel.
113
Authority to Inspect
In the PNP, the following are the authority to
conduct inspection:
1. NAPOLCOM or its representative
2. PNP Chief or his designated representative
3. PNP Director for Personnel or his
representative
4. PNP Regional Director or his representative
5. City/Municipal Chief of Police or his
representative
6. Internal Affairs Service (IAS under RA 8551)
The inspecting officer/s shall examine, audit,
inspect police agencies in accordance with existing
standards and with the following objectives:
1. To take note or discover defects and
irregularities
2. To effect corrections on minor defects being
discovered
3. To bring to the attention of and recommend to
the concerned officers for appropriate actions
on defects noted.
Where the irregularity noted during
inspection is serious as to warrant administrative
charges against a police officer, the inspecting officer
shall immediately file the necessary charge or
charges before the appropriate disciplinary action
offices.
POLICE DISCIPLINARY MECHANISM
Aside from higher police management levels
that can impose disciplinary actions against
subordinates, the following also serves as
disciplinary mechanisms in the police service:
Administrative Disciplinary Powers of the
Local Chief Executive (LCE) - The City and
Municipal Mayors shall have the power to impose,
after due notice and summary hearings, disciplinary
penalties for minor offenses committed by members
of the PNP assigned to their respective jurisdictions
as provided in Section 41 of Republic Act No. 6975, as
amended by Section 52 of Republic Act No. 8551.
PLEB - the PLEB (People's Law Enforcement
Board) is the central receiving entity for any citizen's
complaint against PNP members. As such, every
citizen's complaint, regardless of the imposable
penalty for the offense alleged, shall be filed with the
PLEB of the city or municipality where the offense was
allegedly committed. Upon receipt and docketing of
the complaint, the PLEB shall immediately determine
whether the offense alleged therein is grave, less
grave or minor.
Should the PLEB find that the offense alleged
is grave or less grave, the Board shall assume
jurisdiction to hear and decide the complaint by
serving summons upon the respondent within three
(3) days from receipt of the complaint. If the PLEB
finds that the offense alleged is minor, it shall refer
the complaint to the Mayor or Chief of Police, as the
case may be, of the city or municipality where the
PNP member is assigned within three (3) days upon
the filing thereof.
If the city or municipality where the offense
was committed has no PLEB, the citizen's complaint
shall be filed with the regional or provincial office of
the Commission (NAPOLCOM) nearest the residence
of the complainant.
The Need for Police Records
A police department is only as good as its
records keeping abilities. The effectiveness of the
police department is directly related to the quality of
its records. They are the primary means of
communications among the members of the police
department and have as their purpose the integration
of the various department units into an integrated
organization for accomplishing the police task.
Records are essential in the efficient performance of
routine duties, in the wise direction of the police
effort, in supervision and control of personnel, and in
the determination of departmental policies.
Brief History of Filing and Records Storage
Records and management of them have
existed in one form or another since written history
began. Many original tablets, parchment, and
manuscripts of great historical value have come down
through the ages and how are carefully guarded in
museums all over the worlds. Without some methods
of preservations, most of these valuable documents
would have remained unknown. Possession of many
of them, however, is the result of chance, as record-
bearing stones and tablets have been found buried in
the loose earth and many places, with no attempt of
preservation.
One of the most common methods used by
the ancients for the filing of their papers was that of
keeping them in a stone or earth ware pot. Many bits
of historical evidence have been preserved on wax,
stones parchment or in the urn. A modern day
application of this custom is the widespread practice
of sealing letters, pictures, newspapers, and other
memorabilia of the current day on the cornerstone of
a new building.
Many items used in offices today have a long
history. These items are discussed below:
1. Spindle File – The Spindle, on with
papers nay be impaled, appeared 15th
century.
2. Pigeonhole File – Persons who disliked
spindle folded or rolled their papers,
wrote names or subjects of the outside
and place the roll in holes in rolltop
desks or in a series of separate boxlike
openings in a cabinet.
3. Bellow File – The bellow files are used
as sorters. It appeared at about 1860.
Each lettered compartment, the
114
alphabetic bellows files is sometimes
used as sorters.
4. Box-File – in 1875, the box file shaped-
like a book and opening from the side
was invented. Each box contained a set of
sheets having extended labels bearing
the letters of the alphabet. The box file is
still popular for a limited account of
correspondence and especially for home
use.
5. Shannon File – Named after its inventor.
The Shannon file originated in 1880 in
response to a need of greater security of
papers. The Shannon file consisted of a
double side-opening arch, mounted on a
board with a drawer front on the end.
Papers to be filed were perforated along
the upper edge and then placed on the
arches according to the system or
arrangement being used. The Shannon
file was suitable only for small amounts of
correspondence. The present day
Shannon arch-board filed operate on the
same principle, but they are designed for
temporary storage.
6. Vertical File – Vertical filing of papers
was in all probability first suggested by
Dr. Nathaniel S. Reosenay, secretary of
the Charity Organization Society of
Buffalo, New York. His long experience
with card filing made him believed the
same principle might be applied to filing
papers (placing them on edge behind
guides). He advanced the idea in 1892.
The following year, several firms
demonstrated vertical files at the World’s
Fair in Chicago. Large crowds gathered
before the exhibits; but the general
opinion was, “It will never work; you
cannot stand papers on edge; and if you
leave them loose. They will lose.” Today,
 vertical filing is generally recognized as
the best method of the majority of
business records. The first files were
built of wood in horizontal sections, but
about 1900, the first steel files appeared
in vertical sections.
Records management varies greatly from
organization. In some, records are handled very
informally because their volume is small. At the
opposite extreme is the careful control of all key
records under the direction of a record manager.
This is a position of great responsibility because it
includes working with records from their creation to
their final disposition.\
Classification of Records
The classification of records is important from
the management view because the classification
frequently determines the kinds of filing system used,
the type of equipment require, and the arrangement
of the records in the system. Records can be
classified in several ways. Some managers classify
records into two basic types: Transportation
documents and reference documents. Other
managers classify records into two other basic types:
external communications and internal
communications.
External Communications - Written
communications between organizations, between
customers/ client and the organization, between
buyer and supplier and between the organization
and various branches of the government are the most
notable examples of external communications.
Further examples are public service or public
relation message, (the reply received after writing to
a business of information) and telephone massages
(received orally, but written on a message from for a
record and after confirmed in writing by a letter).
Internal Communications - Examples of
internal communications are communications
between an organization and employees (such as
payroll, records, bulletins and regulations) and
communications among an organizations department
(such as inventory control records, interoffice
memoranda, and reports. Also in the internal
communications categories are plans for future
productions or services and records of equipment
and assists owned).
With the Industrial Revolution, the rapid
movements in production technology, the
introduction of the factory system, and the changes in
forms of business ownership, firms grow in size and
scope of operations. Competition become keener;
finance production, marketing, and other functions
vied for management attention. An awareness of the
responsibilities workers spend a great deal of time
reading, analyzing, writing and summarizing
business letters and interoffice memoranda.
Reference documents also include reports and
studies (formal and informal). Telegrams, printed
matters (catalog, pamphlets, and brochures) and
technical pieces (engineering specification,
advertising copy, and galley proofs) are also
classified as reference documents.
The Record Cycle
Record may differ from each other in
construction or contents, but each follows a common
cycle (or path) through its life. The life span of a
record from creation to final disposition is called the
record cycle. Whether you are considering a simple
one-copy payroll check, a complex ten-copy report,
or a recorded cassette tape – the record cycle is after
referred to as the “birth-through-death” cycle.
1. Creation
2. Classification
3. Storage
4. Retrieval
5. Purging or retention
6. Transfer
115
7. Archival Storage or Disposition
If an organization has no plan for seeing that
all records flow smoothly through the record cycle, it
will be faced with more of the following problems,
any one which can severely drain of profits.
• An unmanageable tangle of papers within
the office
• Wasted clerical effort searching for
information.
• Loss of important operating information
• Extravagant use of operating information.
• Possible loss of key information in
defending the company against legal
actions or governmental inquiries.
Poor records management also creates chaos
and wastes a tremendous amount of time and money.
Such mismanagement is characterized by:
• Improper control of records creation.
• Free access by anyone at any time to the
files.
• No control over records taken from the
files.
• No plans for disposition of absolute
records.
• Retention of unnecessary records.
• No plans for retention of needed records.
Proper records management provides
information, instantaneously and streamlines the
operation of any organization. The information
contained in the filed records is the lifeblood of any
office. The person who is responsible for the orderly
arrangement and control of those records has one of
the most responsible positions in any offices.
Records Storage
Although filing and records management are
sometimes used interchangeable, storage is only one
phase in the management of a record. Material is
placed in the files because it may be useful in the
future-to help information too complicated to be
trusted to memory, to assist departments in
communicating with each other, to substantiate
claims, and to provide a record of the past, to provide
information useful fro legal purposes. The filler,
therefore, must be able to find quickly any
information contained in the stored records.When a
record is created and is ready for filing, unnecessary
working papers or rough drafts used in its creation
should be destroyed. Excessive duplicate copies
should be avoided and papers of temporary value
should be prominently marked for destruction before
they are put into files so that the files do not jumped
with duplicates and records of little or no value. This
is a process of control that is continued as papers are
dated and time stamped upon receipt, started
through the work flow from office to office, and stored
for retrieval when needed.
Efficient records control includes:
1. Standardizing the purchase of equipment and
supplies to allow their usage anywhere in the
organizations.
2. Training personnel
3. Following standard procedures of storage
and control.
Terminology of Storage
Filing terminology may be confusing to
someone who is not familiar with it. Understanding
the naming of records control and being able to
analyze the various systems of storage available
require knowledge of the terms used. The definition
given in the following paragraphs will help in
understanding.
1. Filing – Filing is the actual placement of
materials in a storage container, generally a
folder, according to a plan. It includes the
process of classifying, coding, arranging, and
storage systematically so that they may be
located quietly when needed.
2. Filing Manual – A filing manual is an
instructional book containing detailed
information about various phases of filing and
records management including rules for the
procedures used. Illustrations of those
procedures and examples of clerical details,
such as folder labeling, typing style, and
material used, are usually included in the
manual.
3. Procedures – Procedures are series of steps
for the orderly arrangement or records which
include: alphabet, geographic, numeric,
subject of chronologic.
4. System – The word system as used in records
storage means any plan of filing devised by a
filing equipment manufacturer. System has a
broader meaning in management circles.
5. Classifying – Mentally determining the name
of subject or number of which a specific
record is to be filed is called classifying.
6. Indexing – Another method of classifying.
7. Coding – Making an identifying mark on the
item to be stored to indicate what
classifications it is to be filed is called coding.
Coding may be done by underlining,
checking, circling, or marking the record in
some other way. When a record does not
need to classify or re-index to determine
where it should be refilled because the
original code mark remains on it.
8. Unit – The names, initials, or words used in
determining the alphabetic order of field
materials are called units. The name Joan C.
116
Brown, for example has three units. Brown is
the first, Joan is the second, and C is the third.
9. Cross Reference – A cross reference is a
notation put into a file to indicate that a
record to not store in that file but in the file
specified on the cross-reference. A cross-
reference is somewhat like a directional sign.
It tells the filer or searcher where to find the
needed material.
10. Guide – Dividers in filing equipment are
called guides because in formation on them
serves as guide to the eye of filing and
locating stored items. A primary guide
introduces a special section that falls within
the alphabetic range of the primary guide it
fallows (such as A section devoted to a
special subject applications, or a special
name group such as names beginning with
the word General). An OUT guide is a heavy
divider that replaced a folder in the file when
the folder is temporarily removed.
11. Folder – The container in which papers or
materials are kept in a filing cabinet is called
a folder. Popular materials used in making
folders, are manila, Kraft, plastic and
pressboard. A miscellaneous folder is a
folder that contains has not accumulated is
sufficient volume being removed to its won
specially labeled folder known as an
individual.
Organization of a Centralized Record System
Depending upon the size and needs of the
police force, the Chief of police shall maintain an
adequate and centralized records system by
organizing in his force an efficient records and
communication units. The centralization of records in
the police organization brings together at one point
all information concerning police activities, and it is
trough centralization that the various line functions of
the police organization are coordinated.
Functions and Uses of Records
1. It measure police efficiency,
2. It present the community’s crime picture,
3. It assist in assigning and promoting
personnel,
4. It identify individuals,
5. It provide a basis for property accountability,
6. It control Investigation,
7. It can make information available to the
public,
8. It increase efficiency in traffic control,
9. It assist the courts and prosecutors,
10. It assist in evaluating control services,
11. It coordinate custodial services,
12. It integrate the department,
13. It furnish data for the budget,
14. It establish responsibility,
15. It reveal unusual problems,
16. It aid in the apprehension of criminals.
17. It assist other police agencies,
18. It provide the basis for compilation of police
statistics,
19. Effective employment of personnel and
equipment,
20. Future references and basis of action.
Incidents to be Recorded
1. Violations of laws and ordinances,
2. All calls in which any member of the police
force dispatched or takes official action,
3. All legal papers handled such as warrant of
arrest, subpoenas, summonses, citations and
the like,
4. Cases of missing and found persons, animals
and property,
5. Accidents which require police actions,
6. All personal injuries, bodies found and
suicides,
7. Any damage to property
8. All cases in which a police officer is involved,
9. All arrests made,
10. Miscellaneous cases, general and special
orders and all other incidents that need to be
recorded.
Mechanics of Good Report
1. It should present a chronological sequence of
events.
2. It should be typed written or computerized.
3. It should provide complete data of victim or
suspect.
4. Abbreviations should be avoided except
those that are commonly known.
5. It should be brief but clear.
6. Every incident should be written in separate
report.
7. It should be accurate and state facts and not
opinions.
8. It should answer the 5W’s and 1H.
Types of Police Records
Police Records are classified into the following:
1. Case Records
2. Arrest and Booking Records
3. Identification Records
4. Administrative Records
5. Miscellaneous Records
The Case Records
A case of records is composed of two categories:
1. Complainant/Assignment Sheet which reflects all
information regarding complains and reports
received by the police from the citizens and other
agencies, or actions initiated by the police.
2. Investigation Report, which contains the findings
of an action taken by the investigating officer based
on inquiries made and by obtaining the available
facts of the incidents.
The Arrest and Booking Records
117
This record maintains the arrest and jail booking
report, which is required for all persons arrested. It
shall bear an arrest number for each arrest made.
The Identification Record
Identification record is the third major
division of police records. Fingerprint records are
the heart identification system. It provides positive
identification and the police must supplement it with
a record of physical characteristics and in some cases
a photograph of the criminal. Identification records
have their own number series: an identification
number is assigned to each criminal to identify
records relating to him.
The Administrative Record
These are records required in the
management of the department personnel and
designed to aid in assignment, promotion, and
disciplinary actions. Such records are so essentials
in administering personnel matters that they must be
maintained in a police department.
The Miscellaneous Records
These are records, which do not relate to
recorded complaint and investigation reports but are
informational in character.
Recording and Filing System
The nature of police work justifies emphasis
on criminal records. To be fully effective, a police
record system must:
1. Be comprehensive and include every
incident coming to the attention of the police.
2. Be adequately indexed to permit ready
reference;
3. Be centralized to prove adequate control and
maximum utilization of clerical personnel.
4. Be as a simple as possible, consistent with
adequacy, and;
5. Lend itself into summarization and analysis to
permit continuing appraisal of the police
services.
 Such a system will permit a police records,
report and analysis to be used as significant tools of
management, supervision, control, policy making,
and operations. A police department, large or small,
shall maintain a centralized record file under a
unified control. The case file is the master record and
is supplemented by the arrest and the identification
records. Each of these records is numbered serially;
thus there are case numbers, arrest numbers, and
identification numbers.
Filing the Case Record
The case record is the heart of any police
record system. It is the basis for an analysis of
offences and the methods by which they are
committed. The following are the different types of
reports included under the case records, which shall
be accomplished by all concerned;
1. Complaint/assignment sheet
This is the foundation record of the police
department. The desk officer, or clerk, or
telephone operator receiving a call for police
assistance accomplishes it. All incidents
mentioned above and reported to the police shall
have a complaint/assignment sheet. Each
complaint/assignment sheet shall be assigned a
different number.
There are therefore, two numbering
system: complaint/assignment sheets becomes
the primary document for the analysis of crime
occurrences while the investigative report
becomes the prime document for the
continuation of the investigative process two
copies of the complaint/assignment sheet shall
be made for each complaint requiring a sheet
report.
A separate complaint/assignment sheet is
required for each crime or incident reported to
the police. It makes no difference whether the
complaint is reported by telephone, by letter, in
person at the police desk, to an officer on duty
otherwise. The complaint/assignment sheet is
registered by stamping a serial on each. When
registered the complaint/assignment sheet
becomes a part of the records system. There
shall be a consecutive series of complaint
numbers assigned by the desk officer. The
complaint number must not be confused with the
case number.
All incidents, which require for a police
investigation, shall receive a complain number.
The case number identifies each case and all
other papers and reports relating to it and as a
basis for filing. The desk officer receiving the call
need not be obtain detailed information from the
complainant but secure the basic information
needed to prepare the complaint/assignment
sheet. If the complaint is lodge in the precinct,
the desk officer of the precinct shall prepare the
complaint/assignment sheet in two copies
indicating thereon the complaint number
assigned by the Central Record Unit. The
original copy shall be forwarded to the Central
Records Unit.
2. Investigative Report
This type of report is prepared as a
written report on the findings of the investigator.
The following are the different types of the
investigative reports.
a) Case Report – This report shall be
accomplished by the investigator or member
making preliminary investigation of crime
reported to the police. The investigating officer
shall submit this report at the end of his tour of
duty. This report shall be prepared in the number
of copies required by the department for
distribution. For uniformity of crime reporting
this shall follow the prescribed classification of
offences, while the duplicate copy shall remain in
the precinct concerned for the corresponding
action. The officer assigned to the case shall
make his report at the end of his tour of duty.
b) Supplemented / progress – final
Report – Progress report shall accomplished by
118
the investigator continuing the investigation if the
case is left by pending status.It shall be submitted
within three (3) days after the submission of the
initial report and monthly thereafter until the case
is closed or cleared.
Closing a case shall not be confused with
clearing a case. A case is “Closed”, for
administrative purposes, when it is no longer
being investigated and is not assigned to an
investigator. A closed case can be either solved
or unsolved. A case is “Cleared” when one or
more person is arrested, charge with the
commission of the offense and turned over to the
fiscal or court for prosecution. Based on the final
report a complaint maybe filed by the Police
Station Commander before the Municipal
Criminal Circuit Trial Court, if it is the
municipality.
c) Continuation Report – This report shall
be used as the second as the succeeding pages of
all kinds or reports.
d) Technical Report – This report shall be
accomplished by the investigator to cover other
angles of the case or the technical staff whose
assistance has been requested to conduct
laboratory examination of evidence specimen
gathered, to supplement the findings and report
of the investigating officer.
f) Wanted Person Report – Information of
persons who are wanted by the police shall be
flashed by means of “Notice” wanted person,
accomplished in six copies, one copy to be sent
to the PNP Provincial Director, one (1) copy to the
PNP Regional Director, one copy to be sent to
PNP Director General, Camp Crame, Quezon
City, one copy to be sent to the NBI Central
office, Taft avenue, Manila, the original copy to
be placed in the “Persons Wanted File” of the
police station concerned, and the six (6) copies to
be displayed in the Rogues Gallery. Strict
compliance with the instructions at the back of
the form is required.
 g) Daily Record of Events – A daily
record of event is needed to keep all members of
the force informed concerning police operations,
assignments, and administrative instructions. It
shall carry a brief resume of each
complaint/assignment sheet, a description of
missing persons, and persons wanted, and other
information of interest to the police force. The
officer who prepares the complaint/assignment
sheet may reproduce the daily record of events
becomes a chronological cross-reference to the
complaint file. A number of copies may be made
for dissemination to the different divisions and
units of the department. In large police stations,
the daily record of events may be duplicated by
mimeograph. In all police forces, a log book or
police blotter shall be used, provided that it
contains all the information in the daily record of
events and that each incident shall be assigned a
serial number. All investigation report and other
documents dealing with a case are assembled in
a folder. The accumulation of the record is called
the “Case File” and is one of the principal
features of the satisfactory record system. Case
files are always filed according to the case
number.
Filing the Arrest and Booking Records
These reports are required for all persons
arrested. They shall be made out in full on each
person arrested.
1. Arrest Report – An arrest report shall be
out in full on each person arrested and should be
prepared at the time is prisoner is booked.
Information regarding the offender, the charges and
circumstances of arrest is recorded before the
prisoner is locked in jail or released on bond. The
arresting officer is responsible for the arrest report
and its completion. One or more criminal charge may
be placed on one arrest report. However, if the arrest
is in obedience to a warrant or warrants, separate
arrest report will be made for each warrant. In
preparing for the arrest record, it is important the full
name first, middle and last, another personal
circumstances of the prisoner are entered and all
questions on the form are answered. It shall bear on
arrest number for each arrest made. The number
series for arrest shall start from no. 1 on the first day
of each year which will known as Calendar Year
Numbering System. For example, the first arrest in
1991 shall be 91-1 this means that it is the first case of
the calendar year 1991. This report shall be used in
controlling prisoners during the period of
investigation. The arrest report shall be filed by the
arrest number and cross-indexed by name and all
aliases of the prisoner. It shall carry the serial
number of the complaint/assignment sheet and case
report, as the case may be. In an arrest where there
has been no previous complaint/assignment sheet
prepared, the desk officer shall make out one and
assign a serial number at the time of the time of the
booking. Immediately after accomplishing the arrest
report, three things are done.
First – Send to the complaint clerk for the
preparation of the complaint/assignment
sheet.
Second – Send to the complaint clerk for
name search against the alphabetical index
file in order to determine if the prisoner is
wanted on some other cases.
Third – Two sets of the fingerprints of the
prisoner shall be taken. One set shall be
forwarded to the NBI headquarters, Manila,
and the other shall be searched by
fingerprint classification in the fingerprint
file, only one set shall be taken and
forwarded to the NBI headquarters in Manila.
Finding shall be noted on the arrest report
shall be prepared in triplicate together with one
booking sheet as its fourth copy. The original is filed
119
with the arrest record file be the number in the
Central Record Unit, The duplicate and triplicate
copies shall be sent to the fiscal or to the clerk of
court, as the case may be, together with the criminal
complaint of information and its other supporting
papers. The lower portion of the arrest report will be
later on detached and returned to the police
department by the fiscal or the clerk of court
concerned after the termination of the case, to be
filed with the case record after the disposition of the
case has been annotated on the fingerprint of the
accused.
2. Booking Report – The police station needs
a current list of the prisoners in custody which will
indicate the status and disposition of each. It provides
information to each division as to the inmate or
inmates in jail. It facilitates accounting for the
prisoners at the end of each shift and their control
and all times and on which restrictions or privileges
are noted. The booking sheet shall be jail file for
arrest, arranged alphabetically, and serves as the jail
resister. Information regarding any prisoners in
custody is thus immediately available. The file shall
be kept at the booking counter or location convenient
in examination when inquiries are made. After the
release of the prisoner, either the police or the court,
the jail-booking sheet is forwarded to the records
division where it is filed according to the arrest
number.
3. Prisoner’s Property Receipt – All police
stations shall give receipts to prisoners’ property that
is taken from them. This receipt is prepared in
duplicate. Everything taken from his is still the
prisoners’ property until shown to be otherwise. The
officer who makes the search and remove the
property shall itemize it completely in the presence
of another officer and the prisoner and give prisoner
the original receipt. The officer must also see that the
property is sealed in an envelope, which bears the
prisoners name, the property receipt number and the
date. The department property clerk will not be
concerned with the care of prisoner’s property
except when it is too bulky for storage in the
prisoner’s property cabinet or safe.
The prisoners property receipt blank form
should be in book form, with the original perforated
for easy removal and with a serial number printed on
each pair. The duplicate should be removed from the
book. This is to eliminate danger of loss and to have
an easy reference by property receipt number or
date.
On the time of release, the prisoner shall be
required to produce the original receipt. Where he
sign to acknowledge return of his property. The
receipt is then filed with the case file. In the event the
receipt has been lost, stolen or destroyed before the
return of the property, certification listing as the
property as described on the duplicate prisoners
property receipt shall be signed by the prisoner. This
certification shall indicate that the original prisoners
property receipt was lost, stolen or destroyed.
Prisoner’s property that is clearly identifiable
by a number or inscription shall be checked against
the stolen property files. If an identification is made,
an investigation report stating the facts is written in
duplicate; the original is sent to the Commanding
Officer who shall cause the property so identified to
be held as evidence, the duplicate shall be sent to the
detective division for appropriate action.
Filing the Identification Record
The various identification records for the
identification of the criminals and other individuals
now extensively used in police stations shall include
the following:
Fingerprint Record – Of the various method
of criminal identification, the fingerprint system is the
most reliable. Identifying criminals by name is
unsatisfactory because of the frequent use by
criminal or aliases. Fingerprint record shall be
prepared in at least two copies, the original remain in
the Central Record of the police station concerned
and a copy to be sent to the NBI headquarters in
Manila.
a. Criminal Fingerprint – All persons
arrested for an offense shall be fingerprinted and an
identification number shall be assigned to each
prisoner to identify records relating to him. A
prisoner shall be fingerprinted each time he is
arrested, even though his prints have already on the
file, in order that a copy may be sent to the National
Bureau of Investigation. This procedure brings the
criminal history file up to date after each arrest. The
same ID number shall be used for each subject,
regardless of the numbers of time he may be
arrested or fingerprinted. This is the fourth series of
number used, the other three being the compliant
sheet, case report and arrest report. The
identification number shall appear on the fingerprint
card; the description and the photograph. The
identification numbers are recorded chronologically
in a ledger the entries on which include the name,
identification number, case number, the fingerprint
classification and the date fingerprinted.
b. Civilian Fingerprint – All persons
requesting clearance certificate or other personal
identification purposes shall be fingerprinted using
the prescribed form.
c. Alien Fingerprint – All aliens requesting
clearance certificate for purposes of petition for
naturalization, charge of name, oath taking for other
personal identification, purposes shall be
fingerprinted, using also the prescribed form.
The fingerprint card is searched in the
alphabetical index file. If the search is negative,
search is then made in the fingerprint file by
fingerprint formula. The fingerprint card are then
indexed and filed. This means that it is mandatory
principle of taking the fingerprint of all people
mentioned above in the three categories: criminal
civilians, and aliens.
Secondly, although the police station wishes
to maintain its fingerprint card will be sent to the NBI
in Manila. In order for fingerprints to serve their
maximum usefulness to the local police stations and
120
to all other law enforcement agencies, it is imperative
that copies be sent to the NBI, Manila wherein a
history sheet will be prepared and furnished the
contributing agency. Other police stations may have
arrested the subject in the past are thus inform of his
present whereabouts. The history sheet sent to the
NBI by fingerprints. It is most important, however,
that the fingerprint shall be taken accurately.
The Henry FBI extension classification system
of fingerprints shall be used by the police stations.
The criminal history sheet shall be filed in the
individual criminal file. Each person arrested by a
local police station shall have an individual file
folder.
Criminal Specialty or Modus Operandi File
– This consists of photographic records and modus
operandi of known criminals. This shall describe the
method of operation of a criminals, Classified and
filed in such a way as to aid in identifying the crime
as one committed by a known criminal.
This is commonly known as M. O. (Modus
Operandi) file. The use of the classification index file
is the simplest form of modus operandi. This is a sort
of Rogues Gallery and is helpful in controlling crime
and in apprehending criminals. This shall be filed
accordingly to certain M. O. characteristics,
according to major classes of crimes, and according
to identification number. Group photographs of
criminals working together are aid to identification
and they shall be filed of Criminal Specialty of group
involved.
Filing the Administrative Records
A number of different records are required in
the management of the departments’ personnel.
Some of these are of an informational character
designed to aid in assignments, promotions and
disciplinary actions; others are of control character
such as correspondence files, department
memoranda, daily summary of daily attendance
record, follow up and call sheet and monthly report.
In police stations of over 100 men, the use of such file
is essential in administering personal matters.
1. Personal Records – A file showing the
history of each police officer, both prior and
subsequent to joining the force, is indispensable.
2. Correspondence File – This shall consist of
set or records of communications classified, arranged
and filed alphabetically by the subject to which they
pertain.
3. Memoranda, Orders, Policy files, etc. –
These shall be filed accordingly as they are made
available.
4. Assignment Record – The detective
assignment record is desirable for the effective
function of the detective division. Other division in
the force may devise a system of assigning
personnel.
5. Other files – Police stations shall maintain
other administrative records responsive to their
needs.
Filing the Miscellaneous Records
Police stations perform a variety of services
that do not relate to recorded complaints. In addition
to the general classes or records, there is
miscellaneous group which do not feel under
categories of records that a police stations maintains
and which on occasions create filing problems within
a department.
The average small police stations may simply
maintain one file folder for each category. Each piece
of correspondence, together with the copy of the
reply, should be filed in chronological order in an
appropriate location file. As a refinement, the names
of the authors of the correspondence received may
be indexed – the index care referring to the folder in
which the correspondence may be located. If
correspondence with a particular office is frequent, a
separate folder for the office may be maintained.
However, another method used is to filed
miscellaneous correspondence by a subject matter
such as firearms, speaking engagements, and the
like.
Another system utilized occasionally is to
assign a correspondence number to each piece of
incoming correspondence, which then is filed by the
name of the author. In any event, some types of
control records should be maintained in order to
ensure a prompt reply. Every police form shall keep
and maintain the following miscellaneous record.
▪ Register of the aliens within the city or
municipality obtain from the Immigration
Commission and/or other sources;
▪ List of firearm holders from the Philippine
National Police;
▪ List incumbent city or municipal and
barangay officials and their address;
▪ Lists of the labor unions, cooperative
associations, civic, professionals, social
and religious organizations, in industrial
plants, movie houses, etc.
▪ List and description and all army camps
and mobilization centers.
▪ acts about the locality indicating district,
barangays, sitios, roads, bridge, centers
of population, voters and the like;
▪ Copies of ordinances and penal laws.
▪ Roster of AFP reservists, (obtainable from
military sources) showing current
addresses.
▪ List of private security agencies.
▪ List of parolees, pardoned and released
criminals and their addresses.
▪ Property and equipment records –
complete inventory shall be keep by the
police station and property as well as the
cause of maintenance and operations,
and
▪ Such other reports that may be required
by proper authorities and those that are
121
necessary and the police force. This shall
include the list of police numbers
assigned to individual police personnel
for identification purposes, which shall be
varied and standard identification card
for all members of the police force.
Indexing
Police stations shall prepare and maintain
index card appearing in the case report and index
card for serial number and description of recovered
lost or stolen property that has been brought to their
attention. The following are different types of index
file.
Master Name Index File
Every police station shall maintain a master
name index for the operation. It shall be in 3/5 inches
index card stock. Index cards shall be arranged in
general alphabetical order by the last name. Index
cards shall be made of all names appearing in the
case report, including aliases, name of complainants,
victims, suspect and wanted persons, index card
shall be prepared when outside fingerprint cards are
received and placed in a local fingerprint collection
whether the subject is wanted or not. The department
shall also index all names of persons wanted by other
police agencies as listed in circulars or by other
notice, persons placed on probation or parole. On
the index card, the following shall be reflected.
1. Complaint, case and/or ID number as the
case may be.
2. Name, aliases, addresses, sex, race, height,
weight, color of the eyes and hair, date and
place of birth.
3. Fingerprints classification (if available).
4. Brief statement of each incident base on the
source document with the following date.
▪ Date fingerprint taken, court case
warrant of arrest issued or date
alleged information.
 ▪ Contributor of fingerprint or
information and local number.
▪ Nature of offense and or purpose,
and;
▪ Result of disposition, it known
5. If the subject has used to or more names, he
will be known by the name first used and so
far as the particular police station is
concerned. however, both shall be reflected
on the index card underlying the first or the
original name used.
6. A cross-index card shall be prepared for
each additional name use without the brief
information. The one in charge of the master
name index file shall go through indexes,
card by card, in search of misfile card. The
sizes and conditions of the files will influence
the frequency of searching.
Stolen Property Index File
One principal objective of the investigation
conducted by the line-operating units is the
identification of the recovery of lost or stolen
property. The stolen property index is an
investigative aid of inestimable value in achieving
this objective. There are two means of identifying
property. One by serial number placed on the
property and the other is the type of property
(unnumbered) this shall be indexed and 3/5 inches
index card stock, describing the articles that are
reported lost or stolen locally or by circulars from
other police station. Prior to filing a card, a search
shall be made to determine whether the same piece
of property has been previously recorded.
Numbered Property Index
1. Police stations with less than 200 police force may
number guide cards from 00 through 99. Numbered
property shall be indexed by the last two digits of the
serial numbers. When more than one index card filed
behind one guide card, they may be placed a
numerical order according to the third digit from the
end as follows:
Example: Guide card 66
Revolver 952066
Motor number 123066
Watch 51-266
Electric drill 752566
Radio AMD 3866
2. Radio stations with more than 200 members shall
number the guide cards from 000 through 999.
Numbered property shall be indexed according to
the last three digits of the number without regard to
the type of article. The indexed card is fixed behind
the guide cards corresponding to the last three digits
of the number.
Unnumbered property index
Property not identifiable by manufacturers
serial number is indexed in the unnumbered
property index, by description of the article, such as
clothing, furniture, footwear, and etc., should be
indicative of the general character of the article
indexed. Index card shall be removed from the files
when the property is recovered and file should be
overhauled periodically and certain cards removed.
For example, cards over six months old describing
perishable goods; those over two years old
describing non-perishable foodstuff, tobacco, and
liquor; and those over five years old describing
wearing apparel, linens and bed cloths, etc., serve no
useful purpose after such a period of time, cards
describing articles of greater value, of articles not
likely to be worn, consumed, are destroyed should
be kept indefinitely. The complete description should
be described on the index card to eliminate the need
for a search to check the investigative report to
obtain the complete description.
Charging Out Files
122
Responsibility for filing each class of records
should be definitely assigned to one or more
designated clerks. Access to records, cabinets shall
be restricted to record’s division members only.
When any record is removed from the file, an
appropriate borrower’s slip is used and a charged-
cut card is accomplished. This ensures the proper
used of the files; prevent the misplacement of records
that have been used and keep the files personnel
informed at all times of the whereabouts of the
records instead out at any given time.
Borrower’s Slip
This is used when asking for files, and is used
as a receipt for a case or any number of items from a
file. It is in 4x6 inches sheet. A supply of such slip
shall be kept in each division or unit. This form is
accomplished by the borrower who needs a file and
maybe brought to the file room either through the
regular messenger service or by any person
authorized by the borrower. It is presented to the
record’s official. It is kept in a file control box when
the file stands or remains charged-out. On the return
of the record, the borrower’s slip is cancelled in the
presence of the borrower and same is attached to the
record and remains in the file as a permanent record
of the transaction.
Charge-out Card
Each time any file is issued, a record should be made
on a color charge-out which is often called a
“Substitution Card” or an “Out Card” which takes the
place of a file that has been removed from the
cabinet. This cards maybe cut to fit the file drawer
and shall stand out prominently among the files.
When a file or folder is withdrawn, one of the cards is
filed out and inserted in place of the file. It remains
there until the borrowed file is returned. When the
record is returned, the entry of the record is crossed
out and the card is put back in its place in front of the
file drawer.
Follow-up Procedure
It is essential that each Station Commander
have an administrative device, which will ensure that
all case brought to the attention of the force shall
receive appropriate attention. The mechanics of the
follow-up system consists in making use of one
smooth copy of the complaint/assignment sheet for
every complaint, arrest, or other matter which is not
completely disposed of at the time of the original
report. These sheets are placed in a “Tickler” or
“Follow-up File” according to the date as determined
by the manual on which the investigating officer shall
submit a progress or final report. The file has
dividers for each day of smooth and is separated in to
12 months. If a report is due on a designated date, the
follow-up slip shall be filed on the day following the
target for submission of the report. A reminder slip
shall be made and sent to the superior of the officer
concerned if the report is not submitted on the date
due.
Spot Map
Spot maps are useful to indicate the traffic
accidents and crime location. The location of crime
hazards aid in the direction of enforcement effort. It
provides supervising officer with evidence of
weakness in police service and shows the individual
officer where his attention is specially needed. Spot
maps should be placed where they will be readily
available for consultation. They shall be placed in the
office of the head of the division or in the office
housing the specialized activity involved. Spot maps
should be kept up to the date by the record staff.
Each map should be limited not over four different
factors if this factors have about equal frequency. In
place of the crime index and the location index, spot
maps shall be maintained by the police station for its
use as follows:
Traffic spot maps – Accident spot map for
the posting for motor vehicle and pedestrian
accident, which occur in the area.
Crime spot map – A general crime spot map
on which are posted the location of murders, rapes,
robberies, holdup, carnapping and other major
crimes of the locality.
Uniform Crime Reporting (UCR)
A uniform crime reporting shall be
established in every police station for monthly and
annual reports on case handled and persons arrested
by the police station to include cases reported. These
reports shall follow the prescribed classification of
offenses. The monthly statistical reports shall include
the following:
▪ Monthly report of cases handled by the
police station
▪ Supplement on monthly report on cases
handled by the police station
▪ Report of male persons arrested
▪ Report of female persons arrested
The four reports above described shall be
submitted to the National Police Commission in three
copies not later than the 15th of each month. The
National Police Commission in return shall each
furnish the NBI and the Chief/Director General of the
PNP. Accuracy and promptness in the submission of
these reports shall be the responsibility of the Station
Commander.
The annual crime statistical report shall follow
the prescribed form of monthly reports.
COMPARATIVE POLICE SYSTEM
SALIENT FEATURES:
123
1. Manila Police Department – organized by virtue
of Act No. 183 of the Philippine Commission on July
31, 1901.
- Capt GEORGE CURRY became the first Chief of
Police
2. Philippine Constabulary – organized by virtue of
Act No. 175 of the Philippine Commission on August,
1901, “An act providing for the organization and
government of an Insular Police better known as the
Philippine Constabulary – the First Insular Police of
the Philippines
- Capt. HENRY T. ALLEN became the first Chief of
PC.
NATIONAL POLICE COMMISSION
Republic Act No. 4864 – An act creating the National
Police Commission under the office of the President
in September 8, 1966.
PRESIDENTIAL DECREE NO. 765
An act creating the Police Constabulary/Integrated
National Police (PC/INP) in August 8, 1975. This law
put the NAPOLCOM under the Ministry of National
Defense. During this time pursuant of E.O 389, PC
became one of the four major services of the AFP
Salient Features of PD 765
1. The INP was established and constituted,
composed of the PC as the nucleus and
the INP as component under the DND.
2. The head of the PNP was Chief of the PC
 3. The PC remained as the major service of
the AFP
4. The remaining power of the NAPOLCOM
was extended to the police, fire and jail
components of the INP.
PNP LAW OF 1991
Republic Act No. 6975 – an act establishing
the PNP under a Reorganized Department of the
Interior and Local Government in December 13,
1990.
REPUBLIC ACT NO. 8551 – PNP Reform and
Reorganized Act of 1998 under the National
Police Commission.
REPUBLIC ACT NO. 9708 -
Law amending the provisions of RA 6975 and RA8551 o
n the
Minimum educational qualification for appointment to
the PNP and adjusting the promotion system
; approved on 12 August 2009
“AN ACT EXTENDING FOR FIVE (5) YEARS THE
REGLEMENTARYPERIOD FOR COMPLYING WITH
THE MINIMUM EDUCATIONALQUALIFICATION
FOR APPOINTMENT TO THE PHILIPPINE
NATIONALPOLICE (PNP) AND ADJUSTING THE
PROMOTION SYSTEM THEREOF, AMENDING
FOR THE PURPOSE PERTINENT PROVISIONS OF
REPUBLIC ACT NO. 6975 AND REPUBLIC ACT NO.
8551 AND FOR OTHER PURPOSES”
Commissioned officers
1. Director General (P D/Gen.) - General
2. Deputy Director General (P D/DGen.) -
Lieutenant General
3. Director (P Dir.) - Major General
4. Chief Superintendent (P C/Supt.) - Brigadier
General
5. Senior Superintendent (P S/Supt.) - Colonel
6. Superintendent (P Supt.) - Lieutenant Colonel
7. Chief Inspector (P C/Insp.) - Major
8. Senior Inspector (P S/Insp.) - Captain
9. Inspector (P Insp.) - Lieutenant
Non-commissioned officers
1. Senior Police Officer IV (SPO4) - Senior
Master Sergeant / Chief Master Sergeant
2. Senior Police Officer III (SPO3) - Master
Sergeant
3. Senior Police Officer II (SPO2) - Technical
Sergeant
4. Senior Police Officer I (SPO1) - Staff Sergeant
5. Police Officer III (PO3) - Sergeant
6. Police Officer II (PO2) - Corporal
7. Police Officer I (PO1) - Private First Class <
PNP Seal Meaning and Symbolism
Lapu-Lapu Hero - The great Filipino hero of Mactan,
the prototype of the best and most noble in Filipino
manhood who is the symbol and embodiment of all
the genuine attributes of leadership, courage,
nationalism, self-reliance and a people-based and
people powered community defense. The benevolent
and heroic warrior who derived added strength from
a cohesive, determined and loyal people is today a
fitting symbol and a prototype as well of people
power to preserve our values, customs, traditions,
way of life and the rule of law thru a solidly
community-based police system. Lapu-Lapu also
personifies for us today civilian constitutional
authority.
Laurel - Green Laurel with 14 leaves, symbolizes the
14 Regional Commands. It is also a symbol of the
124
honor, dignity and the privilege of being a member
of a noble organization where the call to public
service is par excellence a commitment to public
trust.
Shield - The symbol of the Philippine Constabulary,
the first National Police by virtue of Organic Act No.
175, enacted by the Philippine Commission on 18 July
1901. The Philippine Constabulary for the close to 90
years of service to the nation has performed with
honor, professionalism and courage. The PC has
carved out a large part of the glorious pages of
Philippine history, as attested by its proudly and
deservedly garnering 86 of the 92 "Medals of Valor"
the highest honor that a grateful Filipino nation can
bestow on its gallant sons in the service of the
Republic. Most appropriately therefore, the
Philippine Constabulary became the nucleus of the
Integrated National Police in 1975 to nurture the then
embryonic concept of the nationalization of the
country's local police forces.
Three Stars - Luzon, Visayas and Mindanao and the
1,700 islands and the territorial integrity wherein the
National Police must enforce the law and maintain
peace and order with professionalism, zeal and
dedication in keeping with the highest ideals and
traditions of service to our country and people.
Service • Honor • Justice - Added distinct ideals for
the officers, men and women of the PNP to insure
efficiency, integrity, cohesiveness, camaraderie and
equanimity to enhance community acceptance and
support to attain its mission of peace keeping and law
enforcement.
Sun - Symbolize the flowering, maturing and ultimate
realization of the glorious evolution of the PC/INP into
a National Police Organization - "national in scope
and civilian in character" - as enshrined in the 1986
Constitution. The Traditional light rays which
represents the fight ingest provinces whose ideals of
courage and patriotism the members of the National
Police must possess.
PNP Badge Meaning and Symbolism
Philippine Monkey Eating Eagle The National
Bird – symbol of swiftness and ferocity, power,
courage and immortality.
PNP Shield - Symbol of protection of all citizens.
Three Stars - Stands for Luzon, Visayas and
Mindanao which constitute the Republic's Territorial
Integrity over which the PNP must enforce the law
and maintain peace and order with professionalism,
zeal and dedication in keeping with the highest
ideals and traditions of service to God, Country and
People.
Eight Sun Rays - Represents the eight (8) provinces
whose ideals of courage, gallantry patriotism led to
their revolt against Spain.
Lapu – Lapu - Symbolizes the bravery of the
Philippine National Police.
Service, Honor, and Justice - Service is the vibrant
and cogent deeds and actions in response to the
needs and wants of the people in distress: Honor
could be the overriding criterion and consideration
in the performance of their entrusted task or mission:
and Justice dispensed to everyone whatever is due to
him without favoritism or discrimination of any sort.
Laurel Leaves - Symbolizes the competency,
brilliance and honor in the field of endeavor
expected from each and every member of the PNP.
THE CONCEPTS, THEORIES AND PHILOSOPHY
OF POLICE SERVICE
D. THEORY OF POLICE SERVICE
1.Continental Theory – policemen are considered
servants of higher authorities and people have little
or no share of all their duties, nor any direct
connection with them.
2.Home Rule Theory – policemen are considered
servant of the community who depends for the
effectiveness of their functions upon the express
wishes of the people.
E. CONCEPT OF POLICE SERVICE
1. Old Concept – punishment is the role
instrument of crime control throwing
more people to jail than keeping
them out of jail.
2. Modern Concept – the yardstick of
efficiency of the police is the absence
of crime. Its objective is the welfare of
the people and the society.
COMPARATIVE
Denotes the degree or grade by which a
person, thing, or other entity has a property
or quality greater or less in extent than that
of another. The way of studying of different
phenomenon, institutions or objects such as
legal system in an effort to understand their
origins, processes or relationships.
POLICE
Police typically are responsible for
maintaining public order and safety,
enforcing the law, and preventing, detecting,
and investigating criminal activities. These
functions are known as policing. Police are
125
often also entrusted with various licensing and
regulatory activities. The word comes via
French word Policier, from Latin politia ("civil
administration"), from ancient Greek polis
("city").
Characteristics common to most police forces
include a quasi-military organization, a
uniformed patrol and traffic-control force,
plainclothes divisions for criminal
investigations, and a set of enforcement
priorities that reflects the community’s way of
life. Administration may be centralized at the
national level downward, or decentralized,
with local police forces largely autonomous.
Recruits usually receive specialized training
and take an exam. The modern metropolitan
police force began with Sir Robert Peel in
Britain c. 1829. Secret police are often
separate, covert organizations established by
national governments to maintain political and
social orthodoxy, which typically operate with
little or no control.
SYSTEM
Combination of parts in a whole; orderly
arrangement according to some common law;
collection of rules and principles in science or
art; method of transacting business.
COMPARATIVE POLICE SYSTEM
Process of outlining the similarities and
differences of one police system to another in order
to discover insights in the field of international
policing.
The way of comparing the different system of
policing practice by other countries to address a
particular problems.
Purpose of comparative police system
1. To address problem of transnational crime.
2. To study the trends in policing.
THEORIES OF COMPARATIVE POLICING
1. Alertness to crime theory, is that as a nation
develops, people’s alertness to crime is
heightened. They report more crime to police
and demand the police to become more
effective in solving crime problems.
2. Economic or migration theory, is that crime
everywhere is the result of unrestrained
migration and overpopulation in urban areas
such as ghettos and slums.
3. Opportunity theory, is that along with higher
standards of living, victims become more
careless of their belongings and
opportunities for committing crime multiply.
4. Demographic theory, is based on the event
when a greater number of children are being
born.
5. Deprivation theory, holds that progress
comes along with rising expectations.
6. Modernization theory, sees the problem as
society becoming too complex.
7. Theory of anomie and synomie
Societal type and police system
1. Folk-communal society- no specialization
among police, and a system of punishment
that just let things go for a while without
attention until things become too much and
then harsh, barbaric punishment is resorted
to.
2. Urban-commercial society- Most of
continental Europe Developed along this
path.
3. Urban-Industrial society- Police become
specialized in how to handle property crimes,
and the system of punishment is run on
market principles of creating incentives and
disincentives..England and the U.S. followed
this positive legal path.
4. Bureaucratic society- has a system of laws
(along with armies of lawyers) police who
tend to keep busy handling political crime
and terrorism and a system of punishment
characterized by over criminalization and
overcrowding.
5. Post-modern society- It is where the
emphasis is upon the meaning of words and
the deconstruction of institution.
Types of Police System
1. Common law system
2. Civil law system
3. socialist system
4. Islamic system
THE NEED FOR INNOVATIVE POLICING
Theories and practices in law enforcement
have been compared in several studies under
various circumstances, the goal is to test
whether the theory and practice in policing
needs modernization to meet the demands of
the present trends in crime fighting.
Comparative research is usually carried out
by the “safari” method (a researcher visits
another country) or “collaborative” method
(the researcher communicates with a foreign
researcher).
GLOBALIZATION IN LAW
ENFORCEMENT
Every nation has its own law
enforcement agency called the Police. One
thing is common, the Police symbolized the
presence of a civil body politics in everyday
life; they symbolized the capacity of the state
126
to intervene and the concern of the state for
the affairs of the citizenry. It is therefore
timely to discuss the connection of
globalization to policing.
WHAT IS GLOBALIZATION?
Globalization
Is the system of interaction among the
countries of the world in order to develop the
global economy. Globalization refers to the
integration of economics and societies all over
the world. Globalization involves
technological, economic, political, and cultural
exchanges made possible largely by advances
in communication, transportation, and
infrastructure.
It is a package of transnational flows of people,
production, investment, information, ideas and
authority.
Alison Brysk in digest paper stated that
GLOBALIZATION is the growing interpretation
of states, market, communications and ideas. It
is one of the leading characteristics of the
contemporary world.
Effects of Globalization
If you visit several countries, you can
easily feel the effect globalization has on our
daily lives. The following are some of the most
significant effects of globalization.
Industry: The world has become a huge
market where you can buy and sell things
produced in any part of the world. There are a
lot of international brands operating
worldwide. These include
Culture: Globalization means a decrease in
the cultural diversity that used to exist in the
world earlier. You can find people in several
countries dressing up like Westerners. Food is
another good example. Young people
especially are eating more of American or
Chinese foods then their own cultural dishes.
The way people speak is also changing. For
example teenagers in the Middle East are
much influenced by the way the black
Americans speak. They think its “cool”.
Legislation: There has been an increase in the
establishment of International courts of justice
where someone accused could be dealt with in
any part of the world. Interpol is another
example of International law enforcement
agency.
Language: With increased globalization,
people tend to forget their mother tongue and
use English instead as there is an idea that it
makes them superior in some way. This might
also help them in job searches etc.
Information: With the wide use of Internet and
other kinds of information technology, it has
become much easier and faster to share
information worldwide. Live TV channels are
another good example of quick information
sharing.
Finance: Globalization has made it easier to
raise finance through individuals and firms
outside the country. The International
Monetary Fund is a good example of an
International Institute which lends money to
countries in need for finance.
Politics: Powerful countries and individuals
nowadays have political control over the whole
world, not only their country. The United States
is an example of a country that influences the
whole of the world politics.
It is believed that globalization is a positive
development generating more trade and
hence welfare of the whole world.
Nevertheless it also has some significant
disadvantages which should not be forgotten.
These include:
• Increasing trends in migration of
labor to developing countries as
large firms shift their production
to developing countries.
• Some powerful people and
countries control the whole world
• Loss of jobs in countries that
cannot compete with larger firms
• Increased dependency on each
other. The recent financial crisis
is a good example of that.
The negative effects of globalization
Opponents of globalization point out to
its negative effects. Some of them are listed
below.
• Developed nations have outsourced
manufacturing and white collar jobs.
That means less-jobs for their people.
This has happened because
manufacturing work is outsourced to
developing nations like China where
the cost of manufacturing goods and
wages are lower. Programmers,
editors, scientists and accountants
have lost their jobs due to outsourcing
to cheaper locations like India.
• Globalization has led to exploitation of
labor. Prisoners and child workers are
used to work in inhumane conditions.
Safety standards are ignored to
produce cheap goods.
• Job insecurity. Earlier people had
stable, permanent jobs. Now people
live in constant dread of losing their
127
jobs to competition. Increased job
competition has led to reduction in
wages and consequently lower
standards of living.
• Terrorists have access to sophisticated
weapons enhancing their ability to
inflict damage. Terrorists use the
Internet for communicating among
themselves.
• Companies have set up industries
causing pollution in countries with
poor regulation of pollution.
• Fast food chains like McDonalds and
KFC are spreading in the developing
world. People are consuming more
junk food from these joints which has
an adverse impact on their health.
• The benefits of globalization are not
universal. The rich are getting richer
and the poor are becoming poorer.
• Bad aspects of foreign cultures are
affecting the local cultures through TV
and the Internet.
• Enemy nations can spread propaganda
through the Internet.
• Deadly diseases like HIV/AIDS are
being spread by travelers to the
remotest corners of the globe.
• Local industries are being taken over
by foreign multinationals.
• The increase in prices has reduced the
government’s ability to sustain social
welfare schemes in developed
countries.
• There is increase in human trafficking.
• Multi-National Companies and
corporations which were previously
restricted to commercial activities are
increasingly influencing political
decisions.

The positive aspect of globalization
Globalization has a positive side as well.
Supporters of globalization argue that it is
good and beneficial. Some of their arguments
are listed below.
1. Globalization has created the
concept of outsourcing. Work
such as software development,
customer support, marketing,
accounting and insurance is
outsourced to developing
countries like India. The
company that outsourced the
work enjoys the benefit of
lower costs because the wages
in developing countries is far
lower than that of developed
countries. The workers in the
developing countries get
employment. Developing
countries get access to the
latest technology.
2. Increased competition forces
companies to lower prices.
This benefits the end
consumers.
3. Increased media coverage
draws the attention of the
world to human right
violations. This leads to
improvement in human rights.
The Future
Globalization is a tool that should benefit
all sections of mankind. One cannot ignore its
negative effects. These must be addressed for
the world’s peace and prosperity.
Effects of Globalization on Law
Enforcement
Every law enforcement agency in the
world is expected to be a protector of the
people’s rights. Globalization has a great
impact on every human right.
The emergence of an “international
regime” for state security and protection of
human rights, growing transnational social
movements networks, increasing
consciousness and information politics have
the potential to address both traditional and
emerging forms of law violation. Open
international system should free individuals to
pursue their rights, but large numbers of
people seem to be suffering from both
longstanding state repression and new denials
of rights linked to transnational forces like
international terrorism and other acts against
humanity.
Threats on law enforcement: Some threats
brought about by Globalization.
1. Increasing value of human rights
violations evident by genocide or
mass killing.’
2. The under privilege gain unfair
access to global mechanism on law
enforcement and security.
3. Conflicts between nations
4. Transnational criminal networks for
drug trafficking, money laundering,
terrorism etc.
Opportunities for law enforcement:
1. Creation of International tribunals to
deal with human rights problems.
2. Humanitarian interventions that can
promote universal norms and link them
to the enforcement power of states.
3. Transnational professional network
and cooperation against transnational
crimes.
128
4. Global groups for conflict monitoring
and coalitions across transnational
issues.
The Effects of Globalization on Human Rights
Human rights and globalization are
profoundly, though not always positively,
linked. When countries export labor or
increase international co-operation, human
rights are sometimes trampled. Subsequently,
many of the effects of human rights on
globalization are reactions to the exploitation
of people.
Impact of globalization and new
technologies on drug-related crime and
Criminal organizations
Cyber Crime
The term “cyber crime” covers many
types of activities but essentially can be used
to describe violations of law that are
committed and/or facilitated through the use of
electronic media.
In comparison with ordinary crime,
cyber crime requires few resources relative to
the damage that can be caused, it can be
committed in a jurisdiction without the
offender being physically present in it and, in
many countries, offences are inadequately
defined or not defined at all; hence, personal
risk and the likelihood of detection are low.
Impact on Drug-Related Organized Crime
Organized crime has its own operative
code, which flouts the rule of law and depends
upon violence for its enforcement. It has,
however, adopted some of the business
practices that characterize the legitimate
economy. Organized criminality has become
more transnational and has been restructured
and decentralized; in other words, it too has
globalized.
The pyramid-shaped structure of the
single organized criminal group has tended to
make way for fluid networks of cell-type
structures in which national identity is
subordinate to function or skill, although
nationality itself can be a function if it opens
the door to a new market or permits the
penetration or corruption of a particular
institution.
Transnational criminals do not respect
borders in that, in carrying out their activities,
they trail their activities across several
jurisdictions to minimize law enforcement risks
and maximize profit; thus, no single State can
presume that a particular criminal activity falls
entirely under its jurisdiction. The network is
the organizational form that characterizes
globalization in both the licit and illicit sphere.
For a drug trafficking organization, the
network structure has distinct advantages over
the traditional hierarchy: it has a well-
protected, dense core of organizations or
people connected to a looser border by a
multiplicity of links, which makes it more
capable of evading law enforcement efforts.
Drug trafficking groups utilize new
technologies in two distinct ways: to improve
the efficiency of product delivery and
distribution through the medium of secure,
instant communications; and to protect
themselves and their illicit operations from
investigation by drug law enforcement agencies,
sometimes using techniques of counter-attack.
New technologies enable drug
trafficking groups to commit traditional crimes
with new methods—for example, to conceal
information about the shipment of illicit drug
consignments by means of encrypted
messages or to launder drug-related funds by
electronic transfer—and to commit new
offences with new means, for example, by
using information warfare or digital attack
against intelligence activities of drug law
enforcement agencies.
Drug traffickers use computers and
electronic pocket organizers for storing
information (such as bank account numbers,
contact details of associates, databases of
assets and financial activity, sales and other
business records, grid coordinates of
clandestine landing strips and recipes for
synthetic drug manufacture) and for electronic
mail (e-mail) and other correspondence.
Surrogates receive instructions by
telephone, fax, pager or computer on where to
deliver warehouse loads, whom to contact for
transportation services and where to send the
profits. Greater protection derives from the
use of prepaid telephone cards, broadband
radio frequencies, restricted-access Internet
chat rooms, encryption, satellite telephony and
“cloned” cellular telephones (so called when
the identity codes assigned to legitimate
customers are intercepted and programmed
into cellular telephones used by criminals).
Members of drug trafficking
organizations can program their computers to
detect attempted intrusion and to use “back-
hacking” techniques in order to damage the
investigating source. Such techniques are of
particular value to the organizers of drug
trafficking activities, who rarely need to leave
the protection of their home base in order to
organize or supervise their operations.
Narcotics police in the Hong Kong
Special Administrative Region of China report
that detecting the laundering of drug-related
funds has become more difficult with the
advance of electronic commerce and Internet
banking facilities.
129
Drug traffickers communicate with
each other mainly by using mobile telephones
with prepaid cards that can be bought
anonymously. China has also reported a case
in which criminals tried to avoid detection by
penetrating the customs database to alter the
details and status of a commercial freight
consignment, a case that undoubtedly has
implications for drug trafficking.
In Australia, drug traffickers use a
facility offered to all clients by worldwide
courier services to track their shipments on the
company’s web site. A delay may indicate to
the traffickers that a controlled delivery
operation has been set in motion. Drug law
enforcement authorities involved in such
operations must therefore act within an
extremely narrow time limit in order to avoid
suspicion.
The Inter-American Drug Abuse Control
Commission (CICAD) of the Organization of
American States (OAS) noted in its
Hemispheric Report 1999-2010 that the Internet
had become the most widely used medium for
expanding the production of synthetic drugs in
some countries and that globalization, instant
communication and electronic fund transfers
had been utilized by organized criminal groups
to improve the efficiency of drug trafficking
activities.
Drug law enforcement authorities in
the Czech Republic report that nowadays illicit
drug sales and purchases are agreed online at
Internet cafes or through the use of cellular
telephones. Because illicit drug deals are
arranged instantaneously and over short
distances, interception by drug law
enforcement authorities is much more difficult.
 Since 1996, companies based in the
Netherlands have been using the Internet to
sell cannabis seeds and derivatives. According
to the International Criminal Police
Organization (Interpol), at the beginning of
the year 2000 authorities in the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland
identified over 1,000 websites worldwide
offering to sell illicit drugs, mostly cannabis
but also methylene dioxymethamphetamine
(MDMA, commonly known as Ecstasy),
cocaine and heroin, in direct violation of the
international drug control treaties.
The Netherlands and Switzerland had
the highest number of such web sites. Law
enforcement agencies in the United States of
America attribute the rapid increase in
seizures of laboratories used for the illicit
manufacture of methamphetamine to the
evolution of technology and the increased use
of the Internet.
In the past, drug recipes were closely
guarded secrets but, with modern computer
technology and chemists’ increasing
willingness to share their knowledge, this
information is now available to anyone with
computer access. It does not require a college-
educated chemist to produce amphetamine.
Less than 10% of suspects arrested for illicitly
manufacturing methamphetamine are trained
chemists, a fact that explains the many fires,
explosions and injuries in clandestine
laboratories.
A drug investigation carried out jointly
by Colombian and United States authorities led
to the arrest of 31 drug traffickers in October
1999. It was found that the traffickers had kept
in touch with each other by using Internet chat
rooms protected by firewalls to make them
impenetrable.
The details of each day’s trafficking
activities had been fed into a computer located
on a ship off the coast of Mexico, ensuring that
even if other computers had been penetrated it
would have been impossible to bring down the
whole network. The same group had used
encryption that law enforcement authorities
had been unable to break in time to act on the
information. Those methods, in addition to
“cloned” cellular telephones, had enabled the
traffickers to move hundreds of tons of cocaine
during a period of several years before being
detected.
Colombian and Mexican drug
association have used sophisticated equipment
for the surveillance of investigating officers
and interception of their communications,
collecting photographs of the officers and
other personal information.
This has also occurred in Europe. In
1995, a drug trafficking group in the
Netherlands hired computer specialists to
carry out hacking operations and to encrypt
their communications. Encryption software
installed on palmtop computers enabled the
traffickers to create a secure database on
unmarked police and intelligence vehicles. A
laptop computer and disks belonging to the
investigating authorities were stolen and the
resultant information was used to intercept
communications between police officers, who
were subsequently observed and threatened.
Transnational Crimes defined:
Transnational crime is an activity that is
considered a criminal offense by the at least
two countries. It is as much a political as legal
130
problems that the phenomenon is largely
influence by the development of world
problems and that is takes advantage of all
forms of progress, especially in international
transport, telecommunication and computers.
Transnational crimes are committed with
several motives: political influence, economic
gain, and social control.
Historical types of transnational crimes:
Slavery- the sub-mission to a dominating
influence of the state of a person who is a
chattel of another.
White slavery- engagement in the business
for profit or enlistment of services of any other
person for the purpose of prostitution.
Piracy as a transnational crime
• Piracy- Refers to robbery in the high
seas and or the unauthorized use of
another’s production intervention or
conception especially in infringement
of copy right.
Transnational Environmental crimes
Environmental crime is inherently
transnational character; most cross-border
environmental harms are not defined as crimes
or regulatory violations. But attempts to do so
are frequently confounded by legal system
rooted in national sovereignty and thus, ill
suited to address trans border injuries.
Mechanism of transnational environmental
crimes
1. Transborder flow of toxic substance
2. Transborder flow of economic decision
3. Transborder projections of power

What is Transnational Organized Crime?
Transnational organized crime is a
crime perpetuated by organized criminal
groups with the aim of committing one or
more serious crimes or offenses in order to
obtain, directly or indirectly, a financial or
other material benefit. In order to be
considered as transnational, a crime must
involve the crossing of borders or
jurisdictions.
Two protocols of the U.N. conventional
organized crime from 1990 to 2000.
1. The protocol against punish trafficking
in person specially women and
children.
2. The protocols against the smuggling
of migrants by land, sea and air,
supplementing the U.N. convention
against transnational organized crime
concentrates on illegal immigration
organized by criminal groups
Causes of Trafficking in Human and
Smuggling of Migrant
As a general rule, trafficking and
smuggling exploit impoverished and
vulnerable individuals seeking a better life.
That is to say, the differences are the main
factors responsible not only for immigration
but also for the criminal activities of migrants
smuggling in human beings.
Factors influencing these criminal
activities;
1. Those that force people to leave the
country and to resort the trafficking or
smuggling services. (push factor)
2. Those that make final destination
countries attractive for those people.
(pull factor).
Criminal Organizations
Definitions of what constitutes
organized crime vary widely from country to
country. Organized groups are typically
involved in many different types of criminal
activity spanning several countries. These
activities may include trafficking in humans,
weapons and drugs, armed robbery,
counterfeiting and money laundering.
Interpol acts as a central repository
for professional and technical expertise on
transnational organized crime and as a
clearinghouse for the collection, collation,
analysis and dissemination of information
relating to organized crime and criminal
organizations. It also monitors the organized
crime situation on a global basis and co-
ordinates international investigations.
Interpol’s mission in this regard is to
enhance co-operation among member
countries and stimulate the exchange of
information between all national and
international enforcement bodies concerned
with countering organized crime groups and
related corruption.
What are the examples of Transnational
Crimes?
▪ Pharmaceutical crime
▪ Trafficking in Persons
▪ Environmental Crime
▪ Economic Crime
▪ Cyber Crimes
▪ Piracy and Armed Robbery
against Ships
▪ Intellectual Property Theft
▪ Cultural Property Theft
131
▪ Illegal Trafficking of Small
Arms
▪ Money Laundering
▪ Terrorism
▪ Drug trafficking
Pharmaceutical Crimes
Counterfeit medical products and illicit
medicines represent a global public health
crisis. They range from inactive, useless
preparations to harmful, toxic substances, and
are often indistinguishable from the genuine
product. They pose a major risk to public
health and are becoming increasingly
prevalent in all parts of the world.
High costs of legitimate drugs and
inadequate controls mean that patients turn
increasingly (knowingly or otherwise) to
counterfeit drugs. At best, these substandard
drugs are likely to be less effective, but they
can also be harmful, even life-threatening.
Fake anti-malarial drugs are believed to be a
contributory factor in a significant number of
tragedies in Sub-Saharan Africa. Also
increasingly available are counterfeited
treatments for life threatening diseases such as
tuberculosis and HIV/AIDS.
The dangers of counterfeit medical
products
Counterfeit products are harmful and
can even be fatal. Fake medicines range from
useless to highly dangerous. They often
contain the wrong level of active ingredient –
too little, too much or none at all – or an active
ingredient intended for a different purpose. In
some cases, fake medicines have been found
to contain highly toxic substances such as rat
poison. In all these scenarios, the person
taking the counterfeit medicine is putting their
health, even their life, at risk.
One can easily be deceived by counterfeit
medicines: they are often packaged to a high
standard with fake pills that look identical to
the genuine ones. Sometimes a laboratory test
is the only way to identify the difference.
The Extent of the Problem
Counterfeit medicine is now a truly global
phenomenon, and all countries of the world are
affected as source, transit or destination points.
The World Health Organization (WHO)
estimates that up to 1% of medicines available
in the developed world are likely to be
counterfeit. This figure rises to 10% globally,
but in some areas of Asia, Africa and Latin
America counterfeit goods can form up to 30%
of the market.
Counterfeiting applies not only to
'lifestyle' medicines, including erectile
dysfunction and weight loss medicines, but
also to 'lifesaving medicines' including those
used to treat cancer, heart disease and other
serious illnesses.
And it's not just medicines. Fake
medical devices also pose a risk. The term
'medical device' covers a wide range of
healthcare products from contact lenses to
condoms; syringes to surgical instruments; and
wheelchairs to radiotherapy machines.
Risks of buying medicines over the Internet
More and more people are buying
medicines and medical devices over the
Internet, through online pharmacies and
auction sites. Unfortunately, a large number of
these Internet sites are unauthorized,
unregulated and trade in illicit or sub-standard
products. If an online supplier conceals its
physical address, this is a warning sign that
their products could be dangerous – the WHO
estimates that 50% of medicines available from
such websites are counterfeit. In particular,
buying prescription-only medicines from
unauthorized or dubious sources significantly
increases the risk of getting substandard or
fake products. It is important to consult a
healthcare professional for prescription-only
medicines and to obtain the medicines from a
regulated source. Buying medicines online
may seem cheaper, quicker and more
convenient than going through your doctor and
high street pharmacy, but the dangers
outweigh the benefits by far. Don't take the
risk.
The Response
At INTERPOL, the Medical Product
Counterfeiting and Pharmaceutical Crime
(MPCPC) Unit works to bring together different
players – from police, customs, health
regulatory authorities, scientists, and the
private sector – to tackle these crimes. Our
network of 188 member countries allows us to
connect stakeholders across the world, and
carry out effective training and operations in
specific regions.
We have also developed targeted
enforcement activities against counterfeit
medical products through our membership of
the International Medical Products Anti-
132
Counterfeiting Taskforce (IMPACT), led by the
World Health Organization.
THE INTERNATIONAL POLICE
(INTERPOL)
The role of the International police in
the control of globalization in policing and
human rights violations is tremendous being
uniquely positioned to contribute substantially
to the success of all law enforcement efforts
aimed at combating global crimes, human
violations and terrorism
INTERPOL is the world’s largest international
police organization, with 190 member
countries. Created in 1923, it facilitates cross-
border police co-operation, and supports and
assists all organizations, authorities and
services whose mission is to prevent or combat
international crime.
INTERPOL aims to facilitate international
police co-operation even where diplomatic
relations do not exist between particular
countries. Action is taken within the limits of
existing laws in different countries and in the
spirit of the Universal Declaration of Human
Rights. Interpol’s constitution prohibits ‘any
intervention or activities of a political, military,
religious or racial character.’
Role of INTERPOL
1. To prevent acts of international
terrorism and it carried out
2. To ensure the perpetrators are brought
to justice
ORIGIN
1914-First International Criminal Police Congress
held in Monaco. Police officers, lawyers and
magistrates from 14 countries meet to discuss arrest
procedures, identification techniques, centralized
international criminal records and extradition
proceedings.
1923-Creation of the International Criminal Police
Commission (ICPC) with headquarters in Vienna,
Austria, on the initiative of Dr Johannes Schober,
president of the Vienna Police.
Wanted persons notices first published in
INTERPOL’s International Public Safety Journal.
1926-The General Assembly, held in Berlin, proposes
that each country establish a central point of contact
within its police structure: the forerunner of the
National Central Bureau (NCB).
1927-Resolution to establish NCBs adopted.
1930-Specialized departments established to deal
with currency counterfeiting, criminal records and
passport forgery.
1932-Following the death of Dr Schober, new statutes
put in place creating the post of Secretary General.
The first was Austrian Police Commissioner Oskar
Dressler
1935-INTERPOL international radio network
launched.
1938-The Nazis assume control after deposing of
President Michael Skubl. Most countries stop
participating and ICPC effectively ceases to exist as
an international organization.
1942-ICPC falls completely under German control
and is relocated to Berlin.
1946-Belgium leads the rebuilding of the
organization after the end of World War II. A new
headquarters set up in Paris, and ‘INTERPOL’ chosen
as the organization’s telegraphic address.
Democratic process to elect the President and
Executive Committee instituted.
Present INTERPOL color-coded notice system
initiated and first Red Notices for persons wanted
internationally issued.
1949-The United Nations grants INTERPOL
consultative status as a non-governmental
organization.
1956-Following the adoption of a modernized
constitution, the ICPC becomes the International
Criminal Police Organization-INTERPOL, abbreviated
to ICPO–INTERPOL or just INTERPOL. The
Organization becomes autonomous by collecting
dues from member countries and relying on
investments as the main means of support.
1958-Contributions of member countries revised and
financial regulations adopted.
1963-First regional conference held, in Monrovia,
Liberia.
1965-The General Assembly sets out formal
responsibilities and operating policies for NCBs.
1971-The United Nations recognizes INTERPOL as an
intergovernmental organization.
1972-A Headquarters Agreement with France
recognizes INTERPOL as an international
organization.
1982-An independent body created to monitor the
implementation of INTERPOL’s internal rules in
relation to data protection. This will become the
Commission for the Control of INTERPOL Files in
2003.
1989-INTERPOL moves its General Secretariat to
Lyon, France.
1990-The X.400 communication system launched,
enabling NCBs to send electronic messages to each
other and to the General Secretariat directly.
1992-An automated search facility for remote
searches of INTERPOL databases introduced.
1995-As part of a programme of regionalization the
General Assembly adopts guidelines for the
establishment and operation of Regional Bureaus.
1998-INTERPOL Criminal Information System (ICIS)
database created.
2002-The I-24/7 web-based communication system
launched, significantly improving NCBs’ access to
INTERPOL’s databases and services. Canada is the
first country to connect to the system.
133
Database of stolen and lost travel documents
launched.
2003-Official inauguration of the Command and
Coordination Centre at the General Secretariat,
enabling the organization to operate 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
2004-INTERPOL liaison office inaugurated at the
United Nations in New York and first Special
Representative appointed.
2005-First INTERPOL-United Nations Special Notices
issued for individuals subject to UN sanctions against
Al Qaeda and the Taliban.
Technology known as MIND/FIND allows frontline
officers to connect directly to INTERPOL's systems.
2009-Official opening of the Office of the Special
Representative to the European Union in Brussels.
VISION & MISSION OF INTERPOL
The vision – "Connecting police for a safer world"
Our Vision is that of a world where each and every
law enforcement professional will be able through
INTERPOL to securely communicate, share and
access vital police information whenever and
wherever needed, ensuring the safety of the world's
citizens. We constantly provide and promote
innovative and cutting-edge solutions to global
challenges in policing and security.
The mission – "Preventing and fighting crime
through enhanced international police
cooperation"
We facilitate the widest possible mutual assistance
between all criminal law enforcement authorities. We
ensure that police services can communicate
securely with each other around the world. We
enable global access to police data and information.
We provide operational support on specific priority
crime areas. We foster continuous improvement in
the capacity of police to prevent and fight crime and
the development of knowledge and skills necessary
for effective international policing.
Interpol’s Four Core Functions
Interpol’s activities are guided by the following four
core functions:
 1. Secure global police communication
services
Interpol’s global police
communications system, known as I-
24/7, enables police in all member
countries to request, submit and access
vital data instantly in a secure
environment.
2. Operational data services and
databases for police
Member countries have direct and
immediate access to a wide range of
databases including information on
known criminals, fingerprints, DNA
profiles and stolen or lost travel
documents. INTERPOL also
disseminates critical crime-related
data through a system of international
notices.
3. Operational police support services
INTERPOL provides law
enforcement officials in the field with
emergency support and operational
activities, especially in its priority
crime areas. A Command and Co-
ordination Centre operates 24 hours a
day, seven days a week and can
deploy an Incident Response Team to
the scene of a serious crime or disaster
4. Police training and development
INTERPOL provides focused
police training initiatives with the aim
of enhancing the capacity of member
countries to effectively combat
transnational crime and terrorism.
This includes sharing knowledge,
skills and best practices in policing
and establishing global standards.
Interpol’s Leadership and Governance
The President of INTERPOL and the
Secretary General work closely together in
providing strong leadership and direction to
the Organization.
Interpol’s Structure
As defined in Article 5 of its
Constitution, INTERPOL (whose
correct full name is 'The International
Criminal Police Organization –
INTERPOL’) comprises the following:
▪ General Assembly
▪ Executive Committee
▪ General Secretariat
▪ National Central Bureaus
▪ Advisers
▪ The Commission for the
Control of Interpol’s Files
The General Assembly and the
Executive Committee form the
organization’s Governance.
General Assembly
Compose of delegates
appointed by the governments of
Member Countries. As Interpol’s
supreme governing body, it meets
once a year and takes all the major
decisions affecting general policy, the
resources needed for international co-
operation, working methods, finances
and program of activities. It also elects
the Organization's Executive
Committee. Generally speaking, the
Assembly takes decisions by a simple
majority in the form of resolutions.
Each Member State represented has
one vote.
134
Executive Committee
The Executive Committee is
Interpol’s select deliberative organ
which meets three times a year,
usually in March, July and immediately
before the General Assembly.
Its role, in accordance with Article 22
of the Constitution, is to:
▪ supervise the execution of the
decisions of the General Assembly
▪ prepare the agenda for sessions of
the General Assembly
▪ submit to the General Assembly
any program of work or project
which it considers useful
▪ Supervise the administration and
work of the Secretary General.
In accordance with Article 15 of
the Constitution, the Executive
Committee has 13 members
comprising the president of the
organization, 3 vice-presidents and 9
delegates. These members are
elected by the General Assembly and
should belong to different countries; in
addition, the president and the 3 vice-
presidents must come from different
regions.
The president is elected for 4
years, and vice-presidents for 3. They
are not immediately eligible for re-
election either to the same posts, or as
delegates to the Executive Committee.
Voting is by secret ballot. A
two-thirds majority is required for the
election of the president. If this
 majority is not obtained after the
second ballot, a simple majority is
then sufficient. Vice-Presidents and
delegates are elected on a simple
majority. Each member state has one
vote; those member states attending
the General Assembly are eligible to
take part in the election, providing
they are not prevented from doing so
under Article 52 of the General
Regulations.
Composition of the Executive
Committee
▪ President
▪ Vice Presidents
▪ Delegates
The former Filipino President of INTERPOL in
1980 – 1984 - Jolly R. Bugarin
(Philippines)
General Secretariat
Located in Lyon, France, the
General Secretariat operates 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year and is run by
the Secretary General. Officials from
more than 80 countries work side-by-
side in any of the Organization’s four
official languages: Arabic, English,
French and Spanish. The Secretariat
has seven regional offices across the
world; in Argentina, Cameroon, Côte
d’Ivoire, El Salvador, Kenya, Thailand
and Zimbabwe, along with Special
Representatives at the United Nations
in New York and at the European
Union in Brussels.
Secretary General
The Secretary General of the
Organization is appointed by the
General Assembly for a period of 5
years. He may be re-elected.
The Secretary General is
effectively the Organization’s chief
full-time official. He is responsible for
seeing that the day-to-day work of
international police co-operation is
carried out, and the implementation of
the decisions of the General Assembly
and Executive Committee.
National Central Bureaus (NCB) -
Each INTERPOL member country
maintains a National Central Bureau
staffed by national law enforcement
officers. The NCB is the designated
contact point for the General
Secretariat, regional offices and other
member countries requiring
assistance with overseas investigations
and the location and apprehension of
fugitives.
Advisers – these are experts in a
purely advisory capacity, who may be
appointed by the Executive
Committee and confirmed by the
General Assembly.
Commission for the Control of
Interpol’s Files (CCF) – this is an
independent body whose mandate is
threefold:
▪ to ensure that the processing
of personal information by
INTERPOL complies with the
Organization's regulations,
▪ to advise INTERPOL on any
project, operation, set of rules
or other matter involving the
135
processing of personal
information and
▪ To process requests
concerning the information
contained in Interpol’s files.
FORMER SECRETARY GENERAL
1. Oskar Dressler (Austria 1932-1946)
2. Louis Ducloux (France 1946-1951)
3. Marcel Sicot (France 1951-1963)
4. Jean Nepote (France 1963-1978)
5. Andre Bossard (France 1978-1985)
• Made a number of written
contributions to the development of
criminal law and the combating of
criminality, for example his book
LAW ENFORCEMENT IN EUROPE-
Building Effective Cooperation(1993)
• Produced a report on “Transnational
Crime and Criminal Law" for the
International Criminal Justice
Department of the University of
Illinois in Chicago, U.S. in 1990.
6. Raymond Kendal (United Kingdom 1985-
2000)
• Connected with activities of non-
governmental organizations in drugs
and security fields
7. Ronald K. Noble (current Secretary
General)
Contributions
• Who has the strong support of
Executive Committee and
National Central Bureau
• Developed of enhanced
technical tools for National
Central Bureaus
• Greater operational support
in the face of 21st century
crime challenges
• Building Bridges
• Strength in Neutrality
 • Preparing for the road ahead INTERPOL 190 Member Countries Rwanda St Kitts & Nevis | St Lucia | St Vincent & the
• Law enforcement experience Grenadines | Samoa | San Marino | Sao Tome &
and education Afghanistan | Albania | Algeria | Andorra | Principe | Saudi Arabia | Senegal | Serbia |
Angola | Antigua & Barbuda | Argentina | Seychelles | Sierra Leone | Singapore | Slovakia |
FORMER PRESIDENT OF INTEROL Armenia | Aruba | Australia | Austria | Azerbaijan
1. Johan Schober (Austria 1923-1932) Slovenia | Somalia | South Africa | Spain | Sri
Bahamas | Bahrain | Bangladesh | Barbados | Lanka | Sudan | Suriname | Swaziland | Sweden |
2. Franz Brandl (Austria 1932-1934)
3. Eugen Seydel (Austria 1934-1935) Belarus | Belgium | Belize | Benin | Switzerland | Syria Tajikistan | Tanzania |
4. Michael Skubl (Austria 1935-1938) Bhutan | Bolivia | Bosnia and Herzegovina | Thailand | Timor - Leste | Togo | Tonga | Trinidad
5. Otto Seinhausl (Austria 1938-1940) Botswana | Brazil | Brunei | Bulgaria | Burkina - & Tobago | Tunisia | Turkey | Turkmenistan
6. Reinhard Heydrich (Germany 1940-1942) Faso | Burundi/Cambodia | Cameroon | Canada | Uganda | Ukraine | United Arab Emirates | United
7. Arthur Nebe (Germany 1942-1943) Cape Verde | Central African Republic | Kingdom | United States | Uruguay | Uzbekistan
8. Ernst Kaltenbrunner (Austria 1943-1945) Chad | Chile | China | Colombia | Comoros |
9. Florent Louwage (Belgium 1946-1956) Vatican City State | Venezuela | Vietnam Yemen
Congo | Congo (Democratic Rep.) | Costa Rica | Zambia | Zimbabwe
10. Agostinho Lourenco (Portugal 1956-1960)
11. Sir Richard L. Jackson (United Kingdom Côte d'Ivoire | Croatia | Cuba | Cyprus | Czech
1960-1963) Republic Denmark | Djibouti | Dominica |
12. Fjalar Jarva (Finland 1963-1964) Dominican Republic Ecuador | Egypt | El Salvador
13. Firmin Franssen (Belgium 1964-1968) | Equatorial Guinea | Eritrea | Estonia | Ethiopia
14. Paul Dicopf (FRG 1968-1972) Fiji | Finland | Former Yugoslav Republic of
15. William Leonard Higgitt (Canada 1972-
Macedonia Gabon | Gambia | Georgia |
1976)
16. Carl G. Persson (Sweden 1976-1980) Germany | Ghana | Greece | Grenada | Sub Bureaus
17. Jully R. Bugarin (Philippines 1980-1984) Guatemala | Guinea | Guinea Bissau | Guyana |
18. John R. Simpson (USA 1984-1988) France Haiti | Honduras | Hungary Iceland |
19. Ivan Barbot (France 1988-1992) India | Indonesia | Iran | Iraq | Ireland | Israel |
20. Norman D. Inkster (Canada 1992-1994) Italy Jamaica | Japan | Jordan Kazakhstan | Kenya | United Bermuda | Gibraltar | Ca
21. Bjorn Eriksson (Sweden 1994-1996) Korea (Rep. of) |Kuwait | Kyrgyzstan Laos | Latvia | Kingdom: Islands | Turks and Caico
22. Toshinori Kanemoto (Japan 1996-2000)
Lebanon | Lesotho | Liberia | Libya |
23. Jesus Espigares-Mira (Spain 2000-2004)
24. Jackie Selebi (South Africa 2004-2008) Liechtenstein | Lithuania | Luxembourg United Puerto Rico | American Sa
25. Khoo Boon Hui (Singapore) He actively Madagascar | Malawi | Malaysia | Maldives | States:
worked to strengthen ties between Mali | Malta | Marshall Islands | Mauritania |
INTERPOL and Southeast Asian police Mauritius | Mexico | Moldova | Monaco | China: Hong Kong, Macao
forces, culminating in the signing of a Mongolia | Montenegro | Morocco |
Declaration of Cooperation between Mozambique | Myanmar Namibia | Nauru |
ASEANAPOL and INTERPOL in june 2007.
Nepal | Netherlands | Netherlands Antilles | New
In October 2008, he was elected The official abbreviations
president of Interpol. Zealand | Nicaragua | Niger | Nigeria | Norway
26. Mireille Ballestrazzi- (France 2012-2016) Oman Pakistan | Panama | Papua New
27. Meng Hongwei (November 2016-2020) Guinea |Paraguay | Peru | Philippines | O.I.P.C - Stands for Organization
Poland | Portugal Qatar Romania | Russia | internationale de police criminelle'
136
 ICPO - Stands for International Criminal
Police Organization'.
The official name is 'ICPO-
INTERPOL'
The word 'INTERPOL' is a contraction of
'international police', and was chosen
in 1946 as the telegraphic address. In
1956, the International Criminal Police
Commission changed its name to
become the International Criminal
Police Organization - INTERPOL.
▪ The GLOBE represents the worldwide
activities of the INTERPOL
▪ The olive branches in either sides of
the globe symbolize PEACE
▪ the name 'INTERPOL' below the globe
in the center of the olive branches
▪ The Vertical Sword behind the globe,
representing police action
▪ The Scales below the olive branches
symbolize JUSTICE
The flag
The flag has been in use since 1950, it
has a light-blue background the
emblem is in the center the four
lightning flashes arranged
symmetrically around the emblem
represent telecommunications and
speed in police action.
Background to the organization's distinctive
signs
▪ At the 1947 General Assembly
session in Paris, it was
recommended that all member
states adopt the name
'INTERPOL' as the telegraphic
address (Resolution
AGN/16/RES/12)
▪ At the 1949 General Assembly
session in Berne, the
organization (then known as the
International Criminal Police
Commission) adopted the
INTERPOL emblem and flag
▪ At the 1956 General Assembly
session in Vienna, the name
'International Criminal Police
Organization' was adopted
▪ At the 1958 General Assembly
session in London, member
states were asked to take
measures to protect the word
'INTERPOL' (AGN/27/RES/1)
▪ At its 1961 session in
Copenhagen, the General
Assembly recommended that
members take further measures
to protect the name 'ICPO-
INTERPOL' from unauthorized
use (AGN/30/RES/6)
▪ At the 1972 General Assembly
session in Frankfurt, Indonesia
proposed that Interpol’s
emblem be modified so that all
regions would be represented.
▪ At the 1973 General Assembly
session in Vienna, the emblem
was modified, and now depicts
all the regions of the world.
137
Protection of the distinctive signs
As an international
organization, Interpol’s distinctive
signs are protected by the 1883 Paris
Convention.
Under the terms of Article 6 of
this Convention, which has been
ratified by the majority of Interpol’s
member states, the signatory
countries have agreed to refuse to
register as trademarks and ban the
use of coats of arms, flags, emblems,
initials and names of states and
intergovernmental organizations.
The organization's emblem and
the name 'INTERPOL' have, in addition,
been registered as European
Community and US trademarks.
The first four were designated by the
President, and the last four were
unanimously chosen by members of
the NATIONAL Law Enforcement
Coordinating Committee (NALECC)
as authorized by the President thru
NALECC Resolution 93-10 dated 21
July 1993.
Notices - One of INTERPOL’s most important
function of international Notices are international
alerts allowing police in member countries to share
critical crime-related information.
INTERPOL’s General Secretariat at the request
of National Central Bureaus (NCBs) and authorized
entities, and can be published in any of the
Organization’s official languages: Arabic, English,
French and Spanish.
In the case of Red Notices, the persons
concerned are wanted by national jurisdictions and
the notices requested are based on an arrest warrant
or court decision. INTERPOL's role is to assist the
national police forces in identifying and locating
these persons with a view to their arrest and
extradition.
The legal basis for a Red Notice is an
arrest warrant or court order issued by the judicial
authorities in the country concerned.
In addition, Notices are used by the United
Nations, International Criminal Tribunals and the
International Criminal Court to seek persons wanted
for committing crimes within their jurisdiction,
notably genocide, war crimes, and crimes against
humanity.
Seven Types of Notice
Red Notice
To seek the arrest or provisional arrest of wanted
persons with a view to extradition
Blue Notice
To collect additional information about a person’s
identity or activities in relation to a crime.
Green Notice
To provide warnings and criminal intelligence about
persons who have committed criminal offences and
are likely to repeat these crimes in other countries.
Yellow Notice
To help locate missing persons, often minors, or to
help identify persons who are unable to identify
themselves.
Black Notice
To seek information on unidentified bodies.
Orange Notice
To warn police, public entities and other international
organizations about potential threats from disguised
weapons, parcel bombs and other dangerous
materials.
Purple Notice
To provide information on modus operandi, objects,
devices and concealment methods used by criminals.
MODEL POLICE SYSTEM
History and Development of British Police Forces
The first formal professional police force in
England and Wales was the London Metropolitan
Force, which was created following enactment of the
Metropolitan Police Act in 1829. This act provided for
a single force for the metropolis and ensured that
policing would cover a radius of approximately
seven miles from the city center.
1835, the Municipal Corporations Act required new
towns and boroughs in England and Wales to
establish police forces. This act applied to 178
corporate towns, although not all towns took
advantage of the act to establish police forces. The
problem of rural police forces was addressed in the
County Police Act of 1839, which was intended to
permit regular police forces for the fifty-six existing
counties in England and Wales. Because the
Municipal Corporations Act gave virtual unlimited
discretion to local authorities in setting standards of
pay, recruitment, and service, the result was the
creation of forces widely differing in quality. To avoid
this result among counties, the County Police Act of
1839 retained significant powers given by central
government, a condition that still exists today. The
home secretary was empowered to regulate the
conditions of pay and service of county forces and
138
provided that the appointment of the chief constable
of each force be approved by him. Again, because
this act was ”enabling” rather than ”obligatory,” only
twenty-eight counties created police forces under it.
1848, there were 182 police forces in Great
Britain. However, over time, a number of smaller
forces were amalgamated with either the county
force in which they were situated or with larger city
departments. According to Stead (1985):
The next principle measure was the County and
Borough Police Act of 1856, known as the ”Obligatory
Act.” This is the major landmark in the making of
Britain’s modern police system. . . . The Act of 1856
produced a model for the nationwide standardization
of police that characterizes the British system today.
This legislation placed on central government, for
the first time, the responsibility of ensuring that a
police force was established in every county and
borough throughout the United Kingdom and to
ensure that they were operating in an efficient
manner. In addition to the home secretary’s
responsibilities, as stated earlier, a further important
provision was that the central government undertook
the obligation of providing a proportion of financing
for those forces certified as efficient. As a result,
central and local government became partners in
providing police service in Britain—a model that
continues to exist in contemporary policing. By 1939,
England and Wales had 183 police forces.
The watershed for the development of the modern
police service came with the Royal Commission on
Police in 1962. The outcome of the commission’s
deliberations was the Police Act of 1964, which sets
the structure of policing in England and Wales and is
the basis on which modern policing is formulated.
The Police Act of 1964 marks a decisive stage in
police development. It reaffirmed the principle of
local participation in police governance. It gave
Parliament a whole range of subjects on which it can
question the Home Secretary and it makes possible
the consolidations of the 1960s.
The local government reorganization in 1974, the
number of forces was reduced to forty-three. As of
1992 there were fifty-two police forces in the United
Kingdom with 29,243 special constables to assist in
law enforcement. These forces vary in size from 798
sworn officers (City of London Police) to more than
28,000 (Metropolitan Police Force). These totals take
no account of civilian staff whose numbers have
swelled considerably during the past few years as
forces have implemented extensive civilianization
programs to ensure that police officers are not tied
down with clerical and administrative tasks.
Although the geographic area that each force covers
varies, the boundaries are coterminous with the
principal local government areas. Each force has the
total responsibility for policing policy and
operations taking place within its area.
The readjustment of forces in 1974, while
encouraging efficiency by creating larger forces
resulting in greater economy, also created problems
in service delivery. Larger police forces resulted in
both greater separation between the administration
and those at the sharp end of policing, and greater
personal distance between the forces and the public
they served. The latter problem was no small issue
for a police service that prided itself on service
delivery and relied heavily on its personal
relationship with the people it served.
The Structure of Police Authority
Metropolitan and City of London forces, each of
which is headed by a commissioner) is totally
responsible for the operational policing in his area.
However, in all forces except the two outlined above,
the local authority has the responsibility under the
Police Acts of 1964 and 1976 to maintain an adequate
and efficient police force for its area. In this regard,
they appoint a police committee composed of local
politicians and magistrates to oversee policing
issues. They also have the responsibility for
appointing the chief constable and serve as his
disciplinary authority.
On a national basis, the secretary of state for home
affairs (the home secretary), who is a senior member
of the government, has a direct responsibility for the
police service. He or she exercises control through
the home office and his or her role is primarily to
maintain a consistent national policy on policing.
This responsibility is undertaken primarily through
the medium of home office circulars, which do not
have the force of law, but which provide chief officers
with advice and guidance on a variety of policing
issues. In addition, central government through the
home office funds 51% of all policing costs and, as a
result, maintains a considerable level of control. In
effect, therefore, police forces are controlled by what
is called a tripartite arrangement among:
Having commented on issues concerning the
control of police forces, we now propose to look at
the rank structure. With the exception of the
Metropolitan and City of London forces, the rank
structure for sworn personnel is identical in all police
forces in England and Wales. (In the Metropolitan
Police the rank structure above chief superintendent
is commander, deputy assistant commissioner,
assistant commissioner, deputy commissioner, and
commissioner. In the city of London, it is assistant
139
commissioner, deputy commissioner, and
commissioner.) The standard rank structure is
outlined below:
• Chief constable
• Deputy chief constable
• Assistant chief constable
• Chief Superintendent
• Superintendent
• Chief inspector
• Inspector sergeant constable
Note that there are a considerable number of layers
of management in this structure, which results in an
average of one supervisor to every three constables.
The Police Service of England and Wales
commands considerable public resources which
demand exceptional management skills if Forces are
to respond to the needs of the public. The
fundamental questions which arose during our
enquiry concern whether the current system of
training and career development for police officers
based on a 19th-Century system and constrained by
the separate organization of each is adequate for the
Police Service as it approaches the 21st Century.
To review the effectiveness of the Criminal Justice
System in England and Wales in securing the
conviction of those guilty of criminal offences and the
acquittal of those who are innocent, having regard to
the efficient use of resources.
In particular, they were asked to consider
whether changes were needed regarding:
• The conduct of police investigations and their
supervision by senior police officers
• The role of the prosecutor in supervising the
gathering of evidence and deciding whether a case
should proceed
• The right of silence for the accused
• The powers of the courts to direct proceedings
• The role of the Court of Appeal in considering new
evidence on appeal
• The arrangements for considering and investigating
allegations of miscarriages of justice when appeal
rights have been exhausted
The second was the review undertaken by the
local government commission into the future of local
government. Its terms of reference were to examine
all relevant issues and make recommendations
concerning the future structure, boundaries, and
electoral changes to particular local government
areas. The review took the form of a rolling program
and, in consequence, it took some time to cover the
whole of the country. However, the results could have
major implications for the police service. For
example, if local authority boundary changes took
place, it could result in the demise of many of the
smaller forces, the amalgamation of others, and even
the breaking up of some of the larger forces. The
possibility of such changes was a fact recognized by
Chief Constable O’Dowd in a speech at an
international police conference in London on the
future of the police service in England and Wales. He
concluded that there would be fewer police forces.
Many people believed that the restructuring of forces
was high on the hidden political agenda.
The final review and probably the most important as
far as the police service is concerned was that which
the home secretary established in May 1992, under
the chairmanship of Sir Patrick Sheey, to review
police responsibilities and rewards. The inquiry
team, which had to report by May 1993, comprised
management consultants, academics, and
industrialists who addressed a variety of policing
issues including the following:
• The structure of forces to ensure that they meet the
management needs of today’s police service • The
roles and responsibilities of the various ranks within
the service
• The salaries of police officers to ensure the salary
reflects the responsibilities of the particular
individuals
• Rewards and sanctions for good and bad
performance
• The conditions of service, work practices, and the
improvement of professional standards
British police ranks that exist today were deliberately
chosen so that they do not mirror British Military
ranks, due to public concern about military
intervention into civil disorder.
Each officer upon joining the police is sworn in
legally as a Constable, which is also the title of the
starting rank. While at the rank of Constable, each
officer is required to undergo a two-year
probationary period and work in a uniformed
policing role. After the two year period has passed,
the individual officer may apply for promotion to the
first supervisory rank of Sergeant or a specialized
role.
Many forces in the United Kingdom have
several different branches, such as the road policing
unit and support unit. In some, officers are uniformed
due to the roles requiring such; others are staffed by
plain-clothes detectives.
Most territorial police forces and special police
forces outside of London have a standard set of ranks:
• (Detective/Uniformed) Constable
• (Detective/Uniformed) Sergeant
• (Detective/Uniformed) Inspector
• (Detective/Uniformed) Chief Inspector
140
• (Detective/Uniformed) Superintendent
• (Detective/Uniformed) Chief Superintendent
• Assistant Chief Constable
• Deputy Chief Constable
• Chief Constable
Ranks up to Chief Superintendent can be held in
either a uniformed or detective capacity, whereas
after that the "Chief Officer" ranks are concerned
with the overall management and effective running of
the force.
Within London's Metropolitan Police Service the
ranks are identical to those outside London, until
Chief Superintendent. In London, the chief officer
ranks are:
• Commander
• Deputy Assistant Commissioner
• Assistant Commissioner
• Deputy Commissioner
• Commissioner
The Special Constabulary, which is made up of
volunteer police officers with identical powers to
regular officers, maintains its own ranking structure
(varies, but most common):
• Chief Officer
• Assistant Chief Officer
• Special Chief Inspector
• District Officer (Similar in role to an
Inspector)
• Section Officer (Similar in role to a Sergeant)
• Special Constable
The Special Constabulary in Scottish police
forces does not maintain any rank structure and all
members of the Special Constabulary are Special
Constables regardless of length of
service/experience, etc. Special Constables are
always subordinate to regular Constables.
Traffic wardens and Police Community Support
Officers do not have a rank structure.
Constable is a person holding a particular office,
most commonly in law enforcement. The office of
constable can vary significantly in different
jurisdictions.
Sergeant (normally abbreviated to Sgt) is a rank
used in some form by most militaries, police forces,
and other uniformed organizations around the world.
Its origins are the Latin serviens, "one who serves",
through the French term Sergent.
Inspector is both a police rank and an administrative
position, both used in a number of contexts.
However, it is not an equivalent rank in each police
force.
Chief inspector (Ch Insp) is a rank used in police
forces which follow the British model. In countries
outside Britain, it is sometimes referred to as chief
inspector of police (CIP)
Superintendent (supt) often shortened to "super", is
a rank in British police services and in most English-
speaking Commonwealth nations. In many
Commonwealth countries the full version is
superintendent of police (SP). The rank is also still
used in the former British Colony of Hong Kong
Chief Superintendent is a senior rank in police
forces organised on the British model.
Assistant chief constable (ACC) is the third highest
rank in all British territorial police forces (except the
Metropolitan Police and City of London Police, in
which the equivalent rank is commander, and
Dumfries and Galloway Constabulary and the
Northern Constabulary, which have no officers of this
rank), as well as the British Transport Police, Ministry
of Defence Police and Civil Nuclear Constabulary.
Commander is a chief officer rank in the two police
forces responsible for law enforcement within
London, the Metropolitan Police and City of London
Police. In both forces, the rank is senior to chief
superintendent, in the Metropolitan Police it is junior
to Deputy Assistant Commissioner and in the City of
London Police it is junior to assistant commissioner.
In forces outside of London, the rank equates to
assistant chief constable.
Deputy chief constable (DCC) is the second highest
rank in all territorial police forces in the United
Kingdom (except the Metropolitan Police, in which
the equivalent rank is deputy assistant commissioner,
and City of London Police, in which the equivalent
rank is assistant commissioner, both of which wear
the same insignia as a DCC). The British Transport
Police, Ministry of Defence Police, Civil Nuclear
Constabulary, and the Isle of Man Constabulary each
also has a DCC.
Until 2006, each force could only have one DCC, who
would normally be second-in-command to the chief
constable. However, Schedule 2 of the Police and
Justice Act 2006 amended the Police Act 1996 to
permit more than one DCC within each force.
However, as yet no force has had more than one DCC
at any one time.
The DCC ranks above the assistant chief constables.
The role of the DCC varies from force to force. In
some smaller forces (usually those with only a single
ACC or no ACC), they take responsibility for
territorial policing, but in most forces the role covers
corporate functions including professional standards.
Assistant commissioner of police of the metropolis
(AC) is the third highest rank in the London
Metropolitan Police, ranking between deputy
141
assistant commissioner and deputy commissioner of
police of the metropolis. The assistant commissioner
is also the second-in-command of the City of London
Police, ranking between commander and
commissioner. The rank is not used in other British
police forces.
Deputy assistant commissioner (DAC) is a rank in
London's Metropolitan Police Service between
assistant commissioner and commander. It is
equivalent to deputy chief constable in other British
police forces and wears the same insignia: a pip
above crossed tip staves within a wreath.
Chief constable is the rank used by the chief police
officer of every territorial police force in the United
Kingdom except for the City of London Police and the
Metropolitan Police, as well as the chief officers of the
three 'special' national police forces, the British
Transport Police, Ministry of Defence Police, and
Civil Nuclear Constabulary. The title is also held by
the chief officers of the principal Crown Dependency
police forces, the Isle of Man Constabulary, States of
Guernsey Police Service, and States of Jersey Police.
Deputy Commissioner of Police of the Metropolis,
commonly referred to simply as the Deputy
Commissioner, is the second-in-command of
London's Metropolitan Police Service. The rank is
senior to Assistant Commissioner, but junior by one
rank to Commissioner.
The rank of Deputy Commissioner was formally
established as a separate rank, additional to the
Assistant Commissioners, in 1931.
The rank of Commissioner was created by the
Metropolitan Police Act 1829, until 1855, the post was
held jointly by two officers. The Commissioners were
Justices of the Peace and not sworn constables until 1
April 1974. The title Commissioner was not used until
1839.
The insignia of rank is a crown above a Bath Star,
known as "pips", above crossed tip staves within a
wreath, very similar to the insignia worn by a full
general in the British Army. This badge is all but
unique within the British police, shared only with the
Commissioner of the City of London Police, the
smallest territorial police force.
At one time, the commissioners were either retired
military officers or civil servants. Sir John Nott-Bower
was the first career police officer to hold the post,
despite several previous Commissioners having
served in senior administrative positions in colonial
forces, and the Metropolitan Police itself. Sir Joseph
Simpson was the first Commissioner to have started
his career as the lowest rank of Constable. However,
Sir Robert Mark, appointed in 1972, was the first to
have risen through all the ranks from the lowest to the
highest, as all his successors have done.
As of 2008, the post of Commissioner is appointed for
a period of five years. Applicants are appointed to
the post by Her Majesty the Queen, following a
recommendation by the Home Secretary under the
Police Act 1996.
As of 2010 the salary of the Commissioner of the
Metropolis is £260,088.[6]
Qualification
Becoming a police officer in Britain can be a
rewarding and fulfilling career. A police officer must
be physically fit and mentally able to make tough
decisions quickly. The daily activities of a police
officer can vary.
Age Restrictions
The British police force does not employ
anyone under the age of 18. The police force has no
maximum age limit, and the police often recruit
adults looking for a career change. Most British
police officers retire around the age of 60.
Citizenship
British police officers must be British citizens
or members of the European Union. Officers also can
be citizens of the larger British Commonwealth. Ex-
patriots living in Britain indefinitely are also welcome
to apply.
Assessments
Applicants must be able to pass the written
and physical examinations for the region in which
they are applying before being admitted to the
police force. The physical exams ensure the
applicant is fit enough to serve in the position. The
written exams assess the applicant's reading ability.
Police officers do not have to have formal education.
Hours
British police officers work varied shifts that
can include working through the night. Police officers
often work on major holidays and put in overtime to
solve case.
Daily Activities
British police officers have various daily
activities depending on the branch of police work in
which the office is employed. An officer could walk a
beat, investigate drug activities, or monitor traffic
patterns, among other duties. Police officers also
spend time filling out paperwork pertaining to
current cases.
Pay and Future Prospects
Beginning police officers will make around
20,000 British pounds per year as of 2010, according
to the Could You Police website. The pay increases
with experience. After leaving the force, officers can
join the military, private security forces, or work in a
variety of government agencies.
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Organizational name: State Police
Agency: Department of Laws and Public Safety
Entrance Age: 21 years old
Retirement age: 55 years old except Superintendent
142
Minimum rank: Trooper
Highest rank: Superintendent
Minimum Qualification: Bachelor Degree of
Accredited University
ORIGIN OF JAPANESE POLICE SYSTEM
In 1872, the government sent the first Superintendent
General Toshiyoshi KAWAJI to Europe to research
the police system.
1874 established the Tokyo Metropolitan Police
Department in the Ministry of the Interior. This was
the first modern police agency in Japan. The police
system was based on a National Police system. In the
process of the democratization of Japan after World
War the old Police Act, enforced in 1948, had
incorporated the system of public safety Commission
into the police and had created a structure consisting
of national and municipal police with the aim of
ensuring democratic management and
decentralization of police power. The old Police Act
had an epochal significance in that it had aimed at
democratizing the police. However, it had
institutional shortcomings such as the existence of a
multitude of municipal police forces in parallel with
the National Rural Police.
1874, under the centralized control of the
Police Bureau within the Home Ministry, to put down
internal disturbances and maintain order during the
Meiji Restoration. By the 1880s, the police had
developed into a nationwide instrument of
government control, providing support for local
leaders and enforcing public morality. They acted as
general civil administrators, implementing official
policies and thereby facilitating unification and
modernization. In rural areas especially, the police
had great authority and were accorded the same
mixture of fear and respect as the village head. Their
increasing involvement in political affairs was one of
the foundations of the authoritarian state in Japan in
the first half of the twentieth century.
The centralized police system steadily acquired
responsibilities, until it controlled almost all aspects
of daily life, including fire prevention and mediation
of labor disputes. The system regulated public
health, business, factories, and construction, and it
issued permits and licenses. The Peace Preservation
Law of 1925 gave police the authority to arrest people
for "wrong thoughts". Special Higher Police (Tokko)
were created to regulate the content of motion
pictures, political meetings, and election campaigns.
The Imperial Japanese Army's military police
(Kempeitai) and the Imperial Japanese Navy's
Tokeitai, operating under their respective services
and the justice and home ministries aided the civilian
police in limiting proscribed political activity. After
the Manchurian Incident of 1931, military police
assumed greater authority, leading to friction with
their civilian counterparts. After 1937 police directed
business activities for the war effort, mobilized labor,
and controlled transportation.
After Japan's surrender in 1945, occupation
authorities retained the prewar police structure until
a new system was implemented and the Diet passed
the 1947 Police Law. Contrary to Japanese proposals
for a strong, centralized force to deal with postwar
unrest, the police system was decentralized. About
1,600 independent municipal forces were established
in cities, towns, and villages with 5,000 inhabitants or
more, and a National Rural Police was organized by
prefecture. Civilian control was to be ensured by
placing the police under the jurisdiction of public
safety commissions controlled by the National Public
Safety Commission in the Office of the Prime Minister.
The Home Ministry was abolished and replaced by
the less powerful Ministry of Home Affairs, and the
police were stripped of their responsibility for fire
protection, public health, and other administrative
duties.
When most of the occupation forces were
transferred to Korea in 1950–51, the 75,000 strong
National Police Reserve was formed to back up the
ordinary police during civil disturbances, and
pressure mounted for a centralized system more
compatible with Japanese political preferences. The
1947 Police Law was amended in 1951 to allow the
municipal police of smaller communities to merge
with the National Rural Police. Most chose this
arrangement, and by 1954 only about 400 cities,
towns, and villages still had their own police forces.
Under the 1954 amended Police Law, a final
restructuring created an even more centralized
system in which local forces were organized by
prefectures under a National Police Agency.
The revised Police Law of 1954, still in effect
in the 1990s, preserves some strong points of the
postwar system, particularly measures ensuring
civilian control and political neutrality, while allowing
for increased centralization. The National Public
Safety Commission system has been retained. State
responsibility for maintaining public order has been
clarified to include coordination of national and local
efforts; centralization of police information,
communications, and record keeping facilities; and
national standards for training, uniforms, pay, rank,
and promotion. Rural and municipal forces were
abolished and integrated into prefectural forces,
143
which handled basic police matters. Officials and
inspectors in various ministries and agencies
continue to exercise special police functions
assigned to them in the 1947 Police Law.
National Organization
National Public Safety Commission
The mission of the National Public Safety
Commission is to guarantee the neutrality of the
police by insulating the force from political pressure
and to ensure the maintenance of democratic
methods in police administration. The commission's
primary function is to supervise the National Police
Agency, and it has the authority to appoint or dismiss
senior police officers. The commission consists of a
chairman, who holds the rank of minister of state, and
five members appointed by the prime minister with
the consent of both houses of the Diet. The
commission operates independently of the cabinet,
but liaison and coordination with it are facilitated by
the chairman's being a member of that body.
National Police Agency
As the central coordinating body for the
entire police system, the National Police Agency
determines general standards and policies; detailed
direction of operations is left to the lower echelons.[1]
In a national emergency or large-scale disaster, the
agency is authorized to take command of prefectural
police forces. In 1989 the agency was composed of
about 1,100 national civil servants, empowered to
collect information and to formulate and execute
national policies. The agency is headed by a
commissioner general who is appointed by the
National Public Safety Commission with the approval
of the prime minister.[1]
The Central Office includes the Secretariat,
with divisions for general operations, planning,
information, finance, management, and procurement
and distribution of police equipment, and five
bureaus.
Police Administration Bureau
The Administration Bureau is concerned with police
personnel, education, welfare, training, and unit
inspections.
Criminal Investigation Bureau
The Criminal Investigation Bureau is in
charge of research statistics and the investigation of
nationally important and international cases. This
bureau's Safety Department is responsible for crime
prevention, combating juvenile delinquency, and
pollution control. In addition, the Criminal
Investigation Bureau surveys, formulates, and
recommends legislation on firearms, explosives,
food, drugs, and narcotics. The Communications
Bureau supervises police communications systems.
Traffic Bureau
Japanese Police Patrol Nissan Caravan in Osaka
The Traffic Bureau licenses drivers, enforces
traffic safety laws, and regulates traffic. Intensive
traffic safety and driver education campaigns are run
at both national and prefectural levels. The bureau's
Expressway Division addresses special conditions of
the nation's growing system of express highways.
Security Bureau
The Security Bureau formulates and
supervises the execution of security policies. It
conducts research on equipment and tactics for
suppressing riots and oversees and coordinates
activities of the riot police. The Security Bureau is
also responsible for security intelligence on
foreigners and radical political groups, including
investigation of violations of the Alien Registration
Law and administration of the Entry and Exit Control
Law. The bureau also implements security policies
during national emergencies and natural disasters.
Organization
• Commissioner-General of the National Police
Agency, the Highest ranking police office
• Deputy Commissioner-General
• Commissioner-General's Secretariat
• Community Safety Bureau
• Criminal Investigation Bureau
o Organized Crime Department
• Traffic Bureau
• Security Bureau
• Foreign Affairs and Intelligence Department
• Info-Communications Bureau
• National Police Academy
• National Research Institute of Police Science
• Imperial Guard Headquarters
Regional Public Safety Bureaus
144
The National Police Agency has seven
regional police bureaus, each responsible for a
number of prefectures. Each is headed by a Director
and they are organization similar to the Central
Office. They are located in major cities of each
geographic region. The Tokyo Metropolitan Police
Department and Hokkaido Prefectural Police
Headquarters are excluded from the jurisdiction of
RPBs. Headed by a Director General, each RPB
exercises necessary control and supervision over
and provides support services to prefectural police
within its jurisdiction, under the authority and orders
of NPA's Commissioner General. Attached to each
Regional Police Bureaus is a Regional Police School
which provides police personnel with education and
training required of staff officers as well as other
necessary education and training.
Regional Police Bureaus:
• Tohoku - Aomori, Iwate, Miyagi, Akita,
Yamagata, and Fukushima Prefectures
• Kinki - Shiga, Kyoto, Osaka, Hyogo, Nara, and
Wakayama Prefectures
• Shikoku - Tokushima, Kagawa, Ehime, Kochi
Prefectures
• Kanto - Ibaraki, Tochigi, Gunma, Saitama,
Chiba, Kanagawa, Niigata, Yamanashi,
Nagano, and Shizuoka Prefectures
• Chubu - Toyama, Ishikawa, Fukui, Gifu, Aichi,
Mie, Prefectures
• Kyushu - Fukuoka, Saga, Nagasaki,
Kumamoto, Oita, Miyazaki, Kagoshima, and
Okinawa Prefectures
• Chugoku - Tottori, Shimane, Okayama,
Hiroshima, and Yamaguchi Prefectures
Police Communications Divisions
 Metropolitan Tokyo and the island of
Hokkaidō are excluded from the regional
jurisdictions and are run more autonomously than
other local forces, in the case of Tokyo, because of its
special urban situation, and of Hokkaidō, because of
its distinctive geography. The National Police Agency
maintains police communications divisions in these
two areas to handle any coordination needed
between national and local forces.
• Communications Departments
o Tokyo Metropolitan Police Info-
Communications Department
Hokkaido Police Info-
Communications Department
o Bodies supervised by the NPA
• 47 Prefectural Police Departments with the
Tokyo Metropolitan Police Department
Imperial Guard
In 1947 the Imperial Police Headquarters was
created under the control of the Home Ministry from
the Imperial Household Ministry. It came under the
aegis of the National Police Agency of Japan in 1957.
It provides personal security for the Emperor, Crown
Prince and other members of the Imperial Family of
Japan, as well as protection of imperial properties,
including the Tokyo Imperial Palace, Kyoto Imperial
Palace, Katsura Imperial Villa, Shugakuin Imperial
Villa (both in Kyoto), Shosoin Imperial Repository in
Nara and the imperial villas as Hayama, Kanagawa
and Nasu, Tochigi.
Strength
As of 2010, the total strength reached
approximately 291,475 personnel.[2] The NPA total is
about 7,709 with 1,969 police officers, 901 Imperial
guards and 4,839 civilians.The Prefectural police total
is about 283,766 with 255,156 police officers and
28,610 civilians. Nationwide, there are about 14,900
female police officers and about 11,800 female
civilians.
Local organization
Tokyo Metropolitan Police Office in Kasumigaseki
There are some 289,000 police officers nationwide,
about 97 percent of whom were affiliated with local
police forces. Local forces include:
• forty-three prefectural (ken) police forces;
• Tokyo Metropolitan (to) police force, in
Tokyo;
• two urban prefectural (fu) police forces, in
Osaka and Kyoto; and
• one district (dō) police force, in Hokkaidō.
These forces have limited authority to initiate
police actions. Their most important activities are
regulated by the National Police Agency, which
provides funds for equipment, salaries, riot control,
escort, and natural disaster duties, and for internal
security and multiple jurisdiction cases. National
police statutes and regulations establish the strength
and rank allocations of all local personnel and the
locations of local police stations. Prefectural police
finance and control the patrol officer on the beat,
traffic control, criminal investigations, and other daily
operations.
145
Prefectural Police
Each prefectural police headquarters
contains administrative divisions corresponding to
those of the bureaus of the National Police Agency.
Headquarters are staffed by specialists in basic
police functions and administration and are
commanded by an officer appointed by the local
office of the National Public Safety Commission. Most
arrests and investigations are performed by
prefectural police officials (and, in large jurisdictions,
by police assigned to substations), who are assigned
to one or more central locations within the
prefecture. Experienced officers are organized into
functional bureaus and handle all but the most
ordinary problems in their fields.
Kōban
Officer providing assistance at a police station in
Hiroshima, near Hondori
Kōbans are substations near major
transportation hubs and shopping areas and in
residential districts. They form the first line of police
response to the public. The Koban system is
composed of about 6500 police boxes (Koban) and
about 7600 residential police boxes (Chuzaisho).
Koban is staffed by relatively small number of police
officers (3-5 officers in usual), and also Chuzaisho is
usually staffed by a single officer. About 20 percent of
the total police force is assigned to koban. Staffed by
officers working in eight-hour shifts, they serve as a
base for foot patrols and usually have both sleeping
and eating facilities for officers on duty but not on
watch. In rural areas, residential offices usually are
staffed by one police officer who resides in adjacent
family quarters. These officers endeavor to become a
part of the community, and their families often aid in
performing official tasks.
Vigilance at the Koban and Chuzaisho is
maintained by standing watch in front or sitting watch
inside, enabling police officers to respond
immediately to any incident. While keeping a
constant watch, they perform a myriad of routine
tasks, such as receiving crime reports from citizens,
handling lost and found articles, counseling citizens
in trouble and giving directions.
Outside their Koban and Chuzaisho, police
officers patrol their beats either on foot, by bicycle or
by car. While on patrol, they gain a precise
knowledge of the topography and terrain of the area,
question suspicious-looking persons, provide traffic
guidance and enforcement, instruct juveniles, rescue
the injured, warn citizens of imminent dangers and
protect lost children and those under the influence or
intoxicated.
Radio-equipped patrol cars are deployed at
each PPH, police station, Koban and Chuzaisho.
Police officers use them for routine patrol and rapid
response. These cars remain in constant radio contact
with their police station and the communications
command center of the PPH. When an emergency is
reported, this rapid response capability plays a
major role in the quick resolution of such incidents.[4]
Officers assigned to koban have intimate
knowledge of their jurisdictions. One of their primary
tasks is to conduct twice-yearly house-by-house
residential surveys of homes in their areas, at which
time the head of the household at each address fills
out a residence information card detailing the names,
ages, occupations, business addresses, and vehicle
registration numbers of household occupants and the
names of relatives living elsewhere. Police take
special note of names of the aged or those living
alone who might need special attention in an
emergency. They conduct surveys of local
businesses and record employee names and
addresses, in addition to such data as which
establishments stay open late and which employees
might be expected to work late. Participation in the
survey is voluntary, and most citizens cooperate, but
an increasing segment of the population has come to
regard the surveys as invasions of privacy.
Information elicited through the surveys is
not centralized but is stored in each police box,
where it is used primarily as an aid to locating
people. When a crime occurs or an investigation is
under way, however, these files are invaluable in
establishing background data for a case. Specialists
from district police stations spend considerable time
culling through the usually poorly filed data
maintained in the police boxes.
Special police
In addition to regular police officers, there
are several thousand officials attached to various
agencies who perform special duties relating to
public safety. They are responsible for such matters
as forest preservation, narcotics control, fishery
inspection, and enforcement of regulations on
maritime, labor, and mine safety.
Special judicial police officials
Cabinet Office
146
• Imperial guard
Ministry of Justice
• Prison guard
Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare
• Narcotics agent
• Labor Standards Inspector
Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries
• Authorized Fisheries Supervisor
• Officers of Regional Forest Office, under
Forestry Agency
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry
Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and
Tourism
Coast Guard Officer
The largest and most important of these ministry-
supervised public safety agencies is the Japan Coast
Guard, an external agency of the Ministry of Land,
Infrastructure and Transport that deals with crime in
coastal waters and maintains facilities for
safeguarding navigation. The agency operates a fleet
of patrol and rescue craft in addition to a few aircraft
used primarily for anti-smuggling patrols and rescue
activities. In 1990 there were 2,846 incidents in and
on the waters. In those incidents, 1,479 people
drowned or were lost and 1,347 people were
rescued.
Ministry of Defense
• Military police officer
Officials working for public safety, except for
Special judicial police officials
There are other officers having limited public safety
functions.
The National Diet
• Diet guard
Ministry of Justice
• Immigration control officer
• Immigration inspector
Public security intelligence officer
They handle national security matters both inside and
outside the country. Its activities are not generally
known to the public.
• Public prosecutor
• Public prosecutor's assistant officer
Ministry of Finance
• Customs official
• Officers of National Tax Agency
Ministry of Health, Labor and Welfare
• Quarantine Officer
Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries
• Animal Quarantine Officers
• Plant Protection Officer
Special operations
The National Police Agency has a counter-
terrorist unit known as the Special Assault Team,
operating under police control.[5]A small number of
anti-riot-trained police officers had been trained to
handle incidents that cannot be dealt with by regular
police and riot police officers, but can operate
independently or with SAT cooperation. These units
include the Special Investigations Team of the Tokyo
Metropolitan Police, the Osaka Police's Martial Arts
Attack Team and the Chiba Police's Attack Response
Team.
Rank
Police officers are divided into nine ranks:
• Superintendent General
• Superintendent Supervisor
• Chief Superintendent
• Senior Superintendent
• Superintendent
• Inspector
• Assistant Inspector
• Sergeant
• Senior Police Officer
• Police Officer
The NPA Commissioner General holds the
highest position of the Japanese police. His title is not
a rank, but rather denotes his position as head of the
NPA. On the other hand, the MPD Superintendent
General represents not only the highest rank in the
system but also assignment as head of the Tokyo
Metropolitan Police Department.
Uniform
For much of the twentieth century up to the
mid 1990s, police officers wore a formal work
uniform consisting of a tunic or Ike jacket with
polished silver buttons, and trousers with a sewn in
truncheon pocket. No stab vest was worn and much
less equipment was carried than is today. Following
concerns about the police uniforms safety it was
suggested that the uniform should be changed.
147
From the 1990s it was generally accepted that
the police could patrol in "shirt-sleeve order" which
meant that they need not wear the jacket, as its
widespread use was hampering in some situations.
The NPA, in agreement with the government and on
the cooperation of the Prefecture Chiefs of Police,
changed the uniform from the business attire with no
protection of the torso, to a uniform of button down
shirt with trousers, stab vest, duty belt, and jacket
when needed.
Although there are minor variations in the
styling, pattern and insignia, the police forces all
wear very similar uniforms. In general, these have
taken their lead from the Tokyo Metropolitan Police,
due to it being the largest police service in Japan.
The base color is a dark blue or a frosted grey for
summer wear.
Female officers' uniforms have gone through
a great variety of styles, as they have tended to
reflect the women's fashions of the time. Tunic style,
skirt length and headgear have varied by period and
force. By the late 1980s, the female working uniform
was virtually identical to male, except for headgear
and sometimes neckwear.
Formal uniform comprises an open-necked
tunic (with or without an attached belt, depending on
the force and rank of the Officer) and trousers or
skirt, worn with a white or light blue shirt and black
tie (usually clip-on, so it cannot be used to strangle
the wearer).
The normal working dress retains the shirt
and trousers. In some forces short sleeved shirts may
be worn open-necked. Long sleeved shirts must
always be worn with a tie, worn with or without a
jersey or fleece. If a jersey, fleece or jacket is worn
over a short sleeved shirt, then a tie must be worn.
Today, female officers almost never wear a
skirt in working dress, and frequently wear trousers
in formal dress as well. Officers also frequently wear
reflective waterproof jackets, which have replaced
the old greatcoats and cloaks traditionally worn in
inclement weather. Most officers now wear stab
vests, a type of body amour, when on duty.
Basic headgear is a peaked cap for men, and
a soft round bowler hat for women. Traffic officers
wear white cap covers or caps.
Most Japanese police wear white gloves
while they are on duty. Some also wear white pistol
belts, lanyards, helmets, boot laces or leggings.
Conditions of service
Education is highly stressed in police
recruitment and promotion. Entrance to the force is
determined by examinations administered by each
prefecture. Examinees are divided into two groups:
upper-secondary-school graduates and university
graduates. Recruits underwent rigorous training—
one year for upper-secondary school graduates and
six months for university graduates—at the
residential police academy attached to the
prefectural headquarters. On completion of basic
training, most police officers are assigned to local
police boxes called Kobans. Promotion is achieved
by examination and requires further course work. In-
service training provides mandatory continuing
education in more than 100 fields. Police officers with
upper-secondary school diplomas are eligible to take
the examination for sergeant after three years of on-
the-job experience. University graduates can take
the examination after only one year. University
graduates are also eligible to take the examination
for assistant police inspector, police inspector, and
superintendent after shorter periods than upper-
secondary school graduates. There are usually five to
fifteen examinees for each opening.
About fifteen officers per year pass advanced
civil service examinations and are admitted as senior
officers. Officers are groomed for administrative
positions, and, although some rise through the ranks
to become senior administrators, most such positions
are held by specially recruited senior executives.
The police forces are subject to external
oversight. Although officials of the National Public
Safety Commission generally defer to police
decisions and rarely exercise their powers to check
police actions or operations, police are liable for civil
and criminal prosecution, and the media actively
publicizes police misdeeds. The Human Rights
Bureau of the Ministry of Justice solicits and
investigates complaints against public officials,
including police, and prefectural legislatures could
summon police chiefs for questioning. Social
sanctions and peer pressure also constrain police
behavior. As in other occupational groups in Japan,
police officers develop an allegiance to their own
group and a reluctance to offend its principles.
148
Aviation
Helicopters are extensively used for traffic control
surveillance, pursuit of suspects, rescue and disaster
relief. Total of 80 small and medium-sized helicopters
are being operated in 47 prefectures nationwide.
Watercraft
Japanese police boats are deployed to major
ports, remote islands and lakes, where they are used
for water patrol and control of illegal immigration,
smuggling and poaching. Ranging from five to 23
meters long, there are about 190 police boats
nationwide.
Police-community relations
Despite legal limits on police jurisdiction,
many citizens retain their views of the police as
authority figures to whom they can turn for aid. The
public often seeks police assistance to settle family
quarrels, counsel juveniles, and mediate minor
disputes. Citizens regularly consult police for
directions to hotels and residences—an invaluable
service in cities where streets are often unnamed and
buildings are numbered in the order in which they
have been built rather than consecutively. Police are
encouraged by their superiors to view these tasks as
answering the public's demands for service and as
inspiring community confidence in the police. Public
attitudes toward the police are generally favorable,
although a series of incidents of forced confessions in
the late 1980s raised some concern about police
treatment of suspects held for pretrial detention.[
Historical secret police organizations
• Tokko (Investigated and controlled political
groups and ideologies deemed to be a threat
to public order)
• Kempeitai (Military Police of the Imperial
Japanese Army)
 • Tokeitai (Military Police of the Imperial
Japanese Navy)
SWISS POLICING HISTORY
The International Committee of the Red Cross
(ICRC)
Henri Dunant, a Swiss merchant, was shocked when
he learned about the fate of wounded soldiers in the
battle of Solferino (1859, Austrian-French war). In
1862 he wrote a book about it. and in 1864 the Swiss
government organized an international conference
on humanitarian aspects during war. 12 nations
signed the Geneva conventions and established the
International Committee of the Red Cross as a
permanent, neutral institution to take care of military
and civil persons wounded or imprisoned in war.
Switzerland during the World Wars
Since the 1815 Vienna conference on international
affairs after Napoleons defeat, Switzerland is obliged
to be neutral in any conflicts between other nations.
During World War I (1914-1918), it was relatively
clear, what this obligation meant. In World War II
(1939-1945), Switzerland was surrounded by troops
of or loyal to the German Nazi regime disregarding
any international rules. From today's point of view, it
seems that Switzerland could and should have done
more in favour of jewish refugees. It is also clear that
accepting gold from the Nazis while knowing they
stole it from murdered jews was a big mistake.
Today's Swiss government has appointed an
international Independent Commission of Experts
(ICE) to conduct an inquiry on Switzerlands role in
World War II.
The International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC)
was critized for not having intervened on behalf of
the Jews in World War II. In fact, though the 4th
Geneva Convention protecting civilians during
wartime was only established after the war in 1949,
the ICRC has admitted that it did neglect a moral
duty. Those who are criticizing the ICRC for its
legalistic omissions in World War II are kindly invited
to support it now, when it demands e.g. that AL-
Qaida terrorists being detained on Guantanamo U.S.
base are either treated as civilians (with full legal
rights, including fair trial within reasonable time) or
at least as prisoners of war.
POLICING SYSTEM
Federal Office of Police:
1. General information
-The Federal Office of Police (Fedpol) works with its
international and cantonal partners as a centre for
information, coordination/cooperation and analysis in
matters concerning the internal security of
Switzerland.
-The Swiss Police Forces comprise about 23,000
members. This includes federal, cantonal, communal
police forces and as well as the Swiss Border Guards.
2. Functions and missions
Fedpol’s activities include:
• Criminal investigations on behalf of the Office of the
Attorney General of Switzerland which are usually of
great complexity and of an international and / or
interdisciplinary nature (in particular cases of
terrorism, money laundering, corruption and
financial crimes);
• Coordination and support to criminal investigations
in cases where the cantons have principal
competence but which involve more than two cantons
and/or foreign countries.
• Security duties such as the protection of persons and
sites considered to be at risk;
• Administrative tasks such as, among others,
managing the Money Laundering Reporting Office
Switzerland (MROS), the Coordination Unit against
the Trafficking of Persons and Smuggling of Migrants
(KSMM), the Coordination Unit for Cybercrime
Control (CYCO) or the Central Office for Explosives
and Pyrotechnics / Arms.
3. Structure and organization
The four main divisions at the Federal Office of Police
are the:
149
• Main Division Federal Criminal Police, responsible
for conducting investigations against transnational
organized crime, including financial crime; terrorism
and its financing; criminal activities involving
explosives; illegal intelligence gathering; offences
involving federal elections and ballots; offences
against the laws on war material, nuclear weapons,
dual-use goods and specific military goods and on
civil aviation; corruption; genocide; money
counterfeiting; as well as the execution of rogatory
letters from abroad. Finally the Federal Criminal
Police coordinates the Intercantonal and international
investigations and ensures the exchange of police
information with Interpol;
• Main Division Services, performing a cross-sectional
function and providing services to clients in
Switzerland and abroad (DNA/AFIS-Services, Identity
Documents, National Police Information Systems
etc.);
• Main Division Federal Security Service, responsible
for the protection of federal officials and people and
buildings affording protection under international
law as well as in charge of the structural, technical
and organisational security strategy for federal
civilian buildings in Switzerland;
• Main Division International Police Cooperation,
among others in charge of the operational and
strategic development of the bilateral and
multilateral police cooperation, including the
cooperation with the European Union and the
Schengen-area in the field of law enforcement.
Moreover, it functions as Single Point of Contact
(SPOC) for bilateral, Interpol, Europol-, and
Schengen-related correspondence and manages the
Swiss police attachés abroad as well as the foreign
police attachés in Switzerland.
•
POLICING OVERVIEW:
-Due to the country’s federal structure and cantonal
sovereignty in police affairs, there is no single
national police force in Switzerland.
The federal system and division:
 1. Cantonal Police Corps
Functions and missions
The responsibility for law and order basically lies
with the cantons, where the police have also the
function of judicial police and of coordination body in
the event of major disasters. The cantons also mainly
determine the structure of their police forces.
Structure and organization:
The Swiss federal structure is reflected in a number of
cantonal police services which are organized in
different ways:
• The German-speaking cantons distinguish generally
between criminal, security and traffic police, the
security police having the more general function of
maintaining law and order and the criminal police
having the more specific task of investigation of
crimes;
• The French-speaking cantons as well as the canton
Ticino distinguish generally between the
“gendarmerie“ and “police de sûreté“, with the latter
being the equivalent to the criminal police, whereas
the “gendarmerie” corresponds to the security
police in the German-speaking cantons but also act
as traffic police;
In addition, the cantonal police corps disposed of
special task units, intervention units and special
institutions as the lake and airport police.
2. Communal Police Corps
Communal police corps became established in
cantons that are territorially subdivided or whose
communes traditionally have a high level of
autonomy, such as Zurich and Lausanne among
others. The competence of whether a communal
police is established and what are its responsibilities
lies with the canton.
3. Border Guards
The Corps of the Swiss Border Guards is the
uniformed and armed part of the Federal Customs
Administration and is therefore part of the Federal
Department of Finance.
Three strategic tasks:
1. Customs duties
Together with the collection of value added tax and
customs duties, these include the prevention of
smuggling and trafficking in narcotics, weapons, war
material, hazardous substances, protected animal
species, cultural artefacts and counterfeit branded
articles. The Border Guard also has other economic,
trade and health policy tasks.
2. Police security duties
These mainly involve searching for persons, goods
and vehicles, detecting document forgeries and
preventing international crime.
3. Aliens police duties
These include the prevention of illegal entry into and
departure from the country, illegal residence and
working, people smuggling and trafficking.
Education and Training
The education and training of the police corps are
organized at cantonal level. There are also training
centres which are managed by several cantons
together in the framework of a concordat. The
following are some of the major training centres for
Swiss police officers:
• The Swiss Police Institute is a private foundation
located in Neuchâtel and supported by the Swiss
federation, cantons and municipalities. It offers
mostly specialized and advanced training, training
material and conducts research;
• The Intercantonal Police Academy in Hitzkirch
offers basic as well as advanced training and
provides together with the Swiss Police Institute
150
advice to the various Swiss police corps on further
training opportunities. Its aim is the standardization of
the education in po-lice matters as well as the
integration of the police training in the general Swiss
education system.
• The Police- School Eastern Switzerland
(Polizeischule Ostschweiz) in Amriswil offers a
comprehensive basic training for future police
officers of six cantons, two cities and of Liechtenstein.
• The Police Academy Savatan offers basic training
for future police officers as well as advanced and
specialized training for police.
• The Association of the Swiss Police Officers in
Lucerne offers the possibility to attend specific
diploma courses for the higher education concerning
criminology or international criminal law e.g.
With regard to advanced training, additionally to the
already cited possibilities, especially with the Swiss
Police Institute, there are also the international
training possibilities offered through the Middle
European Police Academy (MEPA) and the European
Police College (CEPOL).
Concerning the Swiss Border Guards, they have
their own three- year education, which com-prises a
one-year basic education and two years of
specialized education on several topics.
PRISON:
Switzerland has 124 detention facilities with a total
capacity of up to 6,736 detainees, all operated by the
Swiss cantons. The smallest prison is the
Untersuchungsgefängnis Trogen with a capacity of two
detainees.
CHINESE POLICE
Rank Insignia
Police Rank 4 One Star on One Horizontal
Bar
Police Rank 3 Two Stars on One Horizontal Rank Supreme smaller portion of the population than in most nations.
Bar (Police General) The total number of national and local police in 2006
was approximately 470,000.
Police Rank 2 Three Stars on One Horizontal The strength of the Indonesian National Police stood
Bar at approximately 285,000 in 2004. The national police
force was formally separated as a branch of the
armed forces and placed under the Office of the
Police Rank 1 Four Stars on One Horizontal
MALAYSIAN POLICE President in 1999. It also includes 12,000 marine
Bar police and an estimated 40,000 People’s Security
The Royal Malaysian Police (Abbreviation: (Kamra) trainees who serve as a police auxiliary and
Police Officer Rank 4 One Star on Two Horizontal RMP; Malay: Polis Diraja Malaysia, PDRM;) is a part of report for three weeks of basic training each year.
(Inspector)(Sub- Bars the security forces structure in Malaysia. The force is The Headquarter, known as Markas Besar/Mabes in
Lieutenant) a centralized organization with responsibilities Indonesian, is located in Kebayoran Baru, South
ranging from traffic control to intelligence gathering. Jakarta, Indonesia.
Police Officer Rank 3 Two Stars on Two Horizontal Its headquarters is located at Bukit Aman, Kuala
(Senior Bars Lumpur. The police force is led by an Inspector- RANKS
inspector)(Captain) General of Police (IGP). The post is held by Tan Sri In the early years, the Polri used European
Ismail Omar. police style ranks like inspector and commissioner.
Police Officer Rank 2 Three Stars on Two Horizontal When the police were included into the military
In carrying out its responsibilities, the regular structure during the 1960s, the ranks changed to a
(Superintendent) Bars
RMP is also assisted by a support group comprising military style such as Captain, Major and Colonel. In
of Extra Police Constables, Police Volunteer the year 2000, when the Polri conducted the transition
Police Officer Rank 1 Four Stars on Two Horizontal
Reserves, Auxiliary Police, Police Cadets and a to a fully independent force out of the armed forces
(Senior Bars civilian service element. 2000, they use British style police ranks like Inspector
Superintendent) Rakan Cop is a community outreach programme and Superintendent. The Polri have returned to Dutch
launched in 9 August 2005. style ranks just like in the early years.
Police Supervisor One Star on Three Horizontal The RMP constantly co-operates closely with police
Rank 4 Bars forces worldwide, which include those from the four • High ranking officers
(Superintendent neighbouring countries Malaysia shares border with: o Police General / Jenderal Polisi (Jend.
General) Indonesian National Police, Royal Brunei Police Pol.) - equivalent General in the army
Force, Royal Thai Police and Singapore Police Force. o Police Commissioner General /
Police Supervisor Two Stars on Three Horizontal Komisaris Jenderal Polisi (Komjen Pol.)
INDONESIAN POLICE - equivalent Lieutenant General
Rank 3 Bars
o Police Inspector General / Inspektur
The Indonesian National Police (Indonesian: Jenderal Polisi (Irjen Pol.) - equivalent
Police Supervisor Three Stars on Three Kepolisian Negara Republik Indonesia) is the official Major General
Rank 2 Horizontal Bars police force for Indonesia. It had formerly been a part o Police Brigadier General / Brigadir
of the Tentara Nasional Indonesia since its Jenderal Polisi (Brigjen Pol.) -
Police Supervisor Four Stars on Three independence from the Dutch. The police were equivalent Brigadier General
Rank 1 Horizontal Bars formally separated from the military in April 1999, a • Mid rank officers
process which was formally completed in July 2000.[1]
Police Supervisor With 150,000 personnel, the police form a much

151
 o Police Grand Commissioner
Komisaris Besar Polisi (Kombespol) -
equivalent Colonel
o Police Grand Commissioner Adjutant
/ Ajun Komisaris Besar Polisi (AKBP) -
equivalent Lieutenant Colonel
o Police Commissioner / Komisaris
Polisi (Kompol) - equivalent Major
• Low rank officers
o Police Commissioner Adjutant / Ajun
Komisaris Polisi (AKP) - equivalent
Captain
o First Police Inspector / Inspektur Polisi
Satu (Iptu) - equivalent First
Lieutenant
o Second Police Inspector / Inspektur
Polisi Dua (Ipda) - equivalent Second
Lieutenant
• Warrant officers
o First Police Inspector Adjutant / Ajun
Inspektur Polisi Satu (Aiptu) -
equivalent Chief Warrant Officer
o Second Police Inspector Adjutant /
Ajun Inspektur Polisi Dua (Aipda) -
equivalent Warrant Officer
• Non-commissioned officers
o Chief Police Brigadier / Brigadir Polisi
Kepala (Bripka) - equivalent Sergeant
Major
o Police Brigadier / Brigadir Polisi
(Brigadir) - equivalent Chief Sergeant
o First Police Brigadier / Brigadir Polisi
Satu (Briptu) - equivalent First
Sergeant
o Second Police Brigadier / Brigadir
Polisi Dua (Bripda) - equivalent
Second Sergeant
• Enlisted
o Police Brigadier Adjutant / Ajun
Brigadir Polisi (Abrip) - equivalent
Chief Corporal
/ o First Police Brigadier Adjutant / Ajun
Brigadir Polisi Satu (Abriptu) -
equivalent First Corporal
o Second Police Brigadier Adjutant /
Ajun Brigadir Polisi Dua (Abripda) -
equivalent Second Corporal
o Chief Bhayangkara / Bhayangkara
Kepala (Bharaka) - equivalent Chief
Private
o First Bhayangkara / Bhayangkara Satu
(Bharatu) - equivalent Private First
Class
o Second Bhayangkara / Bhayangkara
Dua (Bharada) - equivalent Private
POLICE IN BRUNEI
The Royal Brunei Police Force (Malay: Polis
Diraja Brunei (PDRB)) was founded in 1921 with the
passing of the Brunei Police Force Enactment. The
police force is in charge of prisons, fire services, the
issuing of licenses, immigration, and keeping law and
order in the streets. The RBP has been a member of
INTERPOL since 1984
SINGAPOREAN POLICE
The Singapore Police Force (Abbreviation:
SPF; Chinese: 新加坡警察部队; Malay: Pasukan Polis
Singapura; Tamil: சிங்கப்பூர் காவல் துறை) is the
main agency tasked with maintaining law and order
in the city-state[1]. Formerly known as the Republic of
Singapore Police (Abbreviation: RSP; Malay: Polis
Republik Singapura), it has grown from an 11-man
organization to a 38,587 strong force. It enjoys a
relatively positive public image,[2] and is credited for
helping to arrest Singapore's civic unrests and
lawlessness in its early years, and maintaining the
low crime rate today despite having a smaller police-
citizen ratio compared to other major cities.
Singapore has been ranked consistently in the top
five positions in the Global Competitiveness Report
in terms of its reliability of police services.
152
The organization structure of the SPF is split between
the staff and line functions, roughly modeled after the
military.[6] There are currently 15 staff departments
and 13 line units. The headquarters is located in a
block at New Phoenix Park in Novena, adjacent to a
twin block occupied by the Ministry of Home Affairs.
RANK
A standard rank structure is used throughout the
police force, although some ranks may be unique to
specific organisations. These ranks are denoted
where applicable in the following list, which lists
them in ascending seniority:
Police officers
The rank of Corporal was abolished in 1972,
but reinstated in 1976. In 1997, all ranks were shifted
from the sleeves to the epaulettes, except for the
Gurkha Contingent. Also in the same year, the Station
Inspector rank was changed from collar pips to
epaulettes with a new design similar to that of the SAF
Warrant Officers, and the rank of Senior Station
Inspector was introduced. In 1998, the Senior Station
Inspector (2) rank was introduced, and changes were
made to the SI, SSI, and SSI(2) rank designs. The rank
of Lance Corporal was abolished in 2002[23]. The
2006, the Gurkha Contingent adopted embroidered
ranks as part of an overhaul of its combat dress, but
are worn on the right front pocket.
INDIAN POLICE
Ranks of Gazetted Officers
• Director Intelligence Bureau (post held by
senior most Indian Police Service officer; not
a rank)
• Commissioner of Police (State) or Director
General of Police
 • Special Commissioner of Police or Additional
Director General of Police
• Joint Commissioner of Police or Inspector
General of Police
• Additional Commissioner of Police or Deputy
Inspector General of Police
• Deputy Commissioner of Police or Senior
Superintendent of Police
• Deputy Commissioner of Police or
Superintendent of Police
• Additional Deputy Commissioner of Police or
Additional Superintendent of Police
• Assistant Commissioner of Police or Deputy
Superintendent of Police
• Assistant Superintendent of Police (IPS
Probationary Rank: 2 years of service)
• Assistant Superintendent of Police (IPS
Probationary Rank: 1 year of service)
Ranks of Non-Gazetted Officers
• Inspector of Police
• Sub-Inspector of Police
• Assistant Sub-Inspector of Police
• Police Head Constable
• Senior Police Constable
• Police Constable
HONG KONG POLICE
The Hong Kong Police Force HKPF，alias
Hong Kong Police，HKP) is the largest disciplined
service under the Security Bureau of Hong Kong. It is
the World's second and Asia's first police agency to
operate with a modern policing system. It was formed
on 1 May 1844, with strength of 32 officers. Queen
Elizabeth II granted the Royal Charter to the Hong
Kong Police Force in 1969 for their handling of the
Hong Kong 1967 riots, renaming the Hong Kong
Police Force as the Royal Hong Kong Police Force.
Following the Transfer of sovereignty over Hong
Kong, the Police Force now uses the current name.
The Hong Kong Police Force has been recognized for
its professionalism, organisation, attitude on law
enforcement and prompt response and efficiency,
leading journalist Kevin Sinclair, Federal Bureau of
Investigation and INTERPOL have acknowledged that
the Hong Kong Police Force as "Asia's Finest". And in
having set up the foundation for the social stability of
Hong Kong, and has won a good reputation as one of
the safest cities in the World.
In 2008, a rating investigation of Asian police
departments voted by the Political and Economic
Risk Consultancy Agency, result in the Hong Kong
Police Force have been rated the excellence of Asian
police departments. The rating awarders commented
that the Hong Kong Police Force are respectable and
outstanding in their performance of upholding the
law and maintaining public orders, keeping the Hong
Kong people living and working in peace and
contentment. Furthermore, a quantitative research
derived from the United States of America and United
Kingdom with its statistical outcome, aims for the
World's police forces' overall quality, including local
public security, case cracking rate, incorruptibility,
professionalism and language proficiency, etc. The
result is the Hong Kong Police Force has been rated
in the top of Asia, also as one of the best of the World.
The current Commissioner of Police is Tang
King Shing, including the Hong Kong Auxiliary Police
Force and civil servants, leading a force of about
40,000 personnel, which makes Hong Kong the
second greatest citizen-officer ratio society in the
world. In addition, the Marine Region with about
3,000 officers, and a fleet of 143 is the largest of any
civil police force.
153
RANKS
The HKPF continues to use similar ranks and insignia
to those used in British police forces. Until 1997, the
St Edward's Crown was used in the insignia, when it
was replaced with the Bauhinia flower crest of the
Hong Kong government. The crest of the force was
modified in 1997:
• Commissioner of Police (CP)
• Deputy Commissioner of Police (DCP)
• Senior Assistant Commissioner of Police
(SACP)
• Assistant Commissioner of Police (ACP)
• Chief Superintendent of Police (CSP)
• Senior Superintendent of Police (SSP)
• Superintendent of Police (SP)
• Chief Inspector of Police (CIP) (insignia of a
Captain)
• Senior Inspector of Police (SIP)
• Inspector of Police (IP)
• Probationary Inspector of Police (PI)
• Station Sergeant (SSGT)
• Sergeant (SGT)
• Senior Constable (SPC)
• Police Constable (PC)
•
ENGLISH POLICE (UNITED KINGDOM)
The Metropolitan Police Service (MPS) is the
territorial police force responsible for policing
Greater London, excluding the "square mile" of the
City of London which is the responsibility of the City
of London Police.[10] The MPS also has significant
national responsibilities such as co-ordinating and
leading on counter-terrorism matters and protection
of the Royal Family of the United Kingdom and senior
figures of HM Government.
At the end of February 2010, the MPS
employed 52,111 personnel. This includes sworn
33,258 police officers and 4,226 Special Constables,
14,332 civilian police staff, and 4,520 non-sworn
Police Community Support Officers.[6] This makes it
the largest police force within the United Kingdom by
a significant margin.[12] The Commissioner of Police
of the Metropolis, known commonly as
Commissioner, is the overall operational leader of
the force, responsible and accountable to the
Metropolitan Police Authority. The post of
Commissioner was first held jointly by Sir Charles
Rowan and Sir Richard Mayne. The Commissioner
since 27 January 2009 is Sir Paul Stephenson, QPM
who had previously been the Acting Commissioner
since 1 December 2008.
A number of informal names and
abbreviations exists for the Metropolitan Police
Service, such as "the Met", "Met Pol", "MP" and "the
MPS". In statutes it is referred to in the lower case as
the "metropolitan police force" or the "metropolitan
police", without the appendage "service". The MPS is
also referred to as Scotland Yard after the location of
its original headquarters buildings in and around
Great Scotland Yard, Whitehall. The current
headquarters of the MPS is New Scotland Yard
RANKS
The Metropolitan Police uses the standard UK
police ranks, indicated by shoulder boards, up to
Chief Superintendent, but it has five ranks above that
level instead of the standard three.
The Metropolian Police approved the use of
name badges in October 2003, with new recruits
wearing the Velcro badges from September 2004.
The badge consists of the wearer's rank, followed by
their surname.
Following controversy over alleged assaults
by uniformed officers with concealed shoulder
identification numbers during the G20 summit,
Metropolitan Police Commissioner Sir Paul
Stephenson stated that "The public has a right to be
able to identify any uniformed officer whilst
performing their duty" by their shoulder
identification numbers.
• Police Constable (PC) (Divisional call sign
and shoulder number)
• Sergeant (Sgt or PS) (three point down
chevrons above divisional call sign and
Shoulder Number) – an "acting" Sergeant, i.e.
a substantive constable being paid an
allowance to undertake the duties of a
sergeant for a short period of time, displays
two point down chevrons above divisional
call sign, and Shoulder Number. The use of
the three chevrons by an acting Sergeant is
technically incorrect, and should only be used
during a period of temporary promotion.
• Inspector (Insp) (two Order of the Bath stars,
informally known as "pips")
• Chief Inspector (C/Insp) (three Order of the
Bath stars)
• Superintendent (Supt) (single crown)
• Chief Superintendent (Ch Supt) (crown over
one pip)
• Commander (Cmdr) (crossed tipstaves in a
bayleaf wreath); the first ACPO rank.
• Deputy Assistant Commissioner (DAC) (one
pip over Commander's badge)
• Assistant Commissioner (AC) (crown over
Commander's badge);
• Deputy Commissioner (crown above two
side-by-side small pips, above Commander's
badge)
• Commissioner (crown above one pip above
Commander's badge)
THE UNITED NATION CONVENTION AGAINST
TRANSNATIONAL CRIMES
The convention represents a major step
forward in the fight transnational organized crime
and signifies the recognition of UN Member States
that this is a serious and growing problem that can
154
only be solved through close international
cooperation. The convention, concluded at the 10 th
session of the Ad Hoc Committee established by the
General Assembly to deal with this problem, is a
legally binding instrument committing states that
ratify is to taking a series of measures against
transnational organized crime. These include the
creation of domestic criminal offenses to combat the
problem and the adoption of new, sweeping
frameworks for mutual legal assistance, extradition,
law enforcement, cooperation and technical
assistance and training.
States Parties will be able to rely on one
another in investigating, prosecuting and punishing
crimes committed by organized criminal groups
where either the crimes or the groups who commit
them have some element of transnational
involvement. This should make it much more difficult
for offenders and organized groups to take
advantage of gap in national law, jurisdictional
problems or lack of accurate information about the
full scope of their activities.
The Convention deals with the fight against
organized crime in general and some of the major
activities in which transnational organized crime are
commonly involved such as money laundering,
corruption and a obstruction of investigations or
prosecutions.
The protocols against the Smuggling of
Migrants deals with the growing problem of
organized criminal groups who smuggle migrants,
often at risk to the migrants and at great profit for the
offenders. The protocol against trafficking in Persons
deals with the problem of modern slavery, in which
the desire of people to seek a better life is taken
advantage of by organized criminal groups.
The protocol also commit countries which
ratify them to making the basic subject of the Protocol
a criminal offense and to adopting other specific
measures, such as controls on travel documents, to
combat the problem. These supplement the more practice such corporal punishments as beatings and
general measures found in the Convention and whippings. Nations that practice corporal punishment
countries must become parties to the Convention do tend, however, to have less of a correctional
itself before they can become parties to any of the overcrowding problem. Probation and parole, where
protocols. A third protocol, dealing with the illicit they exist cross-culturally, are applied to the
manufacturing of and trafficking in firearms, parts country’s citizens, and not for foreigners or
and components and ammunition remain under immigrants.
discussion.
Comparative Juvenile Justice System
Police System vs Criminal Justice System Juvenile Justice System varies widely.
With these influences of societal system, Scotland has the toughest system, regularly
Police system and Criminal justice system around the sentencing juveniles to harsh boot camps with a strict
world varies depending on the kind of legal system. military regime and force labor. Germany has a
With the exceptions of Japan and Common Law juvenile justice system similar to the U.S. where more
nations, few countries hold their police officers emphasis is upon education as punishment.
accountable for violations of civil rights. In Socialist
and Islamic countries, the police hold enormous
political and religious powers. In fact, in such places,
crime is always seen as political crime or co-occuring
religious problem.
Comparative Court System
Court systems of the world are two types:
Adversarial, where the accused is innocent, until
proven guilty. The U.S. adversarial system is unique
in the world. No other nation, not even the U.K. places
as much emphasis upon determination of factual
guilty in the courtroom as the US does.
Inquisitorial, where the accused is guilty until
proven innocent or mitigated, have more secret
procedures. Outside the U.S. most trial are
concerned with legal guilt where everyone knows the
offender to apologized, own up to their
responsibility, argue for mercy or suggest an
appropriate sentence for themselves.
Comparative Correctional System
Correctional system worldwide can be easily
distinguished by whether they support corporal
punishment or not. Some so-called “civilized”
countries claim they are better than the U.S. because
they don’t perform death penalty but actually
155